CAT FleetUserManual

Cat® Fleet
User Manual
Release 3.1
Copyright Notices and Disclaimers
Cat® MineStar™ System and related written manuals and documentation
are ©Caterpillar 2001-2012 All rights reserved. No portion of these works
may be reproduced, in whole or in par, for any purpose, without the express
written permission of Caterpillar, CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos,
MineStar and "Caterpillar Yellow", as well as corporate and product identity
used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without
permission.
Microsoft, Access, Windows, Internet Explorer, Word, Excel, Outlook and
Exchange are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and other countries. BusinessObjects and InfoView are
trademarks of BusinessObjects. Other third party product names used herein
may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Cat MineStar System and related written manuals and documentation
contain copyrighted content owned by third parties which has been used
under license from those third parties. Use of Cat MineStar System is subject
to the terms, conditions, limitations and disclaimers that apply to all third
party content contained herein.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies,
names and data used as examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise
noted.
Page i © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

User Manual Release 3.1
Audience
Audience
The user manual aims to provide users with the knowledge, concepts,
procedures and reference information necessary to use Fleet software for
managements and operational purposes.
Typical Fleet users include, but are not limited to:
• Fleet site controllers.
• Fleet site builders.
• Fleet site office personnel.
Users of this manual should be familiar with the following:
• Mining industry terminology.
• Mine site policies, procedures and methodologies.
• Microsoft Windows graphical user interface navigation.
Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Page ii

Fleet User Manual Release 3.1
Terms & typographical conventions
Terms & typographical conventions

It is important to understand certain terms and typographical conventions
before using this manual.
Italics
Used for page names, titles and dialog boxes.
Example: You use the Machine Editor to manage the creation and
maintenance of machines.
Bold
Used for buttons, menu and menu commands, options and field labels.
Example: Click New to display the Machine Editor.
Note: Notes appear in the body of the text, framed by yellow lines.They
provide additional information, explanation, or discussion about the
current topic.
Warnings
Warnings show the icon to the left, alongside text indicating that care should
be taken when using the current functionality, as it could have far-reaching
effects on Fleet or be otherwise hazardous.
Tip: Tips appear in the side-head in blue text and provide information
on how to work quickly and easily with Fleet.
Page iii © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Audience ........................................................................................ i.ii

Terms & typographical conventions ............................................... i.iii
FLEET SYSTEM OVERVIEW

What is the Fleet Client? ............................................................... 1.1
Fleet subsystem descriptions ........................................................ 1.1
FLEET CLIENT INTERFACE

Using the Fleet Client user interface ............................................. 2.1
Opening Fleet............................................................................ 2.1
Closing Fleet ............................................................................ 2.2
Application title bar .................................................................... 2.3
Navigator ................................................................................... 2.3
Menu bar ................................................................................... 2.3
File menu........................................................................................ 2.4
Edit menu ....................................................................................... 2.5
View menu...................................................................................... 2.5
Contents menu ............................................................................... 2.5
Jobs menu...................................................................................... 2.6
Tools menu..................................................................................... 2.7
Displays menu................................................................................ 2.7
Reports menu................................................................................. 2.7
Actions menu.................................................................................. 2.7
Help menu ...................................................................................... 2.7
Statistics bar................................................................................... 2.8
Status bar ....................................................................................... 2.8
Shortcut menus ......................................................................... 2.8
Toolbar ...................................................................................... 2.8
Using the office software Client .................................................. 2.10
Opening pages ........................................................................ 2.10
Selecting data.......................................................................... 2.10
Deleting data ........................................................................... 2.10
Sorting data ............................................................................. 2.10
Including and excluding data................................................... 2.11
Filtering information ................................................................. 2.12
Managing desktops ................................................................. 2.12
Viewing data............................................................................ 2.13
Managing columns .................................................................. 2.14
Enabling and disabling expert mode ....................................... 2.14
Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Contents
Fleet User Manual
PLATFORM
Introduction to Platform ................................................................. 3.1
Managing alarms ....................................................................... 3.1
Editing an alarm.............................................................................. 3.1
Acknowledging an alarm ................................................................ 3.2
Closing an alarm............................................................................. 3.2
Rejecting an alarm.......................................................................... 3.2
Resolving an alarm......................................................................... 3.2
Viewing an alarm ............................................................................ 3.3
Managing alarm types ............................................................... 3.3
Modifying an alarm type ................................................................. 3.3
Deleting an alarm type.................................................................... 3.3
Viewing an alarm type .................................................................... 3.3
Managing crews......................................................................... 3.3
Creating crews................................................................................ 3.3
Renaming crews............................................................................. 3.4
Deleting crews ................................................................................ 3.4
Managing jobs ........................................................................... 3.5
Creating jobs .................................................................................. 3.5
Creating an ad hoc job ................................................................... 3.8
Creating a triggered scheduled job................................................. 3.9
Editing triggered scheduled jobs .................................................. 3.10
Deleting triggered scheduled jobs ................................................ 3.11
Viewing triggered scheduled jobs................................................. 3.11
Stopping triggered jobs from running ........................................... 3.11
Generating coverage maps ..................................................... 3.12
Importing or exporting mining blocks ....................................... 3.15
Creating a scheduled job for mining block importing
and exporting................................................................................ 3.19
Managing Office Processes (Bus Monitor) .............................. 3.19
Managing rosters ..................................................................... 3.19
Creating rosters ............................................................................ 3.19
Managing shifts........................................................................ 3.20
Creating shifts............................................................................... 3.20
Managing users ....................................................................... 3.20
Creating users .............................................................................. 3.20
Editing users................................................................................. 3.21
Deleting users............................................................................... 3.22
Viewing users ............................................................................... 3.22
© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Contents
Fleet User Manual
GUI PAGE REFERENCE

Introduction to pages .................................................................... 4.1
Open and active pages ............................................................. 4.1
Managing pages........................................................................ 4.1
Page security............................................................................. 4.2
Page navigation......................................................................... 4.2
Pages quick reference .................................................................. 4.6
Absence Type Editor ............................................................... 4.17
Alarm Editor............................................................................. 4.17
Alarm Monitor .......................................................................... 4.18
Alarm Types ............................................................................ 4.20
Assignment Event Monitor ...................................................... 4.21
Assignment Group Editor ........................................................ 4.22
Auxiliary Assistant ................................................................... 4.23
Blend Assistant........................................................................ 4.25
Blend Editor............................................................................. 4.25
Channel Finder........................................................................ 4.26
Create Scheduled Break ......................................................... 4.27
Crew Editor.............................................................................. 4.27
Cycle Assistant........................................................................ 4.28
Cycle Bulk Update Assistant ................................................... 4.29
Cycle Editor ............................................................................. 4.31
Cycle Monitor .......................................................................... 4.33
Decision Support ..................................................................... 4.34
Delay Assistant........................................................................ 4.36
Delay Editor............................................................................. 4.37
Delay Monitor .......................................................................... 4.38
Delay Type Editor.................................................................... 4.39
Delay Type Finder .................................................................. 4.40
Destination Assistant............................................................... 4.40
Destination Editor .................................................................... 4.42
Dynamic Mine Model Assistant ............................................... 4.43
Field Communications Monitor ................................................ 4.47
Field Communications Monitor Statistics ..................................... 4.48
Field Event Monitor ................................................................. 4.51
Field Network Monitor ............................................................. 4.53
Fleet Update Assistant ............................................................ 4.54
Fuel and Lube Type Finder ..................................................... 4.58
Fuel and Lube Type Editor ...................................................... 4.59
Fuel Lube and SMU Assistant................................................. 4.59
Fuel Lube and SMU Editor ...................................................... 4.60

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Grade Editor ............................................................................ 4.61

Grade Finder............................................................................ 4.61
Health Event Monitor ............................................................... 4.62
Historical Inspector .................................................................. 4.63
Job Code Finder ...................................................................... 4.65
Job Execution Monitor ............................................................. 4.65
Job Runner .............................................................................. 4.66
Loader Recipe Finder .............................................................. 4.67
Loader Recipe Sender............................................................. 4.67
Loading Tool Assistant ............................................................ 4.69
Machine Category Editor ......................................................... 4.71
Machine Finder ........................................................................ 4.72
Machine License Editor ........................................................... 4.72
Machine State Editor ............................................................... 4.73
Machine State Finder............................................................... 4.73
Maintenance Event Monitor ..................................................... 4.74
Material Editor.......................................................................... 4.75
Material Group Finder.............................................................. 4.76
Material Mix Editor ................................................................... 4.76
Mine Model Query ................................................................... 4.76
Mining Block Editor .................................................................. 4.77
Mining Block Finder ................................................................. 4.78
Mining Block Group Editor ....................................................... 4.79
Model Data Validation.............................................................. 4.80
Office Message Monitor........................................................... 4.84
Office Processes...................................................................... 4.85
Onboard File Assistant ............................................................ 4.86
Onboard File Viewer ................................................................ 4.89
Payload Monitor....................................................................... 4.89
Personnel Finder ..................................................................... 4.91
Personnel Summary ................................................................ 4.91
Processor Assistant ................................................................. 4.92
Production Event Monitor ........................................................ 4.94
Production Planning Editor ...................................................... 4.95
Production Requirements Assistant......................................... 4.96
Production Requirements Template Assistant......................... 4.97
Quick View............................................................................... 4.98
Restriction Assistant ................................................................ 4.98
Road Segment Assistant ......................................................... 4.98
Road Segment Editor ............................................................ 4.100
Roster Editor.......................................................................... 4.101

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Safety Check Action Editor.................................................... 4.101

Safety Checklist Editor .......................................................... 4.101
Safety Record Editor ............................................................. 4.102
Scheduled Assignment Editor ............................................... 4.103
Scheduled Assignment Monitor............................................. 4.104
Scheduled Break Editor......................................................... 4.104
Scheduled Break Finder........................................................ 4.105
Scheduled Communications Monitor..................................... 4.106
Scheduled Jobs..................................................................... 4.106
Send Message Assistant....................................................... 4.107
Session Allocation Rules ....................................................... 4.108
Shift Builder ........................................................................... 4.109
Shift Change Allocations Monitor .......................................... 4.109
Shift Change Editor ............................................................... 4.111
Shift Change Finder .............................................................. 4.114
Site Awareness Monitor ........................................................ 4.115
Site Editor.............................................................................. 4.119
Site Monitor ........................................................................... 4.122
Standard Message Editor...................................................... 4.124
Standard Message Finder ..................................................... 4.125
Transport Vehicle Editor........................................................ 4.125
Travel Condition Assistant..................................................... 4.125
Travel Progress Monitor ........................................................ 4.126
Truck Assistant...................................................................... 4.130
Trucking Indication ................................................................ 4.132
User Editor ............................................................................ 4.134
Waypoint Assistant................................................................ 4.135
Waypoint Editor ..................................................................... 4.136
CONCEPTS AND REFERENCE

Introduction to concepts and reference ......................................... 5.1
Activities ........................................................................................ 5.1
Alarms .......................................................................................... 5.1
Alarm priorities .......................................................................... 5.1
Alarm attributes ......................................................................... 5.2
How the office software handles alarms.................................... 5.2
Assignment ................................................................................... 5.3
Definitions.................................................................................. 5.4
Assignment actions ........................................................................ 5.4
Assignment status .......................................................................... 5.4

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Assignment reasons and triggers ................................................... 5.5

Using Assignment...................................................................... 5.8
Defining the mine model for assignment ........................................ 5.8
Excavators...................................................................................... 5.8
Processors...................................................................................... 5.9
Road Segments............................................................................ 5.10
Sink Destinations.......................................................................... 5.10
Source Destinations ..................................................................... 5.10
Truck Classes............................................................................... 5.10
Excavator and Processor Efficiency sliders.................................. 5.10
Specifying the requirements for the shift ...................................... 5.10
Monitoring truck assignments....................................................... 5.11
Intervention................................................................................... 5.11
Miscellaneous work ...................................................................... 5.12
Scheduled assignment ............................................................ 5.12
Load state only ............................................................................. 5.13
Load state and time ...................................................................... 5.13
Backup assignments................................................................ 5.13
Assignment groups .................................................................. 5.14
Events that trigger creation of assignments............................. 5.14
Entities considered when calculating an assignment .............. 5.15
Rules for managing assignments ............................................ 5.15
Assignment attributes .............................................................. 5.17
Assignment scheduling options .................................................... 5.18
Archiving ...................................................................................... 5.19
Auxiliary equipment ..................................................................... 5.19
Beacons ...................................................................................... 5.19
Blending ...................................................................................... 5.20
Continuous blending ................................................................ 5.20
Discrete blending ..................................................................... 5.20
Business intelligence ................................................................... 5.21
CAES ........................................................................................ 5.21
Channels ..................................................................................... 5.21
Computer Aided Earth moving System ....................................... 5.21
Consoles ..................................................................................... 5.21
Cycles ........................................................................................ 5.21
Cycle attributes ........................................................................ 5.22
Merging cycles......................................................................... 5.23
Splitting cycles ......................................................................... 5.24

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Interim cycles .......................................................................... 5.24

Types of cycle records ............................................................ 5.25
Truck cycles ............................................................................ 5.25
Loading tool cycles .................................................................. 5.26
Auxiliary equipment cycles ...................................................... 5.26
Drill cycles .................................................................................... 5.26
Water truck cycles ........................................................................ 5.27
Delays ........................................................................................ 5.27
Acknowledgement ........................................................................ 5.27
Confirmation ................................................................................. 5.28
Rules for creating delays ......................................................... 5.28
Delay types and delay type groups ......................................... 5.29
Delay type attributes..................................................................... 5.29
Delay categories...................................................................... 5.30
Delay attributes ....................................................................... 5.31
Desktops ..................................................................................... 5.31
Destinations ................................................................................ 5.32
Parent and child destinations .................................................. 5.32
Non-parent destinations .......................................................... 5.33
Destination attributes............................................................... 5.33
Dippers ........................................................................................ 5.34
Dynamic fuel monitoring ............................................................. 5.34
Effective Flat Haul (EFH) ............................................................ 5.34
EFH management ................................................................... 5.35
Road Information Recalculation ................................................... 5.35
Efficiency rates ............................................................................ 5.36
For processors ........................................................................ 5.36
For loading tools...................................................................... 5.36
Entities ........................................................................................ 5.37
Events ........................................................................................ 5.37
Event priorities......................................................................... 5.38
Field communications ................................................................. 5.38
Communications process ........................................................ 5.39
Communications color codes .................................................. 5.39
Lag times................................................................................. 5.40
Fluids ........................................................................................ 5.40
Fluid types ............................................................................... 5.41
Fluid type attributes ...................................................................... 5.41
Fluid categories ....................................................................... 5.41

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Fuel ........................................................................................ 5.41

Fuel parameters....................................................................... 5.42
Fuel calculations ...................................................................... 5.42
Working burn rates ....................................................................... 5.43
Fuel-related attributes................................................................... 5.44
Global positioning system (GPS) ................................................ 5.44
Grades ........................................................................................ 5.45
Grade determination ................................................................ 5.45
Grade attributes ....................................................................... 5.46
Hang time .................................................................................... 5.46
Hazards ....................................................................................... 5.46
Health ........................................................................................ 5.47
Health events........................................................................... 5.47
Historical data .............................................................................. 5.47
Jobs ........................................................................................ 5.48
Job templates .......................................................................... 5.48
Job attributes ........................................................................... 5.52
Batch Cycle Update template .................................................. 5.53
Load factors ............................................................................. 5.54
Data Logger Activate ............................................................... 5.54
Mining Block Exporter template ............................................... 5.55
Mining Block Importer template ............................................... 5.56
Mining Block import and export .................................................... 5.59
Fluid Management Data Import ............................................... 5.66
OilCommander exports................................................................. 5.66
Import rules................................................................................... 5.67
Fluid Management Data Import job template ............................... 5.67
Position Event Export template................................................ 5.69
Snapshot Activate template ..................................................... 5.69
VIMS File Download template ................................................. 5.70
VIMS Data Import template ..................................................... 5.70
Job codes .................................................................................... 5.72
Job code groups ...................................................................... 5.73
KPIs ........................................................................................ 5.73
Summary KPIs......................................................................... 5.73
Real-time KPIs......................................................................... 5.74
Licences ...................................................................................... 5.74
Loading tool ................................................................................. 5.74
Loading tool productivity .......................................................... 5.74

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Loading tool attributes ............................................................. 5.74

Loading tool recipes ................................................................ 5.75
Machines ..................................................................................... 5.76
Machine classes ...................................................................... 5.76
Included configurations ................................................................ 5.76
Machine class attributes............................................................... 5.77
Machine categories ................................................................. 5.78
Machine category attributes ......................................................... 5.79
Machine fleets ......................................................................... 5.79
Machine files ........................................................................... 5.79
Machine files attributes................................................................. 5.80
Machine states ........................................................................ 5.81
Machine state attributes ............................................................... 5.81
Materials ..................................................................................... 5.82
Rules for allowing materials .................................................... 5.82
Material mix ............................................................................. 5.83
Messages .................................................................................... 5.83
Types of messages ................................................................. 5.83
System messages ................................................................... 5.84
Operator messages ................................................................. 5.84
Operator message variables ........................................................ 5.85
Operator message attributes........................................................ 5.88
Mine model ................................................................................. 5.88
Mining blocks .............................................................................. 5.89
Mining block groups ................................................................ 5.89
Mining block attributes............................................................. 5.90
Mining block hierarchy............................................................. 5.91
Modelling mining blocks with multiple royalties ....................... 5.92
Loader Operator’s view of Mining Blocks in CAES ................. 5.93
Overview of material identification................................................ 5.93
Material designs ........................................................................... 5.94
Material status update .................................................................. 5.94
Mothballing .................................................................................. 5.94
Onboard files ............................................................................... 5.94
Pages ........................................................................................ 5.95
Types of pages........................................................................ 5.95
Page configuration .................................................................. 5.95
Page configuration dialog........................................................ 5.95
Page configurations list box .................................................... 5.95
Payloads ..................................................................................... 5.96

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Payload events ........................................................................ 5.96

Processors .................................................................................. 5.96
Processing rates ...................................................................... 5.96
Processor attributes................................................................. 5.97
Production requirements ............................................................. 5.97
Production requirements attributes.......................................... 5.97
Reporting ..................................................................................... 5.98
Restoring ..................................................................................... 5.98
Restrictions .................................................................................. 5.98
Absolute restrictions ................................................................ 5.99
Provisional restrictions............................................................. 5.99
Types of restrictions................................................................. 5.99
Locks ....................................................................................... 5.99
Loading tool locks....................................................................... 5.100
Processor locks .......................................................................... 5.100
Mining block locks ...................................................................... 5.101
Bars ...................................................................................... 5.101
Loading tool bars ........................................................................ 5.102
Processor bars ........................................................................... 5.102
Assignment groups ................................................................ 5.103
Effects of using an assignment group ........................................ 5.104
Road segments ......................................................................... 5.104
Haulage road segments......................................................... 5.104
Final road segments .............................................................. 5.105
Road segment attributes........................................................ 5.105
Rolling resistance ...................................................................... 5.106
Rosters ...................................................................................... 5.106
Routes ...................................................................................... 5.107
Safety checklists ........................................................................ 5.107
Safety check actions ................................................................. 5.107
Scheduled breaks ...................................................................... 5.107
Multiple sessions of breaks.................................................... 5.107
Equipment allocation to breaks.............................................. 5.108
Loading tools .............................................................................. 5.108
Trucks......................................................................................... 5.108
Auxiliary equipment .................................................................... 5.108
Session break allocation rules.................................................... 5.108
Session break delays ................................................................. 5.108
Scheduled breaks attributes ....................................................... 5.109

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Status of breaks ......................................................................... 5.110

Servers ...................................................................................... 5.110
Service meter hours (SMH) ....................................................... 5.110
Service meter readings (SMR) .................................................. 5.110
Service meter units (SMU) ........................................................ 5.110
Maintenance and repair contracts (MARC) ................................ 5.111
Service records ......................................................................... 5.111
Service record attributes ....................................................... 5.111
Shifts ...................................................................................... 5.112
Types of shift change ............................................................ 5.112
Shift change groups .............................................................. 5.113
Shovel ...................................................................................... 5.113
Site map .................................................................................... 5.113
Software Licensing .................................................................... 5.113
Spotting ..................................................................................... 5.113
Station ...................................................................................... 5.114
Stockpiles .................................................................................. 5.114
Stockpile attributes ................................................................ 5.114
Supervisor ................................................................................. 5.115
Surface miner ............................................................................ 5.115
Terrain leveler ........................................................................... 5.115
TMPH/TKPH ............................................................................. 5.115
TOPE ...................................................................................... 5.116
TPMS ...................................................................................... 5.116
Transport vehicles ..................................................................... 5.116
Truck loadout unit (TLO) ........................................................... 5.116
Truck loadout unit toolbar...................................................... 5.116
Truck loadout unit onboard configuration .............................. 5.117
Truck loadout unit operation.................................................. 5.117
Truck loadout unit class attributes ......................................... 5.117
Truck loadout unit color codes .............................................. 5.118
Trucks ...................................................................................... 5.118
Truck attributes...................................................................... 5.118
Truck roles............................................................................. 5.122
Truck states ........................................................................... 5.123
Trucking indication .................................................................... 5.123

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Users, personnel, work groups and crews ................................ 5.125

Users ..................................................................................... 5.125
Personnel............................................................................... 5.125
Work groups .......................................................................... 5.127
Crew ...................................................................................... 5.127
Viewpoints ................................................................................. 5.127
VIMS ...................................................................................... 5.127
Waiting times ............................................................................. 5.128
Waypoints .................................................................................. 5.128
Entry waypoints ..................................................................... 5.129
Dump waypoints .................................................................... 5.129
Stockpile waypoints ............................................................... 5.129
Queue waypoints ................................................................... 5.129
Shop waypoints ..................................................................... 5.130
Crusher waypoints ................................................................. 5.130
Bounding waypoints............................................................... 5.130
Loading tool waypoints .......................................................... 5.130
Road segment waypoints ...................................................... 5.130
Road intersection waypoints.................................................. 5.131
Waypoint attributes ................................................................ 5.131
Waypoint processing ............................................................. 5.132
Single waypoint processing ........................................................ 5.132
Overlapping waypoint processing............................................... 5.132
Waypoint type attributes ........................................................ 5.132
ASSIGNMENT
Introduction to Assignment ............................................................ 6.1
Managing Assignments ................................................................. 6.1
Best practises ............................................................................ 6.1
Creating assignments ................................................................ 6.2
Creating an assignment by request................................................ 6.2
Creating an assignment triggered by load state ............................. 6.2
Creating an assignment triggered by load state and time .............. 6.4
Viewing assignments ................................................................. 6.5
Viewing assignments for a truck..................................................... 6.5
Viewing all assignments for all trucks............................................. 6.5
Managing assignment groups.................................................... 6.6
Creating an assignment group ....................................................... 6.6
Adding a truck to an assignment group .......................................... 6.6
Adding a loading tool to an assignment group ............................... 6.7

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Adding a processor to an assignment group.................................. 6.7

Editing an assignment group.......................................................... 6.7
Deleting an assignment group........................................................ 6.7
Viewing an assignment group ........................................................ 6.8
Decision support ........................................................................... 6.9
Items to take note of................................................................ 6.10
Adding and changing goals ..................................................... 6.11
Prioritizing materials and machines......................................... 6.12
Making decisions for machines and roads .............................. 6.13
Assignment Availability............................................................ 6.13
Delays ..................................................................................... 6.14
Locks and bars ........................................................................ 6.15
Mining Block changes ............................................................. 6.16
Viewing the summary of your changes ....................................... 6.16
Mine Model query .................................................................... 6.18
Managing restrictions .............................................................. 6.22
Setting locks ................................................................................. 6.23
Setting mining block locks ............................................................ 6.23
Clearing locks............................................................................... 6.24
Clearing mining block locks.......................................................... 6.24
Setting bars .................................................................................. 6.25
Clearing bars ................................................................................ 6.25
Viewing restrictions ...................................................................... 6.26
Applying restrictions on trucks...................................................... 6.27
Managing the use of machines ............................................... 6.28
Determining the use of machines................................................. 6.28
Viewing the trucking status........................................................... 6.28
Managing production requirements ............................................ 6.29
Creating production requirements ................................................ 6.29
Viewing your production goals ..................................................... 6.31
Editing production requirements................................................... 6.31
Deleting production requirements ................................................ 6.31
Viewing production requirements ................................................. 6.31
Managing production requirements templates ........................ 6.32
Creating a production requirements template .............................. 6.32
Editing a production requirements template................................. 6.32
Deleting a production requirements template............................... 6.33
Viewing a production requirements template ............................... 6.33

Contents
Fleet User Manual
DATA VALIDATION
Introduction to Data Validation ...................................................... 7.1
Inspecting the mine model using the Model Data Validation
tool .......................................................................................... 7.1
Scanning the mine model ............................................................... 7.1
Using the Historical Inspector tool ............................................. 7.2
Cleansing activities .................................................................... 7.5
Delay Inspector............................................................................... 7.5
Cycle Inspector............................................................................... 7.6
KPI Summaries Inspector............................................................... 7.7
KPI DASHBOARDS
Introduction to KPI dashboards ..................................................... 8.2
KPI dashboards .............................................................................. 8.2
Dashboard appearances ........................................................... 8.3
Dashboard layout options .......................................................... 8.3
Chart types ................................................................................ 8.4
Custom dataset definitions ............................................................ 8.5
Templates ...................................................................................... 8.6
Chart customization ....................................................................... 8.6
HEALTH
Introduction to Health .................................................................... 9.1
Event Monitoring ........................................................................... 9.1
Monitoring health events ................................................................ 9.1
Monitoring maintenance events...................................................... 9.1
VIMS events ................................................................................... 9.1
Channel monitoring ....................................................................... 9.2
Setting up real-time channel monitoring ......................................... 9.2
Monitoring channel data ................................................................. 9.3
Health-related jobs ........................................................................ 9.4
MACHINE TRACKING
Introduction to Machine Tracking ................................................ 10.1
Managing machines and fleets .................................................... 10.1
Managing machine categories................................................. 10.1
Creating a machine category........................................................ 10.1

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Editing a machine category .......................................................... 10.3

Deleting a machine category........................................................ 10.3
Viewing machines in a category................................................... 10.3
Configuring machine categories for loader recipes ...................... 10.4
Managing fuel bays ................................................................. 10.4
Creating a Fuel Bay...................................................................... 10.4
Editing a fuel bay.......................................................................... 10.5
Deleting a fuel bay........................................................................ 10.6
Viewing a fuel bay ........................................................................ 10.6
Managing machine configurations........................................... 10.6
Importing machine configurations ................................................ 10.6
Exporting machine configurations ................................................ 10.7
Managing machine classes and machines.............................. 10.7
Creating truck classes .................................................................. 10.8
Creating trucks ........................................................................... 10.14
Creating shovel classes ............................................................. 10.17
Creating shovels......................................................................... 10.20
Creating processor classes ........................................................ 10.23
Creating processors ................................................................... 10.23
Creating loader classes.............................................................. 10.25
Creating loaders ......................................................................... 10.28
Creating truck loadout unit classes ............................................ 10.32
Creating truck loadout units........................................................ 10.33
Creating Dozer, Grader Track Drill, and Terrain mobile
classes ....................................................................................... 10.35
machines .................................................................................... 10.36
Creating Surface Miner and Terrain Leveler classes ................. 10.38
Creating Surface Miners and Terrain Levelers........................... 10.40
Editing machine classes............................................................. 10.44
Editing machines ........................................................................ 10.44
Deleting machine classes........................................................... 10.47
Archiving machine categories and classes ................................ 10.47
Restoring machine categories and classes................................ 10.47
Deleting machines...................................................................... 10.48
Archiving machines .................................................................... 10.48
Viewing machine classes ........................................................... 10.48
Viewing machines ...................................................................... 10.48
Restoring machines.................................................................... 10.49
Comparing Loading Tools ..................................................... 10.49
Tracking Ton Miles/Kilometers Per Hour in
Fleet Update Assistant .......................................................... 10.50
Ability to report production losses due to Restrictions........... 10.53
Machines displaying asterisks on Fleet Update Assistant..... 10.54

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Possible reasons ........................................................................ 10.54

Viewing fuel levels in Fleet Update Assistant ........................ 10.55
Managing fleets ..................................................................... 10.56
Creating fleets ............................................................................ 10.56
Editing fleets ............................................................................... 10.56
Deleting fleets............................................................................. 10.57
Viewing fleets ............................................................................. 10.57
Analyzing positions .................................................................... 10.57
Monitoring event messages................................................... 10.57
Plotting production messages using Site Editor ......................... 10.57
Plotting VIMS events using Site Editor ....................................... 10.59
Managing viewpoints ............................................................. 10.60
Creating viewpoints .................................................................... 10.60
Renaming viewpoints ................................................................. 10.60
Deleting viewpoints..................................................................... 10.61
Going to a viewpoint ................................................................... 10.61
Monitoring machine positions ................................................ 10.61
Using Fleet Update Assistant ..................................................... 10.61
Using Site Monitor ...................................................................... 10.62
Finding a specific machine position............................................ 10.62
Monitoring positions.................................................................... 10.62
Managing GPS ...................................................................... 10.63
Showing the shortest path ..................................................... 10.64
Managing the travel network ..................................................... 10.66
Managing objects using Assistants ........................................... 10.66
Managing waypoints using Waypoint Assistant..................... 10.66
Creating waypoints ..................................................................... 10.66
Copying waypoints ..................................................................... 10.67
Editing waypoints........................................................................ 10.68
Archiving waypoints.................................................................... 10.68
Restoring waypoints ................................................................... 10.68
Deleting (Archiving) waypoints ................................................... 10.69
Updating waypoint information ................................................... 10.69
Viewing waypoints ...................................................................... 10.69
Viewing archived waypoints ....................................................... 10.69
Resetting the waypoint missed count ......................................... 10.70
Managing road segments using Road Segment Assistant .... 10.70
Creating road segments ............................................................. 10.70
Editing road segments................................................................ 10.72
Archiving road segments ............................................................ 10.73
Restoring road segments ........................................................... 10.73
Deleting road segments.............................................................. 10.73
Viewing road segments .............................................................. 10.74

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Viewing archived road segments ............................................... 10.74

Delaying road segments............................................................. 10.74
Managing destinations .......................................................... 10.75
Creating destinations.................................................................. 10.75
Editing destinations .................................................................... 10.76
Archiving destinations ................................................................ 10.77
Restoring destinations................................................................ 10.77
Deleting destinations .................................................................. 10.77
Viewing destinations................................................................... 10.78
Viewing archived destinations .................................................... 10.78
Site Editor overview............................................................... 10.78
Site Monitor overview ............................................................ 10.78
Toolbar icons......................................................................... 10.79
Shortcut keys......................................................................... 10.82
Removing grid lines ............................................................... 10.83
Display axis ........................................................................... 10.83
Measuring distances ............................................................. 10.84
Viewing the mine model ........................................................ 10.84
Viewing the details of objects ..................................................... 10.84
Managing .dxf files .................................................................... 10.85
Editing layers ............................................................................ 10.86
Entity creation menus ............................................................... 10.87
Point entry mode ....................................................................... 10.88
Creating objects using DXF data .............................................. 10.89
Creating roads using DXF data ............................................. 10.89
Joining and splitting DXF lines .............................................. 10.90
Creating waypoints using DXF data ...................................... 10.91
Managing waypoints using Site Editor ...................................... 10.91
Creating waypoints using Site Editor..................................... 10.91
Creating a waypoint from lines .............................................. 10.92
Editing waypoints using Site Editor ....................................... 10.92
Resizing waypoints using Site Editor .................................... 10.93
Rotating waypoints using Site Editor..................................... 10.93
Changing waypoint properties using Site Editor.................... 10.94
Archiving waypoints............................................................... 10.94
Archiving waypoints using Site Editor ................................... 10.94
Archiving waypoints using Site Monitor ................................. 10.95
Managing roads using Site Editor ............................................. 10.95
Creating roads using Site Editor............................................ 10.95
Editing roads using Site Editor .............................................. 10.96

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Archiving roads ...................................................................... 10.97

Archiving roads using Site Editor........................................... 10.98
Archiving roads using Site Monitor ........................................ 10.98
Managing destinations .............................................................. 10.99
Creating destinations using Site Editor.................................. 10.99
Managing bulk site edits using Site Editor or Site Monitor ........ 10.99
Selecting objects.................................................................. 10.100
Bulk editing waypoints ......................................................... 10.101
Bulk editing roads ................................................................ 10.102
Bulk archiving ...................................................................... 10.103
Managing travel conditions ...................................................... 10.103
Creating travel conditions ......................................................... 10.104
Editing travel conditions............................................................ 10.104
Deleting travel conditions ......................................................... 10.104
Viewing travel conditions .......................................................... 10.105
MATERIAL TRACKING
Introduction to Material Tracking ................................................. 11.1
Managing grades ......................................................................... 11.1
Creating grades ....................................................................... 11.1
Editing grades.......................................................................... 11.2
Deleting grades........................................................................ 11.2
Viewing grades ........................................................................ 11.2
Managing mining block groups .................................................... 11.3
Creating mining block groups .................................................. 11.3
Editing mining block groups..................................................... 11.3
Deleting mining block groups................................................... 11.3
Viewing mining block groups ................................................... 11.4
Managing mining blocks and stockpiles ...................................... 11.4
Creating mining blocks and stockpiles..................................... 11.4
Editing mining blocks and stockpiles ....................................... 11.5
Deleting mining blocks and stockpiles ..................................... 11.6
Viewing mining blocks and stockpiles...................................... 11.6
Activating mining blocks or stockpiles ..................................... 11.7
Deactivating mining blocks and stockpiles .............................. 11.7
Archiving mining blocks and stockpiles ................................... 11.7
Importing mining blocks and stockpiles ................................... 11.8
Managing material groups ........................................................... 11.8
Creating material groups ......................................................... 11.8

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Editing material groups............................................................ 11.8

Deleting material groups ......................................................... 11.9
Viewing material groups .......................................................... 11.9
Managing materials ..................................................................... 11.9
Creating materials ................................................................... 11.9
Editing materials .................................................................... 11.10
Archiving materials ................................................................ 11.11
Restoring materials ............................................................... 11.11
Deleting materials.................................................................. 11.12
Viewing materials .................................................................. 11.12
Managing material mixes .......................................................... 11.12
Creating material mixes......................................................... 11.12
Editing material mixes ........................................................... 11.13
Deleting material mixes ......................................................... 11.14
Viewing material mixes.......................................................... 11.14
Managing loader recipes ........................................................... 11.14
Creating loader recipes ......................................................... 11.14
Sending loader recipes to machines ..................................... 11.15
Editing loader recipes............................................................ 11.15
Deleting loader recipes.......................................................... 11.15
Viewing loader recipes .......................................................... 11.16
Managing blending .................................................................... 11.16
Blending workflow ................................................................. 11.16
Defining blends...................................................................... 11.16
Notes on archiving, restoring, and deleting blends .................... 11.19
Viewing your blending goals in Fleet Update Assistant.............. 11.20
OPERATOR MANAGEMENT
Introduction to Operator Management ........................................ 12.1
Managing absences ................................................................ 12.1
Creating an absence type ............................................................ 12.1
Deleting an absence type............................................................. 12.1
Managing machine licenses .................................................... 12.1
Creating a machine license .......................................................... 12.1
Editing a machine license............................................................. 12.2
Deleting a machine license .......................................................... 12.2
Managing work groups and personnel .................................... 12.2
Creating work groups ................................................................... 12.2
Editing work groups...................................................................... 12.3
Deleting work groups.................................................................... 12.3

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Viewing work groups .................................................................... 12.3

Creating personnel ....................................................................... 12.3
Editing personnel.......................................................................... 12.6
Archiving personnel ...................................................................... 12.6
Restoring personnel ..................................................................... 12.7
Deleting personnel........................................................................ 12.7
Viewing personnel ........................................................................ 12.7
Managing safety .......................................................................... 12.7
Adding a safety item ................................................................ 12.8
Editing a safety item ................................................................ 12.8
Deleting a safety item .............................................................. 12.9
Viewing a safety item............................................................... 12.9
Adding a safety check action ................................................... 12.9
Editing a safety check action ................................................... 12.9
Viewing a safety check action................................................ 12.10
Deleting a safety check action ............................................... 12.10
Editing a safety record ........................................................... 12.10
Deleting a safety check record .............................................. 12.11
Viewing a safety check record ............................................... 12.11
Managing scheduled breaks ..................................................... 12.11
Creating a scheduled break........................................................ 12.11
Editing scheduled break allocation rules .................................... 12.13
Editing a scheduled break .......................................................... 12.14
Deleting a scheduled break ........................................................ 12.14
Viewing a scheduled break......................................................... 12.15
Managing shift changes ............................................................ 12.15
Shift change preparation ........................................................... 12.15
Setting up a shift change ....................................................... 12.15
Allocating operators.................................................................... 12.16
Allocating shift change tie-downs ............................................... 12.19
Limiting shift change tie-downs .................................................. 12.21
Allocating personnel at shift change........................................... 12.21
Specifying a supervisor for the shift............................................ 12.22
Allocating transport vehicles....................................................... 12.22
Shift change comments .............................................................. 12.26
PIT LINK
Introduction to Pit Link ................................................................. 13.1
Monitoring field communications ................................................. 13.1
Support tool for Field Communications Monitor .......................... 13.2

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Third party interface (TPI) ....................................................... 13.3

TMAC messages in Fleet ............................................................. 13.4
Monitoring the field network ........................................................ 13.5
Managing field events ................................................................. 13.5
Monitoring field events ............................................................ 13.5
Managing onboard files ............................................................... 13.6
Selecting and generating files ................................................. 13.6
Uploading Files........................................................................ 13.6
Updating files for TOPE........................................................... 13.8
Pushing KPI data ........................................................................ 13.8
Managing data transfer ............................................................... 13.9
Monitoring data transfer .......................................................... 13.9
Managing operator message groups ........................................ 13.10
Creating operator message groups ....................................... 13.10
Editing operator message groups ......................................... 13.11
Deleting operator message groups ....................................... 13.11
Viewing operator messages groups ...................................... 13.11
Managing operator messages .................................................. 13.11
Creating operator messages ................................................. 13.11
Sending operator messages ................................................. 13.12
Editing operator messages.................................................... 13.13
Deleting operator messages ................................................. 13.13
Viewing operator messages .................................................. 13.13
PRODUCTION
Introduction to Production ........................................................... 14.1
Managing cycles ......................................................................... 14.1
Viewing cycles.............................................................................. 14.1
Filtering cycles.............................................................................. 14.2
Splitting cycles.............................................................................. 14.2
Splitting drill cycles ....................................................................... 14.3
Creating cycles ............................................................................ 14.3
Editing cycles ............................................................................... 14.7
Merging cycles ............................................................................. 14.9
Deleting cycles ............................................................................. 14.9
Hiding cycles .............................................................................. 14.10
Monitoring cycles........................................................................ 14.10
Reconstructing truck cycles from VIMS payload files............ 14.10
Monitoring production events ..................................................... 14.11

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Managing delay types and delays ............................................. 14.12

Managing delay type groups.................................................. 14.12
Creating a delay type group ....................................................... 14.12
Renaming a delay type group..................................................... 14.12
Deleting a delay type group........................................................ 14.12
Viewing a delay type group ........................................................ 14.13
Managing delay types............................................................ 14.13
Creating a delay type.................................................................. 14.13
Editing a delay type .................................................................... 14.14
Archiving a delay type ................................................................ 14.14
Restoring a delay type................................................................ 14.14
Viewing a delay type................................................................... 14.15
Moving a delay type.................................................................... 14.15
Managing delays.................................................................... 14.15
Creating delays........................................................................... 14.15
Editing delays ............................................................................. 14.16
Deleting delays ........................................................................... 14.17
Viewing delays............................................................................ 14.18
Splitting delays ........................................................................... 14.19
Merging delays ........................................................................... 14.19
Extending delays ........................................................................ 14.19
Stopping delays .......................................................................... 14.20
Automatic delay creation for stationary equipment................ 14.21
How it works ............................................................................... 14.21
Reconstructing truck delays from TMAC
message log files ....................................................................... 14.23
Managing job codes groups and job codes ............................... 14.24
Managing job code groups .................................................... 14.24
Creating job code groups ........................................................... 14.24
Editing job code groups .............................................................. 14.24
Deleting job code groups............................................................ 14.25
Viewing job code groups ............................................................ 14.25
Managing job codes............................................................... 14.25
Creating job codes...................................................................... 14.25
Editing job codes ........................................................................ 14.26
Deleting job codes ...................................................................... 14.26
Viewing job codes....................................................................... 14.26
Managing machine states ......................................................... 14.27
Managing machine state groups............................................ 14.27
Creating a machine state group ................................................. 14.27
Editing a machine state group .................................................... 14.27
Deleting a machine state group.................................................. 14.28
Viewing a machine state group .................................................. 14.28

Contents
Fleet User Manual
Managing machine states ..................................................... 14.28

Creating a machine state ........................................................... 14.28
Editing a machine state .............................................................. 14.29
Deleting a machine state............................................................ 14.29
Viewing a machine state ............................................................ 14.29
Managing Fluids ........................................................................ 14.30
Creating fluid types..................................................................... 14.30
Editing fluid types ....................................................................... 14.30
Deleting fluid types ..................................................................... 14.31
Viewing fluid types...................................................................... 14.31
Managing service records ......................................................... 14.31
Creating service records ............................................................ 14.31
Editing service records ............................................................... 14.32
Deleting service records............................................................. 14.32
Viewing service records ............................................................. 14.33
TROUBLESHOOTING
Introduction to troubleshooting .................................................... 15.1
Getting support ........................................................................... 15.1
Running a snapshotSystem .................................................... 15.1
Taking a screen capture.......................................................... 15.2
Sending a reporting issue........................................................ 15.2
Using the CAT FTP server ...................................................... 15.3
Common problems ...................................................................... 15.4
Common Alarm problems........................................................ 15.4
Handling import process errors for mining blocks ................... 15.4
Messages ................................................................................ 15.6
Pinging field network components................................................ 15.7
Dipper count in production event monitor is showing as
zero ........................................................................................ 15.8
Navigating pages..................................................................... 15.8
Opening pages ............................................................................. 15.8
Opening the wrong page .............................................................. 15.9
Using the older page navigation format........................................ 15.9
Troubleshooting erroneous time-based numbers in
KpiSummaries reports ............................................................. 15.9
Introduction................................................................................... 15.9
Identification of issues with non-continuous cycles ...................... 15.9
Identification of issues with activities within cycles..................... 15.11
Resolution of identified cycle data issues using cyclessistant.... 15.12
Standard process for obtaining support for report related

Contents
Fleet User Manual
issues ......................................................................................... 15.12

Shift Change issues............................................................... 15.13
Operator automatic allocation takes too long to complete.......... 15.13
One or more Processors are displayed in the unallocated
equipment lists............................................................................ 15.13
Onboard Safety Check issues ............................................... 15.13
The machine fails to display the safety checklist when the
operator logs in........................................................................... 15.13
The machine is not put on delay when a “Repair before
Operating” safety check item fails .............................................. 15.13
Failed safety check items do not raise an alarm ........................ 15.14
Disabling dynamic fuel and travel alarms .............................. 15.14
ROM Loaders ........................................................................ 15.17
Payload is always the default of 20 ton ...................................... 15.17

Fleet System Overview
What is the Fleet Client?
What is the Fleet Client?

Fleet Client is the office software application used by office personnel to
monitor and manage the Fleet system. Fleet Client’s design is similar to
many Microsoft Windows applications so most users will be familiar with the
basic user interface and functionality.
Fleet subsystem descriptions

Fleet is a totally integrated mining information system. The system features
machine control, machine health, productivity, machine and materials
tracking, drill management and the advanced truck assignment system.
The office software uses the real time information from the on-board
technology systems including Computer Aided Earthmoving System
(CAESultra), Vital Information Management System (VIMS), the GPS
onboard truck displays (Fleet for CD550 or Fleet for CMPD), and the Terrain
for Drill and Terrain for Dragline systems.
The office software comprises the following subsystems:
• Assignment
• Data Validation
• Health
• Machine Tracking
• Material Tracking
• Operator Management
• Pit Link
• Production
• Platform
Note: You can buy Health as a standalone product.
The following table provides a description of each subsystem and its

application.
Page 1.1 © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Subsystem Application
Assignment Assigns trucks to loading tools and dumps to optimize movement of
materials from sources to sinks while achieving production targets. Fleet
Operators can manage short and long hauls to meet planning
requirements, maximize certain materials for process plant requirements
whilst at the same time maximizing overall production, shovel utilization
and minimising truck waiting times and lowering costs.
Data Validation The office software has two data validation tools, Model Data Validation,
and Historical Inspector.
Model Data Validation
A diagnostic page used to check the mine model for inconsistencies. Once
a scan is run, the page displays issues and may suggest ways of resolving
them, helping maintainability and mine model style.
This page is configured by security for use by the Fleet Builder

only.
Historical Inspector
Note: You must be in Expert Mode to use this tool and ensure no data
processing is being undertaken.
Historical Inspector assists implementation and support personnel by

scanning historical data migrated from an earlier version system and
detecting and correcting a defined set of known issues within the Historical
database.
Health Provides real time asset management module for mine mobile equipment.
This subsystem comprises modules that together form an integrated
vital-sign data collection management and analysis suite. Equipment
failures, excessive wear rates, over-temperatures, overloading and
degrading operating conditions are all examples of health information that
when correctly acquired, managed and analysed can improve a mine's
efficiency, unit productivity, and lower lifetime cost of ownership.
Machine Tracking Provides real-time visibility of machine movements from the office, the pit
or a remote location. Machine tracking has all the functionality required to
manage a fleet of machines, communicate with machines via a wireless
network, and track machine positions throughout a site. A site travel
network can be defined, specifying end destinations and all intervening
places or waypoints along the way. Confidential messages can be
transmitted between the office and machine operators, reducing radio
traffic and improving coaching.
Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Page 1.2

Material Tracking Allows you to define the materials on a site and the grades they may have.
Mining Blocks can be defined for unmined material and then calculated for
stockpiles (average grades and volumes). Real-time grade determination
is also supported against these Mining Blocks by truck and integrates back
to mine planning packages. Material Tracking will then monitor material
movement and direction, specifically providing truck payload information to
loader for optimum loading, correct material routing and alerting operators
and planners of mis-routes to ensure material is moved to the proper
location. Material Tracking monitors material flow through the mining
operation by integration with the high precision GPS tool, CAESultra on
the loading tools. Materials are locked to destinations (single or multiple) to
ensure misdirected loads do not occur.
Loading recipes for loading from stockpiles ensures that downstream
quality parameters are consistently met. Recipes can be defined for
individual loaders/locations and can be grouped into material mixes for
ease of description of downstream quality in stockpiles, feeds or dumps.
The main features are
• Mining block management
• Material management
• Recipe management
• Stockpile management
Operator Management Enables you to manage personnel, their safety, their licenses, scheduled
breaks and shift changes. This subsystem is designed to assist the mine
with the core personnel issues within the daily mining environment and
time scale.
The main areas of functionality are as follows:
• Managing absences
• Managing machine licences
• Managing workgroups and personnel
• Managing safety records
• Managing scheduled breaks
• Managing shift changes
• Managing transport vehicles

Pit Link Provides communication between the office and the field, ensuring
optimum productivity and efficiency of mine operations.
• field communications
• the field network
• field events
• onboard files
• data transfer
• operator message groups
• operator messages
Platform Provides the functionality for establishing your mine model through
definition and behaviour of alarms, calendars, charting and reporting,
general configuration, database administration, and disaster recovery.
Production A suite of modules enabling the real time recording, management, analysis
and reporting of mining operations. As each machine works (or doesn't
work), its actions are processed and recorded in the office software
database. Building on the Platform and taking advantage of the wireless
network and available onboard monitoring devices, the data can be
collected with no operator intervention. This frees the operator to focus on
the real production task, not on collecting data.
Production provides real time productivity information during the shift from
trucks, loading tools and earthmoving machines for increased
management control, and increasing efficiency of mining operations.
Features include:
• Activity monitoring
• Cycle management
• Delay management
• Fuel management
• Payload management
• Production KPI summary management
• SMU Interpolation
• TKPH motoring


Fleet Client Interface
Using the Fleet Client user interface

This section describes how to use the main user interface for Fleet Client.
Opening Fleet
Fleet can be started several times, each time being an instance of the
executable file. Each instance can use a different desktop.
 To start an instance of Fleet

1. On the desktop, double-click the MineStar Client icon configured for
your system. The command window opens, the splash screen opens
and the login dialog opens.
2. Either enter your username in the Username field, or select it from the
Username list.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
4. If required, select a specific desktop from the Desktop list.
5. Click OK.
6. If you want to open another instance of Fleet, on the File menu, click
New Window, or click the New Window button on the toolbar.
The Welcome screen displays when an instance of Fleet starts. The main
components are described in the following topics. Figure 2.1 on page 2
shows the Welcome screen.

Figure 2.1: Welcome screen
Closing Fleet
You can close either one session or all Fleet sessions.
 To close one session of Fleet

• On the File menu, click Close Window.
 To stop all instances of Fleet

• On the File menu, click Exit.

Application title bar

The application title bar displays the following:
• The name of the currently displayed console.
• The page configuration name (if one is active).
• The current user.
• The name of the computer to which this instance of the office software is
connected.
• The standard Microsoft Windows minimize, maximize, restore and close
buttons.
Navigator
The Navigator displays an expandable, collapsible and configurable
hierarchy of all available pages within the office software.
When a page is selected in Navigator it is opened in the detail window.
Menu bar
The menu bar displays a set of menus relevant to the active page. Some
menu names may be displayed but not enabled, depending on the user’s
privileges.

A default set of menus is displayed when an instance of the office software

starts. The default menus are as follows:
• File
• Edit
• View
• Contents
• Jobs
• Tools
• Displays
• Reports
• Actions
• Help
File menu
The following table lists the File menu options and functions.
Menu option Function

Open Page Displays the Page Runner.
Close Page Closes the active page in the detail window without
exiting the office software.
Save Page Saves the user-defined configuration of the active

Configuration page.
Do not save page configurations with the name Default

as this will override the system default configuration
settings.
Save page configurations with a new name.
Open Console Opens a previously saved console.
Save Console Saves the currently displayed console.
New Window Opens a window.
Close Window Closes the active window.
Save Desktop Saves the active desktop.
Logout Closes all windows, logs you out and displays the login
dialog.
Exit Closes all windows, logs you out and exists the
application.

Edit menu
The following table lists the Edit menu options and functions.

Cut Use the Cut command to delete the selected text.
Copy Use the Copy command to copy the selected text.
Paste Use the Paste command to insert the text previously

selected.
Select all Use the Select all command to select all of the text on
a specific page or in a specific field.
View menu
The following table lists the View menu options and functions.

Refresh Refreshes the display of the current page.
Filter Displays the Enter filter dialog used to select data to

display.
Navigator Toggles the display of the Navigator.
Toolbar Toggles the display of the toolbar.
Σ Statistics Toggles the display of the statistics bar for the page.
Status Bar Toggles the display of the status bar.
Expert Mode Toggles the display of advanced tools and options

which may be used by advanced users.
Contents menu
The Contents menu displays the same page structure as that displayed
using Navigator and can be used instead of Navigator to select pages.
The following table lists the Contents menu options and functions.
Page type Function

Setup Pages Contains links to all pages that allow you to set up sub-
systems.
Management Contains links to all pages that allow you to manage

Pages sub-systems.

Page type Function

Diagnostics Contains links to all pages that allow you to diagnose
Pages sub-systems.
Assignment Links to the Assignment sub-system.
Data Validation Links to the Model Data Validation sub-system. You

must be in Expert Mode to link to the Historical
Inspector sub-system.
Health Links to the Health sub-system.
Machine Links to the Machine Tracking sub-system.

Tracking
Material Links to the Material Tracking sub-system.

Tracking
Operator Links to the Operator Management sub-system.

Management
Pit Link Links to the Pit Link sub-system.
Platform Links to the Platform sub-system.
Production Links to the Production sub-system.
Jobs menu
The following table lists the Jobs menu options and functions.

Running Jobs - Standard Links to the Standard Job Execution
Monitor.
Running Jobs - Field Links to the Field Transfer Job Execution

Transfer Monitor.
Running Jobs - Health Links to the Standard Job Execution

Transfer Monitor.
Scheduled Jobs Links to the Scheduled Jobs page.
Health Links to Health-related standard jobs.
Pit Link Links to Pit-Link-related standard jobs.
Production Links to Production-related standard jobs.

Tools menu
The following table lists the Tools menu options and functions.

Snapshot System Takes a copy of system files used for system
analysis.
Admin Links to Administration Tools. See the

Administration and Configuration Guide for
more information.
Client Links to Client Tools. See the Administration

and Configuration Guide for more information.
Diagnostics Links to Diagnostics Tools. See the

Administration and Configuration Guide for
more information.
Setup Links to Setup Tools. See the Administration

and Configuration Guide for more information.
Displays menu
The Displays menu displays KPI Dashboards.
Reports menu
The Reports menu links to the Report Cache.
Actions menu
The Actions menu displays the customized actions available for the active
page. If there are no customized actions available, this menu is disabled.
Help menu
The following table lists the Help menu options and functions.

Contents Opens the help page.
About Opens the About MineStar dialog, which displays

copyright, version, general, licence and third party
information.

Statistics bar
The statistics bar displays statistical information about the active page. Some
types of information on the statistics bar are as follows:
• A legend.
• Number of records in the displayed table.
• Performance indicators.
Status bar
The status bar displays status information about the active page. Some types
of status information on the status bar are as follows:
• Status of the page.
• Version of Fleet being used.
• Modified indicator.
• Busy indicator.
Shortcut menus
A shortcut menu displays options relevant to the selected active object on the
page. It is accessed by right-clicking in the details window.
Some menu options may be displayed but not enabled, depending on the
user’s privileges.
Toolbar
The toolbar displays a set of icons representing commonly used actions.
Some icons may be displayed but not enabled, depending on the user’s
privileges.
The icons displayed below may be a different color on your system.
The standard options on the toolbar are described in the following table.
Command Icon Function

Show/hide navigator Toggles the display of the
navigator.
Close page Closes the currently displayed page

in the detail window without exiting
the office software.


Refresh Refreshes the display of data on
the active page.
New window Opens the office software in a new

window. This allows for multiple
pages to be open on the desktop
simultaneously.
Other icons may be displayed depending on the active page. Some

commonly used icons are described in the following table.

Quick filters Selects an entity or combination of
entities to filter the data displayed
in the page. Quick filters can be
found on many of the event monitor
pages.
Configure/display Opens a dialog for modifying page

properties configurations.
Toggle display of Toggles between displays of

archived entities archived and active entities.
Toggle display of Toggles between displaying empty

empty folders folders.
Pause Pauses dynamic updates.
Resume Resumes dyamic updates.

Using the office software Client

This section describes basic Microsoft Windows functionality used
throughout the office software. It will help you to use all pages and windows
within the software.
Opening pages
Pages open in different ways depending on the entity and function. Details on
how to open each page are provided in the individual page topics and also in
a quick reference summary list, see the GUI Page Reference chapter of this
manual.
Selecting data
The following table provides general guidelines for selecting data.
To select... Do this..
One item of data from a table. Click the data to highlight it.
Mulitple items of data from a table. Press CTRL and click each required
item of data.
Deleting data
You can delete data items as required and in most cases is prompted to
confirm that the delete request should proceed.
There is no undo functionality in the office software. A deleted item is
removed from the database and cannot be immediately restored.
Sorting data
This topic explains how to sort columnar data.
Information in most data tables can be sorted in ascending or descending
order. Up to three columns can be specified for sorting. The sort order is
defined by the size of the arrow in the column heading: large, medium and
small.
The primary sort column uses the large arrow, the secondary sort column
uses the medium arrow and the tertiary sort column uses the small arrow.
 To sort one column into ascending order

1. If an up-arrow is displayed in the column label, do nothing. It is already
sorted in ascending order.
2. If a down-arrow is displayed in the column label, click the column label.
This sorts the contents into ascending order and changes the down-
arrow to an up-arrow.

 To sort one column into descending order

1. If a down-arrow is displayed in the column label, do nothing. It is already
sorted in descending order.
2. If an up-arrow is displayed in the column label, click the column label.
This sorts the contents into descending order and changes the up-arrow
to a down-arrow.
 To sort multiple columns into ascending order

1. Determine the columns that you want to sort.
2. Specify the tertiary sort column by clicking the heading of the column
until the arrow is an up-arrow.
3. Specify the secondary sort column by clicking the heading of the column
4. Specify the primary sort column by clicking the heading of the column
 To sort multiple columns into descending order

1. Determine the columns that you want to sort
2. Specify the tertiary sort column by clicking the heading of the column
until the arrow is a down-arrow.
3. Specify the secondary sort column by clicking the heading of the column
4. Specify the primary sort column by clicking the heading of the column
Including and excluding data

This table below provides a description of the buttons used when you need to
include or exclude data, for example, when assigning grades from available
grades.
This button... Allows you to...

Add One (>) Add the selected attributes to the Include window.
Add All (>>) Add all attributes to the Include window.
Remove One (<) Remove the selected attributes from the Include
window.
Remove All (<<) Remove all attributes from the Include window.
Move Up (^) Moves the selected entity up one position.
Move Down (v) Moves the selected entity down one position.

Filtering information
This topic explains how to filter information in the office software so that you
only view information you require.
 To filter information on a page

1. Ensure that the Filter button is available on the toolbar. For example,
there is a filter button on Scheduled Break Finder. If not, then you cannot
filter the information.
2. Click the Filter button on the toolbar to display the Enter Filter dialog.
3. On the Properties tab, select the items you want to include and
exclude.
4. Click the Rows tab.
5. Select the type of information you want view using a complex
expression, as follows:
i. Select the appropriate property, operator, condition, and value.
The Operator list box is only available when an initial expression
exists in the Expression as text field.
ii. Click Add to add each statement to the Expression as text field.
Previous expressions are not cleared from the Expression as text
field.
iii. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialog.
Note: All custom filters of data may be saved and added to the list of page
configurations for future reference and displayed when accessing the
function.
Managing desktops
This topic describes how to manage desktops.
You can edit and save the current desktop. The saved desktop includes all
currently open pages and their size and position in the detail window at the
time of saving. You can then select the saved desktop next time the office
software is started.
 To create a desktop
New desktops can only be created by users with the correct privileges.
1. Ensure that the pages are arranged as you want to save them.
2. On the File menu, click Save Desktop. The Save Desktop dialog
opens.

3. In the Desktop Name field, enter a name for the desktop.

4. Click OK. The new desktop will be available the next time you start an
instance of the office software.
 To edit a desktop
1. Ensure that the required desktop is open.
2. Edit the desktop as required.
3. Click File.
4. Select Save Desktop
5. In the Enter desktop name field, enter a name for the desktop.
6. Click OK.
 To select a desktop
You can select a desktop to use when you log in.
1. Start the office software as you would usually.
2. When the login screen is displayed enter your User Name and
Password.
3. From the list beside System, select the system you want to use.
4. From the list beside Desktop, select the desktop you want to use.
5. Click OK.
Viewing data
This topic explains how to quickly view data and attributes related to an entity
within the office software.
It is recommended that you view data and attributes using the appropriate
page. However, an unstructured view can be displayed using the Quick View
utility.
Quick View may not always show consistent information depending on
the page you are looking at.
For example, when running Cycle Assistant, Quick View does not show
activities for any of the cycles until you open one. Quick View then shows the
activities. In this case, looking at the cycle in Cycle Editor provides you with a
more comprehensive view, with consistent information.
 To view data and attributes using Quick View

1. Open the page that displays the entity.
2. Right-click the required machine or entity.
3. Select Quick View from the menu.

Managing columns
This topic explains how to manage columns.
The order and width of the columns in event tables and data tables can be
modified to suit your own requirements. You can change the order of the
columns and change the width to suit the data.
 To move a column
1. Click the label at the top of the column to be moved
2. Drag the column label to the left or right until the column is in the
required position.
 To change the width of a column

1. Hover the mouse over the left or right boundary of the column until the
double-ended arrow displays.
2. Drag the boundary of the column until it reaches the required width.
Enabling and disabling expert mode

This topic describes how to enable and disable expert mode.
 To enable expert mode

1. Ensure that an instance of the office software is open.
2. On the View menu, click Expert Mode.
3. Enter the appropriate password.
4. Click OK. A plus sign displays on the status bar and a tick displays
beside View > Expert Mode.
 To disable expert mode

1. Ensure that an instance of the office software is open.
2. On the View menu, click Expert Mode.


Platform
Platform
Introduction to Platform
The Fleet system consists of a set of sub-systems, each one providing a
specific type of functionality. Platform is the sub-system used to manage and
monitor the entire office software system and provides access to all common
functionality.
This chapter describes the procedures required to set up, manage, and
diagnose the platform.
There are several high-level pages for monitoring and controlling the office
software which provide a less detailed view than the standard pages.
Examples of some high level monitors are:
• Alarm Monitor
• Job Execution Monitor
• Bus Monitor (Office Processes)
This chapter includes the following sections:
• Managing alarms
• Managing alarm types
• Managing crew
• Managing jobs
• Managing office processes
• Managing rosters
• Managing shifts
• Managing users
Managing alarms
This topic explains how to manage alarms.
Not all users have access to all features related to alarms.
Editing an alarm
 To edit an alarm
1. Open Alarm Monitor.
2. Select the alarm you want to edit.
3. Click Open. Alarm Editor opens.
4. On the General tab, in the Priority group box, select the priority of the
alarm.
5. On the Comment tab, enter any required comments in the Alarm
Comment box.
6. Click Save.

Platform
Acknowledging an alarm
 To acknowledge an alarm
2. If you want to acknowledge specific alarms, do the following:
i. Select the alarm(s) that you want to acknowledge.
ii. Click Acknowledge.
3. If you want to acknowledge all unacknowledged alarms that are
currently displayed, click Select Unacknowledged, and then click
Acknowledge.
Closing an alarm
 To close an alarm
2. Select the alarm(s) that you want to close.
3. Click Close. Alarm Monitor removes all closed alarms from the display.
Rejecting an alarm
 To reject an alarm
2. Select the alarm(s) that you want to reject.
3. Click Reject. Alarm Monitor removes all rejected alarms from the
display.
You cannot reject acknowledged alarms.
Resolving an alarm
 To resolve an alarm
2. Select the alarm that you want to resolve.
3. On the Actions menu, click Resolve Alarms. The page relevant to the
alarm opens.
4. Make the changes necessary to fix the alarm.
5. Click Close.
You can only resolve closed alarms.

Platform
Viewing an alarm
 To view alarms
2. Select a filtered view from the Page Configuration list.
Managing alarm types

Alarm Types are set up as part of your default system. The permissions you
have will dictate how many of the following procedures you are able to
perform. If you are unable to perform a particular procedure, please contact
Fleet Customer Support for more information.
Modifying an alarm type

 To modify an alarm type
1. Open Alarm Type Editor.
2. From the table, click the row of the Alarm Type you wish to edit. The
table at the top of the screen turns gray, and you can now modify the
details in the tabs below the tables.
3. Click Validate to check that the data you have entered passes validity
checks.
4. Click Apply to save your changes and continue editing.
5. Click Save to save your changes and close the window.
Deleting an alarm type

Deleting an Alarm Type is not supported.
Viewing an alarm type

 To view an alarm type
1. Open Alarm Type Editor.
2. Alarm types are shown in the table at the top of the screen.
Managing crews
This topic explains how to manage crews.
Creating crews
 To create a crew
1. Open Crew Editor.
2. Click New.

Platform
3. In the Name field, enter the name of the crew.

4. If you want to check the details you have entered are correct, click
Validate.
5. If you want to save your changes and continue editing data, click Add.
6. If you want to save your changes and exit, click Save.
Renaming crews
 To rename a crew
2. From the Name column on the left, select the Crew you wish to rename.
3. In the Name field, make the relevant changes to the crew name.
Validate.
Deleting crews
 To delete a crew
2. From the Name column on the left, select the crew you wish to delete
and click Delete.
3. If you are sure that you want to delete the crew, click Yes in the
confirmation dialog.

Platform
Managing jobs
This topic explains how to manage jobs both ad hoc and within the office
software.
Jobs are accessed through both the Contents menu and the Jobs menu.
Creating jobs
This topic describes how to create jobs using job templates.
The set of available job templates is as follows:
Table 3.1: Available job templates
Job Name Job Description

Configure VIMS Wireless Configures the VIMS box to send VIMS
Messaging health and production messages direct to the
office. This job is used for Health-only sites
and is not to be used in conjunction with the
TOPE or CAES.
Data Logger Activate Activates or deactivates a Datalogger on a

VIMS ABL enabled machine.
Note: This job is also available for models of

machines carrying VIMS 3G devices
running in either ABL or 3G format.

Platform

FPO (Fleet Productivity Calculates haul road indices for FPO reports
Optimization) Haul Road from Datalog files. The calculations are now
Index Calculator compatible with FPO 1.5 (previously ASA
1.1).
The calculations produced by the
new algorithm cannot be directly
compared with the old. As such, all
existing ASA data is deleted as part of the
upgrade process.
If you want to look at historical data, you
MUST run reports prior to upgrading.
If you want to look at new FPO indices for old
data, you should run the ASA job again on
the old data loggers after upgrading.
Previously, all of the data points from a data
logger were kept in the ASA_DETAIL table.
Now, only those data points that are part of a
complete travelling loaded portion of a cycle
are kept. This conserves space, as data that
is not part of a complete travelling loaded
cycle, is not used in calculating the Haul
Road Condition Index.
Note: You can also perform FPO

calculations when running the VIMS
Data Import job. This imports
dataloggers resulting in the FPO data
being created in the table mentioned
above.
Fluid Management Data Brings data into Health from other condition
Import monitoring sources.
Generate Coverage Map Generates a map of a parameter, e.g.

latency, across the mine site.
Get VIMS Configurations Downloads the VIMS channel configuration

file from a VIMS ABL-enabled machine, and
updates the list of configured chanels for the
machine.
Mining Block Exporter Exports mining block data from the office
software. Generates files for METS Manager.

Platform

Mining Block Importer Imports mining block data (CSV format) into
the office software. Generates files for METS
Manager.
Mining Block Importer MkII Imports mining block data (typically MEDS)
into the office software and generates files for
METS Manager.
Health Data Deletion Deletes VIMS data from the office software
database.
Oracle Mining Block Extracts mining blocks from an Oracle

Extractor database and generates files for the office
software Mining Block Importer.
Position Event Export Export event information for plotting..
SmartSignal Export Export Datalog and Snapshot files in the

VIMS unprocessed directory as SmartSignal
ASC files.
SurPac Mining Block Imports mining block data in SurPac format

Importer into the office software.
Synchronize VIMS Clock Synchronizes the VIMS clock with the office
with Office time.
VIMS Data Import Imports VIMS files into the the office software
database.
VIMS File Download Downloads VIMS data files from a VIMS ABL
enabled machine.
The following jobs are available in Expert Mode only:

Table 3.2: Jobs available in Expert Mode

BatchCycleUpdate Performs bulk cycle and/or summaries updates.
HistoricalDataInspector Performs bulk historical data inspections.

Platform
The procedure for creating a job will vary depending on which template is
being used.
Note: If you are running a job that requires you to enter a file or directory to
be used by the job, note that the path you enter is relative to the
Application Server, NOT the machine the client is running on. For
example, if you enter a path of d:\mstar\reports then the job
looks to use that directory on the d: drive of the Application Server.
Some jobs, for example the BatchCycleUpdate and Mining Block

Importer, allow a symbolic name to be used to specify which file,
directory path, or part thereof, should be used. For example, the
Mining Block Importer requires that a directory containing the files to
import be specified. In this case, the {MSTAR_DATA}/miningblocks
value can be used, which refers to a subdirectory called miningblocks
in the standard data directory. This directory is easily accessible from
both the client and the server.
Creating an ad hoc job

 To create an ad hoc job
To create an ad hoc job using this procedure is the same as starting the job.
1. Open Job Runner.
2. To filter the view of templates based on the group to which they belong,
select a group from the Group list.
3. Select a job template from the Name column. The page re-displays with
tabs relevant to the job being scheduled.
4. Click the Standard Options tab and enter the details as required.
5. If enabled, click Extended Options tab and enter the details as
required.
6. Click the Job Run Options tab and enter the details as required.
7. Click Run.

Platform
Creating a triggered scheduled job
Note: Avoid scheduling jobs near the transition hours of Daylight

Savings.
During daylight savings time (DST) hours, the scheduled job
trigger is not accurate, for example, when a VIMS Import job is
scheduled to fire during the hours of 1.00am and 2.00am. This
is due to a limitation in the Quartz Scheduler software, which
Fleet uses to fire scheduled.
Refer to the following link and scroll to the Daylight Savings

Time section for more information.
http://www.quartz-scheduler.org/documentation/best-practices
 To create a triggered scheduled job

1. Open Scheduled Jobs.
2. Click New.
3. To filter the view of templates based on the group to which they belong,
select a group from the Group list.
4. Select a job template from the Name column. The page re-displays with
tabs relevant to the job being scheduled.
5. Click the Standard Options tab and edit the attributes specific to that
job template as required.
6. Click the Scheduler Parameters tab and do the following:
i. If required, edit the name of the job in the Job Name field. It is
recommended that you use the system generated name as it is
unique.
ii. If required, edit the name of the group to which this job should
belong in the Job Group field.
iii. If required, enter a description of the job in the Description field.
iv. In the Trigger Type box, select the type of trigger for the scheduled
job. The page re-displays with the appropriate trigger tab.
7. Select Simple Trigger to run the job either once, or multiple times at
regular intervals. Click the Simple Trigger tab and do the following:
i. If you want a job to run now, select Now from the Start Mode list.
ii. If you want to schedule the job to run at a time in the future, select
At a nominated time from the Start Mode list.
• Enter the date and time as required.
• Specify the repeats you want by choosing an option from the
Execute box, and specifying the appropriate repeat parameters.

Platform
8. Select Schedule Trigger to run the job at the same time either every
hour, day, and certain days of the week, or certain days of the month.
Click the Schedule Driven Trigger tab and:
i. Select a frequency for the job from the Schedule Type list.
ii. Enter the date and time you want this schedule to become active.
The Activation Time fields show the absolute date and time after
which the job will start. You can set up a job to not start for another
week, even though the other trigger conditions are met.
Note: Ensure the start time is in the present or the future. If you set a
start time in the past, it may trigger a job to be run immediately.
iii. Enter the actual time you want the job to start, within the chosen
period. For example, if you want the job to run daily at 9.05am, click
the Hours Start arrow until you get to 9, and the Minutes Arrow
until you get to 5.
9. Select Event Trigger to run the job when certain events occur. Click the
Event Driven Trigger tab and:
i. Specify the filter type.
ii. Enter details as required.
10. Choose from the following to ensure your changes are saved.
i. If you want to validate your changes, click Validate.
ii. If you want to save the changes and create another scheduled job,
click Apply.
iii. If you want to save the changes and exit, click Save.
Editing triggered scheduled jobs

This topic explains how to edit jobs.
You cannot edit a job that is currently running.
 To edit a triggered scheduled job

1. Open Scheduled Jobs
2. Select the Group containing the required job.
3. Select the required job.
4. Determine which job template was used to create the job. You may need
to know this to refer to the appropriate reference information about the
attributes.
5. Edit the job attributes as required.
6. If you want to save the changes and add more data, click Apply.
7. If you want to save the changes and exit, click Save.

Platform
Deleting triggered scheduled jobs

This topic explains how to delete jobs.
You cannot delete a job while it is running.
 To delete a triggered scheduled job

3. Select the job(s) you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Confirm your request.
Viewing triggered scheduled jobs

 To view a triggered scheduled job
3. Scroll the rows in the table to find the name of the job that you want.
4. Select the name of the job. The details are displayed below the table.
5. Click each tab to view the specific details.
Stopping triggered jobs from running

This topic explains how to stop triggered jobs from running.
 To stop a scheduled job

1. Open Running Jobs.
2. Select the job you want to stop and click Stop.

Platform
Generating coverage maps

Maintaining effective communications between the office software and all
field units including trucks, dozers, loaders and light vehicles is essential to
maintain safe and productive mining operations. Network grey and black
spots are a chronic problem for mine sites due to unusual and changing
topology and demanding physical environments. Network equipment may be
knocked over by mining equipment or may fail as a result of adverse
operating conditions, such as high or low temperatures, wind, rain, snow or
dirt. Wireless signals may not reach around corners or extend into remote
areas of the mine.
Many different factors may degrade network performance including peak
usage, broadcast storms, network design, hardware faults and configuration
errors. It is not always easy to determine which of these many factors are
contributing to a specific network issue.
Broadband radio coverage and its associated tools in the office software
assist you and your support staff in the isolation and resolution of network
and positioning issues. Haul trucks are used as roving sensors, sending back
information on network and GPS health. This information is stored by the
office software and used to generate heat maps that you can overlay on top
of the mine model, using Site Monitor, or exported to third party mapping
tools such as Google Earth. You can then use these heat maps to identify the
areas across your mine site that may be having issues with signal strength or
GPS coverage.
Note: The generation of coverage maps is implemented as a Scheduled

Job, which you run periodically to produce a record of radio
performance over time. These reports could be generated each night
to record radio performance for the prior day, or run interactively when
required.
You need to set the Coordinate Mapping Parameters in Supervisor before

setting up the job and its parameters in the Client office software.
 To configure the generation of coverage maps

In Supervisor
Configuration for coordinate conversion is found on the GPS Coordinate
Transform page.
Contact your site Implementation or Support team for instructions on how to
obtain the coordinate conversion information. Parameters that need to be
extracted are described below.
1. From the menu, select Options > System Options.
2. From the Product list select Pit Link, and from the Option Sets list
select GPS Coordinate Transform.

Platform
3. In the Central Latitude and Longitude fields, enter the latitude and
longitude to which the local coordinate system is referenced, in decimal
degrees.
4. In the False Northing and Easting fields, enter the offsets applied to
the local system, in metres, relative to WGS84 coordinates. WGS84 is
the current reference coordinate system used by the Global Positioning
System.
5. Click Apply.
In the office software
1. Open Job Runner.
2. From the Group List, select either All or Pit Link to see, and then
select, the Generate Coverage Map job.
There are six categories of standard options to configure.
General Parameters tab
Used to set the general mapping parameters.
• From the Parameter to Map list, select which statistic the Job should use
for plotting over the mine, either Latency, Duplicate Messages, Satellites,
or GPS Accuracy. The default is Latency.
Image Parameters tab
Used to set the output folder and image types.
1. Click the button to the right of the Image Directory field and specify the
location to which the generated map image and .kmz files should be
saved. By default this is the directory used by Site Monitor to save
background images.
Note: The .kmz file is a .zip file that includes both the generated image and
a .kml file specifying the latitudes and longitudes that bound the
region represented in the image.
2. From the Image Type list specify the type of image file that will be
generated by the Job. The default is .PNG.
You can import maps into Site Monitor by clicking the .DXF button on the
toolbar when you are on the Site Monitor page, and selecting the
desired .kmz file. You should not import the raw image files, .png, .gif,
.jpg, etc, as they do not include the coordinate information required to
automatically register the image within the monitor.
The .kmz files can also be opened in Google Earth or Google Maps if
you have a need to visualize them against satellite images or third party
maps. You can also use animated files, which allow you to use more of
the Google Earth tools.
Maps are generated from data received from the field. The data
references locations in site-specific coordinate systems. Exporting the

Platform
maps to third party systems requires the site coordinates to be able to

be converted to Latitude and Longitude.
Grid Parameters tab
Used to set the bounds and resolution of the maps.
1. Click the unit to the right of the Western boundary of Heat Map in Site
Coordinates field, and select the unit that is appropriate for your mine
site.
i. Enter the Western boundary.This allows a fix boundary to be
placed on the eastern edge of the modeled region of the mine
site.
ii. Do the same for the Eastern, Southern, and Northern boundaries.
Leaving the default values of zero will mean the program automatically
determines the boundaries from the data.
2. Click the unit to the right of the Size of pixel in the generated map
field, and enter the pixel size of the generated map.
This field sets the physical size of the cells used to generate the map.
Small values for grid size result in longer computation times and finer
details in the resulting image. Using too small a cell size means that
insufficient data point fall within each cell will not give a meaningful
estimate of the modeled parameter. Larger cell sizes result in shorter
computation times, but coarser detail in the resulting map. The default
cell size is 10m, meaning that the mine area is divided into 10m square
cells for modeling purposes. All parameter values falling into the cell are
averaged as part of the modeling process.
Period Selection tab
Used to set the sample period for the coverage maps.
Period Selection can be either Relative or Explicit.
1. If Relative, in the Period Offset field, enter the timeframe relative to the
start time of the job.
2. If Explicit, enter the Period, Start and End Dates, and select whether
or not a separate image should be generated showing coverage for
each hour within the specified period.
Other Parameters tab
Selecting Do not include machines with any bad gps data will help to
improve the quality of the resulting image by eliminating potentially bad data.
If the location of a machine, as reported by GPS, strays from the machine’s
true position for a period of time, data produced by that machine will be
accumulated against the wrong cells, creating inaccuracies in the resulting
map.
Such excursions can be detected if the machine appears to travel beyond the
known limits of the mine. Points acquired outside the mine boundaries are
easily eliminated from the model. However, because of the nature of the GPS
system, machines that have coordinates outside the mine boundary during
an analysis period, are also likely to have incorrectly reported positions within
the mine boundary.

Platform
If this check box is selected, any machine that is observed to travel beyond
the mine boundaries will be completely eliminated from the analysis. This will
reduce the amount of data available, but should improve the quality of the
resulting map.
The Alpha parameter is also used to help improve the quality of the data. If
the mine boundaries are not explicitly specified in the Grid Parameters tab,
the Job attempts to determine the mine boundaries automatically. Alpha is a
number between 0 and 1 that represents the proportion of the available data
that should be included in the final analysis. When a distribution of available
coordinates is constructed during the analysis, those coordinates lying
outside an interval formed using alpha will be discarded.
For instance, if Alpha = 0.99, only the 99% of points closest to the median
coordinate will be included in the analysis. This helps to automatically
remove outlying data and compensates from drift observed in low precision
GPS systems.
The Radius parameter is used to define the area of influence of a data point.
A large radius means that individual data points tend to influence areas of the
mine that are distant from where the data was collected. Therefore large
radius values will tend to produce smooth homogenous maps where the
collected data are averaged over comparatively large areas. Small values
will produce maps that have fine detail, but have less statistical validity.
The Threshold for inclusion parameter is used to determine the number of
data points that is required to generate a portion of the map. Areas of the
map that include less than this number of data points will not have a value
assigned to them and will appear transparent when viewed.
Importing or exporting mining blocks

The mining block import feature is used to import mining block information
from your ore control system into the office software. It also generates a text
file which contains the necessary mining block information to allow Mets
Manager to generate ore map files to be sent to loaders.
The mining block information is expected to be provided as a set of comma
delimited files for each bench:
• The polygon file which contains the grade and material information for
each block.
• The points file which contains the block geometry (polygon coordinates).
• The face advance file containing the expected movement of the face as it
is mined.
Note: The Points and Face Advance Files are optional.

Mining blocks may be imported into the office software without
specifying any geometric information (i.e. block polygon) or face
advance information. These files are therefore optional - one or both
will be used if present but otherwise only the material and grade
information will be imported into the office software.

Platform
Refer to the Concepts and Reference chapter for more information on Mining
Block import and export.
You can import and export mining blocks either as a process that runs “now”
using the Job Runner page, or as a scheduled process using the Scheduled
Job page to run a job at a specific time.
 To import or export mining blocks using Job Runner

1. Open Job Runner.
2. From the Group List, select either All or Production to see the Mining
Block jobs.
3. In the Job table, select either Mining Block Importer or Mining Block
Exporter.
4. On the Standard Options tab, do one of the following:
i. Select the Advanced Directory Prefix check box.
Selecting this check box displays extra fields allowing you to pre-
define a prefix and an engine type, so that when importing mining
blocks from prefixes the mining block engine is set accordingly.
Select the Directory Prefix from the list (which you have set up in
Supervisor), and the Mining Block Engine from the list.
You are able to enter a new Directory Prefix name, and then select
the appropriate Mining Block Engine. ‘
Note: You cannot use a forward or back slash, (/ or \), in the Directory Prefix
name.
ii. In the Directory Prefix field, enter the directory name, following the
examples shown below the field. You would usually only need to
set this if you are trying to separate mining blocks for different pit
regions to avoid the possibility of duplicate names.
5. If you are creating an Import job you can do the following:
i. Import the mining blocks as read only, by selecting the Read Only
check box.
ii. Overwrite existing mining blocks (unless they are ignored), by
selecting the Overwrite check box. Selecting Overwrite updates
any existing mining blocks that are re-imported. If you do not select
Overwrite, pre-existing Blocks are skipped on import.
For example, if there are three Blocks in the office software: 200,
201, 202, and you run a Mining Block Import with Overwrite
enabled, loading Blocks 200 and 201, then those two blocks are
updated with any new or changed attributes in the loaded data.
Block 202 would be unaffected.

Platform
iii. Delete existing mining blocks within the lowest level of the
hierarchy out of the data being imported, that are not present in the
import, by selecting the Delete check box.
This allows groups of Blocks to be reloaded, and removed Blocks
are removed in the process.
For example, if Blast is the lowest level of the hierarchy and there
are three Blocks in the office software under Blast101: 200, 201,
202. If a Mining Block Import is run with Delete enabled when
loading blocks 200 and 201, block 202 would be delete in the
process.
iv. Selecting the Validate check box allows you to run the importation
of Mining Blocks from .csv files as per normal, however no data will
be saved to the database. You can then validate that the
importation process will be successful prior to running the actual
import and preventing the inadvertent overwriting of incorrect
Mining Block data. At the end of the validation process, you will get
a summary of issues, if any, that exist with the import.
6. If you are creating an Export job, in the Mining Block chooser,
navigate the tree until you get to the bench you want to import.
7. Click the Advanced button. More options are displayed.
8. The Base File Directory field is usually configured using Supervisor,
and contains the parent directory containing the source, processed and
destination directories for the import process. You should not need to
change the contents of this field.
9. The following fields are generally not used.
• Output Region In Pts Header.
• Extra Output Text.
• Write Blocks With Dash
• X/Easting Offset.
• Y/Northing Offset.
• Z Offset.
If you need to make any changes to these fields, contact a Fleet
consultant.
10. The Assignment XML File field contains an XML file name. This file
contains specific rules for updating the mining block destinations during
the import. The XML file may need to be updated if, for example, you
are doing any of the following:
• Adding a new material to the mine model.
• Opening a new default dump for a particular material.
• Changing cutoff grades for some of the materials.
Some examples of the types of things you are able to do are shown
below. They are only parts of files, not complete XML files, as examples
only.
i. Opening a new dump for a particular material.

Platform
<tssType list="Mat1" dump="Dump1"></tssType>

ii. Materials Mat1 and Mat2 to be sent to Dump1, unless they are from
Cut4, then they are to be sent to Dump2, and if from Cut5 sent to
Dump3.
<tssType list="Mat1,Mat2" dump="Dump1">
<cut name="Cut4">
<dump name="Dump2"></dump>
</cut>
<cut name="Cut5">
</cut>
</tssType>
iii. Material Mat3 will be sent to Dump1 unless the Gold1 grade is
greater than 0.04999 in which case it will be sent to Dump2.
<tssType list="Mat3" dump="Dump1">
<grade name="Gold1">
<logicalOp opp="GT"></logicalOp>
<value value="0.04999"></value>
</grade>
</tssType>
11. In the Material Name Mappings field, enter the material mappings to
the material names that have already been configured. Separate the
mappings using =.
12. In the Unmapped Material Names field, enter the default material
name to be used if no mapping is found. If this field is left blank, the
unmapped material name is used.
13. In the Grade Name Mappings field, enter the grade mappings to the
grade names that have already been configured. Separate the
mappings using =.
14. Click the Job Run Options tab.
15. Select the appropriate check boxes for the Monitoring Options you
require.
16. Click Run.
To create a scheduled time for running the job, proceed to the next section.

Platform
Creating a scheduled job for mining block importing

and exporting
Use the Scheduled Job page to create and run a job at a specific time.
 To import and export mining blocks at a specific time

2. Click New.
3. On the Standard Options tab, ensure all the entries are correct. If you
need to change anything, see Importing or exporting mining blocks on
page 3.15.
4. Click the Scheduler Parameters tab.
5. In the Job field, enter a unique name for the job. This name must be
unique within the group.
6. In the Job Group field, enter a group for the job.
7. In the Description field, enter a one-line description of the job.
8. Select the Trigger Type. The name of the third tab changes depending
on the trigger type you select. For example, if you select Schedule, the
tab name becomes Schedule Driven Trigger.
9. Click the third tab.
10. Enter the information required for the trigger you have selected.
11. Click Save.
Managing Office Processes (Bus Monitor)

Bus Monitor is used to monitor the health of the office software. It displays
statistics about server processes, number of buffered events and memory
use.
See Office Processes on page 4.85 of the Pages chapter for details on the
information displayed on the Bus Monitor page.
Managing rosters
This topic explains how to create rosters.
Creating rosters
 To create a roster
1. Open Roster Editor.
2. Double-click the date to which you wish to assign a crew.
3. From the list on the day you have selected, select a crew.

Platform
4. If you want to repeat the crew you have rostered onto consecutive
dates, select Duplicate.
5. If you want to roster a crew for the whole month, assign a crew to a date
then select Propagate.
6. To create the roster, click Write Roster. A progress dialog shows the
writing progress.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Close on the progress dialog.
9. Restart Fleet.
Managing shifts
This topic explains how to create shifts. This task can only be done using
Expert Mode.
Creating shifts
 To create a shift
1. Open Shift Builder.
2. In the New Range section, select the Start Date and End Date of the
shift.
3. Click Set Shifts. A progress dialog shows the change progress.
Managing users
This topic explains how to manage users. A user is a person who has a
unique name and identifier and is required to log on to, and use, the office
software.
Creating users
 To create a user
1. Open User Editor.
2. Click New.
3. On the General tab, do the following:
i. In the User ID field, enter the user’s login identifier.
ii. In the Name field, enter the user’s name.
iii. In the Email field, enter the user’s email address.
4. On the Password tab, do the following:
i. Click the Change Password button, and enter a password for the
user.

Platform
ii. In the Confirm New Password field, re-enter the password to

confirm it is correct.
iii. Click OK.
iv. Click Save
5. On the Profile tab, do the following:
i. Click [...] beside the Roles field and select the security roles the
user will have.
Note: If you are setting up users for a typical Fleet management system,
you should initially define one Builder and one Controller.
If you are setting up users for a typical Health system, you should
initially define one Maintenance Engineer and one Maintenance
Technician.
Refer to the Permissions and roles chapter in the Fleet Administration &
Configuration manual, and see the Permissions and roles section for
more information.
6. On the Account tab, do the following:
i. If the account is active, select the This account is currently
active check box.
ii. If the account is inactive, enter a reason in the Reason Inactive
field.
7. If you want to validate the data you have entered, click Validate. If any
data is invalid it is displayed in red.
8. If you want to save your changes, and continue adding users, click Add.
The user you have added is shown in the table above the tabs, and the
table remains shaded gray until you have finished adding users. When
you have finished adding users, click Cancel to be able to continue.
9. If you want to save your changes and be able to exit the page, click
Save.
Editing users
 To edit a user
2. Select the user you wish to edit from the table.
3. Make the appropriate changes.
5. If you want to save your changes, and continue editing users, click
Apply.

Platform
The user’s details you have edited are changed in the table above the
tabs.
6. If you want to save your changes and exit the page, click Save.
Deleting users
 To delete a user
2. Select the user you wish to delete from the table.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the user, click Yes in the
Viewing users
 To view a user
2. You can scroll up and down the table to view user’s details, or click a
user to see more details, which are then shown in the tabs below the
table.

Platform

GUI Page Reference
GUI Page Reference
Introduction to pages
This chapter describes all the main office software pages and dialogs.
This version of the User manual describes a new way of navigating pages. If
you wish to use the previous navigation format, you need to do the following
in Supervisor:
1. Select Contents > Setup > System Options.
2. From the Product drop-down list, select Platform - Clients.
3. From the Option Sets list, select Explorer - Client.
4. Click the Profile Tab.
5. Select the default menuset.
6. From the Option Sets list, select Explorer - Supervisor.
7. Click the Profile Tab.
8. Select the default menuset.
Open and active pages

Several pages can be open at the same time, but you can only look at one
page at a time.
All pages have a visible tab with the same name as the page. Tab names
given below for each page are default names, but on some pages the tab
name will change depending on the configuration you are viewing.
A rectangle displays around the text on the tab of the currently active page,
and on some pages the color of the tab will change if there has been new
data added.
Pages that need to be viewed using Expert Mode have are indicated in red
text in the menus and lists. You need to have a password to log in to Expert
Mode. Not all Expert Mode pages are described in this chapter. If you need
more information on these pages, follow your site support procedures..
Managing pages
This topic explains how to manage the pages within the office software.
 To open a page
1. To use a pre-defined desktop to automatically open the page, specify
the desktop when you log in.
2. To use the Contents menu, do the following:
i. Click the Contents menu.
ii. Navigate to the section which contains the page you want to open.
iii. Click the page name.
The group and the order the page is in matches its location in either the
Diagnostics, Management, or Setup pages menu or screen.

GUI Page Reference
3. To use the Page Configuration drop-down list:

i. Click the arrow beside the drop-down list.
ii. Click the page configuration you want to open.
 To close a page
1. Ensure that the page to be closed is active.
2. Close the page by doing one of the following:
i. Click the Close Page icon on the toolbar, or.
ii. On the File menu, click Close page.
 To save information on a page

• If you want to save the changes but not close the dialog or page, click
Apply.
• If you want to save the changes and close the dialog or page, click Save.
Page security
Access to Pages, the Tools menu, and the Jobs menu can be configured on a
per-role basis using the Permissions page in Supervisor. See the
Administration and Configuration manual for more information.
Page navigation
Pages are split into the following categories:
• Diagnostics pages
• Management pages
• Setup pages
Individual pages within these master categories are organized alphabetically
by subsystem, and alphabetically within each subsystem. The group and the
order the page is in matches its location in the Contents menu. Pages that
need to be viewed using Expert Mode have red text.

GUI Page Reference
Figure 4.1: Diagnostics Pages

GUI Page Reference
Figure 4.2: Management Pages

GUI Page Reference
Figure 4.3: Setup Pages

GUI Page Reference
Pages quick reference

The following table provides a quick reference of all office software pages
and how to open them.
Table 4.3: Quick reference of pages
To open... Click Contents >... Then Click Then ...
Absence Type Editor Setup Pages
Alarm Editor Management Pages Select an alarm.

Click Open
Alarm Monitor Management Pages
Alarm Types Setup Pages
Assignment Event Monitor Diagnostics Pages
Assignment Group Editor Setup Pages Click New
Auxiliary Assistant Management Pages
Blend Assistant Setup Pages

GUI Page Reference
Blend Editor Setup Pages Click New
Channel Finder Management Pages
Crew Editor Setup Pages
Cycle Bulk Update Management Pages

Assistant
Expert Mode Only
Cycle Assistant Management Pages
Cycle Editor Management Pages Click New or Open
Cycle Monitor Management Pages
Decision Support Management Pages
Delay Assistant Management Pages

GUI Page Reference
Delay Editor Management Pages Click New or Open
Delay Monitor Management Pages
Delay Type Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open
Delay Type Finder Setup Pages
Destination Assistant Setup Pages
Destination Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open
Dynamic Mine Model Setup Pages

Expert Mode Only
Field Communications Diagnostics Pages

Monitor
Field Event Monitor Diagnostics Pages
Field Network Monitor Diagnostics Pages

GUI Page Reference
Fleet Update Assistant Management Pages
Fuel and Lube Type Finder Setup Pages
Fuel and Lube Type Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open
Fuel Lube and SMU Management Pages

Records
Fuel Lube and SMU Editor Management Pages Click New or Open
Grade Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open
Grade Finder Setup Pages
Health Event Monitor Management Pages
Historical Inspector Diagnostics Pages

(Historical Data Validation
Tool)

GUI Page Reference
Job Code Finder Setup Pages
Job Execution Monitor Diagnostics Pages
Job Runner Management Pages
Loader Recipe Finder Setup Pages
Loader Recipe Sender Setup Pages
Loading Tool Assistant Management Pages
Machine Category Editor Setup Pages Select either Fixed Plant or

Mobile.
Click New or Open
Machine Finder Setup Pages
Machine License Editor Setup Pages

GUI Page Reference
Machine State Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open
Machine State Finder Setup Pages
Maintenance Event Monitor Management Pages
Material Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open
Material Finder Setup Pages
Material Mix Editor Setup Pages
Mine Model Query Diagnostics Pages
Mining Block Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open
Mining Block Finder Setup Pages
Mining Block Group Editor Setup Pages Click Group

GUI Page Reference
Model Data Inspector Diagnostic Pages

(Model Data Validation tool)
Office Message Monitor Diagnostics Pages
Office Processes (Bus Diagnostics Pages

Monitor)
Onboard File Assistant Management Pages
Onboard File Viewer Diagnostics Pages
Payload Monitor Management Pages
Personnel Summary Setup Pages
Personnel Finder Setup Pages
Processor Assistant Management Pages

GUI Page Reference
Production Event Monitor Diagnostic Pages
Production Requirements Management Pages Click New

Editor
Production Requirements Management Pages

Assistant
Production Requirements Setup Pages

Template Assistant
Restriction Assistant Management Pages
Road Segment Assistant Setup Pages
Road Segment Editor Setup Pages Click New or Click Open
Roster Editor Setup Pages
Safety Check Action Editor Setup Pages
Safety Checklist Editor Setup Pages

GUI Page Reference
Safety Record Editor Management Pages
Scheduled Assignment Management Pages Click New or Open

Editor
Scheduled Assignment Management Pages

Monitor
Scheduled Breaks Management Pages Click New
Scheduled Break Editor Management Pages Right-click an existing break,

then click Open
Scheduled Jobs Setup Pages
Send Message Assistant Management Pages
Session Allocation Rules Management Pages Click Open, then click OK

Click Allocate Sessions
Click Rules
Shift Builder Setup pages

Expert Mode Only
Shift Change Allocations Management Pages

Monitor

GUI Page Reference
Shift Change Editor Management Pages Click New or Open
Shift Change Finder Management Pages
Site Awareness Monitor Diagnostic Pages
Site Editor Management Pages
Site Monitor Management Pages
Standard Message Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open
Standard Message Finder Setup Pages
Transport Vehicle Editor Setup Pages
Travel Condition Assistant Setup Pages

GUI Page Reference
Travel Progress Monitor Management Pages
Truck Assistant Management Pages
Trucking Indication Management Pages
User Editor Setup Pages
Waypoint Assistant Setup Pages
Waypoint Editor Setup Pages Click New or Open

GUI Page Reference
Absence Type Editor

Absence Type Editor allows you to add and delete reasons for absence.
To open Absence Type Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages > Absence
Type Editor.
The Absence Types tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Absence Type
Editor.
Absence Type Editor
Item Description
Name Displays the allowed reason for an absence.
Alarm Editor
Alarm Editor allows you to view and edit details about an alarm raised by the
office software. It provides functionality for validating proposed changes,
adding comments, viewing the chronological history and editing the priority
and severity.
To open Alarm Editor you:
1. Select Contents > Management Pages > Alarm Monitor.
2. Select an alarm.
3. Click Open.
The Alarm Editor page opens.
The following table describes the fields on each tab of the Alarm Editor.
Alarm Editor
Tab Field Description
Main page Description This field contains a description of

the alarm as specified in the
appropriate resources file.
General Priority The priority of the alarm originally

specified in the alarmTypes.xml
file. This indicates how important it
is to action this alarm
Details Acknowledgement The type of acknowledgement that

Type was received for this alarm.
Occurrence Count The number of times that this alarm

was raised against this source
while the alarm was active.

GUI Page Reference
Alarm Editor
Tab Field Description
History Creation Time The time that the alarm was

actually created.
Start Time The time that the alarm started.
Last Occurrence The last time that this alarm

Time occurred.
Acknowledge Time The time that the alarm was

acknowledged.
End time The time that the alarm ended.
Comment Alarm Comment An optional comment to provide

additional information.
Alarm Monitor
Alarm Monitor allows you to effectively monitor and manage alarms. It is the
single point of focus used to monitor all alarms raised.
The main functionality provided by Alarm Monitor includes the following:
• Effective monitoring – notifications of higher priority alarms stand out from
lower priority alarms.
• Streamlined alarm management – the number of alarms open at any time
is minimized through automatic alarm aggregation, rejection and closure.
The default page configuration displays all high priority alarms, but you can
configure pages to display only alarm types of interest.
To open Alarm Monitor, select Contents > Management Pages > Alarm
Monitor.
The name on the tab depends on the page configuration being used.
The following table describes standard page configurations for Alarm
Monitor.
Alarm Monitor
Configuration Function
All Displays all alarms regardless of state and priority.
All Recent Displays all alarms for the last seven days.
Closed All Displays all alarms that have been closed since the
start of the shift.
Closed High Displays urgent and high priority alarms that have
been closed since the start of the shift.

GUI Page Reference
Alarm Monitor
Configuration Function
Closed Low Displays medium and low priority alarms that have
been closed since the start of the shift.
Open All Displays all open alarms.
Open High Displays open urgent and high priority alarms.
Open Low Displays open medium and low priority alarms.
Mobile Displays (on a mobile client device) open urgent and

high priority alarms
Note: Mobile Client is not for general customer use.
The following table describes the items of information on Alarm Monitor. You
are able to drag and drop the columns into whichever order you please.
Alarm Monitor
Item Description
Source Displays the machine the alarm was sent from.
Occurrences Displays how many times the alarm was raised.
Alarm Type Displays the type of alarm.
Priority Displays the priority for actioning the alarm.
Start Displays when the alarm was started.
Finish Displays when the alarm was stopped.
Acknowledged Displays whether or not the alarm has been

acknowledged.
Description Displays an explanation of the alarm.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the various alarm
priorities as displayed on Alarm Monitor.
Alarm monitor colors
Color Priority
Red Urgent.
Orange High.

GUI Page Reference
Alarm monitor colors
Color Priority
Blue Medium.
Black Low.
The menu bar for this page is integrated into the Client menu bar, and
together with command buttons, provides access to all the functionality
available for this page.
If you are running the office software in Spanish, to ensure that the
colors display correctly you need to do the following:
1. Copy the AlarmSummaryRowFormatting.properties file from
mstar\mstarHome\res\com\mincom\explorer\page\alarm
into
mstarfiles\systems\main\config\res\com\mincom\
explorer\page\alarm.
2. Modify the key values alone in the file
AlarmSummaryRowFormatting.properties to Spanish as shown below
• Urgente = foreground:"255,0,55", priority:1
• Alto = foreground:"255,100,55", priority:2
• Mediano = foreground:"0,0,128", priority:3
• Bajo = foreground:"0,0,25", priority:4
3. Restart your office software.
Alarm Types
Alarm Type Editor is used to view and edit alarm types.
To open Alarm Type Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages > Alarm Type
Editor:
The Alarm Types tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Alarm Types.
Alarm Type Editor
Item Description
Name This field displays the name of the alarm type.
Priority This field displays the priority of the alarm.
Acknowledgement This field displays how the alarm is to be

Type acknowledged.
Close On End Of Shift This field displays whether the alarm is to be

closed at the end of the shift.

GUI Page Reference
Alarm Type Editor
Item Description
Page This field displays the page to be accessed to

resolve the alarm.
General This tab contains information on the alarm type

name, description,and priority.
Details This tab contains information on acknowledging

and closing alarm types, and when an alarm of
this type last occurred.
Resolution This tab contains information on how to resolve

alarms of this type.
Assignment Event Monitor

Assignment Event Monitor is used to show a real-time display of all
assignments (automatic or manual). It also provides extensive filtering
options to refine the events.
To open Assignment Event Monitor, select Contents > Diagnostics Pages >
Assignment Event Monitor.
The Assignment Events tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Assignment Event
Monitor.
Item Description
Truck Displays the truck name that the assignment is for.
Time Displays the start time for the assignment.
Assigned to Displays the loading tool name to which the truck is

assigned.
Type Displays the type of assignment.
Reason Displays the purpose of this assignment.
Action Displays the action the truck is to perform.
Load with Displays the type of material to be loaded into the truck.
% Free Displays the number of loaders available for truck

assignment at the end of a cycle as a percentage of the
number of loaders that are compatible with the truck.
This number represents the percentage site wide.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
% Group Free Displays the number of loaders available for truck

assignment at the end of a cycle as a percentage of the
number of loaders in the truck assignment group that
are compatible with the truck. This number represents
the percentage for an assignment group.
Message Displays additional information about the assignment.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the various priorities
of events as displayed on Assignment Event Monitor.
Assignment event monitor colors
Color Priority
Red Urgent.
Orange High.
Green Medium.
Black Normal.
Blue Low.
Assignment Group Editor

Assignment Group Editor is used to create and maintain assignment groups.
To open Assignment Group Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Assignment Group Editor.
2. Click New.
The Assignment Groups tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on
Assignment Group Editor.
Assignment Group Editor
Item Description
Name The name of the assignment group.
Description The assignment group and its purpose.
Assignment This checkbox indicates whether or not the

group assignment group is enabled.
Assignment This panel contains information on the machines to

group include in, or exclude from, the assignment group.

GUI Page Reference
Auxiliary Assistant
Auxiliary Assistant is used to manage auxiliary machines.
To open Auxiliary Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages >
Auxiliary Assistant.
The Auxiliary tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Auxiliary
Assistant.
Auxiliary Assistant
Item Description
Auxiliary Displays a list of auxiliary machines that can be

created or maintained.
General This tab contains information on the following:

• Operator — Displays a list of auxiliary machine
operators and crews.
• Job Code — Displays a description of the job.
• Activity — Displays a description of the activity
being performed.
• Waypoint — Displays the waypoint location.

GUI Page Reference
Auxiliary Assistant
Item Description
Fuel This tab contains information on the following:

• Current fuel level status — Displays the current
fuel status estimated by the office software.
• Estimated time till refuel required — Displays the
estimated operating time before the machine needs
to be refueled.
• Estimated time till fuel level is critical —
Displays the estimated operating time before the
machine reaches its critical fuel level.
• Current fuel level estimate — Displays the current
fuel level as estimated by the office software.
• Last updated at — Displays the date and time the
fuel level estimate was last updated.
• Last refuel occurred at — Displays the date and
time the machine was last refueled.
• Last refuel quantity — Displays the quanity of fuel
that was added the last time that the machine was
refueled.
• Last refuel estimate — Estimated quantity of fuel
required before the last time that the truck was
refueled.
• Duration between refuels — Elapsed time
between last refuelling and the one before that.
Shift Change This tab contains information on the following:

Defaults panel:
• Exclude From Operator Allocation —Whether or
not to exclude this machine from the operator
allocation.
• Exclude From Transport Allocation — Whether
or not to exclude this machine from the transport
allocation.
• Default Tie Down — A list of tie down locations.
Planned panel:
• Operator — The operator of the vehicle.
• Transport Vehicle — The vehicle to be used in this
machine’s shift change.
• Tie Down — Where the tie down for this machine
will be.

GUI Page Reference
Blend Assistant
Blend Assistant manages the creating, archiving, and copying of blends.
To open Blend Assistant, select Contents > Setup Pages > Blend
Assistant.
The Blends tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Blending
Editor.
Blending Editor
Item Description
Name The unique name for the blend.
Active Whether or not the blend is active.
Control Quntity The control quantity for the blend.
Blend Editor
Blend Editor is used to create, view and edit blends.
To open Blend Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Blend Assistant.
2. Click New.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Blending
Editor.
Blend Editor
Item Description
Name The unique name for the blend. This can be any
text characters.
Control Quantity The control quantity for the blend.
Control Quantity This is the drop-down list beside the Control

Unit Quantity field, displaying the units that can be
associated with the control quantity.
Disallowed/Allowed Displays which materials are disallowed and

Materials panels allowed within the blend.
Default = all materials are disallowed.
Continuous Grades
Grade Displays a list of all available continuous grades.
Unit Type The unit type associated with the grade selected.
(This field is not editable by the user)

GUI Page Reference
Blend Editor
Item Description
Min The minimum accepted value of that grade for the

blend.
Max The maximum accepted value of that grade for

the blend.
Discrete Grades
Grade Displays a list of all available discrete grades,

including materials.
Grade Value Displays a list of all available grade values

defined for the grade selected.
Min % The minimum required percentage of the discrete

grade selected.
Max % The maximum required percentage of the discrete

grade selected.
Materials
Material Displays a list of all available materials.
Min % The minimum required percentage of the material

selected.
Max % The minimum required percentage of the material

selected.
Channel Finder
Channel Finder is used to specify monitoring options and channels for
specific machines.
To open Channel Finder, select Contents > Management Pages > Channel
Finder.
The Channel Finder tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Channel
Finder.
Channel Finder
Item Description
Machine This tab specifies the machines whose channels are to

be monitored.
Channel This tab specifies the individual channels that you

wants to monitor.

GUI Page Reference
Channel Finder
Item Description
Polling This tab specifies the number of sessions between polls

of the channel, and the total length of time to poll for.
Data Panel Displays the results of the selected options.
Create Scheduled Break

Create Scheduled Break is used to create a new scheduled break.
To open Create Scheduled Break:
1. Select Contents > Management Pages > Scheduled Break Finder.
2. Click New.
The Create Scheduled Break dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Create
Scheduled Break.
Create Scheduled Break
Item Description
Day The date of the shift.
Shift The type of shift, for example, night shift.
Break Name A name for the break.
Break Start Time The time the break will start
Number of Sessions The number of sessions in the shift.
Time Between Sessions The length of time between sessions.
Length of Break Session The length of the break.
Automatically Allocate Select to automatically allocate a shift.
Crew Editor
Crew Editor is used to add and delete crews.
To open Crew Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages > Crew Editor.
The Crews tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Crew

Editor.
Crew Editor
Item Description
Name Allows you to enter a crew name.
Cycle Assistant
Cycle Assistant manages the querying and maintenance of machine cycles.
Depending on the page configuration and filter options, Cycle Assistant
displays information about the operator, source block, materials, payload and
status.
To open Cycle Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages > Cycle
Assistant.
The Truck Cycle Records tab represents this page. The tab name and data
columns change depending on the page configuration you are viewing.
The following table describes the information displayed on different page
configurations in Cycle Assistant.
Cycle Assistant
Item Description
Cycle Filter This section displays the period the cycle records are
for, the date and time of the period and a machine list. It
is viewable for all page configurations.
Auxiliary This page configuration displays information about the

primary machine, primary operator, start and finish
times, cycle duration, and machine status.
Drill This page configuration displays information about the

primary machine, primary operator, start and end of
drilling times, hole, cycle duration, and machine status.
Loader This page configuration displays information about the

times, cycle duration, source block, material, secondary
machine and operator, source destination, and machine
status.

GUI Page Reference
Cycle Assistant
Item Description
Self-Loader This page configuration displays information about the

times, cycle durationsourceblocks,material, source and
sink destinations, and machine status.
Truck This page configuration displays information about the

times, cycle duration, source blocks, material,
secondary machine and operator, source and sink
destinations, payload and machine status.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the various states of a
cycle as displayed on Cycle Assistant.
Cycle Assistant colors
Color States
Gray Read only.
Light Green Interim.
Blue System Generated.
Red Incomplete.
Black Automatic.
Pink Modified.
Dark Green Manual.
Light Brown Split.
Medium Green Merge.
Cycle Bulk Update Assistant

Cycle Bulk Update Assistant is used to edit multiple cycles, removing the
need to edit large numbers of cycles individually. It displays cycle filtering and
update operations.
This page is only available in Expert Mode.
To open Cycle Bulk Update Assistant, select Contents > Management
Pages > Cycle Bulk Update Assistant.
The Cycle Bulk Update tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Cycle

Bulk Assistant.
Cycle Bulk Assistant
Item Description
Cycle Filtering This section displays two filtering modes:

• Filter By Fields — Allows you to set the criteria
which select the cycles to update. You can include
details for shifts or time periods, trucks, source
blocks, source destinations, sink blocks and sink
destinations.
• Filter From File — Allows you to filter cycles using
those previously saved to a file.
Period • Period — The time period to select from.

Selector • Start Date — The date you wish to start the cycle
update from.
• End Date — The date you wish the cycle update to
end.
Matching This section displays the filtering criteria to match before

Criteria performing the bulk update, including:
• Primary Machine Name(s)
• Source Blocks
• Source Destinations
• Sink Blocks
• Sink Destinations
Update Mode This section displays two modes:

• Update Cycles — This mode allows you to apply the
operations selected in the Update Operations panel
to all cycles that match the selection criteria. In
Update Cycles mode, you can change actual source
and sink block and destination information, including
updating grade values for any of these changes.
• Recalc Reporting Data — This mode allows you to
reapply load factors to tonnages in existing cycles.
This is useful if there have been changes to the
existing load factors and the reporting data needs to
be recalculated.

GUI Page Reference
Cycle Bulk Assistant
Item Description
Update This section allows you to specify the required changes

Operations to the selected cycles. For any of the selected cycles you
can update the source and sink blocks, the source and
sink destinations, and if necessary, re-apply the grade
values, road and activity summary information, and
change the CSV file (which is updated with the changed
cycle data).
Advanced Clicking this button displays the following information:

Parameters • Chunk Size (Hours) — This field displays the
maximum time period from which the office software
should read cycle data before it starts to process that
data.
• Wait Time (s) — This field displays the period, in
seconds, between finishing processing data for one
cycle and starting the process again for the next
cycle.
Cycle Editor
Cycle Editor allows you to edit existing cycles if the information received from
the field is inaccurate.
The tabs and fields displayed in Cycle Editor depend on the type of cycle
record being edited. Not all tabs are available on all records or editors.
To open Cycle Editor:
1. Select Contents > Management Pages > Cycle Assistant.
2. Click New.
The dialog representing this page varies depending on the page
configuration being viewed, for example Loader Cycle Editor, Truck Cycle
Editor.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Cycle
Editor.
Cycle Editor
Item Description
Start This field on the main page displays the start date and
time of the cycle.
Finish This field on the main page displays the finish date and
time of the cycle.
Duration This field on the main page displays the duration of the
cycle.

GUI Page Reference
Cycle Editor
Item Description
Machine This field on the main page displays the machine used for
this cycle.
Count This field on the main page displays the number of cycles
to create.
Split or Select one or the other to either:

Duplicate • Split time period into the number of cycles specified in
the count field.
• Duplicates the cycle into the number specified in the
count field.
General This tab, on the auxiliary, drill, and self loader cycle
editors, displays the name of the machine operator.
Production This tab contains information on material, haulage,

source, sink and mining block details. This tab is visible
only for loader and truck cycles.
Job Code This tab contains information on job code details for this
cycle.
Activities/ This tab contains information on activity and delay

Delays descriptions and durations.
Hole This tab contains information on the start and finish time
of drilling, the depth, name, pattern, and type of the drill
hole. This tab is only visible for drill cycles.
Position / Information on the Position and Consumable tabs is

Consumable obtained from events in the field. You are not able to do
Tabs anything with the values on these pages.
Material This tab contains material, source, and sink information,

Movement and is only visible for self loader cycles.
Road This tab contains information on the road segments

Segments traveled, travel times, and waypoint locations. This tab is
visible only for auxiliary and truck cycles. If there are
consectutive yellow rows in the table, this indicates there
is some time missing - that is, the end time of the first
yellow row is not equal to the start time of the second
yellow row. If there are consecutive red rows in the table,
this indicates that the indicated road segments do not join
up, so there is a hole in the route.

GUI Page Reference
Cycle Monitor
Cycle Monitor displays a summary of cycles that match the current page
configuration. When Cycle Monitor opens, the Truck Exceptions page
configuration is used. Depending on the page configuration and filter options,
Cycle Monitor displays information about the machines, cycle start and end
time, source block, sink block, materials, and operator.
To open Cycle Monitor, select Contents > Management Pages > Cycle
Monitor.
The tab representing this page depends on the page configuration being
viewed for example Truck Cycle Exceptions.
The following table describes the information displayed on different page
configurations in Cycle Monitor.
Cycle Monitor
Page Description
Configuration
Auxiliary All This page displays information about the auxiliary

machine, the start and end times, and the machine
operator. All auxiliary machine cycles are displayed (up
to 100 rows at a time).
Auxiliary This page displays information about the auxiliary

Exceptions machine, the start and end times, and the machine
operator. Only auxiliary machine cycles with missing
data will be displayed. Interim cycles are ignored for all
exception configurations.
Drill All This page displays information about the drill machine,
the start and end times of the drill cycle, and the
machine operator.
Drill This page displays information about the drill machine,

Exceptions the start and end times of the drill cycle, and the
machine operator. Only drill cycles with missing data
will be displayed.
Loader All This page displays information about the loader, start
and end times, material, truck, and source. All loader
cycles are displayed.
Loader This page displays information about the loader, start

Exceptions and end time, material, truck, and source. Only loader
cycles with missing data will be displayed. Interim
cycles are ignored for all exception configurations.
SelfLoader All/ This page displays information about self loaders, start
SelfLoader and end time, material, source and operator.
Exceptions

GUI Page Reference
Cycle Monitor
Page Description
Configuration
Truck All This page displays information about the truck, start
and end times, material, loading tool, source, and sink.
All truck cycles are displayed.
Truck This page displays information about the truck, start

Exceptions and end times, material, loading tool, source, sink, and
validation details. Only truck cycles with missing data
will be displayed. Interim cycles are ignored for all
exception configurations.
Decision Support
The Decision Support page provides support for immediate decision-making.
It can be used to validate and evaluate the impact of decisions made on the
production plan.
To open Decision support, select Contents > Management Pages >
Decision Support.
Note: The Decision Support page opens in a completely different color than
all of the other office software pages. This indicates that you are in the
Decision Support area, and not the live production system.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Decision

Support.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Decision

Support.
Decision Support
Tab Sub-Tab Detail
Production Planning Goals This page allows you to manually edit existing
This tab loads information requirements and goals. You can also do the
based on the current goal following:
and priority configuration. • Add a Goal
• Delete a Goal
• Validate Goals
• Load Templates - also visible on Priority tab
and its subtabs.
• Save Templates - also visible on Priority tab
and its subtabs.
• Reset the Production plan - also visible on
Priority tab and its subtabs.
Priority - Material Priority

comprising • Allows you to prioritize the order of materials.
• Materials Loading Tool and Processor Priority
• Loading Tool Allows you to prioritize loading tools from Low to
Priorities High.
• Processor
Priorities

GUI Page Reference
Decision Support
Tab Sub-Tab Detail
Loading Tools These tabs display key information associated

Processors with with their respective names; loading tools
(including mining block changes), processors,
Trucks trucks (both loading tools and trucks include locks
Roads and bars), and roads. Each tab gives the user the
ability to easily identify the appropriate machine,
lock and bar, and see the possible effects of
putting them on or off delay.
All tabs have the following check box.
• Changed.
This checkbox is selected by the system
whenever a change is made, and can also be
selected and cleared by the user.
When selected, the system assumes the state
is current and will not be updated until the
model is validated. When cleared, the system
reverts back to the original configuration for
that record.
Summary This tab displays a summary of validated

changes. The user is able assess the effect that
the changes are likely to have on the production
figures before saving and activating them in the
production system .
Delay Assistant
Note: This is NOT the Delays Assistant viewable via Decision Support.
The Delay Assistant is used to display a summary of all historical and inactive
delays that match the specified filter. It can be used to create, edit, delete,
merge and split delays.
Color-coding is not applied because all historical delays have the same
status.
To open Delay Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages > Delay
Assistant.
The Delay Records tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Delay

Assistant.
Delay Assistant
Item Description
Delay Filter This panel displays filtering details for dates, shifts,
machines, roads, and destinations.
Delay Target This column displays the name of the machine, road,
or destination, that is or was on delay.
Delay Type This column displays the type of the delay that
occurred.
Start Time This column displays the scheduled start time of the
delay, or the time that the delay started.
Finish Time This column displays the scheduled finish time of the
delay, or the time that the delay finished.
Duration This column displays the length of time of the delay.
Acknowledged This column displays information on whether or not the

delay has been acknowledged.
Confirmed This column displays information on whether or not the

delay has been confirmed.
Delay Editor
Delay Editor is used to create, edit and schedule delays.
To open Delay Editor:
1. Select Contents > Management Pages > Delay Assistant.
2. Click New or Open.
The Delay Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on the Delay
Editor.
Delay Editor
Tab Description
Type The type of delay.
Machine The machines affected by the delay.

This tab can only be edited if the Delay Type relates
to a machine, otherwise it is unavailable.

GUI Page Reference
Delay Editor
Tab Description
Destination The destinations, sources, sinks, and stations

affected by the delay.
This tab can only be edited if the Delay Type is a
destination, otherwise it is unavailable.
Road The road segments affected by the delay.

This tab can only be edited if the Delay Type is a
road, otherwise it is unavailable.
Duration The duration of the delay, and miscellaneous delay

details.
Description A detailed description about the delay.
Delay Monitor
Delay Monitor provides an overview of all planned and active delays that
exist in the office software, i.e. non-historical. The page layout and
configuration you see depends on the Page Configuration selected.
The data table is dynamic. As active delays are stopped their status changes
to historical and they can be viewed in Delay Assistant.
To open Delay Monitor, select Contents > Management Pages > Delay
Monitor.
The Delays tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on the Delay
Monitor.
Delay Monitor
Item Description
Delay Target This column displays information on the machine,

destination, or road segment that has a delay.
Delay Type This column displays a description of the delay.
Category This column displays the category the delay belongs

in.
Start This column displays information on the scheduled

start time of the delay, or the time that the delay
started.
Finish This column displays information on the finish time of

the delay.
Duration This column displays the length of time of the delay.

GUI Page Reference
Delay Monitor
Item Description
Time Remaining This column displays the length of time remaining on

the delay.
Acknowledged This column displays information on whether or not

the delay has been acknowledged.
Confirmed This column displays information on whether or not

the delay has been confirmed.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the various delays as
displayed on Delay Monitor.
Delay monitor colors
Color Delay
Orange Operating Delay/Non-Operating Delay.
Black Scheduled Down/Unscheduled Down.
Blue Standby.
Delay Type Editor

Delay Type Editor allows you to create and maintain delay types, and
associate the delay types with machines, road segments or destinations.
To open Delay Type Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Delay Type Finder.
2. Select a Delay Type and click New or Open.
The Delay Type Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Delay
Type Editor.
Delay Type Editor
Item Description
Name The name of the DelayType.
Description The description of the DelayType.

GUI Page Reference
Delay Type Editor
Item Description
General This tab contains the following information:

• A contact E-mail address for all recipients of
notifications of this delay type.
• Estimated Duration — Either an Estimated
Duration or Unknown.
• Category — The category the delay belongs in.
• Acknowledgement Required — Whether the delay
requires Acknowledgement.
• Assignment Delay — Whether the delay makes the
delay target unavailable for assignment.
• Engine Switched Off — Whether the delays
requires the machine’s engine to be switched off.
• External Reference — A reference used by external
software systems.
• External Reference Description — The description
of the external software systems reference.
Association This tab contains the following information:

• Whether the delay type affects road segments or
destinations.
• Machine categories allowing the delay type.
Delay Type Finder

Delay Type Finder allows you to browse a hierarchy of the various Delay
Types and Delay Type groups that have been created. You are also able to
create Delay Type Groups and Delay Types, as well as edit them.
To open Delay Type Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Delay Type
Finder.
The Delay Types tab represents this page.
Destination Assistant
Destination Assistant is used to create, view, and manage information about
destinations.
To open Destination Assistant, select Contents > Setup Pages >
Destination Assistant.
Details shown are as created using Destination Editor.

GUI Page Reference

Destination Assistant.
Destination Assistant
Item Description
Name The name of the destination.
Active Whether or not the destination is active.
Source Whether or not the destination is specified as a source.
Sink Whether or not the destination is specified as a sink.
Station Whether or not the destination is specified as a station.
Loading Tool/ The loading tool or processor used at this destination.

Processor
Materials The materials loaded at this destination.
Re-Handle Whether or not the material is to be re-handled.
Shift Change The Shift Change Group of the Destination. For

Group example, when computing the runs for the transport
vehicles, you can check the group of the transport and,
check the group of the destination. If a transport vehicle
is to service the NORTH area, it would not visit any of
the stops in the SOUTH area.
Queuing Whether or not queuing is allowed at this station.

Allowed
Station The number of trucks allowed at this station.

Capacity
Bounding The waypoints used at this station.

Waypoints
Tax Class The tax class used for this station.
Isolated Whether or not the destination is isolated.
Is Parent The parent destination.
Child The location of the child destination.

Destination

GUI Page Reference
Destination Editor
Destination Editor is used to create and manage information about
destinations.
To open Destination Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Destination Assistant.
The Destination Editor dialog represents this page.
Destination Editor.
Destination Editor
Item Description
Name The name of the destination.
Description The description of the destination.
General This tab displays whether the destination is a source,

sink or station and the number of machines allowed at
the station, the tax class to use, and whether or not the
destination is in a bad communciations area.
Geometry This tab displays whether the destination is a parent

destination.
Contains the following tabs:
• Bounding Waypoints — Used to uniquely identify
the position of the waypoint associated with a
destination.
• Child Destinations — Used to specify the child
destinations of a parent destination.
Materials This tab displays materials allowed at the destination.

GUI Page Reference
Dynamic Mine Model Assistant

Dynamic Mine Model Assistant allows you to set thresholds for dynamically
updating road segments and travel times.
Once in expert mode, select Contents > Setup Pages > Dynamic Mine
Model Assistant. This option is unavailable if you are not in expert mode.
This page is also available in Supervisor. See the Fleet Administration and
Configuration manual for more information on configuring the dynamic mine
model. You are able to make changes in either the Client or Supervisor, and
the changes are reflected in both applications.
The Dynamic Mine Model tab represents this page
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Dynamic
Mine Model Assistant.
Tab Item Description
Dynamic Updates Enabled Select this check box if you want to use dynamic travel
Travel Times times to update the mine models.
Alarms Enabled Select this check box if you want alarms to be raised if
the observed dynamic travel times are outside the
specified limits.
Update Frequency Specifies how often to update the mine model with new
travel times, in minutes.
New travel times are written to a buffer and when the
update frequency value is reached, new travel times
are written to the database and made available to
Assignment, after which the buffer is emptied.
Updates are only written if the new values are within
the Nominal Time and Current Time thresholds (see
below).
• 0 = update as soon as changes are detected
• Default = 10 minutes

GUI Page Reference
Dynamic Thresholds Based on The multiplier to apply to the nominal time to get the
Travel Times Nominal Times — minimum allowable dynamic time.
continued Minimum Allowable • 0 = ignore
• Default = 0.5
Thresholds Based on The multiplier to apply to the nominal time to get the
Nominal Times — maximum allowable dynamic time.
Maximum Allowable • 0 = ignore
Thresholds Based on The multiplier to apply to the current dynamic time to

Current Times — Minimum determine the minimum allowable dynamic time.
Allowable • 0 = ignore
• Default = 1.5
Thresholds Based on The multiplier to apply to the current dynamic time to

Current Times — determine the maximum allowable dynamic time.
• Default = 1.5
Thresholds Based on The percentage of change required before a travel time

Current Times — Minimum is updated.
Significant Change • 0 = ignore
• Default = 10%
Absolute Thresholds — The minimum absolute allowable dynamic time, in

Minimum cutoff seconds.
• 0 = ignore
• Default = 10 seconds
Absolute Thresholds — The minimum absolute allowable dynamic time, in

Maximum cutoff minutes.
• 0 = ignore
Dynamic Updates Enabled Select this check box if you want to use dynamic
Loading Tool loading tool efficiencies to update the mine models.
Efficiency
Update Frequency Specifies how often to update the model with new
efficiencies, in minutes.
• 0 = update as soon as changes are detected
• Default = 5 minutes

GUI Page Reference
Dynamic Thresholds Based on Specifies the multiplier to apply to the expected time to
Loading Tool Current Efficiencies — get the minimum allowable efficiency.
Efficiency Minimum Allowable • 0 = ignore
continued
• Default = 0.5
Thresholds Based on Specifies the multiplier to apply to the expected time to

Current Efficiencies — get the minimum allowable efficiency.
• Default = 1.5
Thresholds Based on Specifies the percentage of change required before a

Current Efficiencies — time is updated.
Minimum Significant • 0 = ignore
Change
• Default = 10%
Absolute Efficiency Specifies the minimum absolute allowable dynamic

Thresholds — Minimum efficiency.
cutoff • 0 = ignore
• Default = 50%
Absolute Efficiency Specifies the maximum absolute allowable dynamic

Thresholds — Maximum efficiency.
cutoff • 0 = ignore
• Default = 50%
Dynamic Fuel Fuel Reset Duration Specifies the time since the last restart, whereby truck
Monitoring fuel levels are set to zero. To disable this feature set
the duration to zero in Supervisor.
• Default = 12 hours.
Estimated Fuel Consumed Select this check box if you want the estimated
Updates Enabled dynamic fuel consumption amounts to be used to
update the machine fuel levels or just be logged. VIMS
values will always be used.
• Default = selected.
Burn Rate Updates Whether or not the estimated (working) fuel burn rate
Enabled should be used to update the machine's working fuel
rate or just be logged.
Alarms Enabled Select this check box if you want alarms to be raised if
the observed dynamic fuel consumption amounts are
outside the specified limits.

GUI Page Reference
Dynamic Fuel Relative Burn Rate The multiplier to apply to the burn rate to get the
Monitoring Thresholds minimum allowable rate.
continued — Minimum Allowable • 0 = ignore
• Default = 0.8
Relative Burn Rate The multiplier to apply to the burn rate to get the
Thresholds minimum allowable rate.
— Maximum Allowable • 0 = ignore
• Default = 1.2
Relative Burn Rate The percentage of change required before a burn rate
Thresholds will be updated.
— Minimum Significant • Default = 0 = ignore.
Change
Absolute Burn Rate The absolute minimum allowable working burn rate in
Thresholds l/hr.
— Minimum cutoff • Default = 0 = ignore.
Absolute Burn Rate The absolute maximum allowable working burn rate in
Thresholds l/hr.
— Maximum cutoff • Default =0 = ignore.
Relative Fuel Select if fuel consumption estimates (average burn vs

Consumption Thresholds activity/efh based) are to be compared against each
— Use Estimate Check other to validate estimate accuracy.
• Default = Not selected.
Relative Fuel This field is only editable if Use Estimate Check is

Consumption Thresholds selected.
— Minimum allowable Enter the multiplier to apply to the working/idle based
fuel estimate to get the minimum allowable fuel
estimate.
• Default = 0.5. 0 = ignore.

GUI Page Reference
Dynamic Fuel Relative Fuel This field is only editable if Use Estimate Check is
Monitoring Consumption Thresholds selected.
continued — Maximum allowable Enter the multiplier to apply to the working/idle based
fuel estimate to get the maximum allowable fuel
estimate.
Default = 1.5. 0 = ignore.
Fuel Usage Monitoring Enter the tolerance (%) to be applied to the fuel usage
— Refuel Estimate estimates. When the machine refuels, if the estimated
Tolerance amount of fuel required differs from the actual amount
by more than the percentage entered, an alarm is
raised.
• Default = 0.25 (25%).
Field Communications Monitor

Field Communications Monitor allows you to monitor all inbound and
outbound field communications.
To open Field Communications Monitor, select Contents > Diagnostics
Pages > Field Communications Monitor.
The Field Comms tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Field
Communications Monitor.
Item Description
Machine Filter Allows you to filter the information seen by Machine

type.
Message Filter Allows you to filter the information seen by message

type.
Page Allows you to view the default, system or user-defined

Configuration page configuration.
Direction Displays whether the message is coming in or going

out.
Protocol Displays the protocol the message is using.
Type Displays the type of message.
Machine Displays the machine the message is going to or

coming from.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Arrival Time Displays the time that the message arrived at the
communications gateway, i.e. the office computer.
Timestamp Displays the time that the message left the machine.
Delta Displays the time difference in seconds between the

time the message left the machine and arrived at the
communications gateway.
Message ID Displays the ID number given to the message.
Sequence # Displays the sequence number given to the message.
Data Size Displays the data size of the message.
You can include responses to filtered messages on the Field

Communications Monitor by selecting Actions > Include responses.
Field Communications Monitor Statistics

This feature allows you to gather rudimentary statistics on a number of
operational communications parameters for a site either in real time, or
calculated from historical logs.
By default, the feature is turned off so that no unnecessary load is placed on
the system by the process of accumulating the statistics.
To enable the statistics feature, select Action > Include statistics.This
displays a tree of check boxes that allow individual statistics to be gathered,
described in the table below.

GUI Page Reference
You can also select AllStats from the Page Configuration list, which will
turn on all statistics.
Item Description
Duplicates The percentage of duplicate messages sent from the

(% total) field. Duplicates are sent because the onbord system
has not received an acknowledgment message from the
office. This can be because of a failed receiver on an
individual machine, an area of poor coverage in a
particular location of the mine, a failed access point
transmitter, or interference.
Latency The amount of time taken for an inbound message to

(seconds) travel from the field to the office. The timer starts when
the message is first generated onboard. Long latencies
can be associated with network congestion, failing
mobile transmitters, failing access point receivers, poor
coverage or causes similar to those causing duplicates.
The office time clock MUST be synchronized with a
reliable GPS source, otherwise you cannot rely on time
information.
Latency is indicated at the bottom of the statistics
window, with the coloured numbers indicating as
follows:
• Grey - the data has been received and the time
received in is good.
• Blue - the data has been received and the time
received in is a bit out of spec, but fine.
• Red - the data has not been received. This could
mean that the office time and the field times are NOT
synchronized.
Message Size The number of bytes in each message. For some

(bytes) message types this is affected by things such the length
of names associated with entities such as waypoints.
As the TC900 radio network performs best with small
messages sizes (small slot <30 bytes, multiple long slot
>approx 200 bytes) it can be useful to investigate the
distribution of message payload sizes when tuning
network performance.
No Response The percentage of messages sent from the office to the

(% total) field for which no response was received. This can
indicate areas of poor coverage or failing radios.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
RTT (seconds) The round trip time for messages sent from the office
and acknowledged by the field. This can help
understand coverage and congestion issues with the
network as a whole or identify individual machines with
communications issues.
Round trip times do not have associated GPS
coordinates and hence, to plot RTT on the map the last
known location is used, if available.
Satellites The number of GPS satellites visible from a machine in

the field. This can affect accuracy of positional
information available to the office software.
Speed The speed of the machine as reported by the GPS

receiver.
To help identify and diagnose problems with communications, these

statistics can be aggregated by a number of factors, including those
described below.
Date Allows tracking of statistics by day to help identify trends

that may indicate a gradual change in system
performance.
Hour Similar to Date, but aggregates statistics by hour rather

than by day.
Location Plots the statistics on a two-dimensional plan view of the

mine. Locations are not available for all messages, so
where location is not available, the last known location
of the machine is used if it is not too dated.
Machine Allows accumulatiion of statistics by machine so that

problems with individual machines can be highlighted.
Message Type Identifies problems with particular message types that

may indicate a configuration or logic problem with the
system.
Time of Day Accumulates statistics by the hour of the day. Multiple

days are averaged over 24 one-hour bins. This allows
identification of diurnal variations in system
performance.
Statistics are visible in a window located on the bottom right of the Field
Communications Monitor window. If the statistics window is not visible, click
the arrow on the bottom right side of the main Field Communications Monitor
window.

GUI Page Reference
Location based statistics are plotted using a color map to indicate the relative
severity of the statistic at that location. The mean of the statistic at the
location is used to represent the statistic at each point on the map.
Other statistics are presented in tables on tabs behind the map. Tables are
also color coded so that problems can be more easily identified.
Beware that accumulating large quantities of data will consume large
amounts of memory and CPU time, so use this capability sensibly, and
not on the main server.
Note: See the Mstarrun Command Reference chapter in your Fleet

Administration and Configuration manual for related information on
mstarrun targets for Field Communications Monitor Statistics.
Field Event Monitor

Field Event Monitor monitors and displays field events as soon as they are
are received from the field. It has pre-defined configurations to monitor
specific event types. Each page configuration displays a different view.
To open Field Events Monitor, select Contents > Diagnostics Pages > Field
Event Monitor.
The tab representing this page depends on the page configuration selected.
You are able to filter the results by truck.
The following table describes the types of page configuration displayed on
Field Event Monitor.
Field Event Monitor
Page configuration Description
Assignment Required Displays all events that occur as a result of

state changes to dumping or loading or
assignment requests made by the operator.
Coordinate Error- Displays events with x,y,z position coordinates

of (0,0,0).
Hazard Displays all Hazard marks sent in from the field.
Load Events Displays all load events from machines,

including details of the date, machine,
localisable description, location, CAES
material, override material, default material,
CAES block, override block, and default block.
Load Events From Displays load events from loading tools,

Loading Tools including details of the date, loading tool, truck,
CAES material, override material, default
material, CAES block, override block, default
block, and dipper count.

GUI Page Reference
Field Event Monitor
Load Events From Displays load events from shovels, including

Shovels details of the date, loading tool, truck, CAES
material, override material, default material,
CAES block, override block, default block, and
dipper count.
Load Events From Displays load events from trucks, including

Trucks details of the date, truck, payload, and material.
Load Events With Displays load events with overrides, including

Overrides details of the date, loading tool, truck, CAES
material, override material, CAES block,
override block, and dipper count.
Materials From Displays details of materials from the trucks,

Trucks including details of the date, truck and material.
Position Events Displays all position events, including the

details of the date, machine, speed, number of
satellites used, and lcoation.
Position Events With Displays position events with low satellite

Low Satellite Count count, including details of the date, machine,
satellites, and location.
Position Events For Displays position events for waypoints,

Waypoints including the details of the date, machine,
speed, satellites, location, and waypoint.
State Change Displays all state changes, including manual

state changes, loading state changes, and
whether or not the state change was performed
by the machine operator.
State Changes Displays all manual state change events,

Manual including details on the date, truck, waypoint,
new state, and event description.
State Changes To Displays all events when the truck state

Loading changes to loading, including details on the
date, truck, waypoint, manual, and event
description.

Loading To Check changes to loading to check, including details
on the date, truck, waypoint, manual, and event
description.

GUI Page Reference
Field Event Monitor

Queuing changes to queuing, including date, truck,
waypoint, version, manual.
Time Synch Error Displays all events where the timestamp set by
the truck was in advance of the time in the
office.
Field Network Monitor

The Field Network Monitor displays and monitors network availability and
traffic details in either table or grid layout, depending on the your
requirements.
To open Field Network Monitor, select Contents > Diagnostics Pages >
Field Network Monitor.
The Field Network tab represents this page.
The following table describes the types of information displayed on the Field
Network Monitor.
Field Network Monitor
Item Description
Fleet This filter list allows results to be filtered by machine fleet.
Grid This is the default view.

This view displays color–coded information about the status
of the communications link between the office and machines
in the field. The colors are described in the table below.
Table You must click the Table View button for this view, or select
Actions > Table View.
This view displays the machine name and status, the last
message received, and the radio lag.
Event You must click the Event table button to display the event
table, or select Actions > Event Table
This table displays the progress of information, such as
position reports and state changes and monitors messages,
such as assignments and operator messages, from the
office to the field. Additionally it monitors machine
communication status and radio and office lag times.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the colors used to depict the network status of
machines as displayed on the Field Network Monitor.
Field network monitor colors
Color Status
White Communications Warning.
Pink High Office Lag.
Blue High Radio Lag.
Red No Communication.
Green Normal Communication.
Gray On Delay.
Fleet Update Assistant

Fleet Update Assistant allows you to monitor and change various machine
attributes for multiple machines in their fleet at one time.
You can also use Fleet Update Assistant as a navigation tool to other pages,
by right-clicking any row on any of the tabs.
To open Fleet Update Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages >
Fleet Update Assistant.
The Fleet Update tab represents this page.
The following table describes the types of page configurations available for
Fleet Update Assistant.
Page Description
configuration
Restrictions by Displays the tabs and columns most suited to

Category inspecting and monitoring the restrictions that are in
place for Loading Tools, Trucks, Processors, or
Materials.
Shift Change Displays the tabs and columns most suited to

inspecting and monitoring the shift change attributesfor
machines in the field.

GUI Page Reference
Page Description
configuration
Status by Displays the tabs and columns most suited to

Category inspecting and monitoring the status of machines in the
field.
Mobile Displays the tabs and columns most suited to Mobile

Client use.
Tabs, or fields within tabs, vary depending on the page configuration being
viewed. You can show and remove columns from the page by clicking the
Configure Options button on the toolbar.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes each item on the Fleet Update Assistant.
Item Description
Fleet This list allows you to filter the display by

fleet.
Travel condition This list displays travel conditions that can

be used to filter results. The buttons beside
Travel Conditions are as follows:
• Apply travel conditions.
• Reset travel times.
Production Goals Displays information abou the Production

goals via graphical embedded dashboards.
Blending Goals Displays information about the current

blending goals via graphical embedded
dashboards.
Loading tool This tab displays information about loading

tools, including:
• Loader number.
• Operator.
• Operating mode.
• Current destination.
• Block hierarchy folder.
• Assignment availability.
• Last material loaded.
• Last mining block visited.
• Loader status and activity.
• Job code.
• Any delays.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Truck This tab displays information about trucks,

including:
• Truck number.
• Operator.
• State.
• Fuel level.
• Allowed loading tools.
• Last loading tool.
• Last mining block visited.
• Last material carried.
• Allowed materials.
• Allowed and last processor.
• Last waypoint.
• Tire TKPH.
• Any delays.
Processor This tab displays detailed information about

processors, including:
• Processor type.
• Last material processed.
• Status.
• Any delays.
Auxiliary equipment This tab displays detailed information about

auxiliary equipment, including:
• The machine being used.
• Operator.
• Machine category.
• Status and activity.
• Job code.
• Any delays.
This tab is not displayed when using the
Restrictions By Category page
configuration.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Blending Monitor Displays the actual versus target values for

active user-defined blends/processors in a
graphical format using KPI Dashboards.
Material This tab displays detailed information about

materials, including:
• Material type.
• Loading tools loading that material.
• Processors processing that material.
• Trucks carrying that material.
This tab only displays when using the
Restrictions By Category page
configuration.
Trucking Status This indicator bar shows whether the mine is

over, correctly, or under trucked.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the actual versus
target values for production monitoring on the Fleet Update Assistant.
Fleet Update Assistant colors
Color Description
Green The actual value is within the target production

rate values, <= 10%.
Amber The actual value is within target production rate

values, > 10% and < 20%.
Red The actual value is within production rate

values >= 20%.
Fuel and Lube Type Finder

Fuel and Lube Type Finder is used to locate and display the required fluid
types and categories.
To open Fuel and Lube Types, select Contents > Setup Pages > Fuel and
Lube Type Finder.
The Fuel/Lube Types tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information on Fuel and Lube
Types.
Fuel and Lube Types
Item Description
Name The type of fuel or lubricant.
Description A description of the fuel or lubricant type.
Category The category of the fuel or lubricant, for example

coolant, gear oil.
Fuel and Lube Type Editor

Fuel and Lube Type Editor is used to edit fluid types and categories.
To open Fuel and Lube Type Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Fuel and Lube Type Finder.
The Fuel and Lube Type dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Fuel and Lube Type
Editor.
Fuel and Lube Type Editor
Item Description
Name The name of the fuel or lubricant type.
Description A brief description of the fuel or lubricant type.
General This tab contains information about the fuel or lubricant

category and unit types, for example liquid volume,
mass.
Fuel Lube and SMU Assistant

Fuel Lube and SMU Assistant is used to search for service records using
specific criteria and filters.
To open Fuel Lube and SMU Records, select Contents > Management
Pages > Fuel Lube and SMU Assistant.
The Fuel/Lube and SMU Records tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information on Fuel Lube and SMU
Records.
Fuel Lube and SMU Records
Item Description
Record Filter Contains details on the following:

• The time period to filter on.
• The machines to filter on.
• Whether to show only records containing SMU or
Fuel.
Timestamp The time and date of the service.
Machine The machine being serviced.
Odometer The odometer reading at the time of the service.
SMU The Service Meter Unit value for the machine.
Fuel The type of fuel being used by the machine.
Fuel The attendant who refueled the machine.

Attendant
Fuel Lube and SMU Editor

Fuel Lube and SMU Editor is used to create, edit and delete service record
details.
To open Fuel Lube and SMU Editor:
1. Select Contents > Management Pages > Fuel Lube and SMU
Assistant.
The Fuel Lube and SMU Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Fuel Lube and SMU
Editor.
Item Description
Timestamp The time and date of the service.
Machine The machine being serviced.
Odometer The odometer reading at the time of the service.
SMU The Service Meter Unit value for the machine.
Operator The operator of the machine.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Fuel The attendant who refueled the machine.

Attendant
Fuel and Lube A table of fuel and lube types available for this machine.
Types
Grade Editor
Grade Editor is used to manage the creation, maintenance, and deletion of
grade definitions.
To open Grade Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Grade Finder.
The Grade Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Grade Editor.
Grade Editor
Item Description
Name The name of the grade.
Type The type of grade, either continuous or discrete.
Weight Averaging The method of weight averaging, either mass or

Method volume.
Continuous This panel is shown when continuous is selected

from the Type list. The panel contains information
on the unit type, name, maximum, minimum and
desired values for the grade.
Discrete This panel is shown when discrete is selected from

the Type list. The panel contains information on the
desired discrete grade, and the values for the
grade.
Grade Finder
Grade Finder is used to locate and display the details of all grades.
All defined grades are displayed in alphabetical order on this page.
To open Grade Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Grade Finder.
The Grades tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
Health Event Monitor

Health Event Monitor displays a summary of health events received from
machines on site.
To open Health Event Monitor, select Contents > Management Pages >
Health Event Monitor.
The Health Events tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Health Event
Monitor.
Health Event Monitor
Item Description
Date Displays the date of the health event.
Machine Displays the name of the machine being checked.

Name
Event Displays a description of the health event.

Description
Level Displays the level of severity of the event as follows:

Level 1 — Warning. No action is required.
Level 2 — Danger. The mode of operation must be
changed.
Level 3 — Urgent. The machine should be stopped
immediately. This is the highest level of severity.
SMU Displays the number of cumulative engine hours the

machine has been running.
Operator Displays the name of the machine operator.
Duration Displays the length of the event occurrence.
Ack. Time Displays the length of time it took for the operator to
acknowledge the alarm signal.
Ack. Count Displays the number of times the operator

acknowledged the alarm signal.
Machine State Displays the state of the machine when the alarm
occurred.
Speed Diplays the speed of the machine when the alarm

occurred.
Payload Displays the weight of the material the machine was

carrying when the event occurred.
Location Displays the location of the machine when the event

occurred, expressed in X, Y, Z coordinates.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the colors used to depict the severity of health
events as displayed on Health Event Monitor.
Health event monitor colors
Color Level
Green Level 1 — Warning.
Pink Level 2 — Danger.
Red Level 3 — Red.
database.
Note: You must be in Expert Mode to access Historical Inspector, and must
ensure no data processing is being undertaken.
To open Historical Data Validation after going into Expert Mode, select
Contents > Data Validation > Historical Inspector.
The Historical Data Validation tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information on Historical Inspector.

Item Description
Inspect This panel lists the items that can be inspected and
diagnosed. They are:
Delays
• Start time is after finish time.
• Delay duration is too long.
• Overlapping Delays.
Cycles
• Nominal Payload Is 0 or NULL.
• Old cycle activity names.
• Cycle start time > finish time.
• Activity start time > finish time.
• Inconsistent Cycle Delay Times.
• Load status incorrect in CycleRoadSegments.
Kpi Summaries
• Time is Missing from Total.
• Summaries record has no cycle record.
Period Select the period to inspect, ranging from shifts to a

Selector specified whole year, and select the start and finish date
and time.
Write to File Write to File

Options Select this check box to write cycle OIDs to file if
applicable.
Append
This check box is not selectable unless you have
selected the Write to File option.
You select this check box to append to the file instead of
overwriting it.
Cycle OID file
This field is not selectable unless you have selected the
Write to File option.
Enter the file name which will contain one cycle OID per
line.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Advanced Chunk Size (Hours)

Parameters The size of the query chunk in hours.
• Default = 72 hours.
Wait Time (s)
The length of time, in seconds, to wait between each
update.
Inspection Delay duration is too long Inspection

Parameters Maximum Delay Length (Days)
The maximum delay length in days.
• Default = 300 days
New Delay Length (Days)
The new delay length in days.
• Default = 1 day.
Old hang time name Inspection
Old name
The old hang time activity name.
• Default = Waiting For Truck.
Job Code Finder

Job Code Finder is used to hierarchically display all job codes. Job codes are
displayed in alphabetical order within job code groups. The Job Code Editor
and Job Code Group Editor can be launched from this page to allow creation,
editing, and deletion of job codes and groups.
To open Job Code Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Job Code
Finder.
The Job Codes tab represents this page.
Job Execution Monitor

Job Execution Monitor displays a summary of all currently running,
completed and paused jobs. Each tab displays different details about the
selected job.
To open Job Execution Monitor, select Contents > Diagnostics Pages >
Running Jobs.
The Running Jobs-Standard Jobs tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information on Job Execution

Monitor.
Job Execution Monitor
Item Description
Job Execution This panel displays information on the start time, status
and name of the job, what the current task is, and what
the last message was.
Task This panel contains the following tabs:

Summary • Details — Shows details of task progress.
• Messages — Shows messages generated by tasks
that are running.
• Release Status — Shows details of tasks waiting to
be run.
• Failure Details — Shows details of tasks that have
failed.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the various delays as
displayed on Job Execution Monitor.
Job Execution Monitor colors
Color Delay
Green Delays that are completed.
Red Delays run but have failed or have been aborted.
Blue Delays that are currently running.
Gray Delays that are waiting to be run or have been

suspended.
Job Runner
Job Runner is used to start and monitor job runs.
To open Job Runner, select Contents > Management Pages > Job Runner.
The Jobs tab represents this page. Different job options are displayed
depending on the job selected.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes items of information on Job Runner.

Job Runner
Item Description
Group This list allows to select the job group they want to
view.
Job This panel lists the available jobs you can select
from.
Name This column displays the names of the jobs that are
able to be run.
Description This column displays a description of the job.
Loader Recipe Finder

Loader Recipe Finder is used to create, edit and display loader recipes, by
specifying a series of machine activities and associated counts.
To open Loader Recipe Finder.
1. Click Contents > Setup Pages > Loader Recipe Finder.
2. Click New
The Loader Recipes tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Loader Recipe
Finder.
Loader Recipe Finder
Item Description
Recipe Name Specify the recipe name, for each recipe.
Stockpiles Stockpile details include the machine activity and

the number (count) of each activity required for the
recipe. Each machine activity has an abbreviation,
and this abbreviation is sent to the LHD as part of
the recipe. For example, a machine activity of J2
Pile might have an abbreviation of J2. The
operator only sees J2 on the onboard display,
indicating which stockpile to draw material from.
Activities, their abbreviations and other details are
set up using the Machine State Editor.
Loader Recipe Sender

Loader Recipe Sender is used to send selected recipes to machines.
To open Loader Recipe Sender.

GUI Page Reference
1. Click Contents > Setup Pages > Loader Recipe Sender.

2. Select a recipe and click Open.
The Loader Recipe Sender dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Loader Recipe
Sender.
Loader Recipe Sender
Item Description
Loaders Click to specify which loaders you can send the

loader recipes to.

GUI Page Reference
Loading Tool Assistant

Loading Tool Assistant is used to monitor the general state and efficiency of
a loading tool.
To open Loading Tool Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages >
Loading Tool Assistant.
The Loading Tool tab represents this page.
The following table describes the information on each tab on Loading Tool
Assistant.
Tab Description
Loading Tool Displays a drop-down list of loading tools you can

select from.
General This tab displays the following information:

Status, containing the following information:
• Operator — The name of the operator.
• Job Code — The job code.
• Destination — The area to which the loading tool is
going.
• Operating Mode — The mode in which the loading
tool is operating, e.g. single sided, double sided,
drive by, load haul dump. Double sided means that
up to two trucks may be ready for loading at the
same time, whereas Single sided or Drive By
allows only one truck at a time. All other trucks on
route to this loader are issued other assignments.
Note that if there are trucks exclusively locked to this
loader, those trucks will not be able to receive an
assignment until the loader is made assignable
again, or the lock is removed.
Load Haul Dump means that the machine is not
loading any trucks. It is simply Loading, Travelling
and Dumping, for example from a Stockpile to a
Crusher, without interaction with any trucks. The
Assignable check box is cleared. The internal
status of the loading tool is not lost, so its progress
against any production requirements is retained.
This would not occur if the loader was removed
completely from the assignment configuration by
clearing the Available for Assignment setting.

GUI Page Reference
Tab Description
General • Activity — The activity the loading tool is

continued performing.
• Last Material — The last material loaded.
• Last Mining Block — The last mining block visited.
• Mining Block — Click button to display popup
containing information on the mining block hierarchy
and the Default/Active Mining Blocks.
• Reset Position — Resets the truck’s position.
• Assign, containing the following information:
• Available for assignment — Selected if the loading
tool is available for assignment.
• Assignable — This is selected by default. Clearing
this setting stops trucks being assigned to the
loader. The loader is still tracked within assignment
so that its internal status is maintained. This is
important when running production plans.This
setting is enabled automatically when the loader
next completes a delay.
• Reassign Trucks on Route — Selecting this option
forces any trucks currently on route to the loader to
be issued a new assignment. Note that this option is
only available when the Assignable check box is
cleared.
• Reassign Trucks in Queue — Selecting this option
forces any trucks in the queue for ths loader to be
issued a new assignment. Note that this option is
only available when the Reassign Trucks On
Route check box is selected.
• Make Assignable on Delay End — Selecting this
option forces the Assignable setting to be
automatically enabled when the loader next
completes a delay. Note that this option only
becomes available when the Assignable check box
is cleared.
• The machines in various states that are assigned to
the loading tool:
• Loading
• Queuing
• Waiting
• Arrived
• Traveling

GUI Page Reference
Tab Description
Efficiency This tab contains the following information:

• Use Dynamic Efficiency Factor — Will use the
dynamic efficiency factor if selected.
• Loading Times — Displays the truck class, the
class load time, differences, and load times.
Restrictions This tab contains the following tabs:

• Truck — Displays information on truck restrictions.
• Processor — Displays information on processor
restrictions.
• Groups — Displays information on group
restrictions.
Shift Change This tab contains information on excluding the loading

tool from operator and transport allocation, and the
default tie down location.
Machine Category Editor

Machine Category Editor is used to create and maintain fleets and mobile
machine categories.
To open Machine Category Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Machine Finder.
2. Select either Fixed Plant or Mobile.
The Machine Category Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Machine Category
Editor.
Item Description
Name This field contains the name of the machine

category.
Description A field contains a description of the machine

category.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description

• Icon URL — The path to the icon you want to
associate with the category.
• Capabilities — The capabilities that apply to
machines in this category. Any, or all, of the
following:
• Loader Recipes
• Drilling
• Fluids Tracking Only
• VIMS
Onboard This tab contains details relating to onboard

hardware and configuration capabilities.
Production This tab contains details on activities mapping and

production state.
Machine Finder
Machine Finder is used to locate and display machine classes, individual
machines and fleets, and provides access to class, machine and fleet
editors. Machines are shown within a hierarchical structure. You are able to
create and edit machines from this page.
To open Machine Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Machine
Finder.
The Machines tab represents this page.
Machine License Editor

Machine License Editor is used to edit and display machine licenses.
Machines and other equipment are sorted hierarchically by license, machine
class, fleet, and type.
To open Machine License Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages >
Machine License Editor.
The Machine Licenses tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information on Machine Licenses.

Machine Licenses
Field Description
License Name The name of the machine license. This is also

displayed in the Name panel on the left-hand side of the
screen.
Fleet The fleet the license name belongs to.
Active Holders The personnel who are active holders of the selected
license.
Machine State Editor

Machine State Editor is used to display and edit machine state attributes.
To open Machine State Editor
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Machine State Finder.
2. Select a machine class or state.
The Machine State Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Machine State
Editor.
Machine State Editor
Item Description
Name The state of the machine.
Abbreviation An abbreviation of the state.
ID The identification number of the machine. This field is

not editable by the user.
Is Working Whether or not the machine is working.
Destination This tab contains information on the destination of the

machine.
Associations This tab contains information on the machine

categories this machine is associated with.
Machine State Finder

Machine State Finder is used to display a hierarchical view of the machine
states and machine state groups that have been created. You can locate,
create, and edit machine state groups and machine states from this page.

GUI Page Reference
To open Machine State Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Machine
State Finder.
The Machine States tab represents this page.
Maintenance Event Monitor

Maintenance Event Monitor displays a summary of maintenance events. All
maintenance events received from the field are displayed in the event table.
To open Maintenance Event Monitor, select Contents > Management
Pages > Maintenance Event Monitor.
The Maintenance Events tab represents this page.
You can create and save page configurations that show only the required
information.
The following table describes the items of information on Maintenance Event
Monitor.
Maintenance Event Monitor
Item Description
Date Date and time the event occurred.
Machine name Name of the machine that recorded the event.
Event description Description of the event.
Level Level of severity:

Level 1 — No immediate action required.
Level 2 — Caution, sensor not working properly.
FMI description Failure mode indicator description of the even
MID description Machine module that transmitted the event.
CID description Machine component that transmitted the event.
SMU Accumulated engine hours when the event

occurred.
Operator The machine operator on duty when the event

occurred.
Machine State The state the machine was in when the event
occurred.
Location The machine’s position when the event occurred,

expressed in x, y, z coordinates.

GUI Page Reference
Material Editor
Material Editor is used to edit and display material attributes.
To open Material Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Material Finder.
2. Select a material.
The Material Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Material Editor.
Material Editor
Item Description
Name The name of the material.
Description A description of the material.
General This tab contains general information on material

attributes.
Grades This tab lists both available and assigned grades.

• Available — All grades that are available on site,
set up in Grade Editor.
• Assigned — Grades for the material that are
assigned to that mining block.
Discrete This tab lists available discrete material grades.

Discrete materials are different types of grades.
Discrete values are set up as valid, then the mining
block is tagged with only one of the possible values.
One example is Royalty, but it can have multiple
possible values.
Only available if discrete grades are selected on the
Grades tab.
Continuous This tab lists available continuous material grades, and

the maximum, desired, and minimum values. The value
can be any number within the specified range. Only
available if continuous grades are selected on the
Grades tab.

GUI Page Reference
Material Group Finder

Material Group Finder is used to create, edit and delete material groups and
materials. Material Groups are displayed hierarchically in alphabetical order.
To open Material Group Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Material
Finder.
The Materials tab represents this page.
Material Mix Editor

Material Mix Editor allows you to create, edit and delete material mixes.
To open Material Mix Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages > Material Mix
Editor.
The Material Mixes tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Material Mix Editor.
Material Mix Editor
Panel Description
Material mixes Specifies the names of defined material mixes.
Details Fields are:

• Name — The name of the material mix.
• Description — A meaningful description of the
material mix, describing its purpose or contents.
• Exclude — Lists the materials that are excluded
from this material mix.
• Include — Lists the materials that are included in
this material mix.
Mine Model Query

Mine Model Query is used as a troubleshooting page to provide an overview
of the compatibilities and incompatibilities which exist for a combination of
filter criteria, including trucks, loaders, processors, and materials. It is mainly
used to determine which constraints or restrictions need to be modified in
order for a machine to receive an automatic assignment.
• Constraints refers to the materials and destinations for a machine.
• Restrictions refer to the locks and bars that have been placed on
machines and servers.
More information on constraints and restrictions can be found in the
Concepts and Reference chapter. See Restrictions for details.
The Mine Model Query page is divided into two panels. Compatibility
information is shown on a matrix on the left, detailed information is shown on
the right.

GUI Page Reference
There are four dimensions to the mine model query, which are shown on
both panels. You are able to query one of the items, for example, a truck, or
all four items, that is, a truck, loading tool, processor and material, or a
combination of the four. The results shown in the matrix and in the details
panel will depend on what you have chosen to view.
When you select a square in the matrix on the left, the details are shown on
the right.
To open Mine Model Query, select Contents > Diagnostics Pages > Mine
Model Query.
The Mine Model Query tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Mine
Model Query.
Mine Model Query
Item Description
Drop-down These lists provide attributes that can be shown in the

lists rows and columns of the matrix. List labels will change
depending on what you select to view in the rows and
columns.
Truck A list of trucks that can be queried.
Loading Tool A list of the loading tools that can be queried.
Processor A list of the processors that can be queried.
Material A list of the materials that can be queried.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the compatibility of
machines and materials as displayed on Mine Model Query.
Mine Model Query colors
Color Compatibility
Green Compatible.
Orange Partially compatible.
Gray Not assignable.
Blue Delayed.
Red Not compatible.
Mining Block Editor

Mining Block Editor is used to create and edit mining blocks and stockpiles.
To open Mining Block Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Mining Block Finder.

GUI Page Reference
2. Navigate to the required mining block.

The Mining Block Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Mining Block Editor.
Mining Block Editor
Item Description
Name This field displays the name of the mining block.
Hierarchy This field displays the position of the block in the

hierarchy.
Grade This list displays the external software used.

Engine

• Material types, the amount mined and amount
remaining.
• Whether the block is active, read-only, a stockpile, or a
locked destination.
Grade This tab contains the following information:

• Whether the block is continuous or discrete, the grade
in the block, and the unit and value of the grade.
Coordinates This tab contains information on unit of measurement

used for the mining block, and the coordinates of the
mining block.
Alternates This tab contains information on alternate destinations and

materials.
Mining Block Finder

Mining Block Finder displays all mining blocks in a hierarchy. This hierarchy
reflects the location of the mining blocks within the mine. The mining block
labels are the same color as that defined for the material associated with the
mining block. Different colored icons are used to indicate active and inactive
blocks.
You can perform various operations on mining blocks through this page, for
example, mining block archiving, or change a mining block status. You are
able to show and hide empty mining block folders by clicking the Toggle the
display of empty folders button.
To open Mining Block Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Mining
Block Finder.
The Mining Blocks tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the colors used to depict the status of a mining
block or stockpile as displayed on Mining Block Finder.
Mining Block Finder
Color Status
Red Inactive.
Yellow Active.
Mining Block Group Editor

Mining Block Group Editor is used to create and edit mining block groups.
To open Mining Block Group Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Mining Block Finder.
2. Click Group or Open.
The Mining Block Group Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Mining Block Group
Editor.
Mining Block Group Editor
Item Description
Name The name of the mining block.
Description A description of the mining block.
K Value The K Value of the mining block.

GUI Page Reference

Model Data Validation is a diagnostic page used to check the mine model for
inconsistencies. Once a scan is run, the page displays issues and may
suggest ways of resolving them, helping maintainability and mine model
style.
This page is configured by security for use by the Builder only.
To open the Model Data Validation tool, select Contents > Diagnostics
Pages > Model Inspector.
The Model Data Validation tab represents this page. The following table
describes the items of information on the Model Data Validation page.
The Model Data Validation Inspector can also be run as a command-line
mstarrun target, i.e. mstarrun inspectModel. Both Scan on the GUI,
and mstarrun inspectModel will write a file to the trace directory. See
the Fleet Administration and Configuration manual for more information.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Inspect This panel lists the items that can be inspected and
diagnosed. They are:
• Delay
Scans all active delays and finds those that have
archived or empty targets.
• Destination
Scans all destinations and finds those that are not
connected to the road network.
• Fleet
Fleet in Fleets
Scans all fleets and finds those that have sub-fleets.
• Fuel and Lube Types
Missing Fields
Scans all fuel and lube types and finds those that
are missing a field input unit or a category.
• Mining Block
Hierarchy
Scans all mining blocks and finds those that do not
have the correct hierarchy stored for them.
• Grade
Discrete Grade Values
Scans all grade values and finds incorrect discrete
grade values.
• Machine Class
Machine Class Validation
Scans all mining blocks and finds those that do not
have the correct hierarchy stored for them.
• Machine
Machine Validation
Scans all machines and finds all servers that are
available for assignment and have an invalid
waypoint or current destination.
• Material
In Multiple Groups
Scans all materials and finds those that exist in
multiple groups, or have no group.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Inspect • Material Group

(cont’d)
Scans all material groups and finds all material
groups that do not have a correct hierarchy stored
for them.
• Message
Message Attributes
Scans all messages and finds those that have an
invalid group.
• Person
Person in Crew
Scans all personnel and fins those that do not have
a crew.
Person in Work Group
Scans all personnel and finds those that do not
belong to a work group, or belong to more than one
work group.
• Road
FINAL Road
Ensures that only FINAL roads are used to connect
servers to their destinations.
Find Duplicates
Scans all roads and finds any duplicate roads joining
the same two waypoints.
Road Position Rationalisation
Scans all roads and finds any that have intermediate
positions and highlights any situations where there
are positions that are far too close to each other
(currently less than 10 centimeters apart).

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Inspect less than 10 centimeters apart).

(cont’d)
Road Travel Information
Scans all roads and finds any with travel time
anomalies.
Road Waypoint
Scans all roads and finds any with invalid end
waypoints.
• Waypoint
Machine Waypoint Validation
Scans all servers and finds any with invalid
waypoints.
Waypoint Validation
Scans all waypoints and finds any that have invalid
route points, polygons, are not clockwise, are not
flat, do not have a valid color, have invalid flags, or
have parent setting issues.
Model Data Validation Buttons and Columns
Item Description
Scan Scans the mine model for inconsistencies in the areas

you want to inspect.
Issue Displays the issues found in the mine model.
Description Describes the issues found in the mine model.
Solution Whether a solution is automatically available.

Available
Select All Shows all issues that have an automatic solution

available.This is indicated by a tick in the Solution
Available column.
Resolve Select a check box to resolve an issue, and click the

Resolve button to resolve all issues.

GUI Page Reference
Office Message Monitor

Office Message Monitor allows you to monitor all incoming and outgoing
office messages. It also monitors:
• Replies to messages sent to machine operators from the office.
• Status of messages sent to machine operators including delivery errors.
Each row in the data table represents one message. If a single message was
sent to more than one machine, then a separate row is displayed for each
machine to which the message was sent.
To open the Office Message Monitor, select Contents > Diagnostic Pages >
Office Message Monitor.
The Office Messages tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Office Message
Monitor.
Office Message Monitor
Field Description
Timestamp Displays the time of the message.
Machine Name Displays the machine the message is coming from or

going to.
Operator Displays the response from the operator. When a

Response response is received the message status changes.
Status is represented using colors as shown in the
table below.
Message Text Displays the text of the message.
Message Title Displays the title of the message.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the various messages
as displayed on Office Message Monitor.
Office message monitor colors
Color Message
Blue Ok.
Orange Cancel.
Green Yes.
Red No.
Gray Error/Resent.

GUI Page Reference
Office Processes
Office Processes (Bus Monitor) is used to monitor the health of the office
software. It displays statistics about server processes, number of buffered
events and memory use.
To open Office Processes, select Contents > Diagnostics Pages > Office
Processes.
The Office processes tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Office
Processes.
Office Processes
Item Description
Title Displays the name of the process.
Host Displays the name of the host the process is running

on.
Status Displays the status of the process.
Buffered Displays the number of buffered events.
Events per Displays the number of events per minute.

Minute
Memory Displays the amount of memory the process is using.
CPU Usage Displays the percentage of the CPU being used.
Managers This panel displays the following information:

(Services) • Name — All managers in this object server.
• Threads — The number of threads started by this
manager.
Data Stores This panel displays the following information:

• Name — All database connections from this object
server.
• Slow Queries — The number of slow queries
against these data stores in the last minute, two
minutes, five minutes, and 10 minutes.
Buffered This panel displays the following information:

Nodes • Name — All buffered nodes in this object server.
• Buffer Size — The number of events buffered in
these nodes.
Publications This panel displays the following information:

• Name — All publications in this object server.
• Queue Size — The number of events queued for
publication to pubsub.

GUI Page Reference
Onboard File Assistant

Onboard File Assistant allows you to view the status of the fleet’s onboard
files, generate files, manage file versions, upload and activate configuration
files and the office software files, and build files for FLASH cards for
individual machines, or all machines at once.
The columns seen depend on the page configuration You can rest your
mouse on any cell in the table to see the office version number, the onboard
version number, and the date the file was activated (if known).
To open the Onboard File Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages
> Onboard File Assistant.
The Onboard Files tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Onboard File
Assistant.
Item Description
Machine Displays the name of the machine.
Machine Category Displays the category of the machine, for example

Motor Grader.
Machine Class Displays the class of machine the files are being
uploaded to, for example, CAT994.
Machine For each machine file, displays the onboard

version numbers for each machine, and the date
the file was activated (if known).
Material For each material file, displays the onboard version

numbers for each machine, and the date the file
was activated (if known).
Activity For each activity file, displays the onboard version

Job Code For each job code file, displays the onboard version
Mining Block For each mining block file, displays the onboard
Delay For each delay file, displays the onboard version


GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Waypoint For each waypoint file, displays the onboard

the file was activated (if known). The waypoint
column must be selected manually by you when
selecting all files, it is not selected by default
because the file size is extremely large, and does
not need to be downloaded every time.
Message For each message file, displays the onboard

Truck For each truck file, displays the onboard version

KPI For each on-board KPI file, sends Critical

production and health information to the machine
operator via Caterpillar’s on-board systems (CAES
& TOPE). KPIs such as loader tons per hour, truck
tons per hour and total tons per shift can be sent to
machines to enable the machine operators to
monitor and improve performance.
Safety Checklist For each safety checklist file, displays the onboard
Fluid For each fluid file, displays the onboard version

Operator For each operator file, displays the onboard version

Display Waypoint Contains the display waypoint files for each

machine. These files are not version-managed, as
it is assumed the file information will not change
very often. You can see the date the file was last
uploaded by hovering their mouse over the file type
table cell.
Backdrop Contains file information which provides additional

definition to the onboard display, for example
roads, buildings, etc. These files are not version-
managed, as it is assumed the file information will
not change very often. You can see the date the file
was last uploaded by hovering their mouse over the
file type table cell.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Machine Config Contains configuration information specific to each

site, for example:
• Daylight savings time.
• IP addresses.
• Loadout unit tonnages.
• Unit conversion factors, etc.
Windows Config Contains Windows configuration information for

each machine.
Main Executable Contains the main executable file for the particular
machine. This is a compressed file, which the
activation process extracts.
Startup File Contains the startup information for each machine.
CAES Master Contains the CAES master file for each relevant
machine.
Select Connected This button allows you to select all machines to

Machines which files will be uploaded.
Select All Files This button allows you to select all files to be
uploaded.
Build Card This button creates a directory image to be copied

onto a FLASH card. Only available for trucks.
Generate This button generates the selected onboard files to

be uploaded for relevant machines.
Upload Out Of This button uploads and activates out-of-date files.

Date
Upload Selected This button ignores the status of files and will reset
and upload all selected files to selected machines.
Activate This button activates the office software files and

the configuration file once uploaded to the
machine.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the machine
communications status as displayed on Onboard File Assistant.
Onboard file assistant cycle state colors
Color States
White Communications Warning.
Pink High Office Lag.

GUI Page Reference
Onboard file assistant cycle state colors
Color States
Blue High Radio Lag.
Red No Communication.
Green Normal Communication.
Yellow On Delay.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the various states of
files as displayed on Onboard File Assistant.
Onboard file assistant file state colors
Color Cell States
Green with tick Up-to-date
Red with cross Out-of-date
The onboard version number for

Yellow with that file type is not yet known for
question mark this machine
If communication has not been received from a machine for a period of time,
the machine color on the screen will fade from green (normal
communication) through white, pink and then red (no communication).
Onboard File Viewer

Onboard File Viewer is used to view onboard files.
To open the Onboard File Viewer, select Contents > Diagnostic Pages >
Onboard File Viewer.
The Onboard File Viewer tab represents this page.
You must select files to view by clicking the Open an onboard file button on
the toolbar. Column names will vary depending on the file you are viewing.
This page is for diagnostic purposes only, and is used by the Builder.
Payload Monitor
Payload Monitor displays a summary of payload events triggered when a
VIMS load report is received by the office software from a truck.

GUI Page Reference
To open the Payload Monitor, select Contents > Management Pages >
Payload Monitor.
The name on the tab representing this page will vary depending on the page
configuration used.
The following table describes the items of information on Payload Monitor.
Payload Monitor
Item Description
Date The date of the payload event.
Truck The truck the payload event was triggered from.
Loading Tool The loading tool the payload event was triggered from.
Payload The amount of the payload.
Type Whether the payload is overloaded, normal,

underloaded or exceeds the maximum.
Rule An assessment of the payload in the truck, relative to

user-specified thresholds.
Variance From The amount that the payload varied from nominal.
Nominal
Under/ The payload under/nominal/over/maximum weights in

Nominal/Over/ the units used on site, for example, tonnes.
Maximum
The following table describes the colors used to depict the various payload
alarms as displayed on the Payload Monitor.
Payload monitor colors
Color Alarm
Orange Exceeds Maximum.
Light Green Overloaded.
Medium Green Normal.
Blue Underloaded.

GUI Page Reference
Personnel Finder
Personnel Finder allows you to navigate through all site personnel and work
groups, and create and edit personnel and work groups.
To open the Personnel Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Personnel
Finder.
The Personnel Workgroups tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Personnel
Workgroups.
Personnel Workgroups
Item Description
Site Personnel This panel displays a hierarchical list of employees

listed alphabetically by workgroup and crew.
Personnel Summary
Personnel Summary is used to locate and manage personnel records.
To open Personnel Summary, select Contents > Setup Pages > Personnel
Summary.
The Personnel tab represents this page.
Personnel Summary.
Personnel Summary
Item Description
Site Personnel This panel displays a list of employees which can be

sorted by name, personnel ID and crew.
Identification This panel displays the employee’s name, personnel ID

and whether or not the employee is active.
Licenses This tab lists the machine licenses the employee has
acquired, the date they were acquired, the date they
were last used, and their expiry date.
It will depend on the security settings for the user
whether or not they have permission to edit the Last
Use Date field.
Contact This tab contains the following panels:

Details • Details — The employee’s contact details.
• Emergency Contact Details — The employee’s
emergency contact details.

GUI Page Reference
Personnel Summary
Item Description
Employee This tab contains details of the employee, such as their

Details technical level, department they work in, their
supervisor, their position, hire date, crew and work
group they are in.
Security This tab contains details of the employee’s machine

logon password.
Shift Change This tab contains details of machines the employee is

excluded from being allocated.
Leave/ This tab lists employee leave and absence details.

Absences
Overtime This tab lists overtime worked by the employee.
Processor Assistant
Processor Assistant displays machine, assignment, efficiency and restriction
details for any processor.
To open the Processor Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages >
Processor Assistant.
The Processor tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information on Processor

Assistant.
Processor Assistant
Item Description
Processor Displays a drop-down list of processors to select from.
General This tab displays the following sections:

Status, containing the following information:
• Status — The last known status of the processor.
• Last Material — The last material processed.
• Reset Position — Resets the truck’s position.
Assign, containing the following information:
• Available for assignment — Selected if the
processor is available.
• Whether the processor is performing one of the
following:
• Dumping
• Queuing
• Waiting
• Arrived
• Traveling
Trucks This tab displays the following section:

Allowed Trucks, containing the following information:
• Truck Class — A list of truck classes.
• Allowed — Displays a “tick” if the truck is allowed.
• Unload Time — Displays the time taken to unload.
• Maximum unloadable trucks — The maximum
number of unloadable trucks.
Efficiency Displays the following information:

Nominal rate — The nominal efficiency rate.
Effective rate — The effective rate.
Restrictions This tab displays the following tabs:

• Truck — Displays information on truck restrictions.
• Groups — Displays information on group
restrictions.

GUI Page Reference
Production Event Monitor

Production Event Monitor monitors and provides a summary of production
events including dipper, load and cycle events.
To open the Production Event Monitor, select Contents > Diagnostics
Pages > Production Event Monitor.
The Production Events tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Production Event
Monitor
Field Description
Date Displays the date of the event.
Machine Displays the machine associated with the event.

Name
Event Displays a description of the event.

Description
Event Type Displays the type of the event.
Cycle Load Displays the payload as reported by the cycle report
Load Duration Displays the time taken to load.
Loaded Travel Displays the time the machine was loaded and
Duration traveling.
Loaded Stop Displays the time the machine was loaded and stopped.
Duration
Empty Travel Displays the time the machine was empty and
Duration travelling.
Empty Stop Displays the time the machine was empty and stopped.
Duration
Empty Travel Displays the distance the machine was empty and
Distance traveling.
Loaded Travel Displays the distance the machine was loaded and
Distance traveling.
Transmission Displays the number of transmission shifts for the

Shifts machine duing the event.
Fuel Displays the type of fuel used.
Machine State Displays the state of the machine.
Operator Displays the name of the machine operator.
Material Displays the type of material the machine is carrying.

GUI Page Reference
Field Description
Dipper Count Displays the number of times the dipper was used.
Loader Pass Displays a report of each load.

Count
Location Displays the location of the event.
Production Planning Editor

Production Planning is used to create and edit product plans to be saved as
a template.
To open Production Planning Editor:
1. Select Contents > Management Pages > Production Requirements
Assistant.
2. Click New.
The Production Planning dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Production
Planning.
Production Planning
Item Description
Start Time Displays the start time of the production plan.

Finish Time Displays the finishing time of the production plan.
Duration Displays the duration of the production plan.
Goals This tab allows you to add, edit and delete goals, load
and save templates, validate and activate your goals.
Adding goals contains the following information:
• At least— Allows you to enter minimum values
and associated unit types.
• No more than — Allows you to enter maximum
values and associated unit types.
• From — The machine loading the material.
• Material/Blend — The material or blend required
for the goal.
• To — The associated processor.

GUI Page Reference
Production Planning
Item Description
Priority This tab allows you to load and save templates,

validate and activate your goals, and contains the
following sub-tabs:
• Materials, which lists priority and non-priority
materials.
• Loading Tool Priorities, which allows you to
prioritize loading tools from lowest to highest.
• Processor Prioritites, which allows you to
prioritize loading tools from lowest to highest.
Summary This tab displays a summary of the data entered on

the Priority and Goals tabs.
Load Template This button allows you to load a predefined template.
Save As This button allows you to save the current settings as

Template a template.
Validate This button allows you to calculate the production

plan and identify any invalid production requirements
you have entered. The results are automatically sent
to the Summary tab.
Activate This button allows you to commit the current goals to

the production system.
Production Requirements Assistant

Production Requirements Assistant is used to create, edit, and monitor filter
production requirements.
To open Production Requirements Assistant, select Contents >
Management Pages > Production Requirements Assistant.
The Production Requirements tab represents this page.
Requirements Assistant.
Item Description
Start Time Displays the start date and time for the production
requirement.
End Time Displays the end date and time for the production
requirement.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Duration Displays the duration of the production requirement.
Status Displays the status of the requirement.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the status of
production requirements as displayed on the Production Requirements
Assistant.
Production requirements assistant colors
Color Status
Green Active.
Gray Finished.
Black Scheduled.
Production Requirements Template Assistant

Production Requirements Template allows you to view, create and modify
templates for production requirements templates.
To open Production Requirements Template, select Contents > Setup
Pages > Production Requirements Templates.
The Production Requirements Templates tab represents this page.
Requirements Template.
Production Requirements Template
Item Description
Name Displays the name of the template.
Description Displays a description of the template.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the status of
production requirements as displayed on Production Requirements
Template.
Production requirements template colors
Color Status
Green Active.

GUI Page Reference
Production requirements template colors
Color Status
Gray Finished.
Black Scheduled.
Quick View
Quick View is used to view attributes of entities. The information displayed
will differ for each entity.
To open Quick View you must right-click the name of the entity in the table on
the relevant page.
Quick View may not always show consistent information depending on
the page you are looking at.
For example, when running Cycle Assistant, Quick View does not show
activities for any of the cycles until you open one. Quick View then shows the
activities. In this case, looking at the cycle in Cycle Editor provides you with a
more comprehensive view, with consistent information.
Restriction Assistant
Restriction Assistant is used to set, clear and view multiple machine
restrictions at the same time.
To open Restriction Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages >
Restriction Assistant.
The Restrictions tab represents this page.
Restrictions Assistant.
Restrictions Assistant
Item Description
Trucks This group box specifies the trucks whose restrictions

are to be modified.
Action This group box specifies the restrictions that are

available to be modified.
Details This group box displays each machine specified and the
restrictions that apply to them.
Road Segment Assistant

Road Segment Assistant provides a listing of a site’s road segments in a
tabular display.

GUI Page Reference
To open Road Segment Assistant, select Contents > Setup Pages > Road
Segment Assistant.
The Road Segments tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Road Segment
Assistant.
Field Description
Start Displays the location of the start waypoint.

Waypoint
End Waypoint Displays the location of the end waypoint.
Active Indicates whether or not the road segment is active.
Dynamic Displays whether the road segment uses dynamic

travel times. You can select whether or not the road
uses dynamic travel times when creating a road
segment with the Road Segment Editor.
Road Type Displays whether a road segment is a Haulage Road or

a Final Road.
Color Displays the color of the road segment.
Effective Displays the gradient of the road as a percentage.

Gradient
Plan Length Displays the length of the road as it appears on a plan

view.
Slope Length Displays the actual cartesian length of the road.
Rise Height Displays the total of all rises in this road segment, as
experienced when traveling forwards.

GUI Page Reference
Field Description
Fall Height Displays the total of all falls in this road segment, as
experienced when traveling forwards.
Travel Displays attributes recorded for machines traveling,

Information including:
• Along the road forward.
• Along the road backward.
• Along the road full.
• Along the road empty.
• Whether the machine is allowed to travel along that
road.
• The nominal travel time.
• The expected travel time.
• The equivalent flat haul distance.
• EFH factor.
This field is only visible when selecting the All With
Travel Information page configuration.
The following table describes the colors used to depict the current status of
machine assignments as displayed on Road Segment Assistant.
Road Segment Assistant colors
Color Status
Orange Final roads.
Green Haul roads.
Red No travel allowed.
Yellow Some travel allowed.
Road Segment Editor

Road Segment Editor allows you to create and edit road segment details.
To open the Road Segment Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Road Segment Assistant.
2. Click New to create a new road segment, or click Open to edit a road
segment.
The Road Segment Editor dialog represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information on Road Segment

Editor.
Road Segment Editor
Item Description
Name This field displays the name of the road segment.
General This tab describes the general attributes of the road

segment.
Travel Times This tab describes the configuration of the machine and
travel times.
Geometry This tab describes the geometry of the waypoints.
Roster Editor
Roster Editor displays a color-coded calendar view of crews and their rosters
for one month.
To open the Roster Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages > Roster Editor.
The Rosters tab represents this page.
Safety Check Action Editor

Safety Check Action Editor is used to add, view, and delete actions to be
taken when a failed safety check item occurs. You are able to add and delete
safety check actions.
To open the Safety Check Action Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages >
Safety Check Action Editor.
The Safety Check Actions tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Safety Check
Action Editor.
Safety Check Action Editor
Item Description
Name - left panel This table lists the safety check actions defined.
Name - right panel This field displays the name of the safety check
action.
Safety Checklist Editor

Safety Checklist Editor allows you to define a set of safety checks which
must be carried out by a machine operator prior to operating a truck or
loading tool. These checks are performed after the operator login has been
validated. If all safety check items pass inspection, then the onboard system

GUI Page Reference
is ready to use. If not, an alarm is raised and the operator is required to

perform the relevant action and the machine is optionally placed on delay.
To open the Safety Checklist Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages >
Safety Checklist Editor.
The Safety Checklist tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Safety Checklist
Editor.
Safety Checklist Editor
Item Description
Details This tab displays the following details. The Name,

Display Order, and Load Status are displayed in the
panel on the left of the window.
• Name — The machine component to be inspected
e.g. seat belts.
• Display Order — Controls the order in which the
items are presented to the machine operator for
confirmation.
• Load Status — Allows the safety check item to
optionally only be used when a truck is empty or full.
For non-trucks, and those items which must be
checked regardless of the load status, choose
Common.
• Category — Defines what must happen when the
safety check item fails inspection.
• Report Before Operating — The failed item is not
severe enough to prevent the machine from
operating safely, so the only action required is to
inform the relevant personnel.
• Repair Before Operating — The failed item is such
that the machine is not safe to operate, so if the
relevant delay category has been set up, the
machine is placed on delay.
• Action — Defines what the operator must do when
the safety check item fails. Typically this is to either
call maintenance personnel, or call the controller.
Machine This tab displays the categories of machine to which the

Categories safety checklist can be added.
Safety Record Editor

Safety Record Editor is used to edit and delete safety check records and
details. Safety check records are created for each failed safety check item.
To open the Safety Record Editor, select Contents > Management Pages >
Safety Record Editor.

GUI Page Reference
The Safety Check Record tab represents this page.

Note that you cannot create safety records.
When the page is opened, by default only records that are not actioned are
displayed.
Use the page configuration selector to toggle the display of records.
The following table describes the items of information on Safety Record
Editor.
Safety Record Editor
Item Description
Timestamp Displays the time at which the safety check failed.
Machine Displays which machine the safety check failed on.

Name
Safety Item Displays the name of the item which failed.

Name
Item Status Displays the mode of failure, either Bad or Deferred.

Display
Item Actioned Displays whether or not the cause of the safety check
failure has been actioned. Displays a “tick” if the item
has been actioned.
Date Actioned Displays the date the failed item was actioned.
Scheduled Assignment Editor

Scheduled Assignment Editor is used to create scheduled manual and
automatic assignments.
To open Scheduled Assignment Editor:
1. Select Contents > Management Pages > Scheduled Assignment
Monitor.
2. Click New or click Open.
The Scheduled Assignment Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the tabs on Scheduled Assignment Editor.
Scheduled Assignment Editor
Tab Description
Manual Displays assignment, schedule and route information

for you to view and update.
Automatic Automatically displays assignment, schedule and route

details for you to view and update.

GUI Page Reference
Scheduled Assignment Monitor

Scheduled Assignment Monitor displays all scheduled assignments.
To open Scheduled Assignment Monitor, select Contents > Management
Pages > Scheduled Assignment Monitor.
The Scheduled Assignments tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items displayed on Scheduled Assignment
Monitor.
Scheduled Assignment Monitor
Item Description
Truck Displays the machine scheduled to be assigned.
Action Displays a description of the action to be taken,

for example, load, unload, etc.
Load State Displays whether the machine is full or empty.
On Arrival Delay Displays any scheduled delays.

Type
Scheduled Displays a full description of the assignment.

Assignment
The following table describes the colors used to depict the current status of
machine assignments as displayed on the Scheduled Assignment Monitor.
Scheduled assignment monitor colors
Color Status
Red Late.
Orange At Destination.
Green Active.
Black Inactive.
Blue Finished.
Scheduled Break Editor

Scheduled Break Editor is used to create and edit scheduled breaks.
To open Scheduled Break Editor, do the following:
2. Click New or right-click an existing scheduled break and click Open.
3. Click Ok.

GUI Page Reference
The Scheduled Break Editor dialog represents this page.

The following table describes the tabs displayed on Scheduled Break Editor.
Scheduled Break Editor
Tab Description
Equipment Displays information about the equipment being used.
Sessions Displays information about the break sessions.
Destinations Displays a list of destinations.
Scheduled Break Finder

Scheduled Break Finder finds and displays summary information about
existing scheduled breaks. Information is displayed based on the current
page configuration, therefore, not all items are always displayed.
To open Scheduled Break Finder, select Contents > Management Pages >
Scheduled Break Finder.
The Scheduled Breaks tab represents this page.
Scheduled Break Finder.
Scheduled Break Finder
Items Description
Shift Date Displays the date that this break will occur.
Shift Identifier Displays the identifier of the shift in which this break
occurs.
Break Name Displays the name of this scheduled break.
Break Time Displays the time that this scheduled break is to start.
Number of Displays the number of sessions into which this break

sessions is broken up.
Time between Displays the time between the start of each session.
sessions
Status Displays the status of this scheduled break.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the colors used to depict the status of breaks
as displayed on Scheduled Break Finder.
Scheduled break finder colors
Color Break Status
Blue Planning.
Black Committed.
Green Active.
Gray Finished.
Red Cancelled.
Scheduled Communications Monitor

Scheduled Communications Monitor allows you to monitor messages
queued for delivery.
To open Scheduled Communications Monitor, select Contents >
Diagnostics Pages > Scheduled Communications Monitor.
The tab representing this page displays Scheduled Communciations
Monitor.
Scheduled Jobs
Scheduled Jobs is used to create and schedule jobs for various groups.
To open Scheduled Jobs, select Contents > Setup Pages > Scheduled
Jobs.
The Scheduled Jobs tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference

Scheduled Jobs, depending on the job selected.
Scheduled Jobs
Items Description
Group This section displays the name of the group to which

jobs belong, used for sorting purposes.
Scheduled This section displays details on the following:

Jobs • Name — The name of the scheduled job.
• Group — The group the job belongs to.
• Description — A description of the job.
• Completed — Displays a “tick” if the job is
completed.
• Activation Time — Displays the start time of the
job.
• Next Fire Time — The time the next job is due to
start.
Standard This tab displays details specific to each job.

Options
Scheduler This tab displays details on:

Parameters • Job Name — The name of the job being
scheduled.
• Job Group — The group the job is for.
• Description — A description of the job.
• Trigger Type — What triggers the scheduled job.
Simple Trigger This tab displays details on the starting time for the
trigger or event, and how often the trigger or event will
run.
Send Message Assistant

Send Message Assistant is used to send standard or ad hoc messages from
the office to one or more machines.
To open Send Message Assistant, select Contents > Management Pages >
Send Message Assistant.
The Send Message tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the tabs on Send Message Assistant.

Send Message Assistant
Tab Description
Equipment Displays a hierarchy of all available machines that can

receive office messages. You can select any
combination of machines to receive a message, as well
and select or clear all machines. .
Message Displays fields for selecting and entering the type,

response, content and title of the message. You can
select a standard message from the Standard
Messages list or create your own ad hoc message.
Session Allocation Rules

Session Allocation Rules is used to allocate machines and operators to
specific sessions.
To open Session Allocation Rules:
2. Click New. Create Scheduled Break opens.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Allocate Sessions.
5. Click Rules. Session Allocation Rules opens.
The Session Allocation Rules dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Session Allocation
Rules.
Session Allocation Rules
Item Description
Allocate Truck to Displays options for allocating trucks to the

Same Sessions same session as loading tools.
Session Allocation Displays options for the order in which sessions

Order are allocated, either ascending or descending.
Equipment Class Displays options for the order in which a

machine class is allocated to sessions.
Equipment Displays options for the order in which a

machine is allocated to sessions.

GUI Page Reference
Shift Builder
Shift Builder is used to create shifts for a given date range, and delete any
shifts that are present and fall outside of that range.
When the office software is started, it will ensure that x months of shifts exist
ahead of the current time. X is set via the Shifts tab on the Calendar
Defaults settings page in Supervisor.
To open Shift Builder, select Contents > Setup Pages > Shift Builder.
The Shifts tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Shift Builder.
Shift Builder
Item Description
Existing Start Displays the existing start date for the shift.
Date
Existing End Displays the existing end date for the shift.
Date
New Start Date Displays the new start date for the shift.
New End Date Displays the new end date for the shift.
Clear All Shifts Will delete all shifts.
Shift Change Allocations Monitor

Shift Change Allocations Monitor displays the allocation of machines and
operators in a customizable scrolling table. You can select either the day shift
or night shift page configuration.
To open Shift Change Allocations Monitor, select Contents > Management
Pages > Shift Change Allocations Monitor.
The tab representing this page displays either Shift Change Allocation
Night or Shift Change Allocation Day, depending on the Page
Configuration you select.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Shift
Change Allocations Monitor.
Field Description
Class Displays the class of the machine.
Equipment Displays the name of the macine.
Operator Displays the operator of the machine.

GUI Page Reference
Field Description
Transport Displays the name of the transport vehicle.

Vehicle
Tie-down Displays the tie down information such as destinations

and assignments.
Destination Displays the destination for the machine.
Loading Tool Displays any loading tool locks.

Locks
Comment Displays any comments.
Driver Displays whether or not the vehicle has a driver,

otherwise a passenger or one of the operators is
required to drive.
To customize the table, click the Configure Options button on the toolbar.
Different configurations should be saved in separate page configurations.
Default page configurations should be defined for at least each of the shift
names used, for example, Day Shift, Night Shift.
The following table describes the items of information displayed in the
Configure Options dialog box.
Item Description
Break Whether to divide the table by Equipment Class or

Transport Vehicle.
Key Whether to sort the data by Equipment or Operator.
Shift Change The type of Shift Change.

• Change Over — Provides details of all operators
currently logged on to all machines.
• End of Shift — Provides details of operators
currently logged on to machines.
• Start of Shift — Provides details of allocated
operators.
Scroll and Move the slider to display how often the table will scroll
Refresh and be refreshed.
Lines to Scroll Displays the number of lines the table will scroll by.
Show Shift Whether or not the Name and Date of the shift will show
Label at the top of the table.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Show Shows the supervisor of the shift (specified on the

Supervisor General tab of the Shift Change Editor), at the top of
the table.
Show Shows comments relating to the shift (specified on the

Comments General tab of the Shift Change Editor), at the top of
the table.
Shift Change Editor

Shift Change Editor allows you to edit shift changes, and reallocate crew and
machines as appropriate.
To open Shift Change Editor:
1. Select Contents > Management Pages > Shift Change Finder.
2. Select the shift change row to be changed.
3. Click Open.
The Shift Change Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Shift Change Editor.
Shift Change Editor
Item Description
Unallocated This panel displays operators currently unallocated.

Operators
Unallocated This panel displays equipment currently unallocated.

Equipment
Select This button displays an equipment operator dialog

Operators from which you can select operators to allocate to the
shift.
Allocate This button allocates operators and equipment for the

shift.
General This tab displays the shift Supervisor and any

comments.
Personnel This tab displays information on personnel and the

machines they will operate for this shift.
Loading Tools This tab displays information on loading tools for this
shift.
Trucks This tab displays information on trucks for this shift.

GUI Page Reference
Shift Change Editor
Item Description
Auxiliary This tab displays information on auxiliary equipment

for this shift.
Transport This tab displays information on transport vehicles for

Vehicles this shift.
Tie-down This tab displays tie-down information such as

destinations and assignments.
A number of different colors are used to draw your attention when using the
Shift Change Editor. These are described in the tables below. Also, hovering
your mouse over a colored item will bring up a tool tip describing what the
colors mean.
The following table describes colors used for operators, machines, transport
vehicles, and shift change destinations.
Shift Change Editor Colors
Color Description
Operators
Blue The operator has an active license for the allocated machine
and the machine is one of their preferred machines.
Black The operator has an active license for the allocated machine
but the allocated equipment is not preferred equipment,
and, the license will soon expire if not used soon.
Green The operator has an active license for the allocated machine
but the allocated machine is not their preferred machine.
Red The operator has no license for the allocated machine.
Orange Either:
The operator only has an inactive license for the allocated
machine.
Or:
If orange on the Personnel tab, the Operator is doing
overtime this shift.
Machines
Grey The Truck, Loading Tool, Processor or Auxiliary machine is

not available for allocation.

GUI Page Reference
Color Description
Red Either:
The Truck, Loading Tool, Processor or Auxiliary machine
has a delay scheduled to be active at the time of shift
change but has been defined as being available for
allocation
Or:
The allocated operator is not licensed for the machine.
Blue The operator has an active license for the allocated machine
and the machine is one of their preferred equipment.
Black The operator has an active license for the allocated machine
but the allocated machine is not the preferred machine, and,
the license will soon expire if not used.
Green The operator has an active license for the allocated machine
but the allocated machine is not the preferred machine.
Yellow The operator only has an inactive license for the allocated
machine.
Crew
Yellow The operator is doing overtime this shift.
Transport Vehicle
Black The maximum vehicle has less than the maximum number
of machines allocated.
Blue The transport vehicle has the maximum number of

machines allocated.
Yellow Either:
The machine is allocated to a transport vehicle whose run
does not include the shift change destination of the
machine.
Or:
The truck is locked to more than one Loading Tool and the
locked Loading Tools are allocated to different transport
vehicles
Grey The transport vehicle is not available for transport allocation.

GUI Page Reference
Color Description
Red One of the following.

• The number of machines allocated to the transport
vehicle exceeds the maximum allowed.
• An allocated Loading Tool, Auxiliary machine, or
Processor’s shift change destination is no longer in the
run for the allocated transport vehicle.
• An allocated Truck’s possible shift change destinations
are not compatible with the transport vehicle’s run
according to the current transport allocation rules.
Shift Change Destination
Red Either
The machine is not yet allocated.
Or:
The shift change destination for the machine is not in a run
for the allocated transport vehicle.
Shift Change Finder

Shift Change Finder allows you to view current shift change allocations.
To open Shift Change Finder, select Contents > Management Pages > Shift
Change Finder.
The tab representing this page displays Shift Changes.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Shift
Change Finder.
Shift Change Finder
Field Description
Shift Date Displays the date of the shift.
Shift Identifier Displays the type of shift, for example, day shift.
Crew Displays the crew for this shift.
Unallocated Displays the names of unallocated personnel on this

Personnel shift.
Unallocated Displays a list of unallocated machines for this shift.

Machines
Excluded Displays the names of any personnel excluded from

Personnel this shift.

GUI Page Reference
Site Awareness Monitor

Supervisor settings
The following settings need to be configured in Supervisor before running
Site Awareness Monitor. Refer to your Fleet Administration & Configuration
Manual, Supervisor Reference section for more information.
Options > System Options > PitLink > Comms Services
• Under Active Services click the logging, tmac and multicast check boxes.
• Under TMAC Settings set the TMAC MTU field to 1470.
• Under TMAC Multicast Settings – TMAC Multicast TTL set the TTL (Time
To Live Multicast field to 4.
Options > System Options > PitLink > Machine Broadcast
Select the Enable Machine Broadcast check box.
If you enable unicast delivery on this page you must define a new URL called
Machine Broadcast on the Onboard tab of the Machine Editor page in the
office software.
Opening Site Awareness Monitor
Site Awareness Monitor allows you to monitor machine positions around the
mine site.
To open Site Awareness Monitor, select Contents > Diagnostics Pages>
Site Awareness Monitor.
The tab representing this page displays Site Awareness Monitor. The page
has three sections:
• Summary - providing an overview of the status of all monitored mobile
equipment on the site.
• Detail - providing specific information on the location and messaging
performance of a particular machine.
• Map - providing a visual guide to the location of equipment and the
performance of the network.
Beware that accumulating large quantities of data will consume large
amounts of memory and CPU time, so use this capability sensibly, and
not on the main server.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Site

Awareness Monitor.
Site Awareness Monitor - Summary section
Items Description
Machine Displays the name of the machine. It is colored blue if

the machine supports PositionReport2 messaging,
black otherwise.
Arrival Time Displays the time at which the office received the last
position update from this machine. The color changes
gradually from black to red as the available information
becomes less current.
Latency Displays the difference between the time the latest

message arrived in the office (according to the office
clock) and the time at which it was sent from the
machine (according to the on-board clock). It is color-
coded using the scale presented at the bottom of the
Map panel at the bottom of the screen.
Accuracy Displays the reported gps accuracy from the machine.

Displayed in colors as follows.
<= 0.8m Black (High Accuracy)
<= 1.4m Blue (Medium Accuracy)
<= 4.0m Green (Low Accuracy
< 100m Red (Very Low Accuracy)
>=100m Red (No Fix)
Reason Displays the reason for the inaccuracy.
Infra Specifies that the machine is not an infrastructure

component.
Off Indicates whether the machine has sent in a Shutdown

or Shutdown2 message, or has been marked as Off in
the office. This is automatically reset once a new
PositionUpdate message is received from the machine.
Heartbeat Indicates whether or not the machine is delivering PR2

Lost messages within the nominated timeToReport included
in the message.
AMP Timeout Indicates that the machine has NOT reported an AMP
Timeout.
Stopped Displays a "tick" if the machine has indicated it is

stopped.
Reversing Displays a "tick" if the machine has indicated it is

reversing.

GUI Page Reference
Site Awareness Monitor - Summary section
Items Description
Autonomous Indicates whether or not the machine is capable of

operating in autonomous mode.
Operate Displays whether or not the machine can operate

Around around autonmous machines.
Autonomous
Machines
Site Awareness Monitor - Detail section
Item Description
Age Indicates the time since the last PositionUpdate was

received for this machine.
Machine Displays the name of this machine.
ID Displays the machine ID.
Arrival Time Displays the time at which the message was received in
the office, according to the office clock.
Elapsed Displays the elapsed time between the receipt of hte

previous PositionUpdate and the current
PositionUpdate.
Time to Next Displays the time remaining until the next

Report PositionUpdate is due.
Time buffer Displays the system-wide setting providing some

tolerance when determining if a message is overdue or
a machine is out of contact.
Next Update Displays the time at which the next update is due.
Mode Displays the machine mode.
Timestamp Displays the time, according to the on-board clock, at

which the message was sent.
X, Y and Z Displays the latest reported coordinates of the machine.

rows
Last Good Displays the time, according to the on-board clock, at

Timestamp which the last good timestamp or position was received.
Last Good X, Displays the X, Y, and Z positions when the last good
Y, Z rows timestamp or position was received.
Speed Displays the most recently reported speend of the

machine.

GUI Page Reference
Site Awareness Monitor - Detail section
Item Description
Heading Displays the most recently reported heading of the

machine.
Latest Displays the type of the previous PositionUpdate

Message received for this machine.
Previous Displays the type of the latest PositionUpdate received

Message for this machine.
Latency Used to identify particular machines or locations in the

mine where communications may be poor.
• Mean - The average latency for all machines at all
locations in the mine.
• Machine - Latency associated with this machine.
• Location - Latency associated with the location of
this machine.
PR2 Lag The difference in expected and actual PositionReport2

timestamps. This can be used to identify particular
machines or locations in the mine that are related to
slow position updates.
• Mean - The average PR2 lag for all machines at all
locations in the mine.
• Machine - PR2 lag associated with this machine.
• Location - PR2 lag associated with the location of
this machine.
Map section
The Map panel on the bottom right of the screen displays the following
• the location of all monitored machines in the mine
• location of the machine selected in the summary table
• a dynamic map of PR2 lag across the mine site
• a dynamic map of Latency across the mine site
The maps of latency and PR2 provide an aid to diagnosing areas of the mine
in which communications is substandard. However, in order for them to
provide meaningful information, long runs with multiple machines are
required. In addition, you must have suitable Mine Boundaries configured in
Supervisor.
The map is color coded using a heat map that ranges from Blue (good) to
Red (bad).
The map allows you to visualize latency and PR2 lag as usage patterns in the
mine change. It takes time to learn where data is most dense and will evolve

GUI Page Reference
over time with changes in the modeled parameter and in mine usage
patterns.
You can reset the map by closing the user interface. The statistical models
on which the map is based are hosted in the server and will continue to
accumulate data for the life of CommsController.
The last and previous messages from the machine are displayed on the
Messages tab in the Map section.
Site Editor
Site Editor displays a graphical representation of the site and its various road
segments and waypoints.
To open Site Editor, select Contents > Management Pages > Site Editor.
The Site Editor tab represents this page.
You are able to perform many tasks on this page by using either the menu
bar or the tool bar, and can read more about Site Editor and its functionality
in the Machine Tracking chapter.
The following table describes the tool bar buttons displayed on Site Editor.
Item Description
Selection Allows you to select toolbar or menu options, or

click on objects on the screen. Allows you to draw
a bounding box around objects to select them.
Pan Allows the screen to be ’grabbed’ and moved to

change the view.
Zoom Mode Allows you to draw a window around an area you

wish to zoom in on.
Measure Allows you to measure the distance between two

entities. Distance is shwon at the bottom of the
screen.
Fit to Page Changes the display to fit all data in the window in
plan view.
Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the center of the display.
Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out from the center of the
display.
Rotate Allows you to rotate the view 360 degrees

clockwise about the center of the display.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Layers Editor Allows you to control the:

• display of various items such as road
• display of items, and change the location and
size of the label.
• selectability of items.
Search for Entities Allows you to search for road segments and
waypoints.
Viewpoints Editor Allows you to add viewpoints.
Keyboard Interface Displays the keyboard shortcuts.
Load DXF fileor Allows you to import a .dxf file to overlay the
image file as a current display.
background
Show Field Allows you to plot messages of various types from

Message Positional machines in the field.
Data
Configure Display Allows you to configure the way machine field

of Field Message data is displayed.
Positional Data
Create Hazard
Waypoint at Allows you to create a hazard waypoint manually.
Location - Site The waypoint will be sent to the machine, and the
Editor only machine is expected to display the waypoint.
Create Waypoint Allows you to create the following types of

waypoint:
• Square
• Rectangle
• Hexagon
• Freeform
The elevation, or "Z" coordinate of the centroid of
the waypoint is determined by interpolations from
the imported .dxf data. If no .dxf data exists, a
value of zero is used.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Create Road Allows you to draw a new road. The elevation, or

"Z" coordinate of the road is automatically
interpolated from the .dxf data that has been used
as a background. If no .dxf data has been
imported, an elevation of zero is assigned to all
points on the road.
Edit Polygon Points Allows you to:

• edit the points on the polygon (waypoint)
• move individual points on the polygon
• resize the polygon
• rotate the polygon
• move the polygon

GUI Page Reference
Keyboard Commands
• u = undo previous action Layer keys - toggles following layers:

• Shift + U - redo the last undo • 0 - background
• Ctrl + z - undo previous action • 1 - message positions
• Ctrl + Shift - Z - redo last undo • 2 - waypoints
• M - rotate clockwise about "Y" axis • 3 - roads
• I - rotate anticlockwise about "Y" axis • 4 - mining blocks
• L - rotate clockwise about "X" axis • 5 - destinations
• J - rotate anticlockwise about "X" axis • Arrow keys - pan in each of the four
• X- front elevation view directions
• Y - side elevation view • Alt + drag horizontally - zoom in (move

mouse right) or out (move mouse left)
• S - when in point entry mode "snaps" to DXF
data nearest to the center of the cross-hair. • Ctrl + drag - pan
• + zoom in • Esc - completes an object in point entry mode

or clears the selection if not in point entry
• - zoom out mode and something is selected
• c - center on cursor • Double Click - completes object creation
• C - center on selected object and lock to it •
• f - fit all data to window and revert to plan view
• g -Toggle the display of the grid
• q - Rotate Clockwise
• r - repaint
• s - change to select mode (when not in point
entry mode)
• w - rotate anticlockwise
• z - switch to zoom window mode
• [ & ] - step back or forward through previous
views
•
Site Monitor
Site Monitor displays a scaled graphical representation of the mine, the
location of machines and operators. It dynamically updates machines states
and positions and mining block color changes as they occur, and allows you
to perform basic spatial editing of waypoints and road segments.
To open Site Monitor, select Contents > Management Pages > Site
Monitor.
The Site Monitor tab represents this page, although the tab name may
change depending on the page configuration you select.
Save page configurations with a new name.

GUI Page Reference
Do not save page configurations with the name Default as this will override
the system default configuration
settings.
Site Monitor allows you to edit, create, and manage objects on the site.
The following table describes the toolbar buttons displayed on Site Monitor.
Site Monitor
Item Description
Selection Allows you to select toolbar or menu options, or

a bounding box around objects to select them. To
draw the bounding box, hold the left mouse key
down and expand the box until it is large enough
to cover all the objects you want selected.
Pan Allows the screen to be ’grabbed’ and moved to

change the view.
Zoom Mode Allows you to select an object or objects and

zoom in on them by drawing a bounding box
around them
Fit to Page Changes the display to fit all data in the window in
plan view.
Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on an object.
Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out on an object.
Rotate Allows you to rotate the view 360 degrees

clockwise.
Layers Editor Allows you to control the:

• display of various items such as road
• display of items, and change the location and
size of the label.
• selection of .DXF layers to display.
• selectability of items.
Search for Entities Allows you to search for road segments and
waypoints.
Viewpoints Editor Allows you to add viewpoints.
Keyboard Interface Displays the keyboard shortcuts.

GUI Page Reference
Site Monitor
Item Description
Load DXF file as a This button allows you to load a predefined .dxf
background file as your background.
Find Path Allows you to calculate the shortest path between

two nominated locations. The locations can be
waypoints, destinations, loading tools or
processors.
Standard Message Editor

Standard Message Editor allows a user to create, edit, and view details of a
standard message.
To open Standard Message Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Standard Message Finder.
2. Select the group or message to be edited.
3. Click New.
The Standard Message Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Standard
Message Editor.
Standard Message Editor
Item Description
Message Text Displays the text that will appear in body of the sent
message.
Message Displays the title that will be displayed onboard the

Window Title equipment.
Message Type Displays the type of message window that appears on

the onboard equipment on the machine, for example,
information, warning, question, stop, error.
On Board Displays the list of possible responses to the machine

Response operator.
Office Displays a list of standard message responses from the

Response Std office to the machine operator.
Msg

GUI Page Reference
Standard Message Finder

Standard Message Finder is used to locate and view all standard messages
saved in the system, and to find specific standard messages and message
groups. The messages are displayed as a hierarchy, and you can create,
edit, and delete message groups and messages.
To open Standard Message Finder, select Contents > Setup Pages >
Standard Message Finder.
The Standard Messages tab represents this page.
Transport Vehicle Editor

Transport Vehicle Editor is used to create and maintain information about
transport vehicles.
To open Transport Vehicle Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages >
Transport Vehicle Editor.
The Transport Vehicles tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Transport
Vehicle Editor.
Transport Vehicle Editor
Item Description
Transport This panel lists the available transport vehicles

Vehicles previously created on the Details tab.
Details This tab allows you to create and edit the transport
vehicle name, description and number of seats in the
vehicle. You can also select
• Whether or not the vehicle has a dedicated driver.
• Whether or not the vehicle should be excluded
from transport allocation.
Run This tab displays a list of stations and machines that

define the run for the transport vehicle being created
or edited.
Travel Condition Assistant

Travel Condition Assistant allows you to create and edit road travel condition
records.
To open Travel Condition Assistant, select Contents > Setup Pages >
Travel Condition Assistant.
The Travel Conditions tab represents this page.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Travel

Condition Assistant.
Travel Condition Assistant
Item Description
Name Displays the name of the travel condition.
Adjustment The percentage used to adjust road travel times.

Factor
Travel Progress Monitor

Travel Progress Monitor displays the progress of trucks and assignments.
This monitor differs from many other office software monitors in that it does
not display information in a scrolling table. Instead, information about a
truck’s progress from source to sink is represented graphically and is
configurable.
To open Travel Progress Monitor, select Contents > Management Pages >
Travel Progress Monitor.
The Travel Progress tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information displayed on Travel
Progress Monitor.
Travel Progress Monitor
Item Description
Fleets This list allows the displayed machines to be filtered

by fleet.
Page You can select the following page configurations from

Configuration this list:
• Default — Displays both empty and loaded
trucks.
• Empty — Displays empty trucks only.
• Loaded — Displays loaded trucks only.
• Mobile — Displays configuration being used on
mobile client.
You are able to configure the way the page looks using the Configure Options
dialog. To do this, select the Configure Display Properties button on the
toolbar.

GUI Page Reference
The following table describes the items of information displayed on the Travel
Progress Monitor Configure Options dialog.
Travel progress monitor configuration options
Item Description
Show This list allows users to configure which machines

are displayed and in which order to display them.
Empty Trucks This tab displays the following information:

Panel Presentation panel, showing the following:
• Show Problem Bar
Select to display the problem bar.
• Show Collapsed View by Default
Select to automatically hide the truck route
when a new truck is shown for a destination. No
route or waypoint information is displayed.
• Show Tick Marks
Select to display the time-based markers on the
truck route.
• Show Icons
Select the type of icon to display for each truck,
either:
• None — No icons are displayed.
• Standard — The same truck icon is
displayed for all.
• State Aware — The truck icon updates to
reflect the current state of the truck.
Truck Annotation panel.
• Estimated Time to Arrival
Select to have the estimated arrival time shown
on the screen.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Empty Trucks Loading Tool panel, showing the following:.

Panel continued • Remaining Service Time
Select to have the remaining service time
shown on the screen. The service time is known
in advance from the machine class and loading
tool. The estimated remaining service time
starts counting down and when the time has
elapsed, the time starts counting back up. The
time is then shown in brackets, and is orange in
color to indicate a negative value.
• Material
Select to have the material loaded shown on
the screen.
• Mining Block
Select to have the mining block shown on the
screen.
• Destination
Select to have the destination shown on the
screen.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Loaded Trucks This tab displays the following information:

Panel Presentation panel, showing the following:
• Show Problem Bar
Select to display the problem bar.
• Show Collapsed View by Default
Select to automatically hide the truck route
when a new truck is shown for a destination. No
route or waypoint information is displayed.
• Show Tick Marks
Select to display the time-based markers on the
truck route.
• Show Icons
Select the type of icon to display for each truck,
either:
• None — No icons are displayed.
• Standard — The same truck icon is
displayed for all.
• State Aware — The truck icon updates to
reflect the current state of the truck.
Truck Annotation panel.
• Estimated Time to Arrival
Select to have the estimated arrival time shown
on the screen.
• Material
Select to have the material loaded shown on
the screen.
• Mining Block
Select to have the mining block shown on the
screen.
• Payload
Select to have the payload shown on the
screen.

GUI Page Reference
Item Description
Advanced This tab displays the following information:

Fleet Selection List
Select the machines in the fleet to display.
Colors
Select the colors to use on each area of the page.
Refresh Times
Displays the refresh times for the display and
layout.
• Display — How often, in seconds, the display is
refreshed.
• Layout — How often, in seconds, the machine
origins are refreshed. This can be viewed by
clicking on the file icons on the left.
Travel progress colors are displayed on Travel Progress Monitor.

The following table describes the colors used to indicate machine states.
Travel progress monitor colors
Color Description
Green Arrived/Arriving Soon.
Blue Dumping/Loading.
Orange Late/Off course.
Pink Never.
Red Not assignable.
Dull Green Not Available
Gray On delay.
Truck Assistant
Truck Assistant displays machine, assignment and event details for any
truck. You can select destinations, servers and materials in preparation for a
manual assignment. The information displayed depends on the page
configuration you select.

GUI Page Reference
To open Truck Assistant, either:

• Select Contents > Management Pages > Truck Assistant, or
• Double-click the truck in Fleet Update Assistant.
The Truck tab represents this page.
The following table describes each tab on Truck Assistant.
Truck Assistant
Tab Description
General Displays general detail as follows:

• Operator of the truck.
• Job code.
• Truck state.
• Loading tool last assigned to.
• Current loaded material.
• Material determination.
• Waypoint location.
• Current loaded mining block.
Assign Displays details about the manual assignment as

follows:
• Status of the truck.
• Current assignment details.
• Manual assignment options.
Scheduled Displays details about scheduled assignments,

Assignment including:
• Truck the scheduled assignment is for.
• Any action to be taken.
• Load state.
• Destinations.
• On-arrival delay type.
• Scheduled assignment.
Restrictions Displays details about any restrictions on Loading

Tools, Processors and Groups. Colours are indicated in
the table below.

GUI Page Reference
Truck Assistant
Tab Description
Fuel Displays details about fuel-related configuration items

as follows:
• Current fuel level status and estimate.
• Last refuel quantity and estimate.
• Duration between refuels.
Shift Change Displays details about default and planned shift

changes.
The following table describes the colors used to indicate machine

restrictions, as shown on the Restrictions tab.
Restrictions colors
Color Description
Black Unrestricted.
Blue Lock.
Green Provisional Lock.
Orange Provisional Bar.
Red Bar.
Trucking Indication
Trucking Indication displays, for each digging machine, the number of trucks
allocated to that machine, as well as the number of trucks required to utilize
that machine at its maximum capacity. Allocated, in Trucking Indication, is a
measure of hauling capacity required to fully utilize the production from a
digging machine. It does not refer to actual trucks at a specific time. This is in
contrast with Assigned, which is the number of trucks with an assignment to
a particular loading unit, and Allowed, which is the number of trucks in an
assignment group that are not barred from a loading unit by material type,
processor being used or specific bars or locks to other units.
To open Trucking Indication, select Contents > Management Pages >
Trucking Indication. It is a monitoring page only.
The Trucking Indication tab represents this page. If you have various
assignment groups set up, you will have different tabs for each assignment
group showing trucking indication for that group, as well as a Total tab,
showing trucking indication for all machines. You can set up assignment
groups using Assignment Group Editor on page 4.22.
Set-up and configuration of the fields for Trucking Indication is done in
Supervisor. Refer to the Fleet Administration & Configuration manual for

GUI Page Reference
more information.You are also able to configure the colors you wish to use for
Over Trucked, Under Trucked and Trucked in Supervisor.
The following table describes the items of information on Trucking Indication.
Trucking Indication
Item Description
Rehandle A list that gives you the choice of being able to

choose between viewing the current trucking for
digging tools, digging Prime, Rehandle or All
materials,
Average Truck The average capacity of trucks in the fleet.

Capacity
Assignment A list of assignment groups set up using Assignment

Group Group Editor. Each assignment group is shown on a
different tab. You can filter by assignment group on
the “Total” tab.
Loading Tool The machine assigned to load trucks.
Processor The area to which the Loading Tool is going.
Materials The materials being dug.
Computed Max The number of trucks required to utilize the digging

machinery at its maximum capacity. This could be
less than the digging rate of the machine if the
maximum possible is constrained by the production
plan, or by the maximum throughput possible at the
sink of this material.
Current (Target) The current number of trucks utilizing the digging

machinery at its maximum capacity.
Predicted Usage The number of trucks that the existing LP solution will
target. Even in an over-trucked situation for a
particular digging machine, e.g. more trucks than
necessary are locked to it, or the entire area is over-
trucked in general, this number cannot exceed the
Computed Max, as the assignment engine only
regards units as having been assigned the maximum
possible.
En route The instantaneous number of trucks currently asigned

to or from a particular loading tool.
Exclusive The number of trucks that are useable by that piece

of digging machinery alone. This is either because
they are locked to only that machine, they are locked
to a material type that only that machine is digging, or
they are barred from other machines.

GUI Page Reference
Trucking Indication
Item Description
Shared The number of trucks that are available to this digging

machine that are not available to all units – whether
because of multiple locks, bars or material type locks.
A truck locked to multiple digging machines is shown
against all the units it is locked to, so the column does
not reflect anything to do with the total number of
trucks. A truck barred from only one digging machine
shows up as a Shared asset against all the other
digging machines.
Available The total number of trucks available from the fleet,

allowing for locks and bars for the machines in that
fleet. If a particular area is over-trucked, there will be
more trucks Available in that area than is required by
the Computed Max.
Coverage The percentage of trucks assigned or locked to a

machine and the number that could be assigned
there to fully utilize the unit. For example, a loader
with 15 trucks locked to it, that could at most use 12
trucks, has Coverage of 125%. A loader that could
use 10 trucks to be fully utilized, but only has nine
trucks assigned has Coverage of 90%.
User Editor
User Editor allows you to create and view users. You can view all active and
inactive users.
To open User Editor, select Contents > Setup Pages > User Editor.
The Users tab represents this page. The page has a table in the top section
showing details of existing users.
The following table describes the items of information on User Editor.
User Editor
Tab Description
General This tab displays the following information:

• User ID — The identifier the user logs on with.
• Name — The user’s name.
• Email — The user’s email address.
Password This tab displays the following information:

• Password — The user’s password.
• Change Password — Change and confirm the
user’s password.

GUI Page Reference
User Editor
Tab Description
Profile This tab displays the following information:

• Roles — Security roles the user has been
assigned.
Account This tab displays the following information:

• Account check box — Selected if the user’s
account is currently active.
• Reason inactive — A reason for the account
being inactive.
Waypoint Assistant
Waypoint Assistant allows you to create, edit, copy, view, and delete
Waypoint settings.
To open Waypoint Assistant, select Contents > Setup Pages > Waypoint
Assistant.
The Waypoints tab represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Waypoint Assistant.
Waypoint Assistant
Field Description
Name Displays the name of the waypoint.
Active Displays a “tick” if the waypoint is active.
Type Describes the type of the waypoint.
Loading Tool or Displays the machine type at the waypoint.

Processor
Destination Displays the waypoint destination.
Reassignmt Displays a “ tick” if the machine is to be

reassigned when empty.
Reassignfull Displays a “tick” if the machine is to be

reassigned when loaded.
ID Displays the ID number of the waypoint.
Color Displays the color the waypoint will show as on

the site model.
On Entry Displays a “ tick” if the machine has entered the

waypoint and a position report has been sent to
the office software

GUI Page Reference
Waypoint Assistant
Field Description
On Exit Displays a “ tick” if the machine has left the

waypoint and a position report has been sent to
the office software
Nr Points Displays the number of points on the waypoint.
Route Point Displays the X, Y and Z coordinates and unit of

measure of the waypoint.
Route Point Internal Displays a “tick” if the route point is internal.
Area Displays the total area of the waypoint.
Clockwise Displays a “tick” if the waypoint is a clockwise

polygon
Missed Count Displays the number of waypoints the machine

has missed.
Waypoint Editor
Waypoint Editor allows you to create, and edit Waypoint settings.
To open Waypoint Editor:
1. Select Contents > Setup Pages > Waypoint Assistant.
2. Click New.
The Waypoint Editor dialog represents this page.
The following table describes the items of information on Waypoint Editor.
Waypoint Editor
Field Description
Name Displays the name of the waypoint.
Description Displays a description of the waypoint.
General This tab contains information on the following:

• The loading tool or processor at the waypoint, its
destination and ID.
• The waypoint missed count.
• The type of waypoint and its color.
• Whether the machine is reassigned when loaded or
empty.
• Whether the machine is sent on entry or exit.
Geometry Describes the type and geometry of the waypoints.

GUI Page Reference

Concepts and Reference
Introduction to concepts and reference
Introduction to concepts and reference

This chapter provides conceptual and reference information related to using
Fleet.
Activities
An activity is something a machine is doing, that can be reported on. For
example, common activities for trucks include queuing and travelling.
Activities cannot overlap with delays.
Alarms
Alarms notify you of significant operational events which may require a
response by you.
The office software determines the severity and priority of the alarm. It also
provides default alarm types and actions, which can be configured to suit the
requirements of the mine site.
Alarm priorities
The following table describes the colors, priorities and user responses
required when managing alarms.
Color Priority Response

Red 5 — Urgent • Action must be taken immediately.
• Always for safety issues.
Orange 4 — High • Action should be taken as soon as possible.
Blue 3 — Medium • Action may not be required.

• Alarm should be noted.
Black 2 — Low • Usually no action required.

• Information only.
The priority “1” has been reserved for future development.

Urgent priority alarms
When an urgent priority alarm is issued, the office software notifies users
both audibly and visually. An alert sound is played and Alarm Monitor is
opened immediately and displayed in front of all other office software pages
for immediate viewing. You are not able to turn off either the visual or audio
alert.

Alarms
High priority alarms

When a high priority alarm is issued a popup window is not displayed and a
sound is only played if Alarm Monitor is already open.
Alarm attributes
The following table describes the attributes of alarms.
Attribute Description
Name Name of the alarm.
Description Description of the alarm.
Comment Comment associated with the alarm.
Start Time Date and time that the alarm was raised (started).
End Time The date and time that the alarm ended.
Source The entity against which the alarm was raised.
Type The alarm type.
Priority name A numerical value indicating how quickly the alarm

should be actioned, that is, how important it is.
Occurrences The number of times that the same alarm was raised
against the same machine before it was closed.
Severity A numerical value indicating the impact of this alarm on

the system.
Alarm Type Name of alarm type at the time the alarm was raised.
Name
How the office software handles alarms

If an alarm of the same type is already open for the same machine, the office
software does not create a duplicate alarm. Instead, a counter (occurrences
property of the firm alarm) is automatically incremented for each one. For
example, if a truck already has an open off-course alarm, another off-course
alarm is not raised for that truck until the first one is closed, but the counter is
incremented. This minimizes the number of alarms raised.

Assignment
The office software can be configured to respond automatically to some

alarms as follows:
• Acknowledge a specific alarm type.
• Reject a specific alarm type.
• Close an alarm that is no longer relevant. For example, a low fuel alarm is
automatically closed when the machine refuels.
• Acknowledge an alarm when it is closed if it has not been previously
acknowledged.
• Close an alarm when it is rejected (it is negatively acknowledged in this
case).
To configure alarms to be resolved automatically you must contact a Fleet
consultant.
Depending on the severity, an alarm type can be configured to close at the
end of a shift so that they are not carried over to the next shift.
Assignment
Assignment provides truck operators with instructions called assignments
that are shown on an on-board display.
An assignment will be to either travel to a loading tool to load an empty truck,
travel to a destination to unload a loaded truck, or travel to a station so that
the operator can perform some other activity or some task can be performed
on the truck.
An assignment includes a list of waypoints to the assigned destination.
For each truck that is specified as being available for assignment,
Assignment will
• Monitor all activity by the truck and the status of scheduled assignments
for the truck to determine when it is necessary to generate a new
assignment for the truck.
• When necessary, generate an assignment for the truck according to the
constraints defined in the mine model, the restrictions defined for mine
equipment, and the current production requirements.
• Transmit the generated assignment to the truck.
Assignments generated for a truck due to standard events such as a truck
beginning to unload are called Automatic Assignments.
Assignments generated due to a user specifying a single target for a truck
are called Manual Assignments.
A Scheduled assignment is a predefined assignment that is activated when
predefined conditions are met. Conditions may include whether the truck is
empty or loaded and a time window during which the assignment needs to be
generated.
Assignment does not consider one truck in isolation when generating
assignments. In providing an optimal assignment for a truck, a solution is
generated that simultaneously identifies assignments for all trucks likely to be

Assignment
competing for resources with the truck in question, either at a loading tool or
at a processor.
For example, if a truck is seeking an assignment to a loading tool then other
trucks whose next assignment request will also be to travel to an excavator
are also considered. In this way, a supposedly good assignment isn't
generated for one truck at the expense of subsequent trucks. Although not
necessarily the best solution for the truck in question, the assignment will be
the best solution for the current production requirements.
Definitions
Assignment actions
Action Definition
Dump At Loaded truck to dump at processor
Load At Empty truck to load at excavator
Travel To Loaded or empty truck to travel to a station
Assignment status
Status Definition
Automatic Assignment automatically determined considering
mine model constraints and restrictions
Manual Assignment explicitly specified via Explorer
Required Will not usually be seen within Explorer as this status

occurs for very short periods of time during which an
assignment is being generated
Not Assigned There is no current assignment for the truck

Assignment
Assignment reasons and triggers
Reason Priority Trigger Type Assignment Assignment

Start Finish
Critical Fuel Urgent Fuel Level Scheduled • Critical Fuel • Immediate
Level* Automatic Level event Assignment
generated by
• Re Tope or Truck
Fuel
Assistant
Monitoring
Assignment
Request
• Deleted via
Scheduled
Assignment
Monitor
Immediate Medium Manual Immediate • Press of • Another

Assignment Manual button on Immediate
Truck Assignment
Assistant
• Truck Assistant
Assignment
Request
Load Normal Start Immediate • Trucks • Immediate

Assignment Dumping or Automatic changes state Assignment
Request End Dumping to Dumping
• Assignment
• Delay ended Request
by an empty
truck

Assignment

Start Finish
Material Normal Material Immediate • Load report • Immediate
Change Change Automatic sent by Assignment
excavator if no
• Assignment
assignment
Request
yet generated
for truck being
loaded
• Assignment
already
generated for
the truck and
the material
predicted in
the
assignment is
different than
the material
specified in
the load report
• Material is
changed by
the office
software
Operator
Material Normal Grade Block Immediate • Grade Block • Immediate

Change Change Automatic changes due Assignment
to a load
• Assignment
report or by
Request
the office
software
Operator
Off-Course High Waypoint Immediate • Entry of truck • Immediate

Assignment Name Automatic into a route Assignment
Request waypoint that
• Assignment
is not part of
Request
the current
automatic
assignment
route
Re- Medium Waypoint Immediate • Entry of truck • Immediate

Assignment Name Automatic into a Assignment
Request Reassignment
• Assignment
waypoint
Request

Assignment

Start Finish
Refuel * Low Start Loading, Scheduled • Refuel event • Immediate
End Loading, Automatic generated by Assignment
Start Fuel
• Re, Tope or Truck
Dumping or Monitoring
Assistant
End Dumping
Assignment
Request
• Deleted via
Scheduled
Assignment
Monitor
Scheduled for Low Start Service Scheduled • Time period • Immediate

first specified or Automatic commenced Assignment
state change and truck
End Service • Re Tope or Truck
within time changes to
Assistant
period specified state
Assignment
change
Request
• Deleted via
Scheduled
Assignment
Monitor
"Scheduled Low Manual Scheduled • Truck changes • Immediate

for next Manual to specified Assignment
specified state
• Deleted via
state change
Scheduled
Assignment
Monitor
Scheduled for Low Start Loading, Scheduled • Time period • Immediate

specified time End Loading, Automatic commenced Assignment
period Start
Dumping or
Assistant
End Dumping Assignment
Request
Shift Change Start Loading, Scheduled • As necessary • Immediate

* End Loading, Automatic so that Assignment
Start assignment
Dumping or expected to be
Assistant
End Dumping complete by
Assignment
time specified
Request
for the Shift
Change • Deleted via
Scheduled
Assignment
Monitor

Assignment

Start Finish
Tope Medium Operator Immediate • Press of • Immediate
Assignment Request Automatic button on Tope Assignment
Request
• Assignment
Request
Truck Medium Office Immediate • Press of • Immediate

Assistant Request Automatic button on Assignment
Assignment Truck
• Assignment
Request Assistant
Request
Unload Normal Start Loading Immediate • Appropriate • Immediate

Assignment or Automatic event occurs Assignment
Request as configured
End Loading • Assignment
for the
Request
excavator
loading the
truck, for
example truck
changes state
to Loading
• Delay ended
by a loaded
truck
Using Assignment
Defining the mine model for assignment
Assignments are generated to best meet the current production
requirements.
While the mine model always exists, the mine model needs to be reviewed at
the start of a shift and changed as necessary during the course of a shift.
Excavators
The following excavator (loading tool) related attributes are used by
assignment when generating assignments for trucks, (see Creating loaders
on page 10.28).
• Excavator control options.
• Assign material to load.
• Assign at start of loading.
• Assign if material set during loading.
• Assign at end of loading with predicted material.

Assignment
• Allowed truck classes.
• Allowed truck class load times.
• Excavator efficiency.
Note: A material can be set by the office software Operator using the Truck
Assistant or if a dipper message is received from the excavator that is
loading the truck. A load report also sets the material but will not
usually be received while the truck is still in the loading state. When
the truck is traveling loaded, an assignment will always be generated
if necessary if the material is set. If an assignment is not allowed at
the end of loading using a predicted material, an assignment will only
be automatically generated if the material is set during loading or a
load report is received from the excavator that loaded the truck.
Processors
The following processor related attributes are used by assignment when
generating assignments for trucks, (see Creating processors on page 10.23).
• Processor Control options.
• Allowed truck class unload times.
• Processor efficiency.

Assignment
Road Segments
The following road segment related attributes are used by assignment when
generating assignments for trucks, (see Creating road segments on
page 10.70).
• Allowed truck class travel times
Sink Destinations
The following sink destination related attributes are used by assignment
when generating assignments for trucks, (see Creating destinations on
page 10.75).
Source Destinations
The following source destination related attributes are used by assignment
when generating assignments for trucks, (see Creating destinations on
page 10.75).
Truck Classes
The following truck related attributes are used by assignment when
generating assignments for trucks, (see Creating trucks on page 10.14).
• Allowed materials
Excavator and Processor Efficiency sliders

The setting on the efficiency sliders can have a significant impact on
assignments calculated. The sliders should be checked if the assignments
are not utilizing a loading tool or a processor as expected.
Note: Dynamic utilization may reset the efficiency sliders and cause
problems in assignment. If dynamic utilization is enabled and a
loading tool or a processor is not getting assignments as expected,
the efficiency slider should be checked to see what current values are
being used. If the values are incorrect they can be corrected by
manually sending trucks to the loading tool or processor. It is
recommended that dynamic utilization be turned off after a mine
upgrade until the assignment system has stable performance.
Specifying the requirements for the shift

Assignments are generated to meet the current production requirements
using the current mine model.
Use the Production Requirements Monitor and Production Requirements
Monitor Editor to define the active production requirements set (PRS). See

Assignment
Managing production requirements on page 6.29 for details.

The active PRS can be defined by
• Changing the current active PRS.
• Using a finished PRS.
• Using a saved template.
• Entering a new PRS.
If no production requirements are specified, assignments will be generated to
maximize the amount of material loaded into trucks and then minimize the
travel time for loaded and empty trucks.
Materials
Each material may be defined as being a priority material using the Material
tab of the Production Requirements Editor.
Monitoring truck assignments

The Truck tab in the Fleet Update Assistant is used to monitor truck
assignments.
Intervention
Manual assignment
A scheduled assignment may no longer be appropriate because
circumstances have changed. For example, a scheduled manual assignment
for a truck to be refueled the next time the truck dumps may no longer be
appropriate because in the meantime a different truck had to be
unexpectedly sent to be refueled due to a critical fuel level alarm, which
would result in a queue at the fueling station.
An automatic assignment of a loaded truck may no longer be appropriate
due to an unscheduled delay at a crusher.
In such cases, the office software Operator may intervene and issue a
manual assignment via the Assign tab of the Truck Assistant. See Creating
assignments on page 6.2 for more details.
From the Fleet Update Assistant, the Assign tab of the Truck Assistant can
be directly accessed by double-clicking any column. Alternatively, the Truck
Assistant can be accessed from the Fleet Update Assistant by right-clicking
and then clicking Open Assistant.
Automatic reassignment
Reassignment waypoints
Reassignment waypoints may be placed throughout the mine. A waypoint
may optionally be defined as being a reassignment waypoint.
Reassignment waypoints cause the office software to consider whether the
current assignment for the truck is still the best assignment.
Reassignment waypoints typically are placed at strategic points in the mine
such as just before major intersections or either end of roads that are
typically quite congested so that trucks are slowed down due to slower traffic.

Assignment
Separate flags can be set for loaded and empty trucks. The Waypoint
Assistant can be used to modify these flags. See Creating waypoints on
page 10.66 for more details.
Do not specify every waypoint as a reassignment waypoint as this will cause
excessive processing within the office software. A good rule of thumb is to
have around 1 in 10 waypoints defined as being reassignment waypoints.
Reassignment due to a truck off course
Each time a truck sends a position report including a waypoint to the office
software, a check is made to see if the truck is following it's current
assignment. If the waypoint is not one of the waypoints on the remaining path
for the current assignment, the truck is off course and an alarm is raised. A
new assignment is generated for the optimal excavator or processor given
the trucks current positions are defined by the last waypoint the truck
entered. If the new assignment is different to the current assignment, the
assignment is displayed on the truck's on-board display.
Miscellaneous work
For tasks such as road building, there may be a requirement for trucks to be
loaded at a destination that is usually a dump and for the loaded trucks to
dump on the side of a road.
This is called Miscellaneous Work in the office software.
It is recommended that one or more destinations be created that are used for
Miscellaneous Work. When required, the bounding waypoints of one of these
destinations are changed to be on or more waypoints closest to where trucks
need to be loaded. Typically this would be near a road intersection or the end
of a road segment.
Using the Loader Editor, the miscellaneous work destination is then made the
current destination of the loader that will be loading the trucks for the
miscellaneous work.
Scheduled assignment
A scheduled assignment is an assignment that is defined automatically by
the office software based on the mine model, but also includes some specific
overrides.
A scheduled assignment is defined to activate at a specific time and/or load
state in the future. If the scheduled assignment is triggered by load state, it
will be triggered first at the end of service similar to an automatic assignment.
This is determined by either:
• The office software user-supplied override details, or
• An operator request to override some details.

Assignment
Load state only

An assignment can be defined to activate when a specific load state
condition is met. For example, traveling empty.
This type of scheduled assignment:
• Is often referred to in the office software as a scheduled manual
assignment.
• Can be queued in a specific user-defined order.
• Disables off–course detection until the assignment is complete.
• Is automatically cancelled (if still active) and deleted when the associated
truck is manually assigned.
• Is only considered terminated (that is, the state is set to Finished) when
the truck changes to the appropriate load state for the completion of the
assignment.
• May have other details overridden by the user.
If a truck operator considers a more efficient assignment possible a request
for the issue to be reassigned can be requested, if the operator has the
necessary permissions.
Load state and time

An assignment can be defined to activate when a specific load state
condition and a specific time are met. For example, lunch breaks, tie down
and refueling.
This type of scheduled assignment:
• Is often referred to in the office software as a scheduled manual
assignment.
• May have other details overridden by the user.
Backup assignments
A backup assignment is an assignment given to a truck when it is assigned
to a processor at a sink destination (that is, a dump) where the radio
communications may not be very reliable. If the dump is beyond normal radio
coverage this can cause a truck to not be able to receive a valid assignment
at the time of dumping. The backup assignment is automatically sent to the
truck before the truck enters the unreliable radio communication area.
To enable the office software to detect truck entry into destinations where
communications may be an issue, the office software Operator needs to go
to the Destination Editor and select the Bad Communications check box for
the destinations that are known to be in unreliable communications areas.
See To create a destination for more information.
The office software only sends a backup assignment automatically when
destinations are sinks (e.g. dumps). If you have a source or station
destination in an area with unreliable communications, and you select Bad
Communications the office software will not take any automatic action. You
can, however, leave the bad communications check box selected in the

Assignment
Destination Editor, as mine sites are forever changing, and the source or
station destination may one day become a sink.
The office software tracks each truck’s entry into a destination. Whenever a
truck enters an assigned dump destination where unreliable communication
is expected, the office software sends a backup assignment to the truck’s on-
board TOPE system on the Fleet for CD550 or Fleet for CMPD. The TOPE
system keeps this assignment and doesn’t display it unless the truck
completes dumping without having received a new assignment from the
office software.
Assignment groups
Assignment group has two meanings in Fleet, depending on the context, as
follows:
• Assignment group — the collective term for specific types of groups, such
as Assignment groups and Shift change groups. These are managed
using the Assignment Groups page.
• Assignment group — the collective term for a group of machines used in
an assignment.
Machines can be in more than one assignment group.
Events that trigger creation of assignments

Some events that trigger the creation of an assignment for a truck are:
• Ending a delay.
• Loading state change.
• Dumping state change.
• Manual assignment by the office.
• Assignment request from either the truck or the office.
• Truck is detected as off–course (not following its current assignment).
• Load report from the loading tool where the material in the load report is
different from the material the truck was assigned to carry.

Assignment
Entities considered when calculating an assignment

Fleet considers the following entities when calculating assignments:
• All loading tools and their types.
• All trucks (machines) and their types.
• All processors.
• All materials.
• All waypoints and their attributes.
• All road segments and their truck class attributes.
• Travel times for each truck class.
• Travel times between all of the destinations.
• Time it takes each truck class to be loaded by the loading tools.
• Time it takes each truck class to dump.
• Time it takes crushers, etc., to process the load dumped.
• Materials available at the face for each loading tool.
• Materials each loading tool can currently work.
• Materials allowed to be unloaded at the processors.
• All machines on delay.
• All machines coming off delay in the near future.
• Materials flagged as priority.
• Current destinations of all loading tools.
• Current destinations of all processors.
• Current state of each truck – traveling, loading, unloading and the load
status (empty or material type).
• Expected arrival times of each truck.
• Queue length at sources or sinks.
• Current scheduled assignments.
Rules for managing assignments

The following information describes some of the rules for managing
assignments.
A truck can only be:
• Assigned to load at a compatible loading tool.
• Assigned to unload at a compatible processor.
• Assigned to processors that are on delay, where the delay will have
finished by the time the truck arrives.
• Assigned to travel on road segments that are not on delay.
• Assigned to travel on road segments that are allowed for that truck.

Assignment
A compatible server (loading tool or processor) for a truck is one that:

• Is not on delay.
• Has a non-zero unload time specified for the truck class.
• Has a route for the truck class from the current waypoint of the truck to the
processor.
• Has the trucks loaded material as an allowed material.
• There are at least two assignments per cycle in the same assignment
group.

Assignment
Assignment attributes
The following table describes the attributes for assignments.
Attributes Description
Truck Name of the truck to receive this assignment.
Time Start time of the assignment.
Assign to Name of the loading tool to which this truck is assigned.
Type Type of assignment.
Reason Purpose of the assignment.
Action Work being done during this assignment.

Valid values are:
• To load — assignment will be generated the next time
the truck is empty.
• To dump — assignment will be generated the next
time the truck is loaded.
• To travel — assignment will be generated according
to the load state value specified.
Load with If action is to load — name of material to be loaded by

the loading tool into the truck.
On arrival If a scheduled assignment — type of delay that is

delay type associated with the truck’s arrival at the destination.
Load state If a scheduled assignment — the state of the truck.

Valid values are:
• Full.
• Empty
Destinations Destination for the assignment.
Material Material to be loaded/unloaded at the specified

destination.
Manual Indicates that this is a manual assignment (has user-

defined overrides).
Creator User who specified the load state and/or time overrides.

Assignment
Activation time Time when the scheduled assignment was activated.
Arrival times Specifies constraints for the arrival time.

Valid values are:
• Required at — truck must arrive at, or before, this
time.
• Arrive before — truck can only arrive before this time.
• Arrive after — truck can only arrive after this time.
Assignment scheduling options

The following table describes the options for assignment scheduling.
Option Description
As Soon As The time that a machine must arrive after the Arrive
Possible After time. For example, if you want the machine to
arrive after 12 noon, but as soon as it can after 12 noon,
then you set the time in the Arrive After fields and
select the As Soon As Possible check box.
Arrive After The earliest possible arrival time, in minutes, at the line
up location for automatic tie down assignments. The
value is relative to the end of the shift.
Required At The time the machine is required to be at a destination.
Arrive Before This field specifies the latest possible arrive time, in
minutes, at the line up location for automatic tie down
assignments. The value is relative to the end of the
shift.
Start After Indicates that the assignment should start after a

specific start time.
Avoids the assignment starting too early.
Finish Before Indicates that the assignment should finish before a

specific finish time.
Avoids the assignment finishing too late. If a scheduled
assignment is not completed by the Finish Before time
it is automatically finished.
Reschedule Allows you to reschedule an assignment.

Archiving
Archiving
Archiving is the process of removing a Fleet entity from present use, that is,
de-activating it, and storing it in the mine model database where it can be
restored later if required.
Archiving is not the same as deleting. Archiving simply makes the entity
inactive. Deleting an entity while in Expert Mode removes it from the mine
model database and it cannot be restored.
Archived entities are not considered for assignments, however, they are
considered for production recording.
As soon as an entity is set to not active, the archiving process begins.
Entities that can be archived are:
• People
• Machines
• Materials
• Waypoints
• Destinations
• Road segments
Auxiliary equipment
Auxiliary equipment is primarily used in production support activities.
Examples of auxiliary equipment are:
• Scrapers
• Water trucks
• Graders
Beacons
Beacon is a term no longer used by the office software but may still be used
within the mining industry. See Waypoint.

Blending
Blending
Blending ensures that the flow of materials to a sink or stockpile is of the
desired material composition and within appropriate limits.
Blending enables the office software Operator to take into account the
requirements at the mill or processing plant and balance the types and
quantity of materials and/or grades it receives. Blending functionality:
• Enables mines to satisfy customer specific product requirements.
• Reduces material re-handling and ensures correct feeds to crushers /
processing plants and stockpiles.
• Decreases variations in products by dampening natural variations of
materials and grades.
• Allows adjustment of relative percentages and numerous characteristics
to account for changes in the mine.
• Allows adjustments to control trends or sudden changes in a product.
• Enables creation of engineered products not necessarily found in the
natural environment.
Continuous blending
Continuous blending ensures that the flow of materials to a sink or stockpile
is of the desired grade composition and within appropriate limits.
Blending continuous qualities relates to ensuring that the continuous grades
are within set limits, e.g. min 1 gram to max 1.5 grams of gold per tonne, over
a set control quantity e.g. 10,000 tonnes or 8 hours. Arithmetic averaging of
grade values is used to calculate the actual grade qualities of these
continuous qualities.
Discrete blending
Discrete blending ensures that the flow of materials to a sink or stockpile is of
the desired material composition and within appropriate limits.
Blending discrete qualities relates to ensuring that the ratios between
different discrete grades, (including material types), are delivered to the sink
in the desired proportions over a defined control quantity (mass or time). For
example, deliver material A at 50%, material B at 25% and material C at 25%
over a set control quantity, (i.e. 10,000 tonnes or 8 hours).

Business intelligence
Business intelligence
The office software Business Intelligence (MineStar BI) is the term used to
describe the storage and access of data suitable for multi-dimensional
analysis.
CAES
Computer Aided Earth moving System (CAES) is the software onboard field
machines and equipment. It uses GPS data, database technology and
wireless data transfer to provide continuously updated information to the
office software. It is used by loading tools, bulldozers, and scrapers to
perform tasks more accurately.
The CAES Positioning Module (CPM) contains the GPS receiver and the
system power supply.
The CAES Display Module (CDM) contains electronics and a display screen
(CD550 or CMPD, CD1040 or Navigator). It calculates the machine
kinematics and productivity information based on GPS data from the CPM.
Channels
Channels are sensors used to record and send data between the field
machines and the office.
Groups of channels may be defined and used for easy reference and
management of channels. For example, “drive system group”.
Computer Aided Earth moving System

See CAES.
Consoles
A console is a collection of open pages within an instance of the office
software. You can use the default console, create a new one or select it from
their list of user-defined consoles.
The name of the console is displayed in the office software title bar.
You access pages within a console using tabs. Some pages receive updated
data less frequently than other pages, in which case the name on the tab is
changed to red to alert you of new data.
Cycles
A cycle is the set of data associated with a machine or piece of equipment for
the period of time between end cycle events.

Cycles
A cycle record splits the time for the cycle into cycle activities for reporting
and analysis purposes. For example, queuing at source, spotting at source.
Cycle events are continuously stored until the end cycle event is received.
The cycle closes and event data is sorted into chronological order, analyzed
to determine activities and saved to the database.
Messages containing event data from machines and equipment can arrive at
the office out of order or after the cycle has ended. In this case, the cycle is
stored for an additional amount of time after the cycle finishes to allow for the
collection of any delayed messages. After this time the events are replayed
through the activity analyzer to ensure that late events are included in the
cycle. The cycle is then updated in the database.
The amount of time that a cycle is stored in memory after the cycle finishes
may vary depending on the site configuration.
The cycle header stores information that is common throughout the cycle.
For example, material, machine, class operator. One cycle header is stored
for each machine or piece of equipment per cycle. There are three fuel-
related attributes in the cycle header. They are:
• Measured fuel from VIMS (if available).
• Estimated fuel based on activities (or EFH for trucks if selected).
• Estimated fuel based on average burn rates.
Production recording involves collecting data related to states throughout the
cycle.
Cycle attributes
The following table describes the main attributes of a cycle.
Cycle activities Activities undertaken during a cycle.
Delays Delays that ocurred and have been recorded during the
cycle.
Travel For truck cycles only — details about road segments

information traveled, the load state, start and end time, start and
end speed and the duration.
Actual duration Time taken to complete the cycle.
Start time Date and time the cycle starts.
End time Date and time the cycle ends.
Material Specifies the material that is excavated and loaded.
Payload Specifies the amount material that is excavated and

loaded.

Cycles
Primary Specifies the name of the machine for this cycle as
machine follows:
• The truck name — for a truck cycle.
• The loading tool name —for a loading tool cycle.
• The self loader name — for a self loader cycle.
Primary Specifies the name of the operator for the primary

machine machine as follows:
operator’s • The truck operator’s name — for a truck cycle.
name
• The loading tool operator’s name —for a loading tool
cycle.
Secondary Specifies the name of the secondary machine for this

machine cycle.
Secondary Specifies the name of the operator for the secondary

machine machine.
operator’s
name
Fuel Used Specifies the amount of fuel used by the truck in this
cycle.
Source Specifies the location where the truck was loaded.

Destination
Sink For truck cycles — specifies the location of the

Destination assigned sink.
Processor Specifies the processor used in this cycle.
Sink mining For a truck cycle — specifies the type of mining blocks
block used at the sink in the cycle.
Source mining For a truck cycle — specifies the type of mining blocks
block used at the source in the cycle.
Merging cycles
Chronologically sequential cycles can be merged into one cycle using the
Merge Cycle Wizard. When merging cycles, a master cycle is selected with
which the other cycles are merged.
It is possible to have a single cycle that has been split and needs to be
merged.
Machine states and road segments are also combined from all cycles into the
merged cycle. For example, a traveling empty state change could be
received because the truck’s dump switch is accidently activated before the
truck has actually reached its destination. This results in the current cycle

Cycles
being closed and a new cycle started even though the truck has not reached
its destination. In this situation, the resulting cycles can be merged to create
a single cycle, reflecting the real situation that occurred in the field.
The duration of the resulting merged cycle is equal to the combined times for
the cycles that were merged. The office software automatically adjusts the
source and sink mining blocks when cycles are merged.
Splitting cycles
A cycle may require splitting into several cycles of a more appropriate length,
for example, where the office software has created cycles to cover missing
periods of time. Cycles created by splitting have the same values as the
original cycle. The start time, end time and duration will be automatically
calculated so there are no overlapping cycles.
The office software automatically adjusts the source and sink mining blocks
when cycles are split. For example, if a cycle is split and a different mining
block is entered for one of the resulting cycles, the office software adjusts the
material added to and removed from the new sink and source blocks. If
applicable, any associated grades are also adjusted.
When a cycle traverses shifts the following occurs:
• A cycle activity is split at the shift boundary.
• A cycle delay is split at the shift boundary.
• A road segment remains in the segment of the shift where the traversal
began.
• All summary road segments are recalculated for each shift segment.
Interim cycles
Interim cycles provide the ability for the office software to report on
incomplete cycles.
The end of a cycle does not necessarily correspond to the end of a shift, and
sometimes a cycle does not complete for a long period of time, perhaps days
or weeks. This in turn delays the reporting of statistics. An interim cycle is
defined to allow the office software to use the data already captured for
reporting until the cycle is completed.
There are two types of interim cycles written:
• Shift-end interim cycles are written at shift end, so that shift reports which
are run soon after the shift ends have as much information as possible
about cycles that have not yet completed.
• Periodic interim cycles are written every so often, (the default for truck and
loading tools is every 10 minutes), so that the real-time KPI information is
updated in a timely manner.

Cycles
Types of cycle records

Cycle records vary depending on the types of cycles configured for the mine
site. The main types of cycle records are as follows:
• Truck cycles.
• Loading tool cycle.
• Self loader cycles.
• Auxiliary cycles (for example, drill cycles).
Truck cycles
Truck cycles are created automatically by the office software from
information received from the field and the office about the truck.
A truck cycle ends when the truck finishes dumping a load. This is
determined by a state change from travelling empty.
Typical activities for a truck during a cycle are:
• Traveling empty.
• Queuing at source.
• Spotting at source.
• Loading.
• Traveling full.
• Queuing at sink.
• Spotting at sink.
• Dumping.
The cycle boundary, defined as the end of one cycle and the beginning of the
next, occurs in the transition from dumping to traveling empty. An exception
to this is if the state change is received as a result of the end of a delay. If the
truck is traveling empty, goes on delay and at the end of the delay sends a
traveling empty state change, the state change is ignored and the cycle
remains open.
Two activities have been added to the truck loading cycle to support double-
sided truck loading. This feature allows truck loading activities to be better
managed, resulting in increased efficiency and productivity gains.
The new activities are
• Waiting to spot
• Waiting to load
The addition of these two activities enables the office software to accurately
record the necessary data that allows assessment of critical KPIs such as
hang times and cycle times.
Configuration of double-sided loading is done using Supervisor, but the
procedure is described below.

Cycles
 To configure double-sided loading in Supervisor

1. Click Options > System Options.
2. From the Product list box select Production.
3. From the Option Sets list select Cycle Configuration and then click the
Truck Loading tab.
4. Select the Generate WaitForLoad activities check box to enable the
Wait for Load feature.
A WaitForLoad activity starts when the truck stops spotting - this is
determined by the last stop before loading begins. It ends when loading
begins. If this option is selected, the Use Stop to Adjust Begin Loading
functionality is disabled.
The Minimum duration of a WaitForLoad activity in msecs field defaults
to five seconds. This setting prevents the system recording a
WaitForLoad activity when the truck is just completing a spot and the
loader is about to load.
5. Click the Loading Tool Loading tab to configure the Loader.
6. Select the Generate WaitForSpot activities check box to enable
WaitForSpot activities to be recorded.
Note that when this option is selected, the Include truck spotting time in
loading tool loading time functionality is disabled.
Loading tool cycles

A loading tool cycle is the period between finishing loading one truck and
finishing loading the next truck. A loading tool cycle ends when a traveling
loaded state is received from the truck that has just been loaded. Typical
activities for a loading tool are:
• Loading.
• Waiting for truck.
• Being on delay.
Auxiliary equipment cycles

An auxiliary equipment cycle ends when either the auxiliary equipment goes
on delay (the delay begins a new cycle) or the job code changes (the new job
code is associated with the new cycle).
Some pieces of auxiliary equipment do not use the generic auxiliary cycle
records and attributes, instead they have their own cycles. For example, drill
cycles.
Drill cycles
A drill cycle ends whenever the next StateChange message is received, after
a ProductionHoleInformation message occurs.

Delays
Drill cycles for drills in the "Track Drill" machine category are created from
messages received from the QNX6 onboard software, rather than generic
Auxiliary cycles.
Possible activities in such drill cycles are:
• idle
• propel
• level
• drill
• addSteel
• removeSteel
These cycles are viewed and edited using Cycle Assistant with the Page
Configuration set to Drill, with one cycle being created for each hole drilled.
Water truck cycles

A water truck cycle ends when a refill activity occurs. The refill activity begins
the new cycle.
Delays
A delay defines the period of time that a mine entity (for example, a truck or a
road segment) is not operating or being used, and is therefore unproductive.
That is, a scheduled or unscheduled interruption to productivity resulting in
downtime.
A delay includes both:
• The event that triggers the period of time for which the entity will be on
delay. This event may be:
• Scheduled — does have a pre-defined future start time, or
• Unscheduled — does not have a pre-defined future start time, that
is, it occurs unexpectedly or by request.
• The duration — the period of time for which the entity does not operate.
Different delay attributes apply to different entities within the mine.
A delay cannot overlap with activities and usually stops assignments while
the delay is active.
Delays can also be created by machine operators in the field but are still
managed by the office software. These are known as field-initiated delays.
Acknowledgement
Acknowledgment is when the Mine Site Controller indicates that an active
delay has been seen in the office.

Delays
Confirmation
Confirmation is similar to acknowledgement, but a delay is not considered
active until it has reached its start time and it has been confirmed in the
office. Confirmation can be given at any time before or after the start time of
the delay. If confirmation has not been given before the scheduled start time,
the delay flashes to indicate that confirmation is required. If confirmation is
not given before the scheduled start time of the delay, the actual recorded
start time is then equal to the time that confirmation was given.
inactive active
inactive active
active
actual actual
scheduled
start start
start
= confirmed
Figure 5.1: Effect of confirmation on scheduled and actual delay start

times
Rules for creating delays

The rules for creating a delay are:

Delays
• Delays should not overlap. If the times overlap then the end time of the
earlier delay is truncated to the start time of the later delay.
• If the start time is earlier than the current time and the finish time is in the
future, the office software activates the delay immediately and sends it to
the field.
• If both the start and end times are in the past, the delay is considered to
be historical. The details of the delay are stored in the database but no
information is sent to the field.
• If an active delay is overdue and not manually deactivated before the next
delay begins, then it is stopped by the office software before the next
delay starts.
• If a field–initiated delay overlaps a scheduled delay, then the field delay is
stopped immediately before the office delay is scheduled to start.
Delay types and delay type groups

A delay type is an attribute of a delay and specifies a template upon which
the delay is created.
All delays are based on delay types, from which they inherit their default
attributes. These attributes can be overridden when the delay is created.
Related delay types are grouped into named delay type groups which are
used when analyzing delays.
Delay types and delay type groups are displayed in a hierarchy that reflects
the typical applications of the delay. Different icons are used to distinguish
between delay types and delay type groups.
You must define delay types and their attribute values before defining delays.
Delay types association attributes
Delay types can be associated with machines, road segments or
destinations. Each delay type is required to have at least one association.
When an association is made, the editor page displays the attributes relevant
to that association.
Some delay types can only be associated with certain machine types. This
association is used for the onboard hardware (CD550 or CMPD) export files
so that truck and loading tool operators only see a list of delay types that
apply to the type of machine that they are currently operating.
Delay type attributes

The following table describes the attributes for delay types.
Item Description
E-mail Specifies the email address of the person(s) to be
notified about a delay of this type.
Estimating duration Specifies an estimated duration for the delay.

Delays
Item Description
Delay category Specifies the delay category to which the delay
belongs.
Acknowledgement Indicates that a delay requires office

required acknowledgement after it starts.
Confirmation Indicates that a delay requires office confirmation

required when it starts, in order to be classed as active.
Assignment delays Indicates delay types to be ignored.

If disabled, and a machine is on delay, the office
software treats the machine as though it can still
receive assignments or be assigned.
Engine switched off Indicates that the engine is switched off for this
delay.
External references Specifies references to external software systems.
Delay categories
A delay category is a collective grouping of delay types to assist with
managing production data.
Each delay has one delay type attribute and each delay type belongs to one
delay category. Delay categories can have more than one delay type, as
shown in the following diagram.
Delay 1 Delay 2 Delay 3
Delay type 1 Delay type 2 Delay type 3
Delay category A Delay category B
Figure 5.2: Relationship between delays, delay types and delay

categories

Desktops
Delay attributes
The following table describes the attributes for delays.
Start time Specifies either the scheduled or actual start time of the
delay.
Finish time Specifies either the scheduled or actual finish time of the
delay.
Acknowledged Indicates the state of the required acknowledgment.

Valid values are:
• Acknowledged — indicates the delay is waiting for
acknowledgment.
• Confirmed — indicates the delay has received
acknowledgment.
Confirmed Indicates the state of the required confirmation of the

delay.
Valid values are:
• Acknowledged — indicates the delay is waiting for
acknowledgment.
• Confirmed — indicates the delay has received
acknowledgment.
Duration Expected duration of the delay. Defaults to the value

specified for this delay type, but can be modified.
Modifying the duration affects the finish time of the delay
only, not the start time. If the duration of the delay can
not be estimated, you can set the duration to Unknown
which creates an infinite delay.
Reporting the Specifies the name of the person reporting or creating

delay the delay.
Description Description of the delay.
Desktops
A desktop provides a view of all open consoles within an instance of the
office software. You can select a default office software desktop, select from
the list of pre-defined desktops or create a new desktop.
A new desktop can be created, saved, edited and re-used as required. You
can pre-define and save a desktop to capture all open pages, page sizes and
page positions in the detail window as well as be configured for the size and

Destinations
number of monitors being used. The saved desktop can be selected the next
time the office software is opened.
The standard office software installation includes default desktops.
Destinations
A destination is a physical location in the mine to which a truck can be
assigned or a machine can operate.
Its spatial orientation is defined using one or more bounding waypoints. For
example, at a face, the loading tool might move around significantly, or there
might be multiple servers operating. In this situation, the entry or dump uses
two or more waypoints as part of the destination definition. A final road
segment exists between each of the last road segment waypoints and the
server waypoints.
Destinations can be:
• Sources – where material can be obtained, for example, faces, benches
and stockpiles.
• Sinks – where material can be delivered, for example, crushers, dumps
and stockpiles.
• Stations – any other place where material cannot be obtained or
delivered, for example, workshops and fuel bays.
Destinations can be configured to have a parent and child relationship.
An observed destination is not the actual assigned destination, instead it is a
waypoint observed as a destination for that assignment.
If a truck dumps outside any destinations, then the observed destination is
recorded as the last waypoint.
Parent and child destinations

A parent destination has at least one child destination defined within it. Only
parent destinations can have child destinations and all child destinations
must have a parent destination.
A parent destination allows dumped material to be allocated to the assigned
destination instead of the observed destination. However, a parent
destination cannot be a dump or stockpile.
Using parent and child destinations helps to reduce the spatial model
maintenance required around stockpiles. If material is dumped within a
parent destination when the assigned destination is a child of the parent, the
office software behaves as if the truck had dumped at the assigned
destination.
Parent destinations can be created that cover any dumping area and can
only use waypoints that are not linked into the road network. These are
referred to as isolated waypoints. This is an important distinction that allows
the parent to act as a management guide without impacting on the machine
tracking and assignment functionality of the office software.

Destinations
If a truck dumps within a parent destination but not within any of the child
destinations, then the sink is recorded as the assigned destination if it is one
of the listed child destinations. If the assigned destination was not recorded
as a child of the observed parent destination, then the sink is recorded as the
observed destination. This approach ensures that a stockpile can only be
credited with material if the truck has at least dumped within the parent
destination.
Parent destinations can overlap spatially.
Non-parent destinations
A non-parent destination has no child destinations, but may be a child
destination belonging to more than one parent destination.
A non-parent destination can use waypoints that are linked into the road
network.
Non-parent destinations can be listed as child destinations of the respective
parent destination. This is to gather all the dumping destinations that
collectively may not be able to be differentiated by GPS position. This is done
in the definition of the parent destination. There is also a feature included to
use the spatial definitions to automatically determine the suggested child
destinations.
Spatial definitions can automatically determine the suggested child
destinations.
Destination attributes
Destination attributes for trucks are set at the class level and can be
overridden at the machine level if necessary.
Destination attributes for loading tools are set at the class level and cannot
be overridden at the machine level.
Destination attributes do not apply to processors.
s
The following table describes the main attributes for destinations.
Name Name of the destination. This must be unique.
Description A description that can be anything you want to enter.
Source Indicates that the destination is a source destination.
Sink Indicates that the destination is a sink destination.
Station Indicates that the destination is a station.
Station queuing For a station destination – indicates that trucks may

queue.
Station capacity For a station destination – specifies the number of

trucks that may queue.

Dippers
Tax class Specifies the tax class of the destination.
Valid values are:
• In pit.
• Out of pit.
Parent Indicates that this destination is a parent destination.
Bounding Specifies which waypoints are associated with a

waypoints destination.
Child destinations For parent destinations – indicates the child

destinations.
Re-handle Whether or not the material is to be re-handled.
Allow all materials Specifies that all materials are allowed at this
destination.
Materials The list of included materials for destinations is

defined using the Destination Editor.
Dippers
A dipper is the part of a machine that scoops up material. When referring to a
shovel a dipper may also be referred to as a bucket.
Dynamic fuel monitoring

Dynamic fuel monitoring is available as part of the Dynamic Mine Model page
in both Client and Supervisor modes. You are able to make changes in either
client mode or supervisor mode, and the changes are reflected in both
modes.
The dynamic fuel monitoring service calculates and/or stores the three cycle
header fuel attributes. See Cycles on page 5.21 for information on these
attributes. Contact a Fleet consultant for more information about the
calculations.
Effective Flat Haul (EFH)

Effective Flat Haul (EFH) is the horizontal distance a truck can travel at rated
horsepower over the same time period it takes to traverse a given distance at
a specified constant gradient.
The EFH value is expressed as a factor of a flat road. For example, if
travelling one metre on a uphill road is equivalent to travelling 3 meters on
the flat road, then the EFH will be 3.

Effective Flat Haul (EFH)
EFH management
Effective Flat Haul curves in the office software allow for the recalculation of
the EFH distances and factors whenever a road segment is updated.
By default this feature is not enabled. This allows the office software site
builder the chance to setup the EFH curves within the office software and
time to observe the changes that would be made before enabling the feature.
Road segment updates can be selectively turned on for both recalculation of
the EFH factor and the EFH distance, although these are normally enabled
together. Similarly, the update can be selectively enabled for final road
segments separately to normal haulage roads.
The update can also be suppressed if it less than nominated minimum
amounts. Note that for distance, the minimum amount is specified in metres.
Road management settings are set up using Supervisor.
Curves can also be imported and exported from XML.
Road Information Recalculation

Following on from the support for EFH, when the spatial attributes of a road
change, selected information attributes can be recalculated based on
tolerances configured in Supervisor.
The information that is recalculated is as follows:
• Plan Length
• Slope Length
• Rise Height
• Fall Height
• Travel Information
• EFH Factor (optional, can be switched off in Supervisor)
• EFH Distance
• Design Travel Time (optional, can be switched off in Supervisor)
• Dynamic Travel Time (optional, only changed if design time changes)

Efficiency rates
The attribute changes potentially triggering this recalculation are:

• Waypoints having their route point changed.
• Road Segment
• Start Waypoint being changed
• End Waypoint being changed
• Interim vertices being added moved or deleted.
• Rolling Resistance
• Road Speed Limit
• Travel Information
• Truck Class
• Average Speed Empty at Destination
• Average Speed Loaded at Destination
• EFH Specification
• Max Speed Loaded
Efficiency rates
Efficiency rates are a measure of the productivity of a machine, specifically
processors and loading tools.
For processors
Nominal rates for processors are specified in terms of the rate that the
processor can process material (also referred to as the throughput of the
processor). Productivity is based on the nominal rate specified for the
processor. The nominal rate for a processor is specified separately for each
processor and not inherited from the processor class.
If the nominal rate of a processor is changed, productivity is based on the
new nominal rate. For example, if the nominal rate for a processor is 4,000
tons per hour and the processor is operating at 120% of its nominal rate, then
the productivity rate is 4,800 tons per hour. The nominal rate does not
change.
For loading tools

Nominal rates for loading tools are specified in terms of the time it takes for a
loading tool to load material for a specific truck class.
The nominal rate for a loading tool is specified in the loading tool class and
each loading tool inherits those values. Productivity is based on the nominal
rate specified for the loading tool class.
If the nominal rate for the loading tool class is changed, the productivity of all
loading tools in that class will be based on the new nominal rate.

Entities
Increasing productivity for the loading tool decreases the load times for the
allowable truck classes. This may be appropriate when:
• The material is easy to dig.
• The operator is exceptionally experienced.
Decreasing the productivity for the loading tool increases the load time for
the allowable truck classes. This may be appropriate when:
• The loading tool is digging at a low entry.
• The loading tool is mining out a ramp.
• The material is so blocky that it takes extra time to load.
The loading times for individual loading tools can be changed using the
efficiency slider in the Loading Tool Assistant or in the Loading Tool or Shovel
Editor.
Entities
An entity is any object that can be referenced in the office software. For
example, trucks, road segments, waypoints.
Events
Events are logical or physical occurrences that happen in the mine site and
consist of various pieces of information stored by the office software.
Information about events is sent from machines (and equipment) from
onboard monitoring systems.

Field communications
There are many types of events, for example:

• Assignment — occurs when an assignment has been requested
• Health — occurs when a pre-defined health condition has been met or
rule has been broken.
• Maintenance — occurs when a channel stops sending data, sends corrupt
data or is in some way functioning incorrectly and requires maintenance.
They are triggered by VIMS or TPMS.
• Payload — occurs when a VIMS payload report is sent from a truck to the
office software.
Event priorities
The following table describes event priorities and colors used to represent
them.
Color Priority Description

Red Urgent A truck is not assigned. If an automatic
assignment is not displayed within 30 seconds you
need to investigate and manually assign the truck.
Orange High There has been automatic or manual intervention,

for example, off-course assignments.
Green Medium There has been automatic or manual intervention,

for example, an assignment is triggered by a truck
entering a reassignment waypoint.
Black Normal An automatic assignment.
Blue Low A scheduled assignment.
Field communications is the sending and receiving of messages across the
entire mine site and office. The format and content of messages changes as
they are processed from raw data to more meaningful and manageable
information.
The field communications data can be viewed and managed using the
following office software pages:
• Field Communications Monitor — provides a real-time view of the raw
data and messages across the field.
• Field Network Monitor — provides a manageable view of the processed
data and information across the field.

Communications process
The communications process is as follows:
1. The radio network sends onboard data to the TRIMCOMM Network
Router (TNR) via the communications gateway. This is essentially the
main boundary between the field and the office.
2. The TNR collects the data and sends it to the MineStar Communications
Server (MCS).
3. The MCS converts the data protocols from those used by each piece of
machinery or equipment to a standard format and sends it to the
adaptor.
4. The adaptor converts the standardized format data to Fleet format data
and publishes it to the Fleet bus.
5. The bus delivers the data to the relevant managers, for example Event
Manager.
Figure 5.3: Field communications process
Communications color codes

The following table describes the status values for field communications and
the colors used to represent them.
Color Status Behavior and meaning

Green Normal • Indicates normal communications.
communications
• The last message received was within
the last five minutes.
White Warning • Indicates a delay in the

communications.
• The last message received was
between five and twenty minutes ago.

Fluids
Color Status Behavior and meaning

Red No • Indicates an error in communications or
communications the machine is down.
• The last message received was more
than twenty minutes ago.
Yellow On delay • Indicates that the machine is on delay.
Blue High radio lag • Indicates a problem with the radio

network (if all machines exhibit large
lags) or a problem with a radio on an
individual machine (if the lags are
isolated).
• The time taken for messages to travel
from the field to the office is greater
than the current radio lag setting.
Pink High office lag • Indicates a problem with the office

network or software
• The time taken for messages to travel
from the Comms Server to the Office
software is greater than the current
office lag setting.
Lag times
Lag times for communications are a measure of how long it takes for
messages to traverse a section of the network.
The types of lag times that can be monitored are:
• Radio lag — the time it takes for a message to get from a machine in the
field to the field communications server. Machines experiencing radio lag
are shown with a flashing blue background.
• Office lag — the time it takes for a message received at the field
communications server to appear in the Platform sub-system. Machines
experiencing an office lag are shown with a flashing magenta background.
Fluids
Fluids is the collective term used to describe all fluids dispensed on site for
maintaining and operating machines and equipment.

Fuel
Fluid types
Each fluid type is defined by a number of mandatory attributes. Examples of
fluid types are as follows:
• Grease.
• Oil.
Fluid type attributes

The following table describes the main attributes for each fluid type.
Name Unique name for the fluid type.
Description Description of the fluid type.
Category The group or groups to which the fluid type belongs.

For example, ‘Fuel’ (which is not the same as ‘fuel’).
Unit type The type of unit that the office software uses to
establish the actual units in which the quantity is
expressed. For example, volume.
Unit The actual units in which the fluid type is measured.

This is specified elsewhere in the office software and
cannot be changed as part of the process of creating or
editing a fuel type.
Field input unit The unit in which to interpret field-entered quantities of

this fuel. Determined by the Unit type attribute.
Fluid categories
A fluid category is a grouping of related fluids. You can define these as
required when creating a fluid type.
Fuel
Fuel burn rates can be predicted, calculated and monitored for both truck
and non-truck machines.
At the truck class level, trucks can be configured to predict fuel levels using
either of the following:
• Existing EFH-based calculations.
• Average based calculations.
• Fuel burn rate per activity.
On trucks, when the ’Automatically refuel’ check box in the Truck Editor is
selected, and the Truck Editor is set to TRUE, an alarm is raised if the fuel

Fuel
level falls to a pre-defined level. the office software will automatically create a
scheduled assignment for the truck to go to a fuel bay.
On non-truck machines, you can specify the fuel burn rate and duration for
each activity in a cycle that the class of machine can undertake. At the end of
the cycle the overall fuel prediction can be calculated. This amount is then
deducted from the overall fuel level and alarms are raised if preset conditions
are met.
Fuel burn rates per activity are configured at the machine class level and can
be overridden at the individual machine level if required.
The fuel dispensed at a fuel bay is also checked against the predicted fuel
amount.
Fuel parameters
All machines, and machine classes, have the following fuelling parameters:
• Average idle and working burn rates, which are commonly available in
equipment, manufacturers handbooks.
• Burn rates per activity e.g., traveling full, scraping etc. These are often
available from the manufacturer or can be relatively easily calculated from
historical data.
• Dynamic burn rates check box to indicate whether or not the values
should be adjusted dynamically.
• The ability to select the fuel burn calculation algorithm to use e.g., activity
based, average burn rate, EFH.
Trucks, and truck classes, also have parameters for their travel full and
empty burn rates. These are required for an EFH distance based fuel
consumption model.
Fuel calculations
When calculating the fuel used in a cycle, the office software does the
following:
• Uses the fuel consumption measured by VIMS if it is available. Note that
VIMS machines must now be marked as VIMS-capable.
• If the VIMS measurement is not available, the office software uses the
predicted fuel consumption based on the activity or, for trucks, the EFH
model if it has been selected.
All of the estimated fuel usage models take into account delay times, and
apply idle burn rates if the delay is one where the engine is kept running. If
the delay indicates that the engine is switched off, then no fuel consumption
is accredited for that time.
This is indicated in the Delay Type Editor. By default, upgraded databases
will not have the Engine Switched Off checked. These database need to be
reviewed after the upgrade.

Fuel
Calculating fuel used

Checks are made against modeled burn rates for each truck and an alarm is
raised if there is a problem. For this reason, it remains important to ensure
that fuel usage estimates are correct. These checks are based on comparing
the modeled fuel consumption against the simple working and idle
consumptions.
The formula for the simple calculation is
(Idle time * idle burn rate) + (working time * working burn rate)
The idle time is calculated by adding the time for all activities that are not
marked as Is Working, plus the time for all the delays that are not marked as
Engine Off delays. All activities as defined in the machine states are by
default marked as Working. It will be necessary after an upgrade to review
which states should be cleared so that the idle burn rate is used, for example,
queuing.
Calculating validity checks
The basis of the validity checks and whether or not the fuel usage prediction
will be updated is controlled via the Dynamic Mine Model page. Note that this
is an expert only page.
The validity check is done by checking if:
(min threshold)*(avg burn consumption) <= predicted consumption <=
(max threshold)*(avg burn consumption)
If the estimate is not valid, then the truck fuel level is not updated.
Working burn rates

The KPI service tracks the working burn rate of a machine. For VIMS trucks,
this is:
(measured fuel / working time)
For other machines, it is:
(activity based fuel estimate / working time)
If enabled, the modelled working burn rate on machines and machine
classes is updated based on these observed dynamic values. To be enabled,
the dynamic fuel update service has to have the relevant setting turned on
but each machine and machine class can still disable dynamic updates for
that individual machine. Thresholds are used to perform validity checks and
alarms can be raised if the observed dynamic burn rate is considered to be
invalid.

Global positioning system (GPS)
The following settings are available via Supervisor or at run time via the
Dynamic Mine Model page:
• Whether to perform dynamic working burn rate updates (on/off).
• Min burn rate check threshold (0 = ignore).
• Max burn rate check threshold (0 = ignore).
• Min change required before working burn rate is dynamically updated (on/
off).
• Whether to raise an alarm if observed burn rate differs from (on/off).
Fuel-related attributes
To assist in being able to reconcile the overall accuracy of the fuel prediction
model, machine cycles now store three fuel-related attributes in the cycle
header:
1. Measured fuel from VIMS (if available).
2. Estimated fuel based on activities (or EFH for trucks if selected).
3. Estimated fuel based on average burn rates.
In addition, for each cycle activity, the estimated fuel used for that activity is
stored.
For trucks, for each road, the estimated fuel used based on the EFH distance
and load state is also stored.
The estimated totals (stored in the cycle header) are updated if a cycle is
edited, split, merged, etc. The VIMS total is not updated and is just allocated
to one of the cycles in the case of a split.
Along with the working burn rate KPI, there is also a operating burn rate KPI,
which takes the fuel used for each cycle and divides it by the operating time
(i.e. all time not on delay). Machines have two new properties called
estimated operating time till critical fuel level and estimated operating till
refuel. These times are based on the fuel remaining till critical level and fuel
remaining till refuel level divided by the operating time KPI. The new
properties are updated whenever the KPI changes and also whenever a
truck is refueled or a user edits the critical fuel level, refuel level or current
fuel level.
The properties can be displayed in FUA (Fleet Update Assistant) and are
also shown on the fuel status tab on the machine assistant.
Global positioning system (GPS)

The Global Positioning System (GPS) is an internationally available service
used by the office software to locate machines on a mine site.
If a fault is detected in the GPS a message is sent from the truck to the office
software. A machine with bad GPS can be seen in the Fleet Update
Assistant. See the To view GPS messages procedure in the Machine
Tracking chapter.

Grades
If GPS data is not received from the truck, the office software considers the
truck to have stopped and cannot calculate the assignment arrival time.
You can set the truck to ignore GPS so that the arrival time can be calculated
by the office software.
If GPS accessibility is degraded, the office software’s ability to effectively
track machines is also degraded. For example, a broken or malfunctioning
GPS receiver or antennae could have an adverse effect on GPS reception
and reliability.
Note that this is not the same as Differential Global Positioning System
(DGPS), which is maintained by the United State’s Coast Guard.
Grades
A grade describes the material to be mined. Many grades combine to
completely describe the material. For example, acidity, color, specific gravity,
sulfur content.
The office software collects grade data when the material is excavated by the
loading tool. This data can be used for such things as assignments,
production recording, reporting and analysis.
Grade determination
Grade determination is the process of determining the grade of material
excavated at the mine. A grade is determined by combining the X and Y
coordinates of the dipper (using CAES) with the Z coordinate of the shovel
(which identifies the current bench).
The following table summarizes the methods and data sources for
determining grades.
Method Can use data from...

Using mining blocks • The office software materials definitions.
• Grade data derived from external geological
models.
Using block models • The office software materials definitions.

• Grade data derived from external geological
models.
Using stratigraphic • The office software materials definitions

models • Grade data derived from external geological
models.

Hang time
Grade attributes
The following table describes the main attributes for grades.
Name Unique name for the grade.
Type The definition of the grade.

Valid values are:
• Discrete — this may be either numeric or text,
and expresses the non-linear attributes of a
material, for example, color.
• Continuous — defines the attributes of the
material, often expressed as a ratio.
Weight averaging Indicates the method of measurement to use.

methods Valid values are:
• Mass.
• Volume.
Unit Type The measurement type of the grade.
Unit Name The name of the measurement type.
Maximum The maximum amount of this grade to be carried.
Desired The desired amount of this grade to be carried.
Mimimum The minimum amount of the grade to be carried.
Hang time
Hang time is the amount of time a shovel waits, from the “send truck”, to the
arrival time of the next truck, provided that the shovel is not on delay and the
next truck was not queuing or Spotting when the “send truck” was executed.
Hazards
Hazards are represented as a type of waypoint on both Site Editor and Site
Monitor, however they can only be manually created on Site Editor.
Machine Operators can mark hazards they encounter while in transit by
pressing a button on TOPE, which sends a message to the office.
Information on hazards can be found in the Machine Tracking chapter in the
Toolbar icons table, and as part of the To plot production messages
procedure. Hazards is also a page configuration on the Field Event Monitor.

Health
Health
Health refers to the operational quality and condition of the mine machines
and equipment.
Health events occur when a predefined operational limit is exceeded. For
example, a temperature becomes too high for safe operation. The reporting
of health events facilitates maintenance operations.
Health events are sent to the office software from onboard monitoring
systems.
If the Health sub-system is not installed, you must still configure a Health
URL to provide GPS health events.
Measures represent data collected from a particular sensor on a particular
machine during a single sampling session. They are used to group sample
data into logical groups which define the nature of the data and the time at
which the data was collected.
The office software can monitor and report on both real–time and historical
measures.
There are different types of measures, such as:
• Dataloggers.
• Snapshots.
• Cumulatives.
• Histograms.
Health events
The following table describes the levels of severity and corresponding colors
for health events.
Color Level of Description

severity
Green 1 Warning – no immediate action is required.
Pink 2 Danger – the mode of operation must be

changed.
Red 3 Immediate – machine must be stopped

immediately.
Historical data
Historical data provides information about entities over time.
Historical data is recorded in the historical database, not the model database
(which stores details about entities).

Jobs
For example, a machine HT105 completes cycles 8:54, 9:23 and 10:04. The
machine details are stored in the model database and the historical cycle
data in the historical database.
Jobs
A job is a user-defined task that is run for a specific outcome. It may run
immediately (ad hoc) or at a pre-determined time in the future (scheduled).
An ad hoc job runs as soon as you request it to run and requires no
scheduling details or rules. That is, you are the trigger. An ad hoc job cannot
be edited after it has started and a record of the ad hoc job is not kept after it
stops.
A scheduled job runs at some time in the future, the start time being
determined by and triggered by the user-specified scheduling details and
rules. A scheduled job can be edited after it has started but will stop and re-
schedule itself in accordance with the specified changes. A record is kept of
the scheduling details for a scheduled job after it stops and can be viewed
using Scheduled Jobs.
Note: Avoid scheduling jobs near the transition hours of Daylight

Savings.
During daylight savings time (DST) hours, the scheduled job
trigger is not accurate, for example, when a VIMS Import job is
scheduled to fire during the hours of 1.00am and 2.00am. This
is due to a limitation in the Quartz Scheduler software, which
Fleet uses to fire scheduled.
Refer to the following link and scroll to the Daylight Savings

Time section for more information.
http://www.quartz-scheduler.org/documentation/best-practices
Job templates
The office software provides a set of job templates containing logic and some
default values to assist you when creating a job. All jobs must be based on a
template and users can customize the default values in the job templates.
Each job template contains some attributes that are common throughout all
jobs and some specific attributes which are determined by the job itself.

Jobs
The set of available job templates is as follows:

Configure VIMS Wireless Configures the VIMS box to send VIMS
Messaging health and production messages direct
to the office. This job is used for Health-
only sites and is not to be used in
conjunction with the TOPE or CAES.
Data Logger Activate Activates or deactivates a Datalogger

on a VIMS ABL enabled machine.
Note: This job is also available for

models of machines carrying
VIMS 3G devices running in
either ABL or 3G format.

Jobs

FPO (Fleet Productivity Calculates haul road indices for FPO
Optimization) Haul Road Index reports from Datalog files. The
Calculator calculations are now compatible with
FPO 1.5 (previously ASA 1.1).
The calculations produced by
the new algorithm cannot be
directly compared with the old.
As such, all existing ASA data is
deleted as part of the upgrade
process.
If you want to look at historical data, you
MUST run reports prior to upgrading.
If you want to look at new FPO indices
for old data, you should run the ASA job
again on the old data loggers after
upgrading.
Previously, all of the data points from a
data logger were kept in the
ASA_DETAIL table. Now, only those
data points that are part of a complete
travelling loaded portion of a cycle are
kept. This conserves space, as data that
is not part of a complete travelling
loaded cycle, is not used in calculating
the Haul Road Condition Index.
Note: You can also perform FPO

calculations when running the
VIMS Data Import job. This
imports dataloggers resulting in
the FPO data being created in
the table mentioned above.
Generate Coverage Map Generates a map of a parameter, e.g.

latency, across the mine site.
Get VIMS Configurations Downloads the VIMS channel

configuration file from a VIMS
ABL-enabled machine, and updates the
list of configured chanels for the
machine.
Mining Block Exporter Exports mining block data from the

office software. Generates files for
METS Manager.

Jobs

Mining Block Importer Imports mining block data (CSV format)
into the office software. Generates files
for METS Manager.
Mining Block Importer MkII Imports mining block data (typically

MEDS) into the office software and
generates files for METS Manager.
Fluid Management Data Import Imports data into the office software
Health from other Condition Monitoring
sources.
Health Data Deletion Deletes VIMS data from the office

software database.
Oracle Mining Block Extractor Extracts mining blocks from an Oracle

database and generates files for the
Mining Block Importer.
Position Event Export Export event information for plotting in

Minescape.
SmartSignal Export Export Datalog and Snapshot files in the

VIMS unprocessed directory as
SmartSignal ASC files .
SurPac Mining Block Importer Imports mining block data in SurPac

format into the office software.
Synchronize VIMS Clock with Synchronizes the VIMS clock with the
Office office time.
VIMS Data Import Imports VIMS files into the office

software database.
VIMS File Download Downloads VIMS data files from a VIMS

ABL enabled machine.

Jobs
The following jobs are available in Expert Mode only:

BatchCycleUpdate Performs bulk cycle and/or summaries updates.
HistoricalDataInspector Performs bulk historical data inspections.
Job attributes
The following table contains attributes that are common to all job templates.
Job name Name of the job being created.
Job group Name of the job group to which the job being created
belongs.
Description Description of the job being created.
Simple Indicates that the trigger for the job to start is to be non
time based.
Schedule Indicates that the trigger for the job to start is to be time
based.
Event Indicates that the trigger for the job to start is to be

when a specific event occurs.
Once only Indicates that this job is to be run once.
Until nominated Indicates that this job is to be run until the nominated
time time.
Forever Indicates that this job is to be run until manually

stopped
Multiple times Indicates that this job is to be run a specific number of

times.

Jobs
Batch Cycle Update template

The Batch Cycle Update job template is used to select, update, and
recalculate a large number of cycles in a single operation. The cycles are
selected according to specific criteria. You can change these values. This
template is used when grade values or Load factors have changed, and
summaries have become invalid.
The following table describes the specific attributes for a job created using
the Batch Cycle Update job template.
Name The name of the job template. This is always
BatchCycleUpdate.
Description A brief description of the job.
Period A time period. This is pre-defined.
Start date Date on which the job will start in the format
defined for the mine region.
Start time Time at which the job will start on the date
specified, in the format hours, minutes, seconds.
End date Date on which the job will start in the format
defined for the mine region.
End time Time at which the job will start on the date
specified, in the format hours minutes and
seconds.
Primary machine The name of the primary machine(s) for this job.
name
Source block The source blocks for this job.
Source destination The source destinations for this job.
Sink block The sink blocks for this job.
Sink destination The sink destinations for this job.
Update cycles Indicates whether to update cycle data.
Recalc reporting data Indicates whether to reapply load factors
New source block Allows you to select a new source block.

name
New source Allows you to select a new source destination.

destination name
New sink block name Allows you to select a new sink block name.
New sink destination Allows you to select a new sink destination.

name

Jobs
Re-apply grade Indicates whether or not to reapply the grade
values values.
Commit changes Indicates whether or not to commit changes

made.
Change file The CSV file and location of the CSV file which is
updated with the changed cycle data.
Load factors
Load factors are used to adjust the raw tonnages recorded for each cycle to
take account of the moisture content in the material.
When summaries are written, the recorded tonnage used for the grade
calculations is multiplied by the load factor. Each pit, cut, and material
combination has its own load factor.
If a load factor changes, the KPI data needs to be recalculated to take
account of the change. This is done over a data range, and is called Recalc
Reporting Data.
Data Logger Activate

The Data Logger Activate job template activates a data logger on a VIMS
ABL enabled machine.
Note: This job is also available for models of machines carrying VIMS 3G
devices running in either ABL or 3G format.
Events can be selected based on:

1. A relative time range, for example, between current time and four hours
ago.
2. An absolute time range.
the Data Logger Activate job template.
Name The name of the job template.
This is pre-defined using the office software.

Jobs
Machines Specifies the machines to be activated or
deactivated.
Machines are pre-defined using the office software.
Action Indicates whether the data should be activated or

deactivated.
Monitoring Options A choice of monitoring options.
Monitoring Style Whether to monitor data using a dialog, message

tree or status bar.
Mining Block Exporter template

The Mining Block Exporter job template is used to export mining block data
from the office software and generate files for the METS manager.
the Mining Block Exporter job template.
Export File The parent directory containing the source,

Directory processesd and destination directories for the
import process.
Directory Prefix The prefix used to make the directory names.
Mining Blocks A selectable mining block hierarchy.
Output Region Whether or not to include the region in the pts file
header.
Extra Output Text Displays any extra text to include in the pts file
header.

tree or status bar.

Jobs
Mining Block Importer template

The Mining Block Importer job template is used to import mining block data in
CVS format into the office software and generate files for the METS
manager.
the Mining Block Importer job template

Jobs
Tab Attribute Description

Standard Job The name of the job template.
Options
Advanced Directory Select to define the Mining Block Engine type with your
Prefix directory prefix.
Directory Prefix The prefix used to make the directory names.
Read Only Select to import the mining blocks as read only.
Overwrite Select to overwrite existing mining blocks unless they are

ignored.
Delete Select to delete existng mining blocks within the lowest

hierarchy out of the data being imported that are not present
in the import.
Validate Select to run the importation of Mining Blocks from .csv files
as per normal, however no data will be saved to the
database.
Base File Directory The parent directory containing the source, processesd and
destination directories for the import process.
Output Region Whether or not to include the region in the pts file header.
Extra Output Text Displays any extra text to include in the pts file header.
X/Easting Offset The value of the X (East) offset.
Y/Northing Offset The value of the Y (North) offset.
Z Offset The value of the Z offset.
Assignment XML File The assignment destination configuration file.
Material Name Enter how the material names are mapped to material
Mappings names that have been configured in the office software.
Unmapped Material Enter the default material name to be used. This material
Names will be used if a material in the file is encountered that
doesn’t have a mapping to a material already defined in the
office software.
Grade Name Enter how the grade names are mapped to grade names
Mappings that have been configured in the office software.

Jobs
Tab Attribute Description

Job Run Open Details on Start Open and record a details transcript when the import
Options process starts.
Enable Exception Select this checkbox to enable the operator to query

Dialog exceptions.
Close When Select this checkbox to close the interface down when the
Complete files have been successfully downloaded.

Jobs
Mining Block import and export
Note: Please read this section in conjunction with Importing or exporting

mining blocks in the Platform chapter.
Configuration of various attributes is done using Supervisor. Please

refer to your Fleet Administration and Configuration manual for more
information.
Mining Block import

This section provides more detail on the mining block import process. To
begin the ad hoc import operation, navigate to Contents > Platform > Job
Runner, and select Mining Block Importer.
Data flow for mining block import
The data flow for the mining block import process can be summarized as:
The basic premise is that blocks are processed one bench or stockpile at a
time; typically each pair of polygon/points files contains all mining blocks for a
given bench or stockpile. The file names are arbitrary but must conform to
the following files:
• Polygon file (containing grade and material information for each block)
ends with the nominated Polygon File Suffix.
• Points file (containing geometry information for each block) ends with the
nominated Points File Suffix.
• Polygon and points files which correspond to a given bench/stockpile
must share a common file name (excluding the required suffixes).
Mining block names do not have to be unique across a site but must be
unique within a given file pair.

Jobs
The import process iterates over all file pairs in the source directory. These
are processed and moved to the processed directory. The generated output
is put in the destination directory.
Note: The Points File is optional.

You can import mining blocks into the office software without
specifying any geometric information (i.e. block polygon). The points
file is therefore optional - it will be used if present.
You can specify your own Mining block hierarchy, however the final folder in
the hierarchy must represent the bench. As an example, if you used a three
level mining block hierarchy consisting of Pit : Cut : Bench, then the block
label configuration parameters might be:
Block Label 1 = PIT
Block Label 2 = CUT
Block Label 3 = BENCH
Block Label 4 would be left blank. The above label values refer to values
found in the header row of the polygon file. More detail is given below.
Polygon File Format
This file contains a header row followed by one or more rows of data. The
header row contains a comma-separated list of field names which describe
how the subsequent data rows are to be interpreted. The field names may be
quoted or unquoted. Each data row contains values for the following mining
block attributes. These attributes are configured using Supervisor. Refer to
the Fleet Administration and Configuration guide, Supervisor Page
Reference chapter for details of these attributes.
• Hierarchy Folders (up to 4 hierarchy levels)
• Mining block name
• Mining block initial inventory (mass)
• Material name
• Alternate material name
• Default assignment destination (dump/processor name)
• One or more Grade values
Grade values are processed as follows. Each header row label not falling into
one of the fixed categories above (hierarchy level, material, name etc) is
interpreted as a grade name and the corresponding data row values are
interpreted as values for that grade.
Note: Grade names must exist. Each grade name in the header row must
already exist in the office software. The names are not case sensitive.
Thus, if there were a Grade called "TSulf", then the header row item
"TSULF" would match this grade.

Jobs
Mining blocks must be associated with a core material, but may also contain
a list of alternate materials. To specify alternate materials, additional data
rows are required which have the same mining block name value but
different values for the alternate material data column.
An example polygon file is shown below:
Example file (1)

FileName: A1.23.ply
PIT,CUT,BENCH,BLOCK_NAME,TONS,Gold1,TSulf,MAT_ALT,MAT
A1,23,4440,B461,788085.6,4.5,0.1,HG,HG
A1,23,4440,B461,788085.6,4.5,0.1,LG,HG
A1,23,4440,B462,625152.0,0.5,1.2,WASTE,WASTE
A1,23,4460,B527,845252.0,0.5,1.2,WASTE,WASTE
The mining blocks belong to a three-level hierarchy, in this case Pit - Cut -
Bench, and because the file name does not start with the stockpile file prefix
(default stk), the top level hierarchy folder will be Blocks. If the file contained
stockpile mining blocks, the top level hierarchy folder would be Stockpiles.
Specifying Stockpiles
Using the filename prefix is not the only way to specify that stockpile mining
blocks are to be read. If the hierarchy folder labels in the header row are
seen to match the folder names specified in your Supervisor configuration,
then the mining blocks will also be set up under the Stockpiles folder.
In Example file (1), there are two mining blocks specified for bench 4440:
B461 and B462. Mining block B461 has a default material of HG and one
alternate material LG. There are two grades defined, Gold1 and TSulf.
Alternate Materials
Providing an alternate material data column is optional, but if specified
then it is mandatory for each data row. For the cases where only a
single mining block material is required, set the alternate material value
to be the same as the material value.
Units
Values for mining block mass and grade values must be specified in the
display/reporting units used by your site.
Points File Format
For each mining block specified in the polygon file, the corresponding points
file (if one exists) contains the block geometry, i.e. polygon coordinates.
The data in the points file may be specified in one of two ways, depending on
the value of the Header Row in the Points File setting. If this option is set, the
points file will contain a header row similar to that used in the Polygon File
and which specifies how subsequent data rows are to be interpreted. Each
row may contain additional data items which are ignored, but there must be
values for Easting, Northing, Elevation and Point Number.

Jobs
Specification of mining block name using a header row

The mining block name is specified using the same label as that used in the
polygon file.
An example polygon file, (paired with Example file (1) file above), which uses
a header row is shown below.
:
Example File (2)

File name: A1.23.pts
EASTING,NORTHING,ELEVATION,POINT_NR,BLOCK_NAME
100,200,4560,1,B461
150,200,4560,2,B461
150,250,4560,3,B461
100,250,4560,4,B461
300,100,4560,1,B462
250,200,4560,2,B462
200,100,4560,3,B462
300,400,4560,1,B527
250,500,4560,2,B527
200,400,4560,3,B527
When a header row is not used

• The mining block name is always specified as the first data item on a row
of data values.
• Each subsequent set of rows specify a set of coordinates: Easting (X),
Northing (Y), Elevation in that order.
• The point number is determined from the row position - the first row for a
given polygon is always the first point, the second row is point 2 etc.
• Data for different mining blocks is separated by a blank line.

Jobs
An example polygon file (paired with the A1.23.ply file above) which does not
use a header row is shown below.
Example File (3)

File name: A1.23.pts
B461
100,200,4560
150,200,4560
150,250,4560
100,250,4560
B462
300,100,4560
250,200,4560
200,100,4560
B527
300,100,4560
250,200,4560
200,100,4560
Once the import process has completed successfully, all files from the source
directory which contributed to the import are moved to the processed
directory. The import process not only creates or updates mining blocks in
the mine model, it also generates an export file used for ore map generation.
This export step can also be run standalone and produces the same results.
This is described later.
Face Advance File
The contents of the face advance file are appended to the _M_pts file when it
is written. Like the polygon and points files, the filename is used to determine
whether a particular face advance file should be used.

Jobs
The rules are:

• Suffix must be .ADV.VBM
• File name must contain the hierarchy components separated by either a
colon (:) or an underscore (_).
As an example, the 4400 bench specified earlier to describe the polygon and
points file formats would correspond to any of the following face advance
files:
• A_23_4400.ADV.VBM
• A.23.4400.ADV.VBM
• 23_4400.ADV.VBM
• 23.4400.ADV.VBM
Only one of the above files is required. The examples show that you have
some flexibility in the naming convention.
The format of the face advance file is as follows:
• The first row is a space-separated list of values. The first value is the
elevation and the next value is feature code. Refer to your METS
Manager documentation for more information.
• Subsequent rows are space-separated lists of X (easting) Y (northing)
coordinates.
• The last row is "0.0 0.0".
An example face advance file for the 4400 bench is shown below:
Example file (4)

FileName: A_23_4.ADV.VBM
4450.0 234
123.3 234.1
321.3 461.2
0.0 0.0
Mining Block export

This section provides more detail on the mining block export process.
To begin an ad hoc export operation, navigate to Contents > Platform > Job
Runner, and select Mining Block Export.
The output of the export process is one file ending with the suffix _M_pts
which is created in the destination directory. The export is done by selecting
the bench to be exported, the export file then contains all active mining
blocks on that bench.
Note: Inactive and archived mining blocks are not exported.

Jobs
The file name reflects the model hierarchy for that bench. The process of
importing mining blocks also creates one export file per bench.
For the example, for the import file examples given earlier, the following
export files would be produced:
• B_A1_23_4440_M_pts
• B_A1_23_4460_M_pts
The file names are prefixed with B_ for blocks or S_ for stockpiles.
These files contain the necessary information to allow METS Manager to
generate ore map files and send them to a CAES-equipped loader. Refer to
your METS Manager documentation for this information.
Scheduled Mining Block import and export
Note: Please read this section in conjunction with Creating a scheduled job
for mining block importing and exporting in the Platform chapter.
The mining block import and export processes may be run at user-defined
times rather than being invoked ad hoc. Navigate to Contents > Platform >
to configure the scheduling of one or more import/export operations.
The core parameters used to configure the behavior of the import/export
processes are the same as described earlier for ad hoc imports/exports.
There are additional parameters which must be specified to control when the
job will execute. Refer to the Scheduled Job documentation for more
information on setting up and monitoring.

Jobs
Fluid Management Data Import

Health currently utilizes data imported from VIMS. It has become necessary
to be able to extract data from the various Fluid Management systems in use
by Caterpillar Dealers, and to combine this data with the existing VIMS data
within the office software to be able to provide more information on the
"Health" of Mining equipment.
The Fluid Management Data Import job template is used to import health
data from the OilCommander Fluid Management systems version 4.5.2.
Other systems will be added in the future.
The main aims of the scheduled job are to:
1. provide a simple mechanism with which to send key data from
OilCommander to the office software.
2. combine the data with the office software data and produce reports
based on that combined data.
The Fluid Management Data Import scheduled job imports OilCommander
version 4.5.2 CSV-exported files (see OilCommander exports on page 5.66),
and provides the options to
• import records for all machines or a selection of machines.
• provide verbose output with detailed information regarding the import.
• automatically create unknown machines from import records.
Note: We recommend that you do not use the functionality for automatically
creating unknown machines under normal operational circumstances
as it can result in the unintended creation of many machines that are
not sufficiently populated for many other office software usages. The
OilCommander import feature matches Health data against
OilCommander data, so machines should already exist in the office
software.
See Fluid Management Data Import job template on page 5.67 for the
attributes for a job created using the Fluid Management Data Import job.
OilCommander exports
OilCommander v4.5.2 provides a data export function which exports data to a
CSV formatted file. When these files are placed in the fluid import files
directory, which by default is \FluidImportFiles\Unprocessed, running
the Fluid Management Data Import job works through each file with a .csv
extension, importing records as per a set of Import rules, placing processed
files in either \FluidImportFiles\processed or
\FluidImportFiles\badfiles. CSV files that contain any importable
records are processed and placed in processed, otherwise they are placed
in badfiles.

Jobs
File format
OilCommander CSV files contain a header which Health uses to identify the
data contained in a cell. The three most important, and mandatory, columns
are labno, serialno and compartid (Lab Number, Machine Serial Number
and Machine Compartment ID). Most of the other columns are devoted to the
lab results, such as Al and Na that specify the parts-per-million of Aluminium
and Sodium observed in the oil sample.
Import rules
The following import rules are followed when running the Fluid Management
Data Import job.
• Each import record must have a known machine serial number (if auto-
create is not selected), a compartment ID and a lab number (known or
unknown). If these three values are not present in a single import record,
(whole line in CSV), then that record in the file is skipped and the import
will proceed to the next line.
• Machines from import records are matched against Health records by the
machine’s serial number.
• The import job will accept import records that have already been imported
and update imported records as required.
• A unique identifier assigned by the external system identifies parts of an
import record; for example, the OilCommander-assigned identifier lab
number identifies the sample and reading, the machine component
serial number identifies the machine compartment.
• Should a sample value, such as Al ppm, be non-numerical, that value will
be skipped but the remainder of the record will be imported as normal. A
warning is generated if the import job is in 'verbose' mode.
Fluid Management Data Import job template

the Fluid Management Data Import job template. This is found in the office
software by clicking Jobs > Health > Fluid Management Data Import.
Job The name of the job template.
Machines Specifies the machines from which files will be

downloaded.
Verbose Select this checkbox to produce a detailed report,

rather than a summary report.

Jobs
Auto-create Select this checkbox if you want a machine record
to be created when processing a file from an
unknown machine.
It is not recommended that you select this check
box. Refer to the Note: above.
Base Directory Specifies the directory where the imported files will
be located.
Processed files Specifies a directory where all processed files are

located.
Unprocessed Files Specifies a directory where all the unprocessed

files are located.
Bad Files Specifies a directory where all the bad files are
located.
Open Details on Open and record a details transcript when the

Start import process starts.
Enable Exception Select this checkbox to enable the operator to

Dialog query exceptions.
Close When Select this checkbox to close the interface down

Complete when the files have been successfully downloaded.

Jobs
Position Event Export template

The Position Event Export job template is used to export event information
for plotting. (If you are running a release prior to Release 3.0, this will be
done in Minescape).
the Position Event Export job template.
Positions file name The name and location of the position file.
States file name The name and location of the states file.
GPS File name The name and location of the GPS file name.
Period Selection The timeframe for running the job.

Valid values are:
• Relative — Run the export with a time frame
relative to the start time of the job. The period
offset is the number of hours previous to run
time of the job to export.
• Explicit — Run the export for a specific period at
a specific time and date.
Machine Selection The machines to export position event information

for.
Valid values are:
• By category
• By truck/shovel
Event type The events to export position information for.
Snapshot Activate template

The Snapshot Activate job template is used to manually trigger a Snapshot
on a VIMS ABL enabled machine.
the Snapshot Activate job template.

Jobs
Machines Specifies the machines to be activated or
deactivated.
Action Indicates whether the data should be activated or

deactivated.

tree or status bar.
VIMS File Download template

The VIMS File Download job template is used to download VIMS data files
wirelessly from a VIMS ABL equipped machine.
the VIMS File Download job template.

downloaded.
Group Specifies the file types to download from which

group.

tree or status bar.
VIMS Data Import template

The VIMS Data Import job template is used to import health data from a
VIMS equipped machine into the office software database.

Jobs
the VIMS Data Import job template.
Job The name of the job template.

downloaded.
Group Specifies the file types to download from which

group.
Verbose Select this check box to produce a detailed report,

rather than a summary report.
Auto-create Select this check box if you want to create a

machine when processing a file from an unknown
machine.
Delete existing Select this check box if you want existing files to be
records deleted from the system, if they have the same
name as files being imported.
Update views at Select this check box to update the database views
end of import and reflect the imported data when it has finished
downloading.
Export SmartSignal Select this check box to export datalogs and

files snapshots as SmartSignal ASCII files before
importing.
Perform FPO Select this check box to process datalogs to

calculation calculate the FPO Haul Road Condition Index.
Ignore operator Select this check box to ignore operator-related

information.
Create service Select this check box to create service meter

meter reading reading objects from available SMU data.
Import all data in Select this check box to force the import of ALL
files data in files. By default, only data recorded since
last download is imported. Enabling import of all
data will increase database size and potentially
cause duplicate data to be recorded if files are not
reset regularly.
Base Directory Specifies the directory where the imported files will
be located.
Processed files Specifies the directory where all processed files are
located.

Job codes
Unprocessed Files Specifies the directory where all the unprocessed
files are located.
Bad Files Specifies the directory where all the bad files are
located.
ASCII Files Specifies the directory for the exported ASCII

(SmartSignal) files. When you select the Export
SmartSignal files check box on the Extended
options tab, this is the directory used.
Sort files by type After processing, move file into subdirectory for
specific file type
Sort files by After processing, move file into subdirectory for

Machine specific machine
Open Details on Open and record a details transcript when the

Start import process starts.
Enable Exception Select this checkbox to enable the operator to

Dialog query exceptions.
Close When Select this checkbox to close the interface down

Complete when the files have been successfully downloaded.
Job codes
Job codes are used in reporting to show how much time was spent doing a
particular job. Job codes identify what type of job a machine was doing, e.g. a
wheel loader may be maintaining roads, or cleaning up a face.

KPIs
Job code groups

Job code groups assist you to manage job codes with respect to which
machines categories are using them. A job code group may be associated
with a machine category to restrict which job can be performed by that
machine category.
Job code Job code
Job code group
Job code
Job code
Job code group
Machine Machine Machine

category category category
Figure 5.4: Relationship between jobs, job codes and job code groups
KPIs
Key Performance Indicators (KPI) are user-defined measures to report
performance targets based on the critical success factors of the project over
time.
There are two types of KPIs in Fleet: real-time and summary.
Summary KPIs
Summary KPIs provide functionality for you to define and capture KPI data to
be monitored, summarized and used for reporting.
Summary KPIs is configured differently for each mine site using the
cycleskpisummaries.xml file. To configure the xml file, you should
contact a Fleet consultant.

Licences
Real-time KPIs
Real-time KPIs provide functionality for you to define and capture KPI data to
be monitored and analyzed in real-time.
To do this you, (or your Fleet consultant), must configure a KPI/Summaries
server using XML. For details, refer to the Fleet Administration and
Configuration manual.
Real-time KPIs can be displayed for machines in Fleet Update Assistant or
displayed to machine operators via self-service messages.
Licences
A licence refers to the recognized authority and qualification of a person to
operate a particular machine or piece of equipment.
Loading tool
A Loading tool is a specific types of server, and also the generic term for a
machine that loads material into trucks. Shovels, wheeled loaders, diggers,
and crusher load-outs are all examples of Loading tools.
Loading tool productivity

The productivity of a loading tool is based on the nominal rates specified for
that loading tool. Nominal rates for loading tools are inherited from their class
and are specified in terms of the time it takes to load a particular truck class.
When the productivity of a loading tool is changed, the actual loading times
are recalculated from the nominal loading times. For example, if the nominal
loading time for a truck class is 360 seconds and the loading tool is currently
operating at 120% of its normal rate, then the loading time drops to 300
seconds. The nominal loading time does not change.
Loading tool attributes

The following table describes the attributes for Loading tools.
Name Unique name describing the Loading tool.
Saturation Indicates that as soon as truck has finished

being loaded or has dumped, there is another
truck waiting to be loaded.
Description Description of the class to which this Loading

tool belongs.

Loading tool
Serial number Unique number supplied by the manufacturer of
the Loading tool.
Class The loading tool class to which the Loading tool

belongs.
Destination The destination to which the Loading tool can

be assigned, for example, a sink source or
station.
Waypoint Loading tool waypoints are associated with

Loading tools. Whenever a truck enters a
waypoint of this type, the office software can
determine which Loading tool is servicing the
truck.
Loading tool control • Assign at start of loading.

options • Assign at end of loading with predicted
material.
• Assign if material set during loading.
• Assign material to load.
Current destination The destination to which the Loading tool is

currently assigned.
Allowed materials The materials the Loading tool is allowed to

load.
Allowed truck classes The truck classes to which the Loading tool is
allowed to load.
Mining block lock Specifies that for a truck loaded by a Loading

tool with a mining block lock, an assignment is
only ever attempted to specific processors.
Loading tool recipes

Loading tool recipes provide the capability for users (the office software
Operators or ore controllers) to set up specific lists of materials that need to
be loaded into a crusher or other processor in order to produce a required
material mix.
Loading tool recipes are defined in the office software and sent to a suitable
loading tool working at a stockpile. These loading tools have a specific
category identifying them as being suitable for handling loading tool recipes.

Machines
Machines
Machines is the collective term used to describe trucks, processors, loading
tools and equipment. That is, any operational device or entity of which the
office software needs to be aware.
The types of machines are as follows:
• Trucks.
• Loading tools.
• Processors.
• Auxiliary equipment — for example, graders, water trucks.
Although the position of a machine is calculated automatically by the office
software, it can still be manually specified using the assistant page for that
machine, for example, Truck Assistant, Loading Tool Assistant.
Each machine must be classed as either mobile or fixed.
Machine classes
A machine class is a logical group of machines (or equipment) with similar
attributes. Each class exists within a machine category.
Machines in a class are usually constructed similarly and operate similarly,
for example, B495 and PH1150.
Every machine must belong to a machine class and by default inherits the
attributes of that class.
Some individual machine attributes may be defined (or overridden).
Machines that use attribute overrides have their class name displayed in
orange on Fleet Update Assistant.
A machine class contains either all mobile or all fixed machines.
Included configurations
Included configurations allow the Mine Builder to import and export machine
class-specific values to and from a file. When importing, this reduces the
amount of manual data entry required when setting up new machine classes,
which in turn reduces the number of incorrect values entered. This helps to
improve the optimal operation of Assignment.
Exporting included configurations allows the Mine Builder to export existing
machine class values into the same file format used for importing machine
class included configuration files. This is particularly useful if the same
machine class configurations are used at more than one mine site, where the
files can be sent between sites and loaded where necessary.

Machines
Machine class attributes

The following table describes the main attributes for machine classes.
General — truck Exist for all machine classes as part of the class
classes definition, but may vary for each type of machine.
Examples are
• Assignment priority.
• Fuel capacity.
General — These exist for all machine classes as part of the

loading tool class definition, but may vary for each type of
classes machine.
Examples are:
• Loading capacity.
• Hydraulic cycle times.
• Slew rates.
Destination Specifies where a machine can operate based on the

class to which it belongs.
For example, shovels, loading tools and trucks can all
operate at entries but shovels would not operate at a
dump.
Dimension For truck classes, specifies the linear and mass

attributes.
Material Materials associated with this machine class.

Examples are:
• Materials a loading tool is allowed to dig.
• Materials a truck is allowed to carry.
Material payload For truck class — specifies the maximum, nominal

and other payload values of a truck class, as well as
the struck and heaped capacity of the tray and other
details.
Truck For a loading tool class — specifies the trucks that a

loading tool class is allowed to load. Loading tool
classes require at least one allowable truck class as
part of their definition.
Speed Specifies the speed for loading tools and trucks.

Machines
Engine For loading tool and truck classes — specifies model,
power, rated RPM and other details
Production Specifies the cycle engine that the machine should

use and also the URL to the activities that are relevant
to this machine and cycle engine.
Machine categories
A machine category is a group of machine classes with similar attributes.
Machine categories may be either:
• Pre-defined — supplied with the office software, can not be defined,
edited or deleted by you, for example, Loaders, Shovels, Trucks, Graders.
• Auxiliary — not supplied with the office software, can be defined, edited or
deleted by you, for example, Rubber Tired Dozers, Scrapers, Water
Trucks, etc.
Other types of machine categories:
• Transport vehicles — created for use as part of the shift change and have
no capacity for being assigned. Have less attributes and are not defined in
the same way as other machines.
• Load haul dump (LHD) — a wheel loader used at stockpiles to transport
material directly from a stockpile to a crusher. They can be configured to
use loader recipes.
The following diagram depicts the relationship between machine classes and
machine categories
Machine Machine Machine Machine

type A type B type C type D


Class A Class B Class C Class D

(fixed) (mobile) (fixed) (mobile)
Category X Category Y Category Z
Figure 5.5: Relationship between machines, classes and categories

Machines
Machine category attributes

All machine categories require a name and a valid icon URL. This is
displayed alongside each machine of this category in the Machine Finder.
Supported formats are .gif, .jpg and .png. The default location for icons is
mstar\mstarHome\res\com\mincom\gallery\icon. There is no
practical restriction on the size of icon used, but for ease of maintenance and
usability, dimensions of less than 30 pixels per side is recommended.
All other attributes are optional.
The description attribute is a textual description that describes the nature or
purpose of machines and classes in this category.
Machine fleets
Fleet is the term used to describe any user-defined combination of machines
irrespective of whether they are fixed or mobile.
If a mine is particularly large or has many summarized rational activities, it
may be useful to divide machines and equipment into fleets.
Fleets are used for interrogation and reporting, assist online viewing and do
not impact any operational aspect of the office software or the mine.
A machine does not have to belong to a fleet.
The following diagram depicts the relationship of a fleet to machine classes
and machine categories.


Fleet

Class A Class B Class C Class D

(fixed) (mobile) (fixed) (mobile)
Category X Category Y Category Z
Figure 5.6: Relationship between machines, classes, categories and

fleets
Machine files
Machine files contain data about field machines and equipment. These are
also called onboard files.
The data files stored on field machines and equipment must be synchronized
with data files in the office to ensure that the office software assigns

Machines
machines effectively and records production data correctly. This

synchronization is maintained by the periodic transfer of files between the
office and the field. Transfers are made using File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
and may be manual or automatic.
Types of machine files are as follows:
• Activity files.
• Delay files.
• Message files.
• Truck files.
• Safety check files.
• Fluid files.
• Material files.
• Job Code files.
• Mining block files.
• Waypoint files.
• Display waypoint files.
• Operator files.
• Backdrop files.
Machine files may be created for transmission directly to the field machine
devices or to machine FLASH memory cards.
The Onboard File Assistant page displays all files that have been generated
and uploaded and are:
• Waiting to be transferred — although many files may be waiting to be
transferred, no more than the configured maximum will display.
• Currently being transferred.
• Finished being transferred.
Machine files attributes

The following table describes the attributes for machine files.
File Type of machine file.
Examples: Activity, Delay.
Last generated Time and date that the file was last generated.
Current version Version of the latest onboard configuration file that was
generated and still exists on the server. Each time a file
is generated the file version number is incremented.
Last generated Time and date that the file was last generated.

Machines
Next version Version number of the next generated file. Can be
generated automatically or entered manually.
Generated by Indicates the name of the person who generated the

file. This is the person currently logged in to the office
software.
Label Descriptive label added to the header information. Can

be generated automatically or entered manually.
Machine states
A machine state describes the change in activity of the machine.
Machine states use attributes to define the relationship between themselves
and the production cycles of which they are a part.
States change automatically in the office software, but can be changed
manually by you, in which case they are referred to as activities.
The types of events that trigger an automatic state change are:
• Passing through a waypoint.
• Receiving a message from the field machines or equipment.
The state of a machine provided by the onboard systems depends on:
• The type of onboard system.
• The type of machine deployed (shovel, truck, drill, auxiliary).
• The level of onboard sensing (VIMS, TPMS, GPS, body switch, rotation
sensor).
• The degree of automatic determination written in the application vs.
manual interaction.
Machine state groups allow machines with similar attributes to be grouped
together.
Machine state attributes

The following table describes the attributes for machine states.
Name Name of the machine state.
ID Unique identifier for the machine state.
Abbreviation Abbreviation name for the machine state.
Destination Destination of the machine.
Associations Machine categories for which this machine state is

allowed.

Materials
The following table describes the states of a machine and the colors used to
indicate each state.
Color Description
Yellow Normal operations.
Red Selected.
Gray On delay.
Materials
A material is any substance which has the potential to be moved between
destinations in the mine. It is described using values for grades.
Material attributes specify which materials a server can handle. Not all
loading tools can excavate all materials, and not all crushers or stockpiles
can receive all materials.
The office software uses this information to ensure that loading tools are not
assigned to handle the wrong materials, that trucks are not assigned to
incorrect loading tools and also that the wrong material is not sent to
crushers or stockpiles. The office software always ensures that loading tools
are working allowable materials and that only trucks that are allowed to haul
that material are assigned to the loading tool’s destination.
Rules for allowing materials

Rules apply when allowing materials. They are as follows:
• A loading tool may operate at a destination where more than one material
is available. Therefore the allowable material for a loading tool may
change based on the current production requirements.
• Processors can handle more than one material or material grade.
• If a loading tool is only loading a single material, it is preferable that only
that material be allowable at any one time. This ensures that any trucks
that are assigned to that loading tool are to load that material only. If more
than one material were made allowable, trucks could be assigned to the
loading tool expecting to be loaded with a material other than what the
loading tool was currently handling.
• Attributes for processors are defined on a case by case basis.
• Similarly for processors and dumps, a truck is only assigned to dump at a
destination if the material is allowed at that destination.

Messages
Material mix
A material mix is a specific combination of allowable materials. It is used to
simplify the task of adding many materials to processors, loading tools,
destinations, trucks etc.
You can set up material mixes and then add one or more mixes to a specific
destination to produce the required list of allowable materials.
Messages
A message consists of information sent and received between the mine
office and the field.
A target is the machine specified to receive a message. More than one
machine may receive the same message and the names are specified in the
target attribute of the message.
Different types of messages have different attributes. For example, a
controller informing all operators in a specific area of the mine of an imminent
blast might require acknowledgement from the operators, whereas
information regarding achievement of a mine-wide milestone may not require
operator acknowledgement.
Responses to messages are treated as office software events and are
displayed in Event Monitor.
The purpose of break messages may be to:
• Notify operators that a scheduled break has been confirmed (allocation).
• Notify operators that a scheduled break is about to begin (imminent).
• Notify operators that a scheduled break has been cancelled (cancelled).
• Notify operators that a scheduled break has been updated (updated).
Types of messages
The types of messages that are sent and received are as follows:
• System messages.
• Operator messages.

Messages
System messages
System messages are automatically sent by the office software when certain
parameters are met or exceeded or when a state or position change occurs.
System messages include:
• Position requests.
• State changes.
• Dipper reports.
Operator messages
Operator message are the text messages used to communicate information
between the office and operators in the field. They can only be sent to
machines fitted with onboard hardware (Fleet on CD550 or Fleet on CMPD).
The types of operator messages are as follows:
• Ad hoc — attributes are defined as required and message is sent as
required. Used to communicate unforeseen events or unusual
circumstances.
• Standard — attributes are pre-defined and message is sent on a regular
basis to communicate commonly used information, for example, break
messages. Standard messages can also be accessed by field operators
to send messages to the office software office or other field operators.
Types of standard messages are:
• Office — can only be sent from office to the field.
• Mobile — can be sent from and received by either office or mobile
machines and equipment.
Safety messages
A particular type of standard message is the Safety message of the day
which reminds the operator about specific safety rules and guidelines on the
mine site. You can select a different one every day using the Standard
Message Finder.
For a message to be available as a Safety Message, the Message group it is
in must be flagged as "Contains Safety Messages." See Creating operator
message groups in the Pit Link chapter for the procedure.
Safety messages are chosen randomly from any message group folder
called “safety messages”, and display whenever the operator logs in and
completes a safety checklist. As messages are chosen randomly from those
available, the message displayed may not be the same for all machines on
any given day.
Note: If safety checklists are not used, the Safety Message of the Day is not
displayed.

Messages
Operator message variables

Variables are used to populate messages with computed values. The values
may differ depending on the target machine.
The following table describes message variables installed with the office
software.
Variable Definition
OPERATOR_NAME Name of the operator currently operating
the machine which is to receive the
message.
LOCKED_EXCAVATORS Excavators/Loading tools that the truck is

alias = currently locked to.
LOCKED_LOADING_TOOLS
NEXT_BREAK Description of the next break.
NEXT_BREAK_NAME Name of the next break.
NEXT_BREAK_TIME Time of the next break.
NEXT_BREAK_DATE Date of the next break.
NEXT_BREAK_DATETIME Date and time of next break.
ARRIVAL_TIMES Arrival times of all trucks on route to the

machine receiving the message. Only
intended to be used for loading tools.
KPI_VALUE Specified KPI value or values for the

machine receiving the message.
ATTRIBUTE_VALUE Specifiec value for the machine receiving

the message. Vlaues may be cascaded by
"." to get other attribute values, e.g.
lastLoader.currentOperator.name will get
the machines lastLoader attribute, get the
current Operator of the last Loader, and
the name of the Operator.
NEXT_TIE_DOWNS Saved tie-down location for the machine

for the next shift.
Example
• A message compiled using variables, looks like this:
{OPERATOR_NAME}, your next break is {NEXT_BREAK_NAME} at
{NEXT_BREAK_TIME}
The same message rendered on the operator’s console looks like this:
CALLAWAY, JAMES, your next break is LUNCH at 13.00.

Messages
KPI examples
A KPI_VALUE message looks like this:
{KPI_VALUE(kpi_num, ...)}
other KPI examples follow.
Mobile
Total Prime Tons for Shift Request = How many prime tons have been mined
in total this shift?
[Reply: Total Prime Tons for Shift Response]
Total Rehandle Tons for Shift Request = How many rehandle tons have been
mined in total this shift?
[Reply: Total Rehandle Tons for Shift Response]
Office
Total Prime Tons for Shift Response = Total Prime tons for Shift:
{KPI_VALUE(tonsMined.primeForShift)}
Total Rehandle Tons for Shift Response = Total Rehandle tons for Shift:
{KPI_VALUE(tonsMined.rehandleForShift)}
Mobile/Drill
Holes Drilled for Shift Request = How many holes have I drilled this shift?
[Reply: Holes Drilled for Shift Response]
Feet Drilled for Shift Request = How many feet have I drilled this shift?
[Reply: Feet Drilled for Shift Response]
Office/Drill
Holes Drilled for Shift Response = Holes drilled this shift:
{KPI_VALUE(drillKpis.holesByDrillForShift)}
Feet Drilled for Shift Response = Feet drilled this shift:
{KPI_VALUE(drillKpis.feetByDrillForShift)}
Mobile/Loading Tool
Dig Rate Request = What is my dig rate?
[Reply: Dig Rate Response]
Prime Tons for Shift Request = How many prime tons have I mined this shift?
[Reply: Prime Tons for Shift Request]
Rehandle Tons for Shift Request = How many rehandle tons have I mined
this shift?
[Reply: Rehandle Tons for Shift Response]
Trucks Loaded for Shift Request = How many trucks have I loaded this shift?
[Reply: Trucks Loaded for Shift Response]
Hang Time for Shift Request = How much hang time have I had this shift?
[Reply: Hang Time for Shift Response]
Loading Time for Shift Request = How much loading time have I had this
shift?
[Reply: Loading Time for Shift Response]

Messages
Office/Loading Tool
Prime Tons for Shift Response = Prime tons for shift:
{KPI_VALUE(loaderTonsMined.byLoadingToolPrimeForShift)}
Rehandle Tons for Shift Response = Rehandle tons for shift:
{KPI_VALUE(loaderTonsMined.byLoadingToolRehandleForShift
)}
Dig Rate Response =
{KPI_VALUE(loadingToolDigRate.byLoadingToolForPeriod)}
Trucks Loaded for Shift Response = Trucks loaded this shift:
{KPI_VALUE(trucksLoaded.byLoadingToolForShift)}
Hang Time for Shift Response = Hang time:
{KPI_VALUE(loadingToolActivity.hangTimeByLoadingToolForS
hift)}
Loading Time for Shift Response = Loading time:
{KPI_VALUE(loadingToolActivity.loadingTimeByLoadingToolF
orShift)}
Mobile/Truck
TMPH Request = What is my recent average TMPH?
[Reply: TMPH Response]
Payload for Shift Request = What is my total payload this shift?
[Reply: Payload for Shift Response]
Cycles for Shift Request = How many cycles have I completed this shift?
[Reply: Cycles for Shift Response]
Last Cycle Time Request = How long was my last completed cycle?
[Reply: Last Cycle Time Response]
Dumping Time Request = What is my recent average dumping time?
[Reply: Dumping Time Response]
Office/Truck
TMPH Response = TMPH: {KPI_VALUE(tmph.byTruckForPeriod)}
Payload for Shift Response = Payload this shift:
{KPI_VALUE(truckLoadingStats.totalPayloadForShift)}
Cycles for Shift Response = Cycles this shift:
{KPI_VALUE(truckLoadingStats.cyclesForShift)}
Last Cycle Time Response = Last cycle time:
{KPI_VALUE(truckCycleInfo.lastCycleTime)}
Dumping Time Response = Dumping Time:
{KPI_VALUE(truckDumpingActivity.dumpingTime)}

Mine model
Operator message attributes

The following table describes the attributes for operator messages.
Message type Specifies the type or category of message which in
turn defines the way the message is displayed on
the screen. Valid types are:
• Information.
• Question.
• Warning.
• Error.
• Stop.
Required response Specifies the responses that the machine operator

may use. Valid responses are:
• None.
• OK.
• OK or Cancel.
• Yes or No.
Office Indicates whether the office must acknowledge the

acknowledgment response.
Sender ID Specifies the office operator’s user ID.
ID System-generated message ID.
Message text title Specifies an informative short title for the message.
Message text Specifies the actual body text of the message that
will be displayed.
Target A target is the name of a piece of equipment to

receive a message. More than one piece of
equipment may receive the same message and the
names are specified in the target attribute.
Mine model
The mine model is the collection of mine data and information stored by the
office software. The mine model contains details about such things as the
haulage network, the material sources and sinks, as well as the location and
performance of loading tools and trucks.

Mining blocks
The mine model is updated continuously (dynamically) by the office software

and reviewed on every shift. This allows assignments to be based on the
most accurate and up-to-date data.
Site travel network
The site travel network consists of the waypoints, destinations and road
segments that exist throughout the mine and that are used for tracking the
progress and state of all suitably-equipped machines.
The components of the site travel network form part of the mine model and
as such need to be kept up to date for the office software to perform correctly.
Mining blocks
A mining block can be a volume of either unmined or stockpile material. The
volume is defined during ore control planning and the model consists of a
two-dimensional polygon with an elevation (Z) and a height (thickness).
A mining block is described using specific grades and grade values which
are usually consistent across the entire mining block and collectively known
as the material grade for that mining block. If the material grade is not
consistent across a mining block, that volume that differs can be defined as a
child, or alternate, mining block. This enables more accurate recording of
mined materials and better assignments.
Polygons can also be loaded for mining blocks, which means automatic
mining block determination is possible by using the XY coordinates of the
loading tool. If the XY coordinates of the loading tool fall within a particular
polygon, then the mining block associated with that polygon is assumed to
be the current mining block.
The mining block that a loading tool works with is defined when the loading
tool is configured for a destination. Therefore all trucks that load at that
loading tool have grades assigned according to that mining block.
Destinations may have many mining blocks associated with them. To make
the list easier to work with, you can set a mining block to be active or
inactive. Only current mining blocks can have a status of active, and only
active mining blocks can be mined and loading tools can only be configured
to work active mining blocks
Mining block information can be imported into the office software and used to
track material and related grade movement through the mine.
When a mining block has been mined out, it can be archived to remove it
from the list of current mining blocks.
Mining block groups

Mining block groups are used to manage mining blocks and contain mining
blocks with similar material grades and/or locations.

Mining blocks
Mining block attributes

The following table describes the main attributes for mining blocks.
Name Unique name for the mining block.
Location/ hierarchy Indicates the position of the mining block with

respect to other mine areas.
Optional alternate List of available materials that can be applied to

materials this mining block.
Mass and volume Indicates the original mass and volume, the
amount that has been mined and the amount
remaining to be mined.
Current status Indicates the status of the mining block.

Valid values are:
• Active.
• Read only.
• Stockpile.
• Locked Destination.
Grades Indicates the type of grade.

Valid values are:
• Continuous.
• Discrete.
Coordinates Specifies the coordinates that bound the mining

block.
Can be absolute or relative.
Mining block polygons require a minimum of
four vertices.
Destination lock When selected, indicates that a truck loaded

with this material from this mining block can only
unload at the specified destination.
Only applies to stockpiles.

Mining blocks
Mining block hierarchy

The Mining Block hierarchy is designed to take up to four levels. The
following is an example of a Mining Block hierarchy.
• PIT
• BENCH (unique within the pit, can be common between pits)
• BLAST (must be unique within the bench, can be common
between benches)
• Block 1 (must be unique within the blast)
• Block 2
• … to ….
• Block n
Some examples:
PIT: A, B, C, SouthPit, NorthPit
BENCH: Elevation of bench (e.g. RL85)
BLAST: Blast number, e.g. 51571
BLOCK: Block number, e.g. 1 … to … n
Therefore, block definitions for blocks from pit A at bench K level 7, from
blast number 51571 with 6 blocks will lead to the following blocks:
A_7_51571_1
A_7_51571_2
A_7_51571_3
A_7_51571_4
A_7_51571_5
A_7_51571_6

Mining blocks
A graphical representation of the above example is shown in the diagram

below.
Modelling mining blocks with multiple royalties

Within the office software it is possible to handle situations where there are
different royalties for the material being mined. To do this, typically the
geological export / import providing the Mining Blocks should also split the
blocks by the royalty and provide a discrete grade to the material by

Mining blocks
specifying which lease it belongs to. See Mining Block import and export on
page 5.59 for more information on importing and exporting mining blocks.
Note: In the following diagram there are extra blocks created (blocks 7, 8
and 9) that split the same materials (1, 2 and 4) in order that blocks /
materials from different leases can be determined and hence
assigned to different locations by the office software, e.g. a different
stockpile.
Loader Operator’s view of Mining Blocks in CAES

When creating Mining Blocks it is important to consider what and how the
loader operator views the area being mined in order for them to determine a
correct understanding of the materials being loaded into trucks.
Overview of material identification

Material Identification is used in material and ore applications. CAES
identifies different materials that are loaded into a bucket. CAES also
determines the percentages of the different materials in each bucketload.

Mothballing
CAES accumulates the percentages of different materials as buckets are

loaded into a truck. When the "Send Truck" command is applied, the
percentages of material for the truck load are reported.
Material designs
Material designs define the limits of different materials. The limits of the
different materials must form polygons. The material polygons define the
extents of the different materials. CAES identifies the materials that are
loaded into each bucket, as well as the Mining Block ID that is returned back
to the office software to facilitate the identification of the qualities and grades
of the materials being loaded into trucks.
Material status update

The following plan view of the Mining Blocks in CAES shows the various
materials (in different colors) around the loader and their mined state.
1 Areas that have been mined out, indicated by a solid grey color.
2 Areas that have not been mined, indicated by no change to the original
material color.
3 Areas where mining is still in progress, indicated by cross-hatch shading
over the original material color.
Note also the text with the block. This contains the Mining Block ID for the
area being mined. It is sent back to the office software to allow identification
of qualities / grades of the material.
Mothballing
Mothballing is a term no longer used by the office software but may still be
used within the mining industry. See Archiving.
Onboard files
Onboard files are machine files. See Machine files.

Pages
Pages
A page is a graphical user interface (GUI) made up of such things as tables,
fields and buttons. A page performs a specific function within the office
software depending on its type and the subsystem to which it belongs.
Types of pages
The types of pages are as follows:
Page type Description

Finders Show a list of entities defined for the mine, for example,
grades, materials and machines. Generally other pages
such as editors can be launched from finders.
Editors Manage the creation and maintenance of mine entities.
Monitors Display data which is dynamically updated as new

information is received.
Viewers Provide read-only access to documents, graphics and

reports.
Assistants Assist in achieving tasks, for example, sending messages

to operators.
Page configuration
A page configuration is a pre-defined layout for a page.
You may select a page configuration from the Page Configurations list box
on the Welcome screen.
Page configuration dialog

The Page configuration dialog allows you to specify attributes and entities to
be included in, or excluded from, a page. The commands and options within
this dialog vary depending on the page.
Page configurations list box

The Page configurations list box displays all available configurations for the
active page. Some pages have several default configurations for performing
different tasks.
The consoles available and the pages displayed within a console vary
depending on the user’s privileges.

Payloads
Payloads
A payload is the amount of material carried by a truck from source to sink.
A machine’s capacity to carry material varies according to such factors as the
model and health of the machine and road segment conditions. To manage
this you define a nominal payload for each machine class which represents
the optimal load to be carried and the shovel operator must ensure that it is
not exceeded.
The payload is measured by the onboard equipment when a truck is leaving
the loading tool and changes to second gear. The following table describes
how the office software manages the measured payloads.
If the truck payload is ... Then ...

10% more than the nominal payload An alarm is triggered to warn the
operator
20% more than the nominal payload The truck must dump the entire
payload immediately.
Payload events
The following table describes the classifications for payload events and the
colors used to represent them.
Color Description
Orange Exceeds maximum — payload is greater than the
specified maximum value for the truck class.
Light green Overloaded — payload is between the specified

overload and maximum values for the truck class
Green Normal — payloads between the specified nominal

and overload values for the truck class.
Blue Underloaded — payload is between the specified

underload and nominal values for the truck class.
Processors
Processors is the collective term used for machines that process the mined
materials. Examples of processors are crushers and conveyors.
Processing rates
A processing rate is the value of the rate at which a load is to be processed.
The office software considers the processing rate at sinks.

Production requirements
The following tables describes some of the ways the office software
manages processing rate times.
If the time for the Then ...

processing rate is ...
Increased The processor productivity rate decreases.
This may be appropriate when the material is
very blocky and takes extra time to process.
Decreased The processor productivity rate increases.

This may be appropriate when the material
has been blasted finer than usual.
Processor attributes
The following table describes the attributes for processors.
Stationary If set, indicates that the processor does not move and
is located at the centre of the current destination.
If not set, indicates that the processor is at a dump
destination and can move as required. GPS is used to
update the office software of the changed position.
Production requirements
Production requirements are used to define the required mine performance.
They define what needs to be done in order to maximize mine capacity.
Production requirements define the movement of material between two or
more destinations.
Production requirements are based on production templates which can be
customized and version controlled.
One, and only one, set of production requirements must be running at all
times. Production requirements cannot be deleted, instead they must be
replaced by a new set, even if that set is empty.
Production requirements attributes

The following table describes the attributes of production requirements.
Item Description
Name Name of the production requirements template used.
Description Description of the production requirements template

used.

Reporting
Item Description
Start time Sttart date and time for the production requirement.
End time End date and time for the production requirement.
Duration Duration of the production requirement.
Status Status of the production requirement.
Reporting
Reporting is the process of accessing Fleet data base information to
generate reports suitable for output to hard copy. This process is facilitated
by a third party reporting tool, namely Business Objects.
You may customize the standard reports provided by Fleet or create new
ones.
For details, refer to the Fleet Information Access User Manual.
Restoring
Restoring is the process of re-activating an archived office software entity
from the mine model database. Only entities that have been archived can be
restored.
Entities that can be restored are:
• People
• Machines
• Materials
• Waypoints
• Destinations
• Road segments.
Restrictions
Restrictions are rules that define how trucks are to be locked to, or barred
from, one or more servers (loading tools and processors) and mining blocks.
If restrictions are placed on trucks, servers or mining blocks, the office
software may not be able to generate the most efficient assignments.
However, examples of when it may be necessary to place restrictions are as
follows:
• To simplify shift change at the end of a shift.
• To divide the mine by region.
All restrictions must be either:

Restrictions
• Absolute, or
• Provisional.
Absolute restrictions
Absolute restrictions may not be removed or relaxed to permit a truck to get
an assignment. For example, if a truck has an absolute lock to a loading tool,
and that loading tool goes on delay, then that truck no longer receives
assignments, even if other loading tools are still operating.
All types of restrictions may be set as absolute.
Provisional restrictions
Provisional restrictions may be removed or relaxed to permit a truck to get an
assignment. For example, if a truck is provisionally locked to a loading tool
and that loading tool goes on delay, then the provisional locks to the loading
tool are ignored and the truck gets an assignment to another loading tool.
Not all types of restrictions may be set as provisional.
Types of restrictions
The types of restrictions are:
• Locks (including mining block locks).
• Bars.
• Assignment groups.
Locks
A lock constrains the assignment of:
• A truck to a specific server.
• A mining block to a specific destination.
Trucks can be assigned to a destination to which they are locked. A truck
may be locked to:
• One or more loading tools.
• One or more processors.
Locks may be absolute or provisional.

Restrictions
The following table describes some of the ways the office software manages
locks.
If a truck is locked to a... Then the ...

Processor Truck will always dump at that locked
destination.
Loading tool Truck may be assigned to a variety of

dumps but is always assigned to the
same source, and vice versa.
Loading tool locks

Absolute
An absolute loading tool lock is an attribute of a truck. This lock ensures that
assignments are only ever attempted to specific loading tools.
Provisional
A provisional loading tool lock is an attribute of a truck, and is a mechanism
for specifying preferred loading tools for trucks. The office software attempts
to assign trucks to the loading tools to which they are provisionally locked. If
an assignment is not possible, then any other compatible loading tools are
considered for assignment.
Other compatible loading tools include:
• Non-barred loading tools.
• Locked loading tools.
• Provisionally-barred loading tools.
Processor locks
Absolute
An absolute processor lock is an attribute of a loading tool or a truck.
For a loading tool, this lock controls where materials loaded by a specific
loading tool are allowed to be dumped.
If a loading tool has processor locks specified, then any trucks that have
been loaded by that loading tool are assigned to dump at one of the locked
processors, provided that:
• The loaded material is an allowed material for the processor, and
• The truck is allowed to dump at the processor.
A loading tool cannot be provisionally locked.
Provisional
A provisional processor lock is an attribute of a truck, and is a mechanism for
specifying preferred processors for trucks. The office software attempts to
assign trucks to the processors to which they are provisionally locked. If an

Restrictions
assignment is not possible, then any other compatible processors are

considered for assignment.
Other compatible processors include:
• Locked processors.
• Non-barred processors.
• Provisionally-barred processors.
Mining block locks

A mining block lock locks a mining block to a specific destination. It enables a
specific destination to be set as the preferred destination for a truck, based
on the mining block from which the truck was loaded.
A mining block lock is an attribute of a mining block and may only be
provisional.
When mining block locks are active an assignment is provided after the
mining block is determined from a load report. If more than one processor is
at the same destination, then the processor that best meets the active
production requirements will be selected.
If a compatible processor is not found, the mining block lock is dropped and
the truck is assigned as if the mining block lock did not exist.
You can override the mining block lock assignment by explicitly assigning the
truck to a different processor.
Bars
A bar disallows the assignment of a truck to a specific server.
Trucks can not be assigned to a destination from which they are barred. A
truck may be barred from:
• One or more loading tools.
• One or more processors.
Bars may be absolute or provisional.
The following table describes some of the ways the office software manages
bars.
If a truck is barred from Then the ...

a...
Processor Truck will not be allowed to dump at that
sink.
Loading tool Truck will not be allowed to go to the

source.
Server that cannot service Office software system will not be able to
that truck generate any assignments for that truck.

Restrictions
Loading tool bars

Absolute
An absolute loading tool bar is an attribute of a truck and restricts the truck
from being assigned to a specific loading tool.
Provisional
A provisional loading tool bar is an attribute of a truck and restricts the ability
of the office software to assign trucks to specific loading tools. The office
software initially attempts to assign trucks to the loading tools to which no bar
is applied, but if no assignment is possible, then any other compatible loading
tools are considered for assignment.
Other compatible loading tools include:
• Locked loading tools.
• Non-barred loading tools.
• Provisionally-barred loading tools.
The following table describes some of the ways in which the office software
manages provisional loading tool bars.
If ... Then ...

A truck is subject to any loading Provisional loading tool bars have no
tool locks. effect.
A truck is not subject to any Provisional loading tool bars have the
loading tool locks, but is subject to same effect as loading tool bars.
provisional loading tool locks.
A truck is not subject to either Loading tools that are not barred or
loading tool locks or to provisional provisionally barred are the preferred
loading tool locks. choices for an assignment.
An assignment is not possible to Any provisionally barred loading tools

any of the preferred loading tools. are considered as potential
assignment destination.
Processor bars
Absolute
An absolute processor bar is an attribute of a truck and restricts the truck
from being assigned to a specific processor.
Provisional
A provisional processor bar is an attribute of a truck, and is a mechanism for
restricting the ability of Assignment to assign trucks to specific processors.
Assignment initially attempts to assign trucks to the processors to which no
bar is applied, but if no assignment is possible, then any other compatible
processors are considered for assignment.

Restrictions
Other compatible processors include:

• Locked processors.
• Non-barred processors.
• Provisionally-barred processors.
The following table describes some of the ways in which the office software
manages provisional processor bars.
If ... Then ...

A truck is subject to any processor Provisional processor bars have no
locks. effect.
A truck is not subject to any Provisional processor bars have the

processor locks, but is subject to same effect as processor bars.
provisional processor locks.
A truck is not subject to either Processors that are not barred or

processor locks or to provisional provisionally barred are the
processor locks. preferred choices for an
assignment.
An assignment is not possible to Any provisionally barred processors

any of the preferred processors. are considered as potential
assignment destinations.
Assignment groups
Assignment groups allow servers (loading tools and processors) and trucks
to be grouped together for an assignment. When the office software
calculates assignments, assignment groups are considered before other
types of restrictions.
Region locking and barring is possible using assignment groups with other
types of restrictions. For example, a mine may have two regions which are
represented by the assignment groups North and South. A truck that is a
member of the North assignment group will only be assigned to loading tools
or processors who are also members of the North assignment group.
Trucks, loading tools and processors may be members of none, one or
multiple assignment groups.
Trucks which are not members of an assignment group may travel anywhere.
However, other restrictions such as locks and bars will still apply to the truck.
Servers (loading tools and processors) which are not members of an
assignment group are only assigned trucks that also are not members of an
assignment group.

Road segments
Effects of using an assignment group

Using assignment groups has the following effects:
• Trucks that are allocated to an assignment group can only be
automatically assigned to a server that is also allocated to the same
assignment group.
• Trucks that are allocated to an assignment group, only consider
restrictions to loading tools or processors that share at least one
assignment group. All others are ignored.
• Trucks not allocated to an assignment group can be automatically
assigned to any compatible loading tool or processor (normal assignment
operation).
• Trucks not allocated to an assignment group can be locked to or barred
from any loading tools or processors, including those loading tools and
processors that are allocated to an assignment group.
Road segments
A road segment is a straight or curved section of road that connects two
waypoints.
The travel time is the time taken for a class of truck to travel along a road
segment. You can configure the office software to indicate when the
difference between the calculated travel time and the current travel time
exceeds a specified level.
The road travel network is a collection of road segments.
Road segments can be put on delay if they become unserviceable or if traffic
needs to be restricted. If a road segment is on delay, the office software does
not generate assignments that rely on that road segment.
The types of road segments are:
• Haulage.
• Final.
Haulage road segments

A haulage road segment connects many types of waypoints and can exist
anywhere in the road travel network, for example, road intersection, entry
and station.

Road segments
Final road segments

A final road segment is the last road segment that a truck travels on to a
loading tool or processor. It is created as a straight line between each
bounding waypoint of the destination and the loading tool or processor
waypoint.
Final road segments are created automatically and always start or end at a
loading tool or processor waypoint. The second waypoint can be any valid
waypoint type that is not a loading tool or processor waypoint.
If the bounding waypoint is removed or changed, the final road segment is
automatically deleted or changed.
If the loading tool moves within the destination, its waypoint moves with it
and the final road segment is updated. If the loading tool moves to a different
destination, the final road segment is marked for deletion and deleted (after
about 10 minutes). A new final road segment is created when the loading tool
moves to its new destination.
The travel time for a final road segment is calculated using the road length
and truck class average speed loaded and empty at a destination. This
differs to how travel times are calculated for other road segments.
Road segment attributes

The following table describes the attributes for road segments.
Name Unique name for the road segment, usually derived from
the waypoints connected by the road segment.
Active Indicates whether the road segment is active.
Road type Type of road segment.

Valid values are:
• Haulage.
• Final.
Allowable Specifies which truck classes are allowed to use the

equipment road segment.
This attribute cannot be overridden for individual trucks
within the class.
Start waypoint Specifies the start waypoint of the road segment.

The direction is determined when the end waypoint is
specified, but is only relevant to the specified forward
and reverse travel times.
For example: If a road segment is created from waypoint
WP1 to waypoint WP2, the forward loaded and forward
empty travel times are always from WP1 to WP2.

Rolling resistance
End waypoint Specifies the end waypoint of the road segment.
The direction is determined when the end waypoint is
specified, but is only relevant to the specified forward
and reverse travel times.
On delay Indicates whether the road segment is currently on

delay.
Current delay Details about a delay that currently applies to the road
segment.
Travel times Specifies the travel times for each allowable truck class
on a specific road segment. Travel times include both
loaded and empty and forward and reverse.
Reverse refers to traveling in the opposite direction on
the road segment, not to the truck traveling backwards.
Speed limit Maximum speed that a truck class may go on that road
segment. The office software does not provide the
functionality to enforce this limit.
Position co- The 3-dimensional co-ordinates of positions along the

ordinates route of the road segment that represent changes in
direction.
EFH Value of the comparative measure of distances travelled

between between different types of road segments.
Rolling Value of friction or resistance on the road.

resistance
ID A unique identifier for the road segment.
Passing Indicates that overtaking on this road segment is

allowed allowed
Rolling resistance
Rolling resistance is a measure of the friction or resistance to a wheel on a
particular road segment, and varies at different locations throughout the mine
site.
The value is usually expressed as a grade percentage. For example, a well-
prepared and highly maintained road segment may have a rolling resistance
of 3%, whereas a less well-prepared and minimally maintained road segment
(perhaps where a shovel is operating) may have a rolling resistance of 20%.
Rosters
A roster defines who is working for a shift in terms of crews.

Routes
Routes
A route is the path to be traveled between two destinations and consists of
two or more road segments with a common bounding waypoint for each road
segment.
The office software automatically calculates the fastest route between two
destinations using the currently available road segments.
When the office software generates an assignment for a machine, it
calculates the route and sends this information to the truck operator.
Safety checklists
Safety checklists are a numerically-ordered list of safety items to check on a
machine before the operator starts using the machine. Safety items can
include such things as Air System, Brake Lights, Emergency Brake,
Headlights, Steering, Tracks, etc. When setting up a safety checklist, you can
also select an action to take if the safety check fails. Actions are set up using
the Safety Check Actions Editor.
Safety check actions

Safety check actions are actions to take, or people to call, if a safety check
fails. Examples of actions include Call Controller, Call Maintenance
Technician etc.
Scheduled breaks
A scheduled break is a predefined period of time where crews, machines and
equipment are not required to work.
Scheduled breaks consist of one or more numbered sessions, each with a
specific start time and duration.
Scheduled break sessions also have associated delay types. The operator
activates the delay when they start their allocated break session.
Colors are used to represent the status of scheduled breaks.
Multiple sessions of breaks

There may be multiple sessions of the same type of scheduled break. For
multiple sessions, the initial start time is the start time for the scheduled
break and subsequent sessions start at intervals corresponding to the value
specified for the time between sessions. For example, some operators may
have their lunch break from 12:30 until 1:00pm, while others may have their
lunch break from 1:00pm until 1:30pm.

Scheduled breaks
Equipment allocation to breaks

Equipment and machines are allocated to breaks according to specific
allocation rules. The rules may be applied either by session or by order. If
there is only one break session then all equipment or machines are allocated
to that break.
You may automatically allocate equipment and machines using default rules
and parameters.
When the break becomes active the allocated equipment and machines are
shown as being on delay and cannot be changed.
Loading tools
Loading tools can be allocated to a scheduled break session either
automatically or manually.
When allocated automatically, loading tools are allocated to sessions in the
order specified in the allocation rules. One loading tool is allocated to each
break session until either all loading tools have been allocated or until each
session has one loading tool allocated. Allocation begins again at the first
session.
Loading tools are always allocated before trucks are allocated. This is
because truck allocations are based on a compatible loading tools allocation.
Trucks
Trucks can be allocated to a break session either automatically or manually.
When allocated automatically, trucks are allocated to sessions in the order
specified in the allocation rules.
Auxiliary equipment
Auxiliary equipment can not be allocated automatically, it may only be
allocated manually to break sessions.
Session break allocation rules

Session allocation rules define the way in which the office software allocates
field equipment to the scheduled break sessions.
Session break delays

Scheduled breaks may have an associated delay which is activated by the
operator.

Scheduled breaks
Scheduled breaks attributes

The following table describes the main attributes for scheduled breaks.
Shift date Date on which this shift will occur.
Shift identifier Identifier of the shift in which this break will occur.
Break name Name of this scheduled break.
Break time Date and time this scheduled break is to occur.
Number of sessions Number of sessions that this break is split into.
Time Between Time between the start of each session.

Sessions
Truck Load Status The load state of the truck for this break.
Delay Type The delay type to use for this break.
Session Allocation The standard message sent to the operator advising

Message of a break session allocation.
Allocation Message The time before the start of a break session that the
Lead Time Session Allocation Message is sent to the operator.
Session Imminent The standard message sent to an operator to advise

Message that a break session is imminent.
ImminentMessage The time before the start of a break session that the
Lead Time Imminent Message is sent to the operator.
Cancellation The standard message sent to the operator when

Message the break has been cancelled.
Update Message The standard message sent to an operator when a

break session has been rescheduled.

Servers
Status of breaks
The following table describes the color codes used to indicate the status of a
scheduled break.
Color Status Description

Blue Planning Scheduled break has been created but has not
been committed.
Black Committed Scheduled break has been committed but has

not reached its start time.
Green Active Scheduled break has started.
Gray Finished Scheduled break has finished.
Red Cancelled Scheduled break was cancelled before

becoming active.
Servers
Servers is the collective term used to describe machines capable of loading
or accepting material from a truck. Servers include:
• Processors — collective term for crushers and dumps.
• Loading tools — collective term for all loading tools and shovels.
Service meter hours (SMH)

See Service meter units (SMU).
Service meter readings (SMR)

A Service meter reading (SMR) is a record containing SMU data, date and
machine details.
Service meter units (SMU)

A Service meter unit (SMU) is a measure of the operational life of the
machine calculated by onboard hardware (such as VIMS or CENSE). SMUs,
which are often referred to as service meter hours (SMH), are used for
scheduling maintenance activities for machines.
SMUs are also used at some sites in the calculation of various time-based
KPIs, in preference to clock time. The current SMU value is included in most
events which contain GPS information (for example, StateChange and
PositionReport messages) as well as special messages (for example
ServiceHours messages). These values are stored (in a very compressed

Service records
format) in the ServiceMeterReading table, which is used by the SMU

interpolator.
The SMU interpolator runs in the MineTracking server. It reconstructs the
SMU graph from the ServiceMeterReading table, providing a function that
returns the SMU value for any given machine and time. It will return 0 if:
1. the SMU Enabled switch is turned off,
2. there are no Service Meter Readings for the given machine or
3. the time is before any Service Meter Readings for the given machine.
If the time is after all Service Meter Readings for the given machine, the last
SMU value seen is returned, since it is a good assumption that a machine
not providing SMU values has its engine switched off. After all, the SMU
interpolator is not an extrapolator.
Configuration of SMU and the SMU Interpolator is done in Supervisor. See
your Fleet Administration and Configuration manual for more details.
Maintenance and repair contracts (MARC)

For a maintenance and repair contract, the office software calculates the use
and availability not just by time but by SMU increments.
Service records
Service records store information gathered about trucks when they are being
serviced. Service records are defined by attributes and hold data such as fuel
and oil consumption, SMUs and mileage.
Service records can be used to ensure that:
• Refueling time is minimized.
• Queue length at fuel bays is minimized.
• Trucks are refueled only when necessary.
• Trucks do not run out of fuel.
Service records can be entered by the machine operator or fuel attendant at
the time of refueling or on a regular basis using fuel cards.
Service record attributes

The following table describes the attributes for service records.
Timestamp Date and time that the service record was created.
Cannot be in the future. Default value is the current date
and time.
Machine Machine that is being serviced. The machine must

already be defined in the office software.

Shifts
Odometer Odometer reading of the specified machine at the time of
service.
SMU The Service Meter Units (SMUs) value. This cannot be

zero.
If the machine does not use true SMUs, the service time
counting mechanism used by the machine must be
entered.
Operator Name of the operator of the machine at the time the

service record was created. The operator name must
already be defined in the office software.
Fuel attendant Name of the fuel attendant who serviced the specified
machine. This is usually the same person who created
the service record. The fuel attendant must already be
defined in the office software.
Fuel and Lube The fuel and lube types table contains a list of all defined
types fluid types. This is where you enter the actual amounts of
each fluid dispensed to the machine.
Fuel type Name of the fuel type as defined in the Fuel and Lube
Type Editor.
Fuel amount Amount of fuel or oil that was dispensed to the machine.
Units Units in which fluids are expressed for the site.
Shifts
A shift is a unit of work performed by a team of mine personnel, typically
spanning eight, 10 or 12 hour blocks, Shifts are commonly used for
organizing patterns of work where a day may comprise two or three shifts.
The office software user may specify the tie-down location for machines at
shift change and allocate operators and machines at the beginning of a new
shift.
Types of shift change

The key element of a shift change is that the crew for one shift is replaced by
the crew for the next shift. Machines, therefore, need to be parked, and
machine operators from the current shift be replaced by personnel from the
next shift.

Shovel
Types of shift changes are as follows:

• Cold shift change — Operators from the current shift park their machines
and complete their shift well before operators on the next shift arrive.
• Warm shift change — Operators from the current shift park their machines
and wait for the operators on the next shift to arrive.
• Hot shift change — A hot shift change is similar to a warm shift change,
except that machines need not be parked at tie-down points. Operator
changes may occur on the side of the haul road, or at other convenient
points between Loading Tools and Processors.
The mine site must be configured to enable shift change groups using
Supervisor. This must be done before the attributes for the shift change
group can be managed using the Assignment Group Editor page.
Shift change groups

A shift change group is the name of a group of shift changes with similar
attributes.
Shovel
A shovel is a class of loading tool. It is typically large, semi-stationary and
has a forward pointing dipper.
Site map
The site map is a view of the mine site. It consists of layers which can be
displayed or hidden.
The types of layers are as follows:
• Standard — consist of entities such as the map grid, waypoints, road
segments, trucks loading tools, shovels etc.
• User — consist of such things as mine-specific graphics, bench plans,
entry plans, cultural features and aerial photographs.
Software Licensing
You need a license key to install Fleet. Software licensing is used throughout
Fleet to decide which collections of features you are able to use. Features
are enabled by their presence within an encrypted license key.
Spotting
The time from the arrival of the truck to the first dipper.

Station
Station
A station is a destination that is not a sink or source.
Stockpiles
A stockpile is an entity that is both a source and a sink destination, and which
has a finite capacity. Material can be deposited to, and reclaimed from, a
stockpile.
Stockpile mining blocks can be set for both loading tools and processors, and
function in the same way as normal mining blocks, except that only stockpile
mining blocks are available for selection. Stockpile mining block information
for both loading tools and processors is included in all cycle records.
Stockpile attributes
The following table describes the main attributes for stockpiles.
Inventory Current mass or volume available at the stockpile.
Maximum Mass or volume capacity of the stockpile.
Remaining Mass or volume that can be added before the stockpile

reaches capacity.
Mined Amount of material mined from the mining block.
Original Amount of material available to be mined when the

mining block was originally surveyed.
Grade Grade of the material present in the mining block.
Value Amount of the specific material grade present in the

mining block.
Unit Units in which the value of the material grade is

specified. Continuous grades only.
Mandatory field.
Active If selected, indicates that current mining block is active.
Read-only Indicates that current mining block is read-only. This

applies to mining blocks created via import.
Stockpile Indicates that the current mining block is a stockpile.

The stockpile must then be associated with a
destination. All material placed at that destination is
recorded in the stockpile and grades are adjusted as
material is dumped.

Supervisor
Supervisor
Supervisor is used in conjunction with the office software to provide
administration and configuration functionality for Fleet.
Surface miner
The surface miner is a milling machine designed for recovering material from
large flat areas. Surface miners cut, crush, and load in one pass. A large
surface miner has a 4.2 m cutting drum and fills a Caterpillar 777 Truck within
five minutes. CAESultra provides high precision guidance both for the cutting
drum, to cut to the design accurately and for differentiating between
materials on the design. The most common recovery method consists of
cutting the iron ore in strips while loading the ore directly onto a truck. A
second less used method consists of cutting the ore directly onto the ground,
then clearing these windrows at a later date.
Terrain leveler
The Terrain Leveler is a milling machine designed for recovering material
from large flat areas. Terrain Levelers cut and crush in one pass. CAESultra
provides high precision guidance both for the cutter drum, to accurately cut
to the design, and for differentiating between materials on the design. Terrain
Leveler machines mill to ground only.
The cutter drum can be moved independently of the machine body and can
be tilted. Because of this, the GPS antenna and a dual axis sensor must be
mounted on the cutter drum to determine accurate position.
TMPH/TKPH
Ton Miles Per Hour/Ton Kilometers Per Hour is a measurement of the tire’s
capacity to handle its operational workload. Each tire has a ceiling TMPH/
TKPH rating from its manufacturer, which is based on the weight and speed
that a tire can handle without overheating, causing it to deteriorate
prematurely or to fail.
TMPH/TKPH, in practice, is calculated as an average, obtained by
multiplying the gross load of the truck by the distance traveled, then dividing
by the time taken. The calculated average is then distributed over the
(usually) six tires on the truck. The gross weight on the front axle is first
calculated based on the laden and unladen weight distributions defined for
the associated machine class. The weight on the front axle is then divided by
two to get the average weight on a single front tire. The office software uses
the average weight distributed to a front tire to calculate TMPH/TKPH
because it is generally equal to or greater than the weight distributed to the
rear tires.
Calculating the TMPH/TKPH average for several journeys involves weighting
the individual journey calculations by time. As the time a truck is idle (waiting

TOPE
to load) reduces the average TMPH/TKPH, the journey times should include
the waiting time.
TOPE
Truck Operating Equipment (TOPE) is the software used in trucks.
TPMS
Truck Payload Monitoring System (TPMS) is software that measures the
amount of strut pressure used to monitor the payload on trucks.
Transport vehicles
Transport vehicles are a type of auxiliary equipment within the office software
and are not defined in the same way as trucks, loading tools, etc.
They are created purely for use as part of the shift change process, and as
such, have no capacity for being assigned. Instead, transport vehicles are
allocated runs, or a list of destinations to which they can travel.
Operators are allocated to transport vehicles at warm and hot shift changes
to facilitate efficient transport into and out of the pit.
Truck loadout unit (TLO)

A truck loadout unit (TLO) is a fixed plant loading tool, sometimes referred to
as a loadout unit or a loading unit. It is used to store and automatically
dispense processed materials.
The truck loadout unit is configured in the same way as a loading tool, but
does not have an operator attribute because it does not have an operator.
Truck loadout unit toolbar

The truck loadout unit toolbar maps to soft keys on the onboard hardware.
Some soft keys are:
• Auto loadout with tonnage displayed.
• Stop loadout.
• Close loadout tool bar.
The office software automatically displays the details when a truck enters a
loadout waypoint. The toolbar closes automatically when the truck exits the
loadout waypoint. If the truck is not inside a loadout and inactive.
The tonnage displayed on the button is obtained from the truck file or truck
capacity and shows the amount of material to be loaded.

Truck loadout unit (TLO)
Truck loadout unit onboard configuration

Communications between trucks and TLOs is slightly different from that
between trucks and other loading tools. Consequently the onboard
configuration for trucks that load at TLOs is slightly different. This enables the
required toolbars and associated commands on the onboard hardware for
machine operators to interact with the TLO.
It is essential that material and mining blocks are configured correctly for the
TLO class as the data is used for production calculations. For this reason the
configuration cannot be overridden by the truck operator.
Truck loadout unit operation

When a truck enters a waypoint of type Loadout unit, the onboard display
unit displays a Loadout toolbar. This toolbar provides the appropriate
commands for the truck operator to select the required loading operation.
Some available commands are as follows:
• Auto Load.
• Manual Load.
• Manual Stop.
When the truck operator chooses any of these commands, the onboard
display unit sends a message to the office which sends a message to the
TLO unit.
To determine the correct amount of material, a nominal or pre-defined
payload for the truck is compared against some cut-off limits for the TLO. For
example, if the cut-off limits are 140t and 190t, then trucks with nominal
payloads of 130t, 150t, 190t and 200t receive payloads of 140t, 190t, 190t
and 190t respectively. All TLOs in the system must share the same set of cut-
offs.
TLOs usually employ proximity detection that must be triggered by the truck
correctly spotting before it can receive its material. If the initial request to the
TLO is received before the proximity detection is triggered, the operator
needs to request it again when closer to the TLO.
Truck loadout unit class attributes

The following table describes the main attributes for truck loadout unit
classes.
Name Name of the truck loadout unit class.
Allow all Indicates whether all materials are allowed to be loaded by

materials this class.

Trucks
Material names Indicates which materials are allowed.
Load time Specifies the load time for each truck.
Truck loadout unit color codes

The following table describes the colors and status for truck loadout units.
Color of light on Description

monitoring
stand
Red A red light on the monitoring stand alerts the truck
operator that another truck is currently loading at the
TLO and that it is not safe to enter.
Green A green light on the monitoring stand alerts the truck

operator that it is safe to spot the truck under the
loading conveyor.
Orange The amber light indicates to the truck operator that

the system is enabled for automatically loading the
truck.
Trucks
Trucks are the machines used for hauling materials in the mine site.
Other trucks that do not haul material are collectively referred to as auxiliary
equipment and should not be confused with haulage trucks.
Truck attributes
Truck attributes of loading tools determine which trucks they are allowed to
load and are set at the class level.
Truck attributes may be overridden at the machine level. For example, if a
truck is allowed at the loading tool class level, it can be removed at the
machine level. However, the reverse cannot be set. That is, a truck cannot be
made allowable for a loading tool if it is not already allowed at the loading tool
class level.

Trucks
The following table describes the attributes related to trucks.
Truck Name of the truck whose details are currently
displayed.
Operator Name of the operator currently logged in to the

truck.
Operators with a valid license for the truck are
shown in green.
Operators without a valid license for the truck are
shown in red. The office software also displays a
warning message but still allows the selected
operator.
Truck state Current state of the truck. This is the determined

by state changes sent from the field.
Selected mining block The mining block to be loaded from.
Loading tool lock Indicates whether the truck is locked to a specific

loading tool.
Loading tool bar Indicates whether the truck is barred from a

specific loading tool.
Loading tool Indicates whether the truck is provisionally locked

provisional lock to a specific loading tool.
Loading Tool Indicates whether the truck is provisionally barred

provisional bar from a specific loading tool.
Loading Tool Allowed Indicates that the loading tool is allowed to load
this truck.
Loading Tool Indicates that the loading tool is not allowed to

prohibited load this truck.
Processor lock Indicates whether the truck is locked to a specific

processor.
Processor bar Indicates whether the truck is barred from a

specific processor.
Processor provisional Indicates whether the truck is provisionally locked

lock to a specific processor.
Processor provisional Indicates whether the truck is provisionally barred

bar from a specific processor.
Processor allowed Indicates that the processor is allowed to

associate with this truck.
Processor prohibited Indicates that the loading tool is not allowed to

associate with this truck.

Trucks
Allowed materials Indicates whether this material can be loaded by
this truck.
Current fuel level Current estimated fuel status.

status
Current fuel level Current estimated fuel level.

estimate
Last refuel quanity Quanity of fuel that was added the last time that
the truck was refueled.
Last refuel estimate Estimated quanity of fuel required before the last
time that the truck was refueled.
Last refuel occurred at The date and time the machine was last refueled.
Duration between Elapsed time between last refuelling and the one
refuels previous.
Destination Sink or source to which the truck is currently

traveling.
Server Loading tool or processor currently at the truck’s

destination.

Trucks
Current Loaded Material currently being carried by the truck.
Material
If the truck is currently not carrying material, the
value of this field is Empty. The material can be
updated by selecting the required material from
the list. Materials are color-coded to indicate
permission as follows:
• Green — material is allowable for this truck.
• Orange — material is not at the assigned
location or cannot be loaded by the assigned
loading tool.
• Red — material is not allowed to be carried by
this truck.

Trucks
Material determination Used to determine if new information from the
field should be used to change the current
material and mining block.
The order of material determination from lowest
to highest is:
• Manually set — the material was set by the
office software Operator.
• Only Compatible — there is only one material
that can be loaded.
• Predicted — the material predicted to be
loaded.
• First Dipper — the material was taken from
the first dipper.
• Load Report — the material was taken from a
load report.
• Load Report (Auto) — the material was taken
from a load report and determined by CAES.
• Load Report (Oper) — the material was taken
from a load report and overridden by the
operator.
• Unknown — it is not known what the material
is.
If a load report comes in with the same or higher
material determination, it is used to populate the
material and mining block. When a truck goes
from full to empty (usually through dumping), this
information is reset ready for the next loading.
With this understanding, it is possible to set the
material determination to something other than
manual (say, Load Report) in case a valid load
report is received in the office and should be
used. However, under most circustances, if the
office software Operator has determined the
material and mining block then they are the
correct values to use, so the value should be left
as Manual.
Truck roles
Truck roles are used to associate an activity with a truck, such as hauling
coal or hauling overburden. Roles are determined either by the Mine Builder
at build time, or by the office software Operator, at run time.

Trucking indication
Truck states
As the truck passes through various route waypoints, its position is
transmitted back to the office. Throughout the truck cycle, the truck changes
state several times. The truck states are:
• Travelling
The truck is on its way to or from its destination.
• Queuing
The truck is waiting to be loaded at the loading tool, or waiting to dump.
• Spotting
The truck has entered the loading tool’s waypoint and is lining itself up to
be loaded, or is preparing to dump.
• Waiting
See queuing.
• Loading
The truck is being loaded with material.
• Dumping
The truck is within the dump waypoint and is ready to dump the material.
• Route done
The truck has arrived at a station, and has not been assigned to go to
another machine or processor. The onboard hardware shows RTEDONE.
• Out of service
The truck is on delay.
Trucking indication
The trucking indicator, shown at the bottom of the Fleet Update Assistant
page, provides an immediate visual indication of trucking status, rather than
just the basic underlying information for the determination of this status. The
Fleet Update Assistant shows five trucking status values:
1. Over trucked
2. Slightly over trucked
3. Correctly trucked
4. Slightly under trucked
5. Under trucked
Set-up and configuration of the fields for Trucking Indication is done in
Supervisor. Refer to the Fleet Administration & Configuration manual for
more information.You are also able to configure the colors you wish to use for
Over Trucked, Under Trucked and Trucked in Supervisor.
Each of these trucking status values is determined through user-configurable
heuristic values that allow each mine to set the boundaries at which they

Trucking indication
occur. This removes the need for the Site Controller to interpret the values,
although the raw information is still available to make more detailed
determinations with.
The heuristic values are configured using Supervisor. There are two sets of
values that can be set depending upon the use of an LP solver.
The first set of values is used when there is no LP solver, and is based upon
the predicted server utilization. The predicted server utilization is the larger of
the loading tool utilization or the processor utilization. Each trucking status is
determined by deciding upon the value at which that status becomes active.
In the example below the mine is considered over trucked when the highest
server utilization is greater than 90%.
The second set of values is used when there is an LP solver, and is based
upon predicted excessive trucking tonnage and excess server rates. Over
trucking status is determined by a positive value in excess trucking tonnes,
and the severity is selected by differing absolute values of this indicator. If the
mine is not considered over trucked, then how under trucked it is can be
determined by looking at the excess server production/consumption rate.
This rate is the lowest of the loading tool excess production rate or the
processor excess consumption rate.
Once the over/under trucking value has been determined, the display of each
of these values can be customized. To highlight any trucking status you can
set the color of each one of five 'bars' that make up the display. This may be
used to provide something similar to a bar graph showing trucking status, or
just a specific color pattern to highlight the trucking status. A pattern can be
set for each trucking status.
If the trucking status has not yet been determined then you can set a specific
color grouping for this as well.

Users, personnel, work groups and crews

This topic explains the concepts of users, personnel, crews and workgroups
and their relationship to one another.
Crew 1
Person 1 Person 4 Person 7 Person 10
Person 2 Person 5 Person 8
Person 3 Person 6 Person 9
Work group A Work group B
Figure 5.7: Relationship between users, personnel, work groups and

crews.
Users
A user is a person who has a unique name and identifier and has a user
account.
Users have different roles and attributes to personnel.
Personnel
Personnel is the collective term used for a specific group of people without
any privileges to use the office software, although their details are stored
within the office software for reporting and shift change management. These
people are typically the operators of machines and equipment.
Personnel who are defined within the office software have a number of
different attributes which:
• Uniquely identify personnel within the office software.
• Indicate to which work group any individual belongs.
• Specify which machine and equipment licences have been acquired.
• Specify contact and emergency details for each individual.
• Specify login PIN numbers for machine and equipment operation.
Personnel and users exist independently of each other.

Personnel attributes
The following table describes the main attributes related to personnel.
Name Name of the person.
ID Unique identifier. This is required to logon.
Licences Types of operators licence held by the person.
Person’s Address of the person

address
Person’s phone Home and cell (mobile) phone numbers of the person.
numbers
Emergency Name and phone number of a person to contact in the

contact details event of an emergency relating to the person identified
in ‘Name’.
Technical level Level of technical ability or competency of the person.
Department Department within the mine to which the person

belongs
Position Textual description of the position held by the person at

description the mine.
Primary Name of the primary supervisor to whom this person

supervisor reports.
Hire date Date on which the person was hired on the mine site
Crew Name of the crew to which this person belongs.
Work group Name of the work group to which this person belongs
Machine Password used by the person to logon to the machine

password (or equipment) that they are to operate or maintain.
Maintenance Indicates that the person has logged on to the machine

user (or equipment) to perform maintenance and does not
require office validation.
Exclude from Indicates that this person should be excluded from any
equipment automatic equipment allocations at shift change.
allocation
Allocation date Date the employee was hired, or another seniority date
that is used to define the allocation order for a group of
personnel.
Allocation Priority of the order in which equipment will be allocated

priority to the employee.

Viewpoints
Preferred List of all equipment preferred by this person. Used at
equipment shift change.
Leave or Start and end dates for a scheduled leave and the
absence details reason. Used for excluding the person from rostered
shifts.
Overtime details Start and end dates and type of shifts that a person is
available for overtime. Used to include a person on a
shift even though their crew may not be included.
Work groups
A work group is the name used for a group of people (personnel) based on
specific criteria, usually roles. It can be used for managing and reporting.
The office software provides one global work group called Work Groups,
under which all other work groups must be created. You must create at least
one work group before individual site personnel can be entered.
Work groups are sorted alphabetically in the Personnel Finder.
The textual name of the work group is the only attribute associated with
workgroups.
Crew
Crew is the collective term used for a group of people based on shift rosters.
A person can be a member of a crew and a member of a work group. The
textual name of the crew is the only attribute associated with crews.
Viewpoints
A viewpoint is a user-defined view of the mine and can be accessed via Site
Editor.
VIMS
The Vital Information Management System (VIMS) is a software application
used to record data from the onboard machine (or equipment) system. This
data is used by the office software.
Maintenance events are triggered by VIMS.

Waiting times
Waiting times
A waiting time is the expected average amount of time that a machine will
remain idle, usually pending the action of another machine (or piece of
equipment).
The current truck waiting time is included in the context of the most recently
generated assignment. It is the average of the expected waiting times for all
assignments of empty trucks specified in the most recent assignment
solution.
Waypoints
A waypoint is a virtual area within the mine and is defined by the vertices of a
two-dimensional polygon, with an associated height. Waypoints are used to
identify the physical location of machines within the mine site. For example,
when a truck passes through a waypoint, the truck’s onboard system sends
the coordinates of its position to the office software.
A waypoint can be changed manually by you or automatically by the office
software. For example, if a loading tool changes position, its waypoint
changes automatically.
Waypoint information changes frequently and is stored:
• In files in the office.
• In files on machines in the field.
Waypoint information used by the office and machines must be synchronized
for the office software to work effectively.
Waypoints not linked into the road network are referred to as isolated
waypoints and are neither the start or end points of a road segment.
Different types of waypoints are defined in the site configuration and are
color-coded to represent the types.

Waypoints
Types of waypoints are as follows:

• Entry.
• Dump.
• Stockpile.
• Queue.
• Shop.
• Crusher.
• Bounding.
• Loading tool.
• Processor.
• Road segment.
• Road intersection.
• Unknown.
Entry waypoints
Entry waypoints (sometimes referred to as face waypoints) are entry points
to source or sink destinations. This waypoint type is considered when
determining the arrival time for a truck along its path, and is also used to
determine if the truck is off course.
When this is the second last waypoint in the current path, it initiates peer-to-
peer communication between the truck and the loading tool.
Dump waypoints
Dump waypoints trigger a truck to go into a dump state if the TOPE is
configured to allow this to happen. This waypoint type is considered when
Stockpile waypoints
Stockpile waypoints are entry points to stockpile (both source and sink)
destinations. This waypoint type is considered when determining the arrival
time for a truck along its path, and is also used to determine if the truck is off
course.
Queue waypoints
Queue waypoints have no special meaning in the office software, however
road segments can connect with waypoints of this type. This waypoint type is
considered when determining the arrival time for a truck along its path, and is
also used to determine if the truck is off course.

Waypoints
Shop waypoints
Shop waypoints are entry points to station destinations. This waypoint type is
considered when determining the arrival time for a truck along its path, and is
also used to determine if the truck is off course.
Crusher waypoints
Crusher waypoints are special waypoints associated with processors.
Whenever a truck enters a waypoint of this type, the office software can
determine which processor is servicing the truck. These waypoints cannot be
shared between processors. The office software also uses this waypoint type
to determine the nearest crushers to a truck when the truck requests crusher
hopper levels. This waypoint type is not considered when determining the
arrival time for a truck along its path, and neither is it used to determine if the
truck is off course. These waypoints are the last waypoints in a truck’s path
when traveling to a processor.
Bounding waypoints
Bounding waypoints are the entry points for the destination. That is, the
bounding waypoint forms the end of the road segment that connects to the
destination. Final road segments connect bounding waypoints to the servers
at the destination.
You can only select isolated waypoints as bounding waypoints for parent
destinations.
Loading tool waypoints

Loading tool waypoints are associated with loading tools. Whenever a truck
enters a waypoint of this type, the office software can determine which
loading tool is servicing the truck. These waypoints cannot be shared
between loading tools, and every loading tool must have an associated
waypoint of this type. This waypoint type is not considered when determining
the arrival time for a truck along its path, nor is it used to determine if the
truck is off course. These waypoints are the last waypoints in a truck’s path
when traveling to a loading tool.
Road segment waypoints

Road segment waypoints are entry points to road segments. Every road
segment has two waypoints, one at either end and each is used to determine
whether a truck has entered or left the road segment. These waypoints also
constitute the majority of the waypoints that form the trucks’ paths through
the mine. This waypoint type is considered when determining the arrival time
for a truck along its path, and is also used to determine if the truck is off
course.

Waypoints
Road intersection waypoints

Road intersection waypoints are entry points to road segments, and also
places where multiple road segments join. This waypoint type is often used
where three or more road segments join, although it is also a valid type for an
intersection of two road segments. This waypoint type is considered when
Waypoint attributes
The following table describes waypoint attributes.
Name Unique name of the waypoint.
Usually an abbreviation of the destinations or other
locations with which it is associated.
Example: "CRUSHER_G" (which is not the same as
"crusher_G".)
Type Type of waypoint.
Description Description of the waypoint.
Color Specifies the color in which the waypoint displays on

the Site Monitor and on the onboard display (CD550 or
CMPD).
Reassign when Permits the office software to check an empty truck

empty when it passes through this waypoint to determine if the
assignment is still valid, or if a better assignment is now
possible.
Reassign when Permits the office software to check a loaded truck

loaded when it passes through this waypoint to determine if the
assignment is still valid, or if a better assignment is now
possible.
Send on entry Specifies that the onboard equipment (Fleet on CD550

or Fleet on CMPD) is to send state and position
information to the office software when a truck enters
the waypoint.
Send on exit Specifies that the onboard equipment (Fleet on CD550

or Fleet on CMPD) is to send state and position
information to the office software when the truck exits
the waypoint.

Waypoints
Waypoint processing
A truck can be inside a single waypoint or several overlapping waypoints
simultaneously.
Additional buttons may be displayed on a truck’s onboard equipment
depending on the type of waypoint that the truck has entered. This is handled
by TOPE.
Single waypoint processing

If a truck changes state while it is inside a single waypoint, the waypoint ID
may be included in the state change message. If the new state is loading, the
waypoint ID in the state change message will be that of the waypoint
associated with the loading tool that is to load the truck.
Overlapping waypoint processing

If a truck changes state while it is inside overlapping waypoints, only one of
the overlapping waypoint IDs is may be included in the state change
message.
Overlapping IDs are usually processed in the order that they exist in the
waypoint file. Exceptions to this are:
• If the new state is loading, the waypoint ID in the state change message
will be that of the waypoint associated with the loading tool that is to load
the truck.
• If the new state is dumping, and the reason is that a dumping waypoint
has been entered, then this waypoint ID will be entered in the state
change message
Waypoint type attributes

T
The following table describes the attributes of the waypoint type attribute.
No. Name Description

0 Unknown Default.
1 Entry Entry points to source destinations. Used by the

office software to determine arrival time for a truck
and whether a truck is off course.
2 Dump Entry points to sink destinations. Used by the office

software to determine arrival time for a truck and
whether a truck is off course.
3 Stockpile Entry points to stockpile (both source and sink)

destinations. Used by the office software to
determine arrival time for a truck and whether a
truck is off course.

Waypoints

4 Road Entry points to road segments (which have a
segment waypoint at each end). Used by the office software
to determine:
• whether a truck has entered or left the road
segment.
• the arrival time for a truck
• whether a truck is off course.
5 Road Entry points to road segments (which have a

intersection waypoint at each end) and to places where multiple
road segments join. Although valid for the join of
two road segments, this is usually used when three
or more road segments join. Used by the office
software to determine the arrival time for a truck
and whether the truck is off course.
6 Loader Associated with loading tools. Used by the office

waypoints software to determine which loading tool is
servicing a truck. These waypoints cannot be
shared between loading tools, and every loading
tool must have an associated waypoint of this type.
This is not used by the office software to determine
the arrival time for a truck and neither is it used to
determine whether the truck is off course. These
waypoints are the last waypoints in a truck’s path
when traveling to a loading tool.
7 Queue Have no special meaning. However road segments

waypoints can connect with waypoints of this type. Used by
the office software to determine the arrival time for
a truck and whether the truck is off course.
8 Shop Entry points to station destinations. Used by the

waypoints office software to determine the arrival time for a
truck, and to determine whether a truck is off
course.
9 Display only Ignored by all business logic. Displays information

waypoints about fixed objects in the mine (e.g., office
buildings, water towers). Not used by the office
software to determine arrival time for a truck or
whether a truck is off course.

Waypoints

10 Crusher Associated with processors, but cannot be shared
waypoints among processors. Are the last waypoints in a
truck’s path when traveling to a processor.
The office software does not use this waypoint to:
• determine the arrival time for a truck.
• determine whether a truck is off course.
The office software does use this waypoint to:
• determine which processor is servicing the
truck.
• determine nearest crushers to a truck when the
truck requests crusher hopper levels.
11 TOPE Used internally by TOPE and serve no purpose in

internal the office software.
12 Processor Identifies to the office software the processor

servicing a truck which enters this waypoint. This
type of waypoint cannot be shared among
processors. That is, each processor waypoint may
only be associated with one processor and each
processor must be associated with one processor
waypoint. Processor waypoints are automatically
moved to the position of the dump event.
13 Loadout These are static Truck Loadout Unit (TLO)

waypoints.

Waypoints

Assignment
Assignment
Introduction to Assignment
Introduction to Assignment
The Fleet system consists of a set of sub-systems, each one providing a
specific type of functionality. Assignment is the sub-system used to create
and optimize assignments for trucks.
• Managing assignments.
• Decision support
• Mine Model query.
• Managing restrictions.
• Managing production requirements.
Managing Assignments
This section describes the procedures required to manage assignments.
To override some automatic assignment details you must delete the
unwanted assignment and create a new assignment. The way in which you
can do this varies depending on the type of assignment and whether it is
active.
Best practises
Under normal use, if the mine model is up-to-date the assigner should
operate without any problems. However the following practices are
recommended in order to ensure the best operation of assignment.
• Run the Inspector at regular intervals. In particular, roads, destinations
and waypoints in the mine model should be regularly checked. Problems
observed with the loading tools and processors should be immediately
resolved.
• The Assignment Event Monitor should be used to track the operation of
the assigner. The office software Operator or Supervisor should
appropriately handle errors and warnings in the assignment event
monitor.
• The Trucking Indicator will give a very good indication of how assignment
will distribute the trucks in an operating mine. If a loading tool or
processor is grayed out or does not display in this page and it should be in
use then there is probably a problem in the either the locks and bars or
the material settings. The Mine Model Query can help in the resolution of
these types of problems. If no production plan is displayed then either
there are no production paths available in the mine or there is a
configuration problem that should be immediately resolved.

Assignment
• Locks, bars and material restrictions limit the ability of the assigner to
optimize the truck operations. They should be used as little as possible.
• Production Requirements are recommended as the best way to influence
the decisions of the assigner. In particular they can be effectively used to
limit production of a loading tool or processor or to set lower limits of
production for parts of the mine.
Assignment problems can often be reproduced in the development
environment if the exact time and nature of the problem are provided with a
system snapshot. This is the recommended way of solving unknown
assignment problems.
Creating assignments
Creating an assignment by request
 To create an assignment by request
You may want to do this either when there is no current assignment for the
truck or you want the office software to terminate the existing automatic
assignment and create a new automatic assignment.
1. Open Truck Assistant.
2. From the Truck list, select the required truck. Truck Assistant re-
displays to show the current status and assignment details for the
selected truck.
3. Click the Assign tab.
4. Click Request Assignment. This overrides any existing assignments
for that truck and instructs the office software to immediately create an
automatic assignment.
Creating an assignment triggered by load state

 To create an assignment triggered by load state
You may want to do this when you need to explicitly define the load state
details for an assignment generated by the office software. This can be done
using either Truck Assistant or Scheduled Assignment Editor.
Using Truck Assistant
2. From the Truck list, select the required truck. Truck Assistant re-
displays to show the current status and assignment details for the
selected truck.
4. In the Manual assignment group box, do the following:
i. From the Action list, select the required action. This will determine
what destinations are listed.

Assignment
ii. If you selected To load, do the following:

• Select Next to request that this assignment does not have to
happen immediately but may occur the next time this action
needs to be performed.
• From the Loading Tool list, select the required loading tool. You
may be required to enter a material.
iii. If you selected To dump, select the required processor from the
Processor list.
• Select the Next check box to request that this assignment does
not have to happen immediately but may occur the next time this
action needs to be performed.
• From the Processor list, select the required processor.
iv. If you selected To travel, select the station from the Stations list.
• Select Next to request that this assignment does not have to
happen immediately but may occur the next time this action
needs to be performed. This is further qualified by selecting a
value from the list beside Next.
• From the Station list, select the required station.
5. Click Assign. The details in the Current assignment group are
updated.
Using Scheduled Assignment Editor
1. Open Scheduled Assignments.
2. Click New. Scheduled Assignment Editor opens.
3. Click Browse beside the Truck Field. The Select Trucks dialog
displays.
4. Select the trucks you wish to Exclude and Include from the list
displayed.
5. Click OK.
6. Select the Manual check box. The fields on the Manual tab become
active.
7. In the Assignment group box, do the following:
i. From the Action list, select an action for the truck to perform.
ii. If you selected To Travel, from the Load State list select the load
state to trigger the assignment.
iii. If enabled, from the Loading Tool list, select the loading tool.
iv. If enabled, from the Loading With list, select the material to be
loaded.
v. If enabled, from the Processor list, select the processor.
vi. If enabled, from the Station list, select the station to which the truck
will be sent.

Assignment
8. In the Schedule group box, do the following:

i. In the Schedule before text box, enter the order of the
assignments.
ii. If you want this assignment to be recreated after it completes,
select the Reschedule check box.
9. In the Other group box, do the following, select the Assignment Delay
check box and do the following:
i. In the On Route Delay Type field, browse for the type of delay to
be set when the assignment starts.
ii. Select the On Arrival Delay field, browse for the type of delay to be
set when the assignment ends.
iii. In the Expected Duration at Station field, enter the amount of time
that the truck is expected to be at the station.
iv. In the Reason field, enter the reason for creating this assignment.
Creating an assignment triggered by load state and time

 To create an assignment triggered by load state and time
You may want to do this when you need to explicitly define the load state and
time details for an assignment generated by the office software
1. Open Scheduled Assignment Monitor.
2. Click New.
3. Click Browse beside the Truck field. The Select Trucks dialog displays.
4. Select each truck that you require from the list and click the right arrow
to include each one in the assignment.
5. Click OK.
6. Ensure that the Manual check box is not selected. The fields on the
Automatic tab become active.
7. In the Assignment group box, do the following:
i. Select the Load State.
ii. Click the Browse button beside the Station field, and select the
assignment destination.
8. In the Schedule group box, do the following:
i. If you want the assignment to occur as soon as possible, select the
As Soon as Possible check box.
ii. If you want the assignment to occur on or before a specific time,
beside the Required At field, do the following:
• Select the date from the calendar.
• Select the time in hours minutes and seconds.
• Set the Arrive After and Arrive Before fields as necessary.
9. In the Other group box, do the following:

Assignment
i. Select the Assignment Delay check box if you want the specified
delay to be set as an assignment delay.
ii. Click Browse beside the On Route Delay Type field.
iii. Select the required delay type from the list.
iv. Click Browse beside the On Arrival Delay Type field.
v. Select the required delay type from the list.
vi. Enter the expected duration in days, hours and minutes in the
Expected Duration at Station field.
vii. Enter a description of the reason for the assignment in the Reason
field.
10. If you want to save your assignment and continue adding assignments,
click Add.
11. If you want to save your assignment and exit, click Save.
Viewing assignments
This topic explains how to view assignments.
Viewing assignments for a truck

 To view an assignment for a truck
This can be done using either Truck Assistant or Schedule Assignment
Editor.
Using Truck Assistant
2. From the Truck list, select the truck you want to view the assignment
for.
Using Fleet Update Assistant
1. Open Fleet Update Assistant.
2. Click the Truck tab.
3. Scroll if required to display the truck assignment details.
Viewing all assignments for all trucks

 To view all assignments for all trucks
1. Open Assignment Event Monitor.
2. Select <no filter> from the Truck list.
3. Select <no filter> from the Assigned to: list.
4. Scroll the list to view all assignments.

Assignment
Managing assignment groups

This topic describes how to manage assignment groups.
Creating an assignment group

 To create an assignment group
1. Open Assignment Group Editor.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a name for the assignment group in the Name field.
4. If required, enter a description for the assignment group in the
Description field.
5. Select the Assignment Group check box to use the group as an
assignment group.
6. If you want to use this to group personnel and machines during shift
change, select the Shift Change Group check box.
Note: This will only be displayed if activated using Supervisor.
7. If required, click the Loading Tool tab, and move the loading tools that
you want into the Include list.
8. If required, click the Processor tab, and move the processors that you
want into the Include list.
9. If required, click the Truck tab, and move the processors that you want
into the Truck list.
10. If required, click the Fuel Bay tab, and move the trucks you want to be
refueled into the Include list.
Trucks without an assignment group can go to any Loading Tool,
Processor or Fuel Bay. Trucks with one or more assignment group can
only go to Loading Tools, Processors or Fuel Bays that have at least one
matching assignment group.
11. Click Save.
Adding a truck to an assignment group

 To add a truck to an assignment group
2. From the Truck list, select the truck you require.
3. Click the Restrictions tab.
4. Click the Groups tab.

Assignment
5. Click the check box beside each assignment group to which the truck is
to be added.
6. Click Apply.
Adding a loading tool to an assignment group

 To add a loading tool to an assignment group
1. Open Loading Tool Assistant.
2. From the Loading Tool list, select the loading tool you require.
5. Click the check box beside each assignment group to which the loading
tool is to be added.
6. Click Apply.
Adding a processor to an assignment group

 To add a processor to an assignment group
1. Open Processor Assistant.
2. From the Processor list, select the processor you require.
5. Click the check box beside each assignment group to which the loading
tool is to be added.
6. Click Apply.
Editing an assignment group

 To edit an assignment group
2. From the Assignment Groups list, select the name of the group you
require. The details are displayed on the right hand panel.
3. Edit the details as required.
4. Click Save.
Deleting an assignment group

 To delete an assignment group
require.

Assignment
3. Click Delete.
Viewing an assignment group

 To view an assignment group
require. The details are displayed on the right hand panel.
3. View the details as required.

Assignment
Decision support
Decision support
This topic explains the Decision Support page, and its functionality.
Decision Support helps the office software Operators and other authorized
personnel evaluate the impact that changes they make to specific settings
will have on the production plan during the remainder of the current shift.
Changes to production goals, priorities, delays, as well as assignment locks
and bars can be simulated and the results displayed quickly.
The Decision Support pages are available for any personnel to view,
however only the Mine Builder and the office software Operator will have
Save and Apply privileges.
Decision Support loads with the current configuration of the mine, including
the current production requirements, and displays with the following tabs.
Production Planning
The production planning tab loads based on the production system’s current
goal and priority configuration.
This tab comprises two sub-tabs, allowing you to define goals and priorities.
Goals
You are able to manually add new and edit existing requirements and goals,
for example, changing the minimum and maximum required flow rates,
required Material and Source, or Blend and Sink.
Priority
The Priority tab has three sub-tabs, allowing you to define material priorities,
loading tool priorities, and processor priorities, and see the effects of the
changes.
Loading Tools
The Loading Tools tab displays key information associated with loading tools,
and enables you to easily identify the appropriate Loading Tool and see the
effects of:
• Making the Loading Tool available and unavailable for assignment.
• Setting locks and bars.
• Changing mining block selection for a particular Loading Tool.
• Putting the Loading Tool on and off delay
Processors
The Processors tab displays key information associated with Processors,
and enables you to easily identify the appropriate Processor and see the
effects of
• Putting the Processor on and off delay,
• Making the Processor available and unavailable for assignment.

Assignment
Decision support
Trucks
The Trucks tab displays key information associated with Trucks, and enables
you to easily identify the appropriate Truck and see the effects of:
• Making the Truck available and unavailable for assignment.
• Setting locks and bars.
• Putting the Truck on and off delays.
Roads
The Roads tab displays key information associated with Roads, and enables
you to
• easily identify the appropriate Road and see the effects of putting that
Road on and off delay.
Summary
The Summary tab allows you to assess the effect your changes are likely to
have on the production figures.
Items to take note of

1. The Decision Support page opens in a completely different colored page
to the standard Pages.
Open Decision Support using Contents > Assignment > Decision
Support.
2. You set the background color of the page in Supervisor (Options >
System Options > Assignment > Decision Support). The different
color indicates that you are in the Decision Support area, and not the
live production system.
3. If you have a need to restart Fleet and iAssignment you will need to
reopen the Decision Support Page to ensure you are viewing up-to-date
information.
4. The Loading Tools, Processors, Trucks, and Roads tabs all have a
"Changed" check box
This check box only displays in the Decision Support window, and
identifies records that have been manually changed since Decision
Support was loaded.
The check box is selected by the system whenever a change is made,
and can also be selected and cleared by whoever is using Decision
Support.
When you select Changed, the system assumes the state is current and
will not be updated until the model is validated. When you clear the
check box, the system reverts back to the original configuration for that
record.
5. Future delays for scheduled breaks and scheduled assignments are
included in the DSS calculations by creating fake delays. These delays
will not be transferred to the running system. Any modifications and

Assignment
Decision support
changes to the delays created by scheduled breaks and scheduled

assignments will be ignored upon applying the DSS changes.
6. When you click Save, you are updating your live production
system.
Note: The extra description is not included within the Save, Cancel, Apply
or Validate procedures below.
You will be given a warning, letting you know that you are about to save
changes to production settings and are you sure you want to do that. If
you click Yes, the Decision Support window closes.
If you Cancel without Saving your changes will not take effect.
7. Clicking Apply displays the same warning as clicking Save, however
the Decision Support window will not close once you have clicked
Yes.
8. Clicking Validate displays the Summary window, which indicates what is
valid and not valid depending on the data you are validating. You can
see a description of the Summary window in the section Viewing
the summary of your changes. The folders on the Summary window are
collapsed by default. Click on any folder to expand it and see more
detailed information.
9. If you go straight to the Summary tab, a validation is automatically run.
You can then click Validate, Apply, or Save from within that tab.
The following sections describe the functionality of each tab on the Decision
Support page.
Adding and changing goals

This tab allows you to add new and edit existing requirements and goals, for
example, changing the minimum and maximum required flow rates, and see
the effects of your changes on the production plan.
 To add a goal
1. Click Add Goal to add your defined goal. The Goal Editor displays.
2. In the At least field, enter the minimum tons per hour, and in the No
more than field enter the maximum tons per hour.
3. Click the From list arrow, and select the Loader you wish to load from.
4. Click the Material/Blend list arrow, and select the material or blend to
load.
5. Click the To list arrow, and select the processor or dump you wish to
load to.
6. Click OK. You are returned to the Goals window.

Assignment
Decision support
7. Click Validate to see the summary of your changes.

8. Click Apply or Save.
You are able to see your changes in the Production Requirements
Assistant.
 To edit a goal
1. Select the goal you wish to edit and click Edit Goal.
2. Make the changes required.
3. Click OK.
 To delete a goal
• Select the record you wish to delete, and click Delete Goal.
Prioritizing materials and machines

The following procedures allow you to define material priorities, loading tool
priorities, and processor priorities, and see the effects of your changes. You
need to click the Priority tab to see each of the tabs described below.
 To prioritize Materials
1. Click the Materials sub-tab and move the materials that you want to
prioritize from the Non Priority list into the Priority list.
 To prioritize Loading Tools

1. Click the Loading Tool Priorities sub-tab.
2. Beside each Loading Tool to be prioritized, move the slider to the level
of priority you wish that Loading Tool to have, from Lowest to Highest.
3. Click Validate to assess the changes to your production plan.
4. Click Apply or Save to commit your changes to the production system.
 To prioritize Processors
1. Click the Processor Priorities sub-tab.
2. Beside each Processor to be prioritized, move the slider to the level of
priority you wish that Processor to have, from Lowest to Highest.
3. Click Validate to assess the changes to your production plan.

Assignment
Decision support
Making decisions for machines and roads

The individual tabs for machines and roads allow you to make decisions such
as putting a machine or road on and off delay, and see the effects of those
decisions. The table below shows the decisions you can simulate for
machines and roads.
Decision Loading Processors Trucks Roads

Tools
Available/unavailable for Assignment Y Y Y N
Delays on or off Y Y Y Y
Apply locks and bars Y N Y+ N

Provisional
Change Mining Block Y N N N
Assignment Availability
This section describes making a machine available or unavailable for
assignments, and seeing the effects of your decision.
This procedure applies to the following.
Loading Tools Processors Trucks

Y Y Y
 Making a machine available or unavailable for assignment

1. On the appropriate tab, either Loading Tools, Processors, or Trucks,
locate the machines you wish to make either available or unavailable for
Assignment.
2. To make the machines available for assignment, select the Available
for Assignment check box.
3. To make the machines unavailable for assignment, clear the Available
for Assignment check box.
4. Click Validate to see the effects of your change. The changes to the
machines’ availability are considered when the production plan is being
calculated.

Assignment
Decision support
Delays
This section describes putting a machine or a road on or off delay, and
seeing the effects of your decision.
Loading Tools Processors Trucks Roads

Y Y Y Y
 Putting a machine or road on or off delay

1. On the appropriate tab, locate the machine or road you wish to put on or
off delay.
2. Double-click the Delays field. The Delays Editor displays.
Note: The Delays Editor displayed relates only to Decision Support and is
different to the Delay Editor under the Production > Delay
Assistant menu option.
The Decision Support Delays Editor does, however, provide entity-

specific delays for selection that you will have already set in Delay
Type Editor. For example, if you are putting a Road on delay, then
only delays relating to roads are displayed.
3. Set the Start and Finsh times of the delays.

4. Click the Ellipses button to choose a Delay Type.
5. Click Add to enter another delay, or click OK to return to the Loading
Tools tab.
Note: You can schedule more than one delay.
• If delays have already been added for the machine or road you have
selected, only the existing delays are shown in the Delays Editor.
• If you open the Delays Editor and exit it without setting a delay, the Delays
Editor automatically creates a new one hour delay. You can go back into
the Delays Editor and change the start and finish types of this delay, as
well as the delay type.
6. Click Validate to see the effects of your change.

Assignment
Decision support
 Removing a delay from a machine or road

1. On the appropriate tab, locate the machine or road you wish to put on or
off delay.
2. Double-click the Delays field. The Delays Editor displays.
3. Select the delay you wish to remove and click .
If a current delay is removed, the Summary tab shows that the delay will
be stopped.
4. Click Validate to see the effects of your changes.
Locks and bars

This section describes setting lock and bar restrictions on Loading Tools and
Trucks, and seeing the effects of your decision. You are also able to set
Provisional locks and bars on Trucks only.
See Restrictions in the Concepts and Reference chapter for background
information on the different types of restrictions.
Loading Tools Trucks

Y Y + Provisional
 Setting and removing locks and bars

1. On the appropriate tab, locate the machine for which you wish to set or
remove the locks and bars.
2. Double-click the Locks and Bars field. The Restrictions Editor displays.
3. Select the Lock and Bar check boxes of the Processor, Shovel or
Loader you wish to lock to, or bar, and click OK.
4. To remove a lock or bar, click the relevant check box to clear it.
Note: You are able to set or remove Provisional locks and bars on Trucks
only by selecting or clearing the relevant check box in the Provisional
column. See the Concepts and Reference for an explanation of
Provisional restrictions.
5. Click Validate to see the effects of your changes.


Assignment
Viewing the summary of your changes
Mining Block changes

This section describes how to change the mining block selection for a
particular Loading Tool.
This procedure applies to:
Loading Tools
Y
 Changing the Mining Block
Note: This feature is only available on the Loading Tools tab.
1. On the Loading Tools tab, locate the Loading Tool for which you wish to
change the Mining Block it is digging from.
2. Click the Mining Block field and select an alternate mining block from
the list.
The Mining Block field defaults to the mining block currently being
mined.
The list of mining blocks is restricted to those active mining blocks on
the same level within your mining block hierarchy.
3. Click Validate to see the effect of your changes.

Once you have Validated your changes, and before you Save the changes,
you can use the Summary tab to assess the effect your changes are likely to
have on the production figures.
The Summary tab displays the following:
• Invalid Production Requirements, if there are any.
• Production Targets.
• Source Production Targets.
• Sink Production Targets.
• Material Production Targets.
• Goals Summary.
• Changes
• Goals
• Priorities

Assignment
• Loading Tools
• Trucks
• Roads
• Processors
• Locks and Bars
• Production Plan Summary.
Changes
Each section under Changes expands so that you can see each change you
have made in that section using Decision Support. If there have not been any
changes, the section will be dimmed.
After viewing the Summary, if you want to make changes to your production
plan, you need to
1. Clear the check boxes of those elements you wish to change.
2. Make the changes.
3. Validate your changes.
4. View the Summary again, before Applying your changes.
Production Targets
The Summary tab provides you with shift-based production targets. This
enables you to identify the current expected target for the shift, as well as the
change.
The Production Plan Targets display in grid format, and allow calculations to
be defined on the numeric values, i.e. sum, average, and formula. You can
drag and drop elements to a group as required, and create sub totals, which
can then be analyzed.
The benefit of this is that you are able to easily identify the total production
for both the old and new configurations. In addition, you are able to group by
shovel, processor, or material and see the sub-totals for a comparison of the
figures which you are actually interested in. This enables you to quickly
identify exactly which areas will be affected, and by what amount, as a result
of the change.
The following fields are available within the production target summary:
Field Description
Production Arc
Source The source Loading Tool.
Sink The Sink or Processor destination
Material The Material being processed.
Current Prediction
Rate (t/h) The tons per hour predicted for that Source
machine.

Assignment
Field Description
Total for Shift (t) The total tons predicted for that shift.
New Prediction
Rate (t/h) The tons per hour predicted for that Source machine
based on any changes.
Total for Shift (t) The total tons predicted for that shift based on any
changes.
Change
Rate (t/h)
Total for Shift (t)
% Change
Mine Model query

This topic explains how to view and use the Mine Model query page.
Mine Model Query is used as a troubleshooting page to provide an overview
of the compatibilities and incompatibilities which exist for a combination of
filter criteria, including trucks, loaders, processors, and materials. It is mainly
used to determine which constraints or restrictions need to be modified in
order for a machine to receive an automatic assignment.
• Constraints refers to the materials and destinations for a machine.
• Restrictions refer to the locks and bars that have been placed on
machines and servers.
More information on constraints and restrictions can be found in the
Concepts and Reference chapter. See Restrictions on page 5.98 for details.
 To view compatibility details in the matrix panel

1. Open Mine Model Query.
Compatibility information is shown on a matrix on the left, detailed
information is shown on the right.
In the matrix on the left, do the following.
2. From the Rows drop-down list, select the item you want to view in the
rows.
3. From the Columns drop-down list, select the item you want to view in
the columns.
The labels beside the other two drop-down lists will depend on what you
have selected for your rows and columns.
For example, if your rows are Processors, and your columns are
Materials, the other two lists will be Loading Tool and Trucks. Or, if your

Assignment
rows are Trucks and your columns are Materials, the other two lists will
be Loading Tools and Processors.
4. From the other drop-down lists, select the items you want to view the
compatibility of.
The matrix will refresh, showing various compatibilities.
• Red cells with a cross indicates that the combination is not
compatible.
• Green cells with a tick indicates that the combination is compatible.
5. If you want to view the compatibilities for a particular combination, click
the relevant cell in the matrix.
The compatibility details for that combination is shown in the summary
panel.
6. If you want to swap the row and column positions, do one of the
following:
i. Select Actions > Swap.
ii. Click the Swap button on the toolbar.
7. If you want to filter the data, do one of the following:
i. Select Actions > Filter.
ii. Click the Filter button on the toolbar.
You can then select whether to show machines that are not available for
assignment, or to show machines that are on delay, or both.
8. If you do not want the matrix displayed, do the following:
i. Select Actions > Show Matrix.
ii. Click the Toggle Matrix button on the toolbar.
 To view compatibility details for a single entity in the

summary panel
This example describes viewing "What is compatible with a particular
Loading Tool?"
2. From the Loading Tool drop-down list, select the Loading Tool you wish
to view the compatibilities for.

Assignment
3. Click Refresh to view the most up-to-date information for your query.
Compatibilities with the Loading tool are shown.
Destination compatibilities with a Loading Tool are always Sources.
4. If you want to have a compressed view of the compatibility summary,

select the Compress check box. You are also able to see the
compatibility summary by clicking any column, row, or cell in the left
panel.
 To view compatibility details for more than one entity in

the summary panel
This example describes viewing "What is compatible with a particular
Loading Tool AND a particular Processor?"
2. From the Loading Tool drop-down list, select the Loading Tool you wish
to view the compatibilities for.
3. From the Processor drop-down list, select the Processor you wish to
view the compatibilities of, when working with the Loading Tool you
selected in Step 2.

Assignment
4. Click Refresh to view the most up-to-date information for your query.
Compatibilities with the particular Loading tool working with the Processor
you have chosen are displayed.
Destination compatibilities with the combination of a Loading Tool and a
Processor can include both Sources and Sinks.
5. Click the Refresh button to refresh the information for your query.
6. If you want to have a compressed view of the compatibility summary,
select the Compress check box. You are also able to see the
compatibility summary by clicking any column, row, or cell in the left
panel.

Assignment
Managing restrictions
This topic explains how to manage restrictions for trucks, loading tools,
processors and mining blocks.
The following table summarizes the management tasks that you can perform
on restrictions. There is no order of restriction, they are all satisfied equally.
The only exception to this is for Mining Blocks.
Table 6.1: Management tasks you can perform on restrictions
You can To this On this... To/from this...

do restriction...
this...
Set Lock Truck Loading Tool
Truck Processor
Loading Tool Processor
Bar Truck Loading Tool
Truck Processor
Mining block lock Mining block Destination
Clear Lock Truck Loading Tool
Truck Processor
Truck Processor
View Lock Truck Loading Tool
Truck Processor
Truck Processor

Assignment
Setting locks
This topic explains how to set locks on trucks, loading tools and mining
blocks.
 To set a lock on a truck to a server

2. Select the truck from the Truck list.
4. If you want to set the lock to a loading tool, do the following:
i. Click the Loading Tool tab below the Restrictions tab.
ii. Select the Lock check box on each row containing a loading tool to
which the truck is to be locked. The lock is automatically set as
absolute.
iii. To change the lock to provisional, select the check box beside it in
the Provisional column.
5. If you want to set the lock to a processor, do the following:
i. Click the Processor tab below the Restrictions tab.
ii. Select the Lock check box on each row containing a processor to
which the truck is to be locked.
6. Click Apply.
 To set a lock on a loading tool to a processor

2. Select the required loading tool from the Loading Tool list.
4. Click the Processor tab.
5. Select the Lock check box on each row containing a processor to which
the loading tool is to be locked.
6. Click Apply.
Setting mining block locks

This topic explains how to set mining block locks.
 To set a mining block lock to a destination

Before you begin you must manually enable a loading tool, using Shovel
Editor.
1. Open Mining Block Finder.
2. Select the required mining block.
3. Click Open. Mining Block Editor opens.

Assignment
4. Click the General tab.

5. From the Locked Destination list, select the destination. If this is not
enabled, you must ensure the mining block is active and not read only.
6. Click Save.
Clearing locks
This topic explains how to clear locks on trucks and loading tools.
 To clear a lock on a truck from a server

4. If you want to clear the lock to a loading tool, do the following:
ii. Clear the Lock check box on each row containing a loading tool to
which the truck is to have the lock cleared.
5. If you want to clear the lock to a processor, do the following:
ii. Clear the Lock check box on each row containing a processor to
which the truck is to have the lock cleared.
6. Click Apply.
 To clear a lock on a loading tool from a processor

5. Clear the Lock check box on each row containing a processor to which
the loading tool is to have the lock cleared.
6. Click Apply.
Clearing mining block locks

This topic explains how to clear mining block locks.
 To clear a mining block lock to a destination

2. Select the required mining block.

Assignment
5. From the Locked Destination list, select None.

6. Click Save.
Setting bars
This topic explains how to set bars on trucks, loading tools and mining
blocks.
 To set a bar on a truck to a server

4. If you want to set the bar to a loading tool, do the following:
ii. Select the Bar check box on each row containing a loading tool
from which the truck is to be barred. This is absolute.
iii. To change the bar to provisional, select the check box beside it in
the Provisional column.
5. If you want to set the bar to a processor, do the following:
ii. Select the Bar check box on each row containing a processor from
which the truck is to be barred.
6. Click Apply.
 To set a bar on a loading tool to a processor

2. From the Loading Tool list, select the loading tool you require
5. Select the Bar check box on each row containing a processor from
which the loading tool is to be barred.
6. Click Apply.
Clearing bars
This topic explains how to clear bars on trucks and loading tools.
 To clear a bar on a truck from a server

2. From the Truck list select the truck you require.

Assignment
4. If you want to clear the bar to a loading tool, do the following:

ii. Clear the Bar check box on each row containing a loading tool to
which the truck is to have the bar cleared.
5. If you want to clear the bar to a processor, do the following:
ii. Clear the Bar check box on each row containing a processor to
which the truck is to have the bar cleared.
6. Click Apply.
 To clear a bar on a loading tool from a processor

5. Clear the Bar check box on each row containing a processor to which
the loading tool is to have the lock cleared.
6. Click Apply.
Viewing restrictions
This topic explains how to view restrictions on trucks, loading tools and
processors.
 To view restrictions for a truck

2. From the Truck list, select the truck whose restrictions you want to view.
4. If you want to view restrictions between the selected truck and loading
tool, click the Loading Tool tab.
5. If you want to view restrictions between the selected truck and
processors, click the Processor tab.
6. If you want to view restrictions between the selected truck and a group
of assignment groups, click the Groups tab.
 To view restrictions for a loading tool

2. From the Loading Tool list, select the loading tool whose restrictions
you want to view.

Assignment
4. If you want to view restrictions placed on trucks with respect to the

selected loading tool, click the Truck tab.
5. If you want to view restrictions placed on processors with respect to the
selected loading tool, click the Processor tab.
6. If you want to view restrictions placed on the selected loading tool with
respect to assignment groups, click the Groups tab.
 To view restrictions for a processor

1. Open Processor Assistant.
2. From the Processor list, select the processor whose restrictions you
want to view.
4. If you want to view restrictions placed on trucks with respect to the
selected processor, click the Truck tab.
5. If you want to view restrictions placed on the selected processor with
respect to assignment groups, click the Groups tab.
Applying restrictions on trucks

This topic explains how to apply restrictions on more than one truck at once.
 To apply restrictions on more than one truck

1. Open Restriction Assistant.
2. Select the required trucks by doing one of the following:
i. Select the All radio button, for all trucks to be selected, or
ii. Select the Selected radio button to enable the truck list, and click
Browse to display the list and select the required trucks.
3. In the Action group box, do the following:
i. Select the Clear Loading Tool Restrictions check box to clear all
the loading tool restrictions for the selected truck(s).
ii. Select the Clear Processor Restrictions check box to clear all the
processor restrictions for the selected truck(s).
iii. Select the Clear Server Restrictions check box to clear all the
server restrictions for the selected truck(s).
iv. Select the Lock to Last Loading Tool check box to lock the
selected truck(s) to the loading tools to which they were last locked.
v. Select the Lock to Last Processor check box to lock the selected
truck(s) to the processors to which they were last locked.
vi. Select the Clear Follow Mining Block Locks check box to clear
any locks to mining blocks associated with the selected truck(s).
4. Click Save.

Assignment
Managing the use of machines

This topic describes how to determine the use of machines so that they can
be more effectively managed and assigned, and how to view the trucking
status of machines.
Determining the use of machines

 To determine the use of machines
2. If you want to change the columns you are seeing, click Configure
Options on the toolbar to choose the columns you want to see.
3. If you want to filter the list by fleet, select the required fleet from the
Fleet list.
4. If required, from the Travel Condition list, select the travel condition to
filter on.
5. If you want to determine the use of loading tools, click the Loading
Tools tab, scroll and view the results.
6. If you want to determine the use of trucks, click the Truck tab, scroll and
view the results.
7. If you want to determine the use of processors click the Processor tab,
scroll and view the results.
8. If you want to determine the use of auxiliary equipment, click the
Auxiliary Equipment tab, scroll and view the results.
9. If you want to view details about a specific machine, locate the machine
in the list and double-click.
Viewing the trucking status

The trucking status is configured using Supervisor. See the Fleet
Administration & Configuration manual for more information on configuring
trucking status.
 To view the trucking status

2. If you want to filter the list by fleet, select the required fleet from the
Fleet list.
3. Pause your mouse on the Trucking Status indicator at the bottom of the
screen. The colors shown in the indicator are set up in Supervisor.

Assignment
Managing production requirements
4. If you have Default Production Requirements configured, (configured

in Supervisor), you will see the following information:
i. Average Processor Wait — The average amount of time a
processor will wait.
ii. Average Loading Tool Wait — The average amount of time a
loading tool will wait.
iii. Total Processor Utilization — The total amount of processor
utilization.
iv. Total Loading Tool Utilization — The total amount of loading tool
utilization.
5. If you have Standard or Advanced Production Requirements
configured, (configured in Supervisor), you will see the following
information:
i. Over trucking capacity (mass) — The additional amount of
trucking capacity that has been used.
ii. Processor capacity (rate) — The additional amount of processor
capacity that has been used.
iii. Used processor capacity (rate) — The amount of processor
capacity being used.
iv. Loading Tool capacity (rate) — The additional amount of Loading
Tool capacity that has been used.
v. Used Loading Tool capacity (rate) — The amount of processor
capacity being used.

This topic explains how to manage production requirements and production
requirements templates.
Creating production requirements

Production requirements start at the time you save the production goal,
which automatically sets the end time of the previous set of production
requirements. Production requirements remain active until a new goal is set,
or until the end of the current shift (which is set in Supervisor).
 To reset production requirements at the end of every shift

1. In Supervisor, click Options > System Options.
2. From the Product list, select Assignment, and from the Option Sets
list select Production Requirements.
3. To reset the production requirements at every shift change, select the
Reset requirements on shift change check box.

Assignment
 To create a set of production requirements

1. Open Production Requirements Assistant.
2. Click New. The Production Planning window displays.
3. If you want to use details already stored in an existing production
requirements template, do the following:
i. Click Load Template.
ii. From the Production Requirements Template list, select the
template you require.
iii. Click OK.
4. To set your production plan goals, click the Goals tab and click Add
Goal. The Goal Editor displays.
5. In the At least field, enter the minimum tons per hour, and in the No
more than field enter the maximum tons per hour.
6. Click the From list arrow, and select the Loader you wish to load from.
7. Click the Material/Blend list arrow, and select the material or blend to
load.
8. Click the To list arrow, and select the processor or dump you wish to
load to.
9. Click OK. You are returned to the Goals window.
10. If you want to prioritize materials, click the Priority tab and do the
following:
i. Click the Materials tab.
ii. Move the materials that you want into the Priority list.
11. CIick Validate to calculate your production plan, and identify any invalid
production requirements you may have entered.
12. Click Activate to commit the current goals to the production system. If
your production plan cannot be solved due to invalid requirements, a
dialog box will display, asking whether or not you wish to continue.
13. Click Continue to disregard the warning, or click Cancel to go back and
edit your production plan.
14. If you want to save the production requirements as a new template, click
Save As Template.
15. If you want to prioritize loading tools, click the Priority tab and do the
following:
i. Click the Loading Tool Priorities tab.
ii. Beside each Loading Tool to be prioritized, move the slider to the
level of priority you wish that Loading Tool to have, from Lowest to
Highest.

Assignment
16. If you want to prioritize processors, click the Priority tab and do the
following:
i. Click the Processors Priorities tab.
ii. Beside each Processor to be prioritized, move the slider to the
level of priority you wish that Processor to have, from Lowest to
Highest.
17. Click Activate.
Viewing your production goals

You can view your production goals via the Fleet Update Assistant.
Production goals are displayed as a graphical embedded dashboard with
one dial for each goal. The statistics are shown in real time.
Editing production requirements

 To edit production requirements
2. Select the required set of production requirements.
3. Click Open.
4. Edit details as required.
5. If you want to save the production requirements as a new template, click
Save As Template.
6. Click Activate.
Deleting production requirements

 To delete production requirements
2. Create a new set of production requirements with no goals.
3. Click Activate and select immediately.
Viewing production requirements

 To view production requirements
2. Select the required set of production requirements.
3. Click Open.
4. View as required.

Assignment
Managing production requirements templates

This topic explains how to manage templates for production requirements.
Creating a production requirements template

 To create a production requirements template
1. Open Production Requirements Templates.
2. Click New.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the template.
4. In the Description field, enter a description of the template.
5. Click the Goals tab and do the following:
i. Click Add Goal. Goal Editor dialog opens.
ii. Click the unit type beside the At Least field to display the list of
choices for the minimum amount.
iii. Select the unit for the minimum amount.
iv. Enter the minimum amount in the At Least field.
v. Click the unit type beside the No More Than field to display the list
of choices for the maximum amount.
vi. Enter the minimum amount in the No More Than field.
vii. From the From list, select the processor for this material.
6. From the Material/Blend list, select the material or blend to load.
7. From the To list, select the processor or dump you wish to load to.
8. Click OK.
9. Click the Priority tab and do the following:
i. Click the Materials tab
ii. Move priority and non-priority items into the appropriate list.
iii. On the Loading Tool Priorities and Processor Priorities tabs,
select the required priority of each machine.
iv. Click Apply or Save.
The information you entered on the Priority and Goals tabs is now
displayed on the Summary tab.
Editing a production requirements template

 To edit a production requirements template
2. Select the production requirements template you require from the list.

Assignment
3. Click Open.
Deleting a production requirements template

 To delete a production requirements template
2. Select the production requirements template from the list.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the selected template.
Viewing a production requirements template

 To view a production requirements template
2. Select the production requirements template from the list.
3. Click Open.
4. View the details as required.

Data Validation
Data Validation
Introduction to Data Validation

Fleet has two data validation tools, Model Data Validation, and Historical
Inspector.
A diagnostic page used to check the mine model for inconsistencies. Once a
scan is run, the page displays issues and may suggest ways of resolving
them, helping maintainability and mine model style.
This page is configured by security for use by the Builder only.
Note: You must be in Expert Mode to use this tool and ensure no data
processing is being undertaken.

database.
Inspecting the mine model using the Model Data

Validation tool
This topic explains how to use the Model Data Validation tool.
Scanning the mine model

 To scan the mine model
1. Open Model Data Validation.
2. In the Inspect panel on the left, select the items you want to scan.
i. If you want to scan a specific item, select the check box for that
item.
ii. If you want to scan all of the available items, select the Inspect
check box at the top.
3. Click Scan.
• If an automatic solution is not available for an issue, the text of the
issue will be orange, and the Solution Available column will be
blank.
• If an automatic solution is available for an issue, the text of the issue
will be blue, and there will be a tick in the Solution Available
column.

Data Validation
4. If you want resolve all issues for which there are automatic solutions,
click the Select All button, then click Resolve.
5. If you want to resolve a specific issue, or issues, select the relevant
check boxes, then click Resolve.
You must click Resolve to fix any issues. Once an issue is resolved, the
text of the issue turns green.
Using the Historical Inspector tool

This topic explains how to use the Historical Inspector tool to initially resolve
any validation issues with your data.
 Historical data initial operational procedure

Prior to executing the HistoricalInspector tool, ensure that no processing of
data is being undertaken. Accordingly, Cycle and Delay Assistants should be
closed. No Historical Data Validations should be performed on data currently
being updated, i.e. avoid the current shift and two days prior.
Stage 1
1. In Expert mode, click Contents > Data Validation > Historical
Inspector.
2. Under Cycle Inspector, select the check box for Inconsistent Cycle
Delay Times.
3. All other check boxes should not be selected.
4. Click the Inspect button. If you are a site with a large amount of data it
may take a few minutes for the report to display.
5. If you want to save the report for future reference, click Save.
This report operates across the entire database.
6. If there are problems reported, click Fix.
7. Click Inspect to verify that the problems have been fixed.
8. If there are any problems in the displayed report, save the report and
raise a DSN ticket.
Stage 2
1. Clear the check box for Inconsistent Cycle Delay Times.
2. Under Delay Inspector, select the check box for Start time is after
finish time.
3. Select the check box for Delay duration is too long.
4. Select the check box for Overlapping Delays.
5. Under Cycle Inspector, select the check box for Nominal Payload is 0
or NULL.
6. Select the check box for Old cycle activity names.

Data Validation
7. Under Kpi Summaries Inspector select the check box for Time is
Missing from Total.
8. Select the check box for Summaries record has no cycle record.
9. Set record filtering for no more than 12 months, for example:
i. Period = Year
ii. Period Start date = 1/1/07 06:00
iii. End date = 31/12/07 06:00
10. Click Inspect. If you are a site with a large amount of data it may take a
few minutes for the report to display.
11. Save the report if you want to keep it for future reference.
12. Click Fix.
13. Click Inspect, a report will show after a few minutes. If you are a site
with a large amount of data it may take a few minutes for the report to
display.
14. If there are any problems in the displayed report, save the report and
raise a DSN ticket.
Stage 3
This stage describes the procedures for repairing problems that cannot be
fixed automatically.
1. Clear all check boxes.
2. Under Cycle Inspector, select the check box for Cycle start time >
finish time.
3. Select the check box for Activity start time > finish time.
4. Select Inspect. If you are a site with a large amount of data it may take
a few minutes for the report to display.
5. Save the report if you want to keep it for future reference.
6. Using Cycle Assistant, modify the cycles as determined by the local
user expert.
There are no Resolve solutions for these Cycle Inspector queries.
7. Click Scan, a report will show after a few minutes.
8. If there are any problems reported in the displayed report, save the
report and return to Step 7.
Stage 4
1. Recalculate KPI Summaries for the time period.
2. Verify Business Objects reports for the time period.
Stage 5
• Repeat Stages 2, 3 and 4 for all time periods.

Data Validation
 Historical data normal operational procedure

Whenever you update cycles, you always need to make a corresponding
change to the associated summaries record in the summaries database.
If you have made any changes in your initial run using the historical inspector
tool, and after you have resolved all your validation issues, you need to do a
summaries recalculation for the corresponding time period using the Cycle
Bulk Update Assistant. For example, if you used the validation tool to correct
issues for January to December 2007, you need to recalculate the
summaries for the same period.
 To do a summaries recalculation
1. In Expert Mode. click Contents > Production > Cycle Bulk Update
Assistant.
2. In the Update Mode panel, select Recalc Reporting Data.
3. Click Run.
Re-run the initial operating procedure
When you perform subsequent runs with other inspections enabled across
the same time period, it is likely that you will need to correct a much smaller
number of cycle records. In this case, only the cycles that are changed will be
written to a file. This file will be used to tell the subsequent summaries
recalculations to only recalculate those cycles in the defined time period
rather than all of them.
Before re-running the initial operating procedure, (as described on page 7.2
onwards), you must
1. Select the Write To File check box on the Historical Inspector page.
2. Clear the Append check box so that a fresh file is created.
Then you can re-run the initial operating procedure with some or all of the
inspections enabled.

Data Validation
Subsequent validation runs

Before doing any subsequent runs, ensure that you select the Append
option so that the file is updated with any new cycle records to be
subsequently processed.
Once you have completed all your validation runs, you need to do another
summaries recalculation as described earlier.
Note: Before you click Run when doing the summaries recalculation, select
the Filter From File option in the Cycle Bulk Update Assistant. If the
Write to File check box has been previously selected on the
Historical Inspector page, only those cycles that changed are used in
the recalculation rather than all cycles for the given time period.
Cleansing activities
Delay Inspector
Start time is after finish time (negative duration delays)
Identification query
The query reports all delays with a negative value.
Corrective action
Swap the delay start and end times.
Delay duration is too long (Very long delay durations)
The query reports all delays that are longer than 300 days. 300 days is the
default. The time parameter is user selectable.
Corrective action
Modify the delay so that the end time is the start time + 1 day. 1 day is the
default and is user modifiable.
Overlapping Delays
The query reports delays for all machines for which one delay overlaps in
time with a following delay.
Corrective action
Set the following delay start time equal to the preceding delay end time.

Data Validation
Cycle Inspector
Nominal payload is 0 or NULL (Null or Zero nominal
payload)
The query reports cycle records which have a zero or null value.
Corrective action
Copy the nominal payload value for the specific machine class into the cycle
record for all identified cycles.
Old cycle activity names
The query reports the cycles that have activities called Waiting for Truck.
Corrective action
Replace all identified problem truck cycle activity names with Hang Time.
Cycle Start Time > Finish Time (Negative duration cycles)
The query reports all cycles with a start time greater than end time.
Corrective action
There is no automated solution currently available. You need to manually edit
the cycles using Cycle Assistant.
Activity start time > Finish time (Negative duration cycle
activities)
This query reports all cycle activities with a start time greater than end time.
Corrective action
There is no automated solution currently available. You need to manually edit
the cycles using Cycle Assistant.
Inconsistent cycle delay times
Identification Query
This query reports delays in the delay table that are not consistent with the
cycle delay records table.
Corrective Action
For any cycle that has a cycle delay record where start time = NULL, reset
that delay record to the reference delay record start time.

Data Validation
Load status incorrect in CycleRoadSegments

This query detects cycles with just a single value for loadStatus in all the
cycle's CycleRoadSegments.
Corrective Action
Fix the loadStatus so that it is full for all roads travelled after loading.
KPI Summaries Inspector

Time is missing from total
Corrects the KPI Summaries where the sum of cycle activities and delays
does not equal the cyclet duration.
The query will report the records for which the difference between the cycle
finish and start time is not equal to the total time of all activities associated
with the cycle.
Corrective Action
Resynchronize the existing delays by identifying and correcting delays that
overlap cycle activities, and create new activities with a "non-determined"
activity status where activity gaps exist.
Summaries Record Has No Cycle Record
Remove KPI Summaries entries for No Associated Cycle.
This query returns the list of cycles stored in KPI Summaries database fact
table Cycle_Fact_Man for which there is no corresponding record in the
Historical database.
Corrective Action
Cycles with no corresponding Historical database record are deleted in the
KPI Summaries Database.

KPI Dashboards
KPI Dashboards
Introduction to KPI dashboards

This section contains general information on the following:
• KPI dashboards, their appearance and layout options.
• Chart types.
• Custom dataset definitions.
• Templates.
• Chart customization.
KPI dashboards
Dashboards combine data from real-time KPIs and domain model property
changes with chart definitions to provide a live graphical view of the office
software system operation.
Figure 8.1: Sample dashboard

KPI Dashboards
A dashboard is made up of:

• Chart definitions, for individual charts.
• Layout Information, for groups of charts presented on a screen.
• Templates, as a way to manage frequently used chart definitions.
As shown in Figure 8.1 on page 2, many charts may appear on a single
dashboard, grouped logically using tabs or boxes, and laid out across or
down the screen.
Dashboard appearances
You can enhance the appearance of the dashboard by rendering the groups
in different modes. The most useful modes are tab for hiding or showing
whole pages of related charts at a time, and box for providing a named,
non-intrusive visual grouping.
Modes
• Plain. Has no visible borders or label.
• Region. Has a label, and a horizontal line at the top of the group. The line
extends across the full width of the group, with the label at the left of the
line.
• Box. Has a pale line around the group, with the label at the top left of the
box.
• Tab. The items in this group are shown on a tab in a tabset.
• Collapsed. The label is shown as a button. Clicking the button displays
the items in the group.
• Split. The items in the group are laid out separated by moveable dividers
(a split pane).
• Window. The label is shown as a button. Clicking the button opens
another window displaying the items in the group.
Dashboard layout options

You can create complex layouts using multiple nested groups with different
layout options. For example, you can display a number of columns of meters
by creating a top level group with a horizontal layout, containing a number of
groups with a vertical layout, and contain the actual meters.
Layouts
• Horizontal. The items in the group are laid out across the page.
• Vertical. The items in the group are laid out down the page.
• Custom. An additional attribute specifies the column groups, column
spec, and row spec in the correct format.
• Border. The size of the border around the group. You can specify none if
you do not want to have a gap between items, otherwise the gap will be
eight. Generally this should be set to none.

KPI Dashboards
Chart types
The dashboards provide the following chart attributes; Table, for a tabular
display of the data, and any of the following graph types.
Category Chart Type

Value Thermometer
Compass
Metre
Pie Pie
Pie 3D
Multiple Pie
Values by Category Combined Domain
Vertical Bar
Vertical Bar 3D
Horizontal bar
Horizontal bar 3D
Stacked Vertical Bar
Stacked Vertical Bar 3D
Stacked Horizontal Bar
Stacked Horizontal Bar 3D
Vertical Line
Vertical Line 3D
Horizontal Line
Horizontal Line 3D
Vertical Area
Vertical Stacked Area
Horizontal Area
Horizontal Stacked Area
Intervals by Category Gantt
Values by Time Combined Time Series
Time Series
Step

KPI Dashboards
Custom dataset definitions
Category Chart Type

XY Plots Line XY
Area XY
Bar XY
Scatter
XYZ Plots Bubble
Custom dataset definitions

The chart custom definition has a dataset which defines:
• The range of values to be displayed by the chart. For example, the range
of values may be the truck names, or the loader class names.
• The allocation of the range to a single or multiple charts. For example, all
trucks may be displayed on a single bar chart, or they may be divided
between several bar charts, with each chart showing the trucks from a
single class (i.e. grouped by class name).
The names of the items in the range provide the link to the data-feed defined
by the property called the dataSource. The dataSource for a chart provides
name and value data which must match the names of the items in the range
defined by the dataSet for the chart.
The dataSet may be specified as either of:
• A type of model entity and a filter that subsets these items so they are not
all used in the chart, with an optional grouping based on a type of model
entity and a filter that groups the items so they are split into different
charts.
• A list of specific names that will serve as the names of the chart range
items.
• The reserved name "Shift" is used for KPIs that do not have a
dimension, for example, a rolled-up KPI that results in a single value
such as loaderTonsMined.primeForShift.
When the chart is initialized its dataSet is evaluated. Usually there are a
number of items in the dataset, and the treatment of these items differs
slightly for the different chart types.
The name of the item is important, as it maps directly to the name of a data
item provided by the dataSource - this is the link between the dataSet and
the dataSource.
For charts that may display several range items, e.g. the various bar charts,
the dataSet values become the labels for the range items, that is, the name
displayed at the bottom of each bar.
For charts that can display only a single value, such as a meter or a
thermometer chart, a new chart is created for each of the values in the
dataSet.

KPI Dashboards
Templates
If the optional grouping is specified, the group specification is evaluated and

a chart is created for each group, with range items allocated to their matching
groups.
The group.layout determines how the charts defined by the group
specification are to be displayed.
• Horizontal. The charts are laid out across the page.
• Vertical. The charts are laid out down the page.
• Region. The charts are laid out down the page. A label and horizontal line
is placed at the top of each chart, with the line extending the full width of
the chart. The label (the group name) is positioned at the left of the line.
• Tab. Each chart occupies a tab in a tabset.
Templates
Frequently a number of charts displayed in a dashboard are of a similar
appearance, but are linked to different dataSources. To reduce duplication in
the dashboard, simple templates are supported for the user interface defined
elements, using the source attribute.
The template itself has no special features.
Chart customization
Charts have the ability to provide many customizations, some of which are
• background color.
• width and height.
• unit display.
• meter needle color.
• meter dial color.
• meter value color.
• meter value position.
• meter tick mark range and spacing.
• interval ranges.
• interval display color.
• interval display thickness.
• x and y labels.
• max number of items per chart (more charts are rendered to contain the
surplus items).
Several sample files have been developed which contain examples of most
chart types and possible usages. Note that some files may require minor
modifications before they will produce correct results as they demonstrate
specific features of a particular Model Domain, e.g. specific truck names in
filters, or KPI definitions.

KPI Dashboards
Chart customization
The following files may be found in your office software source code
repository.
• KPIs.xml
• SampleCharts.xml
• State.xml
• Templates.xml
• Dashboards.xml

KPI Dashboards
Chart customization

Health
Health
Introduction to Health
Introduction to Health
Fleet consists of a set of sub-systems, each one providing a specific type of
functionality. Health is the sub-system used to monitor machine health in
real-time.
• Event monitoring.
• Channel monitoring.
• Health-related jobs.
Event Monitoring
This section describes the procedures for monitoring incoming health-related
event data from machines.
Monitoring health events

 To monitor condition-related health events
1. If you want to monitor health events, do the following:
i. Open Health Event Monitor.
ii. Analyze the information displayed.
2. If you want to monitor payload events, do the following:
i. Open Payload Monitor.
Monitoring maintenance events

 To monitor condition-related maintenance events
1. If you want to monitor maintenance events, do the following:
i. Open Maintenance Event Monitor.
VIMS events
An audible alarm sounds when a certain VIMS event occurs. By default, this
alarm is factory set to be triggered when a TMAC VIMSActivate message is
received in the office (eventnumber=3). This message indicates that a Level
3 event has occurred. These alerts can be configured to include events from
Levels 1 or 2, or to be turned off.

Health
Channel monitoring
Channel monitoring
This section describes the procedures to manage data acquisition from
onboard sensors and store it in a standard format.
Setting up real-time channel monitoring

This topic explains how to set up real-time channel monitoring.
Use the Channel Finder to specify the trucks and channels to monitor and to
specify polling options such as the sample rate and sample duration.
Use the Channel Monitor to view information as it arrives from the field.
 To set up real-time channel monitoring

Use this procedure to specify the trucks and channels that you want to
monitor.
1. Open Channel Finder.
2. Click the Machine tab. A list of machines that have been defined in the
office software displays.
3. Select the machines whose channels you want to monitor. You can
either use the machine list to navigate to the machines you want, or
enter a comma-separated list of values in the Machine field. The
second method can be quicker if you know exactly which machines you
want to monitor. If no machines are selected, the office software
retrieves data for all machines.
4. Click the Channel tab. A list of channel groups that are available for
monitoring displays.
5. Select the channels that you want to monitor.
6. If you want to specify polling options, do the following:
i. Click the Polling tab
ii. Specify the Sample rate. The default sample rate is 30 seconds
and the default duration is 30 minutes.
iii. Specify other options as required.
7. Click Find. A list of selected channels displays.
8. Select the channels you want to display in the Channel Monitor.
9. Click Display.
The information you have requested is displayed in the lower panel.

Health
Channel monitoring
Monitoring channel data

This topic explains how to monitor channel data.
 To monitor channel data

1. Open Channel Monitor.
2. The following table describes some options for monitoring and analyzing
the data.
If you want to... Do this...

Pan through the chart Right-click and drag in the required
direction
Display the machine name, Click the graph near the sample points of
value description, etc the line charts
Show and hide channels Use the short-cut menu on the data table
Exclusively view channels • Right-click the required channel in the

data table
• Click Exclusive View
Show or hide a monitored • Right-click the required channel in the

channel data table
• Click Show/Hide
Change the scale of an axis • Double-click the cell in the data table to
on the screen show a list of scaling factors
• Select the required scale from the list
• Click a different cell to update the chart
Change the width of the • Double-click the Width cell for the
screen relevant plot
• Enter a new line width
Show and hide plot points Select the check box in the Points column
in the data table
Pan through the chart Right-click and drag in the required

direction

Health
Health-related jobs
Health-related jobs
Jobs are usually set up by a Fleet consultant, which means that all you need
to do is run the job as and when required.
However, you are able to create and run health-related scheduled jobs in any
of the following ways:
• Select Contents > Platform > Jobs.
• Select Contents > Platform > .
• Select Contents > Platform > Running Jobs.
• Select Jobs > Health.
Details on creating, editing and deleting jobs are found in the Platform
chapter under the following headings:
Creating jobs.
Editing triggered scheduled jobs.
Deleting triggered scheduled jobs.
Viewing triggered scheduled jobs.
Stopping triggered jobs from running.
A more complete description of jobs can be found in the Concepts and
Reference chapter, and also in the Supervisor Page Reference chapter of the
Administration and Configuration manual.

Health
Health-related jobs

Machine Tracking
Machine Tracking
Introduction to Machine Tracking
Introduction to Machine Tracking

functionality. Machine Tracking is the sub-system used to define all
machines and related machine information for use in the office software. It
communicates with machines via a wireless network, and provides a real–
time view of machine movements from the office, the pit or from a remote
location.
• Managing machines and fleets.
• Analyzing positions.
• Managing the travel network.
• Managing travel conditions.
Note Throughout this chapter, where procedures are able to be done in

both Site Editor and Site Monitor, the procedure will refer to Site
Editor.
Managing machines and fleets

This section describes how to manage machines and fleets.
Note Machine Finder is located under Pit Link
Managing machine categories

This topic describes how to manage machine categories.
Creating a machine category

 To create a machine category
1. Open Machine Finder.
2. Select the machine type folder in which you want to create the new
category, for example, either Fixed Plant or Mobile.
Click New. The Machine Category Editor opens.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the category.
4. In the Description field, enter a description for the category.
i. Click [...] beside the Icon URL field, to select the path to the icon
you want to associate with the category.

Machine Tracking
Standard icons are available or you can add your own icons to the
mstar/lib/res/com/mincom/gallery/icon directory.
ii. In the Capabilities section, select the capabilities that apply to
machines in this category.
Note Machines inherit capabilities from their class and category. Therefore
any capability ticked at a class or category level also applies to the
individual machines in that class or category even though they are not
ticked individually.
Table 10.3: Machine Capabilities
Capability Description
Loader Recipes Loader recipes are only implemented at
stockpiles, and each count specifies the number
of loads to be taken from a particular stockpile.
See To create a loader recipe for more
information.
Drilling Used for Drills only.

References to Drill Cycles can be found in the
Concepts and Reference chapter, in the Drill
cycles section.
Fluids Tracking Only If you select Fluids Tracking Only, these

machines are considered to be fueling capable,
and will not be included in shift change reports.
Fueling capable machines are intended to be
fuel docks/stations, and the reason for marking a
machine as having its fluids tracked, (and
therefore fueling capable), is so that it is included
in the onboard machine file even though it
doesn’t have an IP address allocated.
VIMS The Vital Information Management System

(VIMS) is a software application used to record
data from the onboard machine (or equipment)
system. This data is used by the office software
in areas such as, for example, events, fuel
calculations, maintenance, and various reports.
TPS (Truth This check box should only be selected if the

Positioning System) machine has a TPS receiver.

Machine Tracking
11. Click the Onboard tab, and do the following:.

i. If the machine category has onboard configuration, select the
Specify Onboard Hardware check box.
ii. Select the relevant Onboard Platform, and the relevant
category from the Configuration Name list.
iii. Select the relevant Onboard Health Platform if required.
12. If you want to save your changes and continue adding data, click Add.
Editing a machine category

 To edit a machine category
2. Select the category you want to edit.
3. Click Open. Machine Category Editor opens.
4. Edit the details on each tab as required.
Deleting a machine category

 To delete a machine category
You are only able to delete user-defined categories.
2. Ensure that there are no machine classes or sub-categories in the
category you want to delete.
3. Select the category you want to delete.
4. Click Delete. A confirmation dialog opens.
5. If you are sure that you want to delete the category, click Yes in the
Viewing machines in a category

 To view machines in a category
2. Double-click the machine type folder for the machine category you want
to view
3. You can toggle the display of archived items by clicking the Toggle
archived items button on the toolbar.
4. You can toggle the display of empty folders by clicking the Toggle
empty items button on the toolbar.

Machine Tracking
Configuring machine categories for loader recipes

Loader recipes are only implemented at stockpiles, and each count specifies
the number of loads to be taken from a particular stockpile.
 To configure Load Haul Dump (LHD) recipe capabilities for

a machine category
2. Select the machine category that you want to specify as being LHD
capable.
3. Click Open. Machine Category Editor displays the current details of the
selected machine category.
4. Click the Capabilities tab.
5. Select Loader Recipes.
Managing fuel bays

This topic describes how to manage fuel bays.
Creating a Fuel Bay

 To create a fuel bay
2. Navigate to the Fixed Plant folder and click Fuel Bay.
3. Click New. Fuel Bay Editor opens.
4. In the Name field, enter a name for the fuel bay.
5. In the Serial No field, enter the fuel bay number.
6. From the Class list, select the fuel bay class.
7. Click [...] beside the Operator field to select the operator of the fuel bay.
8. From the Destination list, select the destination of the fuel bay.
i. If the fuel bay is Available for assignment, select the check box
beside that field.
ii. In the Number of pumps field, enter the number of pumps at
this fuel station. You can use the arrow keys to scroll through
numbers.
iii. In the Maximum queue length field, enter the number of trucks
allowed to wait (queue) for a fuel pump to become available.
For example, If you have two fuel pumps and enter a maximum

Machine Tracking
queue length of two, then the fuel bay can service two trucks at
the same time and have two trucks waiting for the pumps. There
is not enough room to have any more trucks waiting at the
pumps. If Assignment has to choose which fuel bay to send a
truck to, it will be forced to put this fuel bay at the bottom of the
list as it would be currently full.
i. If there is a need for onboard configuration, select the Has
Onboard Hardware check box.
ii. Select the appropriate Onboard Platform.
iii. From the Configuration Name list, select the appropriate name
of the onboard configuration category.
iv. Select the relevant Onboard Health Platform if required.
v. Click the New button beside Interface URL.
vi. Click a row under Interface Name, and select an interface name
from the list.
vii. If you want to delete an interface, click Delete.
If you delete the Assignment Interface URL, this will remove the fuel
bay from the assignment system. This means nothing will ever be
assigned to it. The office software will send an assignment event,
however the machine, e.g. a truck in the field, will not receive the
assignment as there is no way to communicate this.
11. Click the External Reference tab and enter a Reference and a
description.
12. Click the Machine Classes tab, and do the following:
i. In the Include column, select the check box beside the machine
classes compatible with this fuel bay.
ii. Double-click the Refuel time row and enter the amount of refuel
time, in minutes.
Editing a fuel bay

 To edit a fuel bay
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the fuel bay you want to edit.
3. Select the fuel bay that you want to edit, and click Open.
4. Edit the details on each tab as required.

Machine Tracking
Deleting a fuel bay

You must be in Expert Mode to delete fuel bays.
 To delete a fuel bay

2. Navigate to the fuel bay folder you want to delete. Ensure that no fuel
bays still exist in the folder that you want to delete.
If fuel bays still exist, either delete them or assign them to another class.
3. Click the fuel bay that you want to delete, and click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the fuel bay, click Yes in the
Viewing a fuel bay

This topic explains how to view fuel bay attributes.
 To view a fuel bay

2. Navigate to the fuel bay folder you want to view.
3. Click Open.
Managing machine configurations

Importing machine configurations
This functionality is configured by security for use by the Builder only.
Importing machine configurations allows the Mine Builder to import machine
configuration values from a file, automatically populating the following fields
on a Machine Editor page:
• Dimensions
• Payload
• Fuel
• EFH
• Tires
This reduces the amount of manual data entry required when setting up new
machine classes or machine class types. This in turn reduces the number of
incorrect values entered, improving the optimal operation of Assignment.
 Importing machine configurations into a new machine

class

Machine Tracking
2. Navigate to the machine class under which you are creating a new
class, e.g Truck Classes, and click New. The relevant Editor page for
the machine class you have chosen opens.
3. Click Import. The Import Machine Class dialog displays.
4. Navigate to the new machine class you are importing, e.g. Cat797B,
and click OK.
Data is imported into the Machine Class Editor on the tabs described
above.
You are not able to import the data of a machine class that already
exists. You must rename the existing machine class to something else,
and then import the data.
5. Check the imported data to ensure it is correct.
6. You will need to enter data where relevant on the other tabs within the
Machine Class Editor, and you must have at least one material selected
on the Materials tab before you can add the machine class.
7. Click Add.
8. The Machine Class you have added now displays in the tree on the
Machine Finder page (you may have to refresh the Machine Finder
page).
Exporting machine configurations

This functionality is configured by security for use by the Builder only.
Exporting machine configurations allows the Mine Builder to export existing
machine class values into the same file format used for importing machine
class included configuration files. This is particularly useful if the same
machine class configurations are used at more than one mine site, where the
files can be sent between sites and loaded where necessary.
 Exporting machine configurations from a machine class

2. Navigate to the machine class type you wish to export machine
configuration values from e.g. Cat793D, and click Open.
3. Click Export. A dialog displays advising you that the current values will
be saved and exported.
4. Click Yes to continue, or No to return to the Truck Class Editor page.
A dialog displays advising you that the export was successful.
The office software exports the machine class configuration to your
customer-specific override directory, and a copy is saved in a directory
accessible by the office software.
5. Click OK.
Managing machine classes and machines

This topic explains how to manage machine classes and machines.

Machine Tracking
You must create a default fuel type called Diesel before trying to create,
open, or edit a machine in Machine Editor. See the section Fuel Properties,
in the Supervisor Page Reference chapter of the Fleet Administration &
Configuration manual.
When creating a machine with onboard hardware, you may add an
Assignment Interface URL. If you delete this Assignment Interface URL
at any time, the office software will send an assignment event, however
the machine, e.g. a truck in the field, will not receive the assignment as
there is no way to communicate this.
Creating truck classes

 To create a truck class
Before you begin, ensure that at least one required destination has been
created. To do this, see Creating destinations.
Note If you are setting up TKPH/TMPH, ensure that TKPH in Assignment is

enabled in Supervisor before setting up your truck class and trucks.
In Supervisor, click Contents > Setup > Assignment Options, and

on the Assignment Behavior tab ensure that Enable and use TKPH
in Assignments is selected.
Continue with the following procedure.

2. Navigate to the Mobile folder and click Truck Classes.
3. Click New. Truck Class Editor opens.
4. In the Class field, enter a name for the class.
5. In the Description field, enter a description of the class.
6. In the Manufacturer field, enter the manufacturer of the truck class.
7. On the Engine tab, do the following.
i. Enter the Model number of the engine.
ii. In the Gross power field, enter the gross power of the engine if
necessary.
iii. In the Rated RPM field, enter the Rated RPM of the engine.
iv. Click the arrows beside the Cylinders field to select the number
of cylinders the truck engine has.
v. In the Flywheel power field, enter the rated power output at the
flywheel.
vi. In the Bore field, enter the Bore cylinder diameter.
vii. In the Stroke field, enter the longitudinal travel of the piston in
the cylinder.

Machine Tracking
viii.In the Displacement field, enter the Displacement volume.

In the Speed section, do the following.
ix. In the Max loaded speed field, enter the maximum speed of the
truck while loaded.
x. In the Max unloaded speed field, enter the maximum speed of
the truck while unloaded.
xi. In the Average unloaded speed at dest field, enter the
average unloaded speed when at a destination.
xii. In the Average loaded speed at dest field, enter the average
loaded speed when at a destination.
8. Click the Fuel tab.
9. On the General tab, in the Fuel Levels section, do the following:
i. From the Fuel type list, select the type of fuel the truck uses.
ii. In the Fuel capacity field, enter the maximum amount of fuel the
truck is able to carry.
iii. In the Refuel level field, enter the fuel level that should trigger
refueling for this truck.
iv. In the Refuel window field, enter how long it will be after the
refueling trigger before the truck can operate normally.
v. From the Refuel load state list, select the allowed load state
when refueling.
vi. Click [...] beside the On Route Delay Type field, and select the
delay type while on route.
vii. Click [...] beside the On Arrival Delay Type field, and select the
delay type when the truck has arrived at the destination.
viii.In the Critical level field, enter the fuel level that should trigger
immediate refuelling.
ix. Select the Ignore VIMS Fuel Sensor check box to ignore any
sensor data for the selected machine class. This mitigates
issues with faulty data causing inaccurate fuel usage readings
on some trucks.
10. In the Burn Rates section, do the following:
i. Select the Use Dynamic Burn Rate check box if you want to
use dynamic burn rates. If you select this check box the Working
Rate field becomes unavailable.
ii. In the Idle Rate field, enter the amount of fuel used when the
truck is not working.
iii. In the Working Rate field, enter the amount of fuel used when
the truck is working.
iv. From the list beside Fuel burn calculations use, select the
calculation you wish to use to calculate the amount of fuel
burned.
It is recommended that you use the average burn rates for an

Machine Tracking
average duty cycle until the truck has been observed in

operation for a period of time. You can then fine-tune the burn
rates on a per-activity basis.
v. If you selected Activity durations, click the Activity duration
burn rates tab, and enter the burn rate details in the appropriate
burn rate fields.
vi. If you selected EFH (Effective Flat Haul), click the EFH burn
rates tab and enter the burn rate details for travelling empty and
travelling full in the appropriate fields.
11. Click the Refueling Constraints tab, and do the following:
i. In the Minimum refuel quantity field, enter the minimum
amount of fuel the truck requires when being refueled.
ii. In the Expected duration between refuels field, enter the
average amount of time between refueling stops expected for
this truck.
12. Click the Payload tab.
13. In the Capacity section, do the following:
i. In the Maximum payload field, enter the maximum payload of
the truck.
ii. In the Overload field, enter the amount at which the truck is
considered overloaded.
iii. In the Nominal payload field, enter the nominal payload of the
truck.
iv. In the Underload field, enter the amount at which the truck is
considered underloaded.
v. In the Heaped capacity field, enter the maximum capacity of
trucks of this class.
vi. In the Struck capacity field, enter the level capacity of trucks of
this class.
vii. In the Payload accuracy field, enter the payload accuracy of the
truck.
In the Distribution Empty section, do the following:
viii.In the Front field, enter the distribution of weight over the front
axles when the truck is empty.
ix. In the Rear field, enter the distribution of weight over the rear
axles when the truck is empty.
These two fields, and the following two fields in the Distribution
Loaded section, are used to calculate the Ton Miles/Kilometers
per Hour figure, which you can show in Fleet Update Assistant,
using the configure options button.
In the Distribution Loaded section, do the following:
x. In the Front field, enter the distribution of weight over the front
axles when the truck is loaded.

Machine Tracking
xi. In the Rear field, enter the distribution of weight over the rear
axles when the truck is loaded.
14. On the Road tab, do the following:
i. In the Allowed column, select the road segments this truck can
travel on, in either direction.
ii. Click Allow All if machines in this class are allowed on all road
segments.
iii. Click Disallow All if machines in this class are not allowed on
any road segments, or if you wish to clear all the check boxes.
iv. Click Set All Dynamic Times from Design Times to show the
design times in the Forward Full and Empty, and Reverse Full
and Empty columns.
15. Click the EFH tab, and either:
• Click Import to import EFH information from a file for that class.
Or
Click Add Row and
i. In the Grade field, enter the percentage grade of the road.
ii. In the Loaded field, enter the EFH value for a loaded truck.
iii. In the Empty field, enter the EFH value for an empty truck.
You can click Export to export EFH information to a file.
Click Delete Row if there is a row that is not necessary.
16. Click the Shovel tab and do the following:
i. To set the Load and Spotting times for each Shovel, double-
click the relevant field and enter the time.
ii. In the Allowed column, select the check box if trucks in the truck
class are allowed to be assigned to that particular shovel. Select
Allow All to select them all, and Disallow All to clear them all.
17. Click the Processor tab and do the following:
i. In the Allowed column, select the check box if the Processor is
available for assignment by trucks in that truck class. Select Allow
All to select them all, and Disallow All to clear them all.
ii. To set the Unload Time for each Processor, double-click the
relevant field and enter the time.
18. Click the Tires tab and do the following:
i. In the TKPH lowest rated tire field, enter the lowest rated TKPH
value for all the tires on a truck. The TKPH rating is supplied by
the manufacturer, and indicates the TKPH value at which a tire
failure is expected. This value should never be exceeded,
because it will cause a critical tire failure.
ii. In the TKPH maximum percentage field, enter the percentage
of the lowest TKPH rating at which the controller should be
notified of potential tire failure. Anything above this value, and

Machine Tracking
the tire is considered by the mine to be approaching critical high

values of TKPH, and action should be taken to reduce the TKPH
or one of the truck tires may fail.
The suggested default for setting for TKPH maximum
percentage is 90%, however, it is suggested that for larger
trucks, e.g. a CAT 797, you set this field to 80% due to the
increased cost of tires on the larger trucks. The threshold you set
will trigger an alarm if it is exceeded.
iii. In the Tire tread field, enter the depth of the tire tread.
19. Click the Capabilities tab, and check the capabilities that apply to trucks
in this class.
• Select the Capabilities check box to select all capabilities. Refer to
Machine Capabilities on page 10.2 for more information.
20. Click the Onboard tab, and do the following:
i. If the machine category has onboard hardware, select the
ii. If you want to inherit onboard hardware configurations from the
machine category, select the Use Category Configuration
check box.
iii. Select the appropriate Onboard Platform.
iv. From the Configuration Name list, select the appropriate name
v. Select the relevant Onboard Health Platform if required.
Note Refer to the Production chapter, and the To set up automatic delay
creation in Supervisor procedure, to set up the automatic delay
creation first before proceeding.
Note You must have selected the Activate Stopped Machine

Determination check box in Supervisor (done as part of the setting
up automatic delays procedure), to see the Stopped tab.
21. Click the Stopped tab, and do the following to set up automatic delay
creation:
i. Click the Elipses button beside the Stopped Delay Type field,
and navigate to the delay type you require.
ii. Click OK.
22. Click the Materials tab, and do the following:
i. Select the Allow all Materials check box if you want to allow all
materials on this truck.
ii. If you want to select all of the materials, click Select All, and if
you want to clear all materials, click Clear.

Machine Tracking
iii. If you want to include specific materials, select the check box of
the material in the Include column.
23. Click the Machine Type tab.
Any changes you make on this tab are dynamically displayed in the site
editor panel on the right of the tab.
24. On the Machine Dimensions tab, do the following;
i. Enter the Machine Length and Machine Width.
ii. Enter the Machine Offset X and Y Coordinates.
• This locates the center of the rear axle from the origin 0,0 point,
and is the point on the machine that is reported to the office
when a position report message is received. The on-board
system does the translation from the GPS antenna to the
machine origin before reporting that position back to the office.
The GPS X and Y values should be set to represent the physical
location of the GPS antenna on the machine.
iii. Enter the GPS Antenna X and Y positions relative to the
machine offset specified above. This is used by the on-board
system to modify the GPS X and Y values calculated from the
satellites. This gives the office software the center of the rear
axle position.
iv. Select the Use Center of Rotation check box.
• Enter the Center of Rotation X and Y Coordinates. These are
sent to machines in the MachineType.wmf file.
25. Click the General tab, and from the Category drop-down list, select the
machine type being configured.
• This is used by on-board systems and also the Site Editor and
Site Monitor to determine the type of icon to display.
26. Select the relevant check boxes as follows:
i. Select External Machine if this machine class is not to receive
peer-to-peer messages directly.
ii. Select Route All Messages to have all messages sent to this
machine class. This automatically then selects Route Operator
Messages.
iii. Select Route Operator Messages if you want this machine
class to receive only messages for the operator.
iv. Select the Can Be Towed check box if this is a machine class
that can be towed by another vehicle.
27. Select the Body Area tab and do the following:
i. Select either Rectangular or Circular Body Area and then
enter either the Width and Height, or the Radius.
• You would use a Circular body area for machines that pivot on a
central axis, such as a shovel, and it should be as big as, but no
bigger than, the machine.

Machine Tracking
28. Click the Avoidance Area tab.

i. Select either Rectangular Avoidance Area or Circular Avoidance
Area.
ii. Enter either the back, left, front and right area avoidance regions,
or the Radius avoidance regions. When you enter or change the
settings your changes are dynamically reflected in the image of
the machine.
• You would use a Circular avoidance area for machines that pivot
on a central axis, such as a shovel, and it should be set to be
larger than the machine.
29. Click the Truck tab and do the following:
i. Enter the Body weight of the truck.
ii. In the Canopy rail height field, enter the height of the truck’s
canopy rail.
iii. In the Chassis weight field, enter the truck’s chassis weight.
iv. In the Height at full dump field, enter the height of the truck
when full.
v. in the Gross vehicle weight field, enter the gross weight of the
truck.
vi. In the Loading height field, enter the loadable height of the
truck.
vii. in the Wheelbase field, enter the measurement of the truck
wheelbase.
Note The Gross vehicle weight, Chassis weight and Body weight fields are
used to calculate the Ton Miles/Kilometers per hour figure, which you
can show in Fleet Update Assistant using the Configure Options
button.
Creating trucks
Ensure that TKPH in Assignment is enabled in Supervisor, as per the Note
on page 10.8.
 To create a truck
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder and click Truck Classes.
3. Click the class in which you want to create the truck.
4. Click New. Truck Editor opens.

Machine Tracking
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the truck.

6. In the Serial No field, enter the truck serial number.
The truck Class is selected by default. If, for some reason, you wish to
change the class, click the arrow next to the field and select the new
truck class. A warning message is displayed asking you if you are sure
you want to change the class. Click Yes or No.
7. Click [...] beside the Operator field to select the operator of the truck.
8. From the Waypoint list, select a waypoint destination.
i. If the truck is Available for assignment, select the check box
beside that field.
ii. If the truck is to Record Nominal instead of Actual Payload,
select the check box beside that field.
iii. If the truck is to Use GPS for Assignment, select the check box
beside that field.
iv. If you want the truck to use the TKPH values already configured
for its truck class, select the TKPH Use Class Values check
box. If you select this check box, the TKPH lowest rated tire field
becomes unavailable.
v. If you are not inheriting TKPH values from the truck class, in the
TKPH lowest rated tire field, enter the lowest rated TKPH value
of any one of the tires on the truck.
The office software utilizes the lowest rated TKPH value entered in
Truck Editor for each truck and considers this figure as the whole TKPH
amount, with the 100% TKPH rolling average figure being displayed
through the Fleet Update Assistant. The defined threshold (maximum
percentage) defined in the Truck Class Editor reduces this value to the
TKPH value the site wishes to maintain the truck below (e.g. 90% of this
value).
10. Click the Capabilities tab, and check the capabilities that apply to this
truck.
i. If the machine has onboard configuration, select the Has
from the list. If you want to delete an interface, click Delete.

Machine Tracking
Description for the external software systems.
14. Select the Override Class GPS Antenna Position check box, to have
anything you enter in the GPS X and Y fields override the settings for
the machine class.
16. If the truck is to be automatically refueled, click the Automatically
refuel check box. If you select this check box, an alarm is raised If the
fuel level falls to a predefined level. The office software automatically
creates a scheduled assignment for the truck to go to a fuel bay.
17. On the General tab in the Fuel Levels section, do the following:
i. If you want to use class values, select the Use class values
check box. If you do this, all other fields are unavailable.
ii. From the Fuel type list, select the type of fuel the truck uses.
iii. In the Fuel capacity field, enter the maximum amount of fuel the
iv. In the Refuel level field, enter the fuel level that should trigger
v. In the Refuel window field, enter how long it will be after the
refueling trigger before the truck can operate normally.
vi. From the Refuel load state list, select the allowed load state
when refueling.
vii. Click [...] beside the On Route Delay Type field, and select the
viii.Click [...] beside the On Arrival Delay Type field, and select the
delay type when the truck has arrived at the destination.
ix. In the Critical level field, enter the fuel level that should trigger
immediate refuelling.
x. Select the Ignore VIMS Fuel Sensor check box to ignore any
sensor data for the selected machine class. This mitigates issues
with faulty data causing inaccurate fuel usage readings on some
trucks.
ii. Select the Use Dynamic Burn Rate check box if you want to
Rate field is unavailable.
iii. In the Idle Rate field, enter the amount of fuel used when the
iv. In the Working Rate field, enter the amount of fuel used when

Machine Tracking
v. From the list beside Fuel burn calculations use, select the
burned.
It is recommended that you use the default burn rates for an
vi. If you selected Activity durations, click the Activity duration
burn rate fields.
vii. If you selected EFH (Effective Flat Haul), click the EFH burn
ii. In the Minimum refuel quantity field, enter the minimum
amount of fuel the truck requires when being refueled. If less
than this amount of fuel is added, a warning event is raised.
iii. In the Expected duration between refuels field, enter the
this truck. An event is raised when this amount of time passes
without notification of refueling.
Creating shovel classes

 To create a shovel class
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder and click Shovel Classes.
3. Click New. Shovel Class Editor opens.
6. In the Manufacturer field, enter the manufacturer of the shovel class.
i. In the Struck capacity field, enter the struck capacity of the
dipper for this shovel class.
ii. In the Heaped capacity field, enter the heaped capacity of the
dipper for this shovel class
iii. In the Reach radius field, enter the reach radius for the shovel.
iv. In the Maximum speed field, enter the maximum speed of the
shovel.

Machine Tracking
v. In the Rate loaded field, enter the slew speed when the shovel
is loaded.
vi. In the Rate unloaded field, enter the slew speed when the
shovel is unloaded.
vii. In the CW limit field, enter the maximum allowable slew in a
clockwise direction.
viii.In the CCW limit field, enter the maximum allowable slew in a
counter-clockwise direction.
8. Click the Capabilities tab, and check the capabilities that apply to
shovels in this class.
selected machine category, select the Use Category
Configuration check box.Select the appropriate Onboard
Platform.
Refer to the Production chapter, and the To set up automatic delay
creation in Supervisor procedure, to set up the automatic delay creation
first before proceeding.
materials on this shovel.
ii. If you want to include specific materials, select the check box of
iii. If you want to select all the materials, click Select All.
iv. If you want to clear all the materials, click Clear.

Machine Tracking

axle position.
Messages.
Area.
ii. Enter either the back, left, front and right area avoidance
regions, or the Radius avoidance regions. When you enter or
change the settings your changes are dynamically reflected in
the image of the machine.
17. You would use a Circular avoidance area for machines that pivot on a
central axis, such as a shovel, and it should be set to be larger than the
machine.
18. Click the Trucks tab, and do the following:
i. Click the Load time field and enter the load time.
ii. Click the Spotting time field and enter the spotting time.

Machine Tracking
iii. If you want to select specific truck classes allowed for this shovel
class, select the appropriate check box in the Allowable column.
Creating shovels
 To create a shovel
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder, click Shovel Classes, and select the
class in which you wish to create a shovel.
3. Click New. Shovel Editor opens.
4. In the Name field, enter a name for the shovel.
5. In the Serial No field, enter the shovel’s serial number.
The shovel Class is selected by default. If, for some reason, you wish to
shovel class. A warning message is displayed asking you if you are sure
6. Click [...] beside the Operator field to select the operator of the
processor. You are able to filter the operators by crew, or search for a
specific operator.
7. From the Destination list, select a relevant destination.
8. From the Waypoint list, select a relevant waypoint if necessary.
i. If you have selected a Waypoint, and the shovel is to be used by
assignment, select the Available for assignment check box.
This check box is selected by default. Clearing this check box
stops trucks being assigned to the loader. The loader is still
tracked within assignment so that its internal status is
maintained. This is important when running production plans.
This check box is dimmed if a Waypoint is not selected.
ii. If you want to tell the shovel what material to load, select the
Assign Material to be Loaded check box. If you select this
check box, you can tell the shovel what material to load, and the
shovel will in fact load this material. You then have to set up, on
the Materials tab, the materials the shovel can load. This check
box is not selected by default.
iii. If you want to provide an assignment (if possible) based upon
the predicted material when the truck commences loading, select
the Assign at Start of Loading check box.
If, at your site, receiving an assignment means that the truck driver
should start leaving, do not select the Assign at Start of Loading
check box.
This check box is not selected by default. In some circumstances,

Machine Tracking
where the predicted material will be correct, it may be selected in

order to give the trucks a destination before they start moving.
iv. If you want an assignment to assign a truck away from the
shovel with no better than a predicted material, select the
Assign Using a Predicted Material check box. The material is
predicted based upon the default material if the shovel has one,
then the last material loaded by the shovel before the truck was
assigned to the shovel.
If the shovel has more than one material selected in the
Materials tab, then the predicted material may not be correct.
If the check box is cleared, a truck will only automatically be
assigned away from the shovel if a load report has been sent
and correctly interpreted by the office, or the Mine Site Controller
selected a material.
v. If you want to allow materials to be set and the truck to be
immediately assigned without waiting for the end of service,
select the Assign if Material Set During Loading, check box.
This means that if a load report is received in the office and sets
the material, or the Mine Site Controller sets the material using
the truck assistant, then truck should immediately be assigned
without waiting for the end of service. This check box is selected
by default.
should start leaving, do not select the Assign if Material Set During
Loading check box
vi. If trucks are able to be assigned to this shovel, select the
Assignable check box.
vii. If the shovel comes unassignable, select Reassign Trucks On
Route to request a reassignment for all trucks currently on route
to the shovel.
viii.If the shovel comes unassignable, select Reassign Trucks In
Queue to request a reassignment for all trucks currently in that
shovel’s queue.
ix. If the shovel is to be available at the end of a delay, select Make
Assignable on Delay End.
x. Click the Reset Position to reset the shovel position.
xi. From the Operating Mode list, select the operating mode of the
shovel. This specifies how many trucks can be at the shovel at
the same time. Double sided means that up to two trucks may
be ready for loading at the same time, whereas Single sided or
Drive By allows only one truck at a time. Regardless of the
setting, only one truck can be loading at any one time.
Load Haul Dump means that the machine is not loading any
trucks. It is simply Loading, Travelling and Dumping, for example
from a Stockpile to a Crusher, without interaction with any trucks.
shovel.

Machine Tracking

from the list. The Interface URL is then entered automatically.
the machine class.Click the Materials tab, and do the following:
i. From the Default Material list, select the default material for the
shovel.
iii. If you want to select all materials, click Select All.
iv. If you want to clear all materials, click Clear.
v. If you want the materials to be automatically selected, click Auto
Select.
15. Click the Efficiency tab, and do the following:
i. If you want to set the efficiency factor dynamically, select the Use
Dynamic Efficiency Factor check box. This causes the
efficiency slider to be unavailable.
ii. In the Efficiency section, click the arrow on the efficiency slider,
and slide it to the percentage of efficiency for the shovel. The
percentage you move the arrow to is shown in the Loading
Times fields.
16. Click the Mining Blocks tab, and do the following:
• Navigate through the Mining Block tree to select the Mining Block
hierarchy.
• From the Default/Active Mining Blocks list, select the default or
active mining blocks.

Machine Tracking
Creating processor classes

 To create a processor class
2. Navigate to the Fixed Plant folder and click Processor.
3. Click New. Processor Class Editor opens.
4. From the Class list, select the processor class name.
6. In the Manufacturer field, enter the manufacturer of the processor
class.
processors in this class.
• Select the Capabilities check box to select all capabilities.
Creating processors
 To create a processor
2. Navigate to the Fixed Plant folder and click Processor.
3. Click the class in which you want to create the processor.
4. Click New. Processor Editor opens.
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the class.
6. In the Serial No field, enter the processor serial number.
The processor Class is selected by default. If, for some reason, you
wish to change the class, click the arrow next to the field and select the
new processor class. A warning message is displayed asking you if you
are sure you want to change the class. Click Yes or No.
specific operator.
8. From the Destination list, select the destination for the processor.
9. From the list beside the Waypoint field, select the appropriate waypoint.
i. Select whether the processor is Available for assignment, or
Stationary.
ii. Click Reset Position to reset the position of the processor.

Machine Tracking
processor.
i. If the machine category has onboard hardware, select the Has
i. Click Browse beside the Material Mix field and select the
material mixes to include and exclude from this processor.
Select.
i. If you want to select specific truck classes allowed for this
processor class, select the appropriate check box in the Allowed
column.
ii. Click the Unload Time field and enter the unload time.
iii. Click the up and down arrows beside the Maximum
unloadable trucks field to select the maximum number of
unloadable trucks for this processor class.
i. In the Nominal rate field, enter the nominal efficiency rate for the
shovel.

Machine Tracking
ii. In the Efficiency section, click the arrow and slide it to the
percentage of efficiency for the processor. The percentage you
move the arrow to is shown in the Effective rate field.
Creating loader classes

 To create a loader class
Before you begin, ensure that at least one required destination has been
created.To do this, see Creating destinations.
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder and click Loader Classes.
3. Click New. Loader Class Editor opens.
6. In the Manufacturer field, enter the manufacturer of the loader class.
7. Click the General tab
8. In the Miscellaneous section do the following:
i. In the Ground clearance field, enter the loader clearance above
ground.
ii. In the Fuel tank cap field, enter the maximum fuel tank capacity.
iii. In the Hydraulic tank cap field, enter the hydraulic tank
capacity.
iv. In the Hydraulic system cap field, enter the hydraulic system
capacity.
v. In the Struck capacity field, enter the struck capacity of the
dipper for this loader class.
vi. In the Heaped capacity field, enter the heaped capacity of the
dipper for this loader class.
vii. In the Maximum speed field, enter the maximum speed of the
loader.
9. In the Hydraulic Cycle Times section do the following:
i. In the Raise field, enter the time it takes the loader to raise the
bucket from the ground.
ii. In the Dump field, enter the time it takes the loader to dump
material from the rollback position.
iii. In the Lower field, enter the time it takes the loader to lower the
bucket to the ground.
iv. The Total field displays the total time of the above three fields.

Machine Tracking
loaders in this class.
check box.
iv. From the Configuration Name list, select the appropriate name
v. If you want to delete an interface, click Delete.
13. Click the Speed tab.
14. In the Forward section, do the following:
• Enter the maximum forward speed in 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gear.
15. In the Reverse section, do the following:
• Enter the maximum reverse speed in 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gear.
i. Double-click the Load time field and enter the load time.
ii. click the Spotting time field and enter the spotting time.
iii. Select the appropriate check box in the Allowable column.
Note You must enter either a Load or Spotting time (or both) for a new
Loader class to enable the Allowable check boxes to be selected.
You must select an Allowable Truck class before you can save the
new Loader class.

Machine Tracking
17. Click the Engine tab.

18. In the Engine section, do the following:
i. From the Model list, select the engine model of the loader.
The following fields are automatically filled depending on the
engine model you select. You are also able to change these field
details.
ii. In the Gross power field, enter the gross power of the engine if
necessary.
iii. In the Rated RPM field, enter the Rated RPM of the engine.
iv. Click the arrows beside the Cylinders field to select the number
of cylinders the truck engine has.
v. In the Flywheel power field, enter the rated power output at the
flywheel.
vi. In the Bore field, enter the cylinder diameter.
vii. In the Stroke field, enter the longitudinal travel of the piston in
the cylinder.
viii.In the Displacement field, enter the Displacement volume
19. In the Tires section, do the following:
i. In the Tread width field, enter the tread width of the tires.
ii. In the Width over tires field, enter the width of the loader over
the tires.
axle position.

Machine Tracking
Messages.
Area.
the machine.
• You would use a Circular avoidance area for machines that pivot
on a central axis, such as a shovel, and it should be set to be
larger than the machine.
Creating loaders
 To create a loader
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder and click Loader Classes.
3. Click the class in which you want to create a loader.
4. Click New. Loader Editor opens.
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the machine. The default name
length is seven characters. To use more than seven, and up to 16
characters, you need to go into Supervisor and change the limit.

Machine Tracking
i. In Supervisor click Options > System Options.

ii. From the Product list box select Pit Link.
iii. From the Option Sets list select Loading Tool Editors.
iv. Make the change to the Name Length field.
Loading Tool names should not be extended at Fleet sites where
the extended names may cause on-board issues.
6. In the Serial No field, enter the loader serial number.
The loader Class is selected by default. If, for some reason, you wish to
loader class. A warning message is displayed asking you if you are sure
specific operator.
9. From the Waypoint list, select the appropriate waypoint. If you do not
select a waypoint the machine will not be available for assignment.
i. If you have selected a Waypoint, and the loading tool is to be
used by assignment, select the Available for assignment
check box. This check box is selected by default. You may clear
this check box if the loading tool will be down for many weeks
and will not have any delays entered against it. This check box is
dimmed if a Waypoint is not selected.
ii. If you want to tell the loading tool what material to load, select
the Assign Material to be Loaded check box. If you select this
check box, you can tell the loading tool what material to load,
and the loading tool will in fact load this material. You then have
to set up, on the Materials tab, the materials the loading tool can
load. This check box is not selected by default.
the predicted material when the truck commences loading,
select the Assign at Start of Loading check box.
check box.
loading tool with no better than a predicted material, select the
predicted based upon the default material if the loading tool has
one, then the last material loaded by the loading tool before the
truck was assigned to the loading tool.

Machine Tracking
If the loading tool has more than one material selected in the
assigned away from the loading tool if a load report has been
sent and correctly interpreted by the office, or the Mine Site
Controller selected a material.
The check box is not selected by default for ‘normal’ loading

tools. However, some machines that do not send in load reports,
such as loadout units and non-Fleet equipped machines, may
have the check box selected with appropriate material settings
and defaults set.
by default.
should start leaving, do not select this check box.
vi. If trucks are able to be assigned to this loader, select the
vii. If the shovel comes unassignable, select Reassign Trucks On
to the loader.
viii.If the shovel comes unassignable, select Reassign Trucks In
Queue to request a reassignment for all trucks currently in that
loader’s queue.
ix. If the loader is to be available at the end of a delay, select Make
Assignable on Delay End.
x. Click the Reset Position to reset the loader position.
loader. This specifies how many trucks can be at the loading tool
at the same time. Double sided means that up to two trucks
may be ready for loading at the same time, whereas Single
sided or Drive By allows only one truck at a time. Regardless of
the setting, only one truck can be loading at any one time.
Most loading tools are Double sided, and this may even be used
for wheel loaders when there is enough space for multiple trucks
to park ready for loading.
This causes basic Loader Cycles to be produced with a default
activity of LHD. These cycles end on the start of a Delay or a Job

Machine Tracking
Code change. While in this mode, a loader is not available for

assignment.
loader.
i. If the machine has onboard hardware, select the Has Onboard
Hardware check box.
vii. If you want to delete an Interface, click Delete.
the machine class.
i. In the Default Material list, select the default material for the
loader.
Select.
i. In the Efficiency section, click the arrow on the efficiency slider,
and slide it to the percentage of efficiency for the shovel. The
Times fields.
ii. If you want to set the efficiency factor dynamically, select the
Use Dynamic Efficiency Factor check box. This will cause the

Machine Tracking
i. Navigate through the mining block hierarchy to get the mining

block you wish to load.
ii. From the Default/Active Mining Blocks list, select the default
or active mining blocks.
Note If your site does not use Mining Blocks you will not see this tab.
Creating truck loadout unit classes

 To create a truck loadout unit class
2. Navigate to the Fixed Plant folder and click Loadout Unit.
3. Click New. Loadout Unit Class Editor opens.
Click Class and enter the Class name.
5. In the Manufacturer field, enter the manufacturer of the class.
6. On the Capabilities tab, select the capabilities that apply to this class.
i. If the machine category has onboard Hardware, select the
Specify Onboard Hardware check box. If not, clear the check
box and continue.
ii. If you wish to inherit onboard hardware configurations from the
check box.
v. From the Configuration Name list, select the appropriate name

Machine Tracking

iii. If you want to select specific truck classes allowed for this loader
class, select the appropriate check box in the Allowable column.
Creating truck loadout units

 To create a truck loadout unit
2. Navigate to the loadout unit class you wish to create a unit in and click
New. Loadout Unit Editor opens.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the class.
4. In the Serial No field, enter the truck loadout unit’s serial number.
7. From the Waypoint list, select the appropriate waypoint.
i. If you want to Assign Material to be Loaded, click the check
box beside that field.
ii. If you want to Assign at Start of Loading, click the check box
beside that field.
iii. If you want to Assign Using a Predicted Material, click the
check box beside that field.
iv. If you want to Assign if Material Set During Loading, click the
check box beside that field.
v. If trucks are able to be assigned to this loadout unit, select the
vi. If the loadout unit becomes unassignable, select Reassign
Trucks On Route to request a reassignment for all trucks
currently on route to the shovel.
vii. If the loadout unit comes unassignable, select Reassign Trucks
In Queue to request a reassignment for all trucks currently in
that shovel’s queue.
viii.If the loadout unit is to be available at the end of a delay, select
Make Assignable on Delay End.
ix. Click Reset Position to reset the truck loadout unit’s position.

Machine Tracking
machine type.
Onboard Configuration check box.
iv. Click the New button beside Interface URL.
v. Click a row under Interface Name, and select an interface name
vi. If you want to delete an interface, click Delete.
the machine class.
shovel.
You must select a material from the list.
v. To select all valid materials, click Auto Select.
i. In the Efficiency section, click the arrow and slide it to the
percentage of efficiency for the shovel. The percentage you
move the arrow to is shown in the Effective rate field.
i. From the Mining Block Group hierarchy, select the blocks or
stockpiles you wish to select from.
ii. From the Default/Active Blocks list, select the default or active
mining blocks.
You must select a default mining block.

Machine Tracking

classes
The procedure for creating dozer, grader, track drill and Terrain mobile
classes is the same for each machine class.
 To create dozer, grader, track drill and Terrain mobile

classes
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder and click the relevant category.
3. Click the class in which you want to create the machine.
4. Click New. Mobile Editor opens.
Click Class and enter the Class name.
7. On the Capabilities tab, select the capabilities that apply to this class.
i. If the machine category has onboard Hardware, select the
Specify Onboard Hardware check box. If not, clear the check
box and continue.
ii. If you wish to inherit onboard hardware configurations from the
check box.
v. From the Configuration Name list, select the appropriate name
10. On the General tab, in the Fuel Levels section, do the following:
i. From the Fuel type list, select the type of fuel the machine uses.
ii. In the Fuel capacity field, enter the maximum amount of fuel the
machine is able to carry.
iii. In the Refuel level field, enter the fuel level that should trigger
refueling for this machine.
iv. In the Critical level field, enter the fuel level that should trigger
refueling for this machine.

Machine Tracking
v. Click [...] beside the On Route Delay Type field, and select the
i. Select the Use Dynamic Burn Rate check box if you want to
Rate field becomes unavailable.
ii. In the Idle Rate field, enter the amount of fuel used when the
machine is not working.
iii. In the Working Rate field, enter the amount of fuel used when
the machine is working.
iv. From the list beside Fuel burn calculations use, select the
burned.
It is recommended that you use the average burn rates for an
v. If you selected Activity durations, click the Activity duration
burn rate fields.
vi. If you selected EFH (Effective Flat Haul), click the EFH burn
i. In the Minimum refuel quantity field, enter the minimum
amount of fuel the machine requires when being refueled.
ii. In the Expected duration between refuels field, enter the
this machine.

machines
The procedure for creating dozer, grader, track drill and Terrain mobile
machines is the same for each machine.
 To create dozer, grader, track drill and Terrain mobile

machines
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder and click the relevant category.
3. Click the class in which you want to create a machine.
4. Click New. Mobile Editor opens.

Machine Tracking
truck.
v. Click the New button beside Interface URL. Click a row under
Interface Name, and select an interface name from the list. The
Interface URL is then entered automatically
Note If you are creating a Terrain mobile machine you need to follow steps
A and B.
A. Under Interface name select Config from the list

B. Change the Interface URL to ftp://ip_address:21/terrainmobile.
For example, ftp://10.3.22.14:21/terrainmobile.
5. If the truck is to be automatically refueled, click the Automatically
refuel check box. If you select this check box, an alarm is raised If the
fuel level falls to a predefined level. The office software automatically
creates a scheduled assignment for the truck to go to a fuel bay.
6. On the General tab in the Fuel Levels section, do the following:
ii. From the Fuel type list, select the type of fuel the truck uses.
iii. In the Fuel capacity field, enter the maximum amount of fuel the
iv. In the Critical level field, enter the fuel level that should trigger
v. Select the Ignore VIMS Fuel Sensor check box to ignore any
sensor data for the selected machine class. This mitigates
issues with faulty data causing inaccurate fuel usage readings
on some trucks.

Machine Tracking
ii. Select the Use Dynamic Burn Rate check box if you want to
Rate field is unavailable.
iii. In the Idle Rate field, enter the amount of fuel used when the
iv. In the Working Rate field, enter the amount of fuel used when
v. From the list beside Fuel burn calculations use, select the
burned.
It is recommended that you use the default burn rates for an
vi. If you selected Activity durations, click the Activity duration
burn rate fields.
vii. If you selected EFH (Effective Flat Haul), click the EFH burn
ii. In the Minimum refuel quantity field, enter the minimum
amount of fuel the truck requires when being refueled. If less
than this amount of fuel is added, a warning event is raised.
iii. In the Expected duration between refuels field, enter the
this truck. An event is raised when this amount of time passes
without notification of refueling.
the machine class.
Creating Surface Miner and Terrain Leveler classes

 To create surface miner and terrain leveler classes
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder and click the relevant folder.

Machine Tracking
3. Click New. The Machine Class Editor opens.

machines in this class.
selected machine category, select the Use Category
Configuration check box.Select the appropriate Onboard
Platform.
materials on this machine.
axle position.

Machine Tracking
Messages.
i. Select either Rectangular Avoidance Area or Circular
Avoidance Area.
the machine.
16. You would use a Circular avoidance area for machines that pivot on a
central axis, such as a shovel, and it should be set to be larger than the
machine.
iii. If you want to select specific truck classes allowed for this
machine class, select the appropriate check box in the
Allowable column.
Creating Surface Miners and Terrain Levelers

 To create a surface miner or terrain leveler

Machine Tracking
2. Navigate to the Mobile folder, click either Surface Miner Classes or

Terrain Leveler Classes, and select the class in which you wish to
create the machine.
3. Click New. Surface Miner Editor opens.
4. In the Name field, enter a name for the machine.
5. In the Serial No field, enter the machine’s serial number.
The Class is selected by default. If, for some reason, you wish to
class. A warning message is displayed asking you if you are sure you
want to change the class. Click Yes or No.
specific operator.
7. From the Destination list, select a relevant destination.
8. From the Waypoint list, select a relevant waypoint if necessary.
i. If you have selected a Waypoint, and the machine is to be used
by assignment, select the Available for assignment check box.
This check box is selected by default. Clearing this check box
stops trucks being assigned to the machine. The machine is still
tracked within assignment so that its internal status is
maintained. This is important when running production plans.
This check box is dimmed if a Waypoint is not selected.
ii. If you want to tell the machine what material to load, select the
Assign Material to be Loaded check box. If you select this
check box, you can tell the machine what material to load, and
the machine will in fact load this material. You then have to set
up, on the Materials tab, the materials the machine can load.
This check box is not selected by default.
the predicted material when the truck commences loading,
select the Assign at Start of Loading check box.
check box.
machine with no better than a predicted material, select the
predicted based upon the default material if the machine has
one, then the last material loaded by the machine before the
truck was assigned to the machine.
If the machine has more than one material selected in the

Machine Tracking

assigned away from the machine if a load report has been sent
and correctly interpreted by the office, or the Mine Site Controller
selected a material.
by default.
should start leaving, do not select the Assign if Material Set During
Loading check box
vi. If trucks are able to be assigned to this machine, select the
vii. If the machine comes unassignable, select Reassign Trucks On
to the machine.
viii.If the machine becomes unassignable, select Reassign Trucks
In Queue to request a reassignment for all trucks currently in
that machine’s queue.
ix. If the machine is to be available at the end of a delay, select
Make Assignable on Delay End.
x. Click the Reset Position to reset the machine position.
machine. This specifies how many trucks can be at the machine
at the same time. The first two described below are specific to
the surface miner.
Mill to Truck means that trucks are loaded by a conveyer
directly from the surface miner.
Mill to Ground means that the surface miner leaves the material
in a window directly behind itself. A dozer then comes in and
pushes the material into stock piles where it is loaded by a loader
into trucks.
Double sided means that up to two trucks may be ready for
loading at the same time, whereas Single sided or Drive By
allows only one truck at a time. Regardless of the setting, only
one truck can be loading at any one time.
machine.

Machine Tracking

the machine class.Click the Materials tab, and do the following:
machine.
Select.
materials on this machine.
i. If you want to set the efficiency factor dynamically, select the
Use Dynamic Efficiency Factor check box. This causes the
ii. In the Efficiency section, click the arrow on the efficiency slider,
and slide it to the percentage of efficiency for the machine. The
Times fields.

Machine Tracking
• Navigate through the Mining Block tree to select the Mining Block
hierarchy.
• From the Default/Active Mining Blocks list, select the default or
active mining blocks.
If you want to save your changes and exit, click Save.
Editing machine classes

This topic explains how to edit machine classes. The procedure is the same
for all classes.
Before you begin, check that the allowable destinations for the machines you
are editing are still valid.
Machines can be reassigned to another class in the same category and will
inherit the attributes of that class.
 To edit a machine class

2. Navigate to the machine class folder you want to edit, and click Open to
open the Editor dialog for that class.
3. Edit the details on each tab as required. For more information on field
details, see the following procedures:
• To create a truck class
• To create a shovel class
• To create a processor class
• To create a loader class
• To create a truck loadout unit class
• To create dozer, grader, track drill and Terrain mobile classes
• To create surface miner and terrain leveler classes
Editing machines
This topic explains how to edit machines. The procedure for editing a
machine is the same for all classes until Step 5.
 To edit a machine
Before you begin, check that the allowable destinations for the machine you
are editing are still valid.
2. Navigate to the folder that contains the machine you want to edit.
3. Select the machine that you want to edit, and click Open.

Machine Tracking
4. Edit the details on each tab as required. For more information on field
details, see the following procedures:
• To create a truck
• To create a shovel
• To create a processor
• To create a loader
• To create a truck loadout unit
• To create dozer, grader, track drill and Terrain mobile machines
• To create a surface miner or terrain leveler
5. When editing a truck, click the Restrictions tab, and do the following:
i. Click the Loading Tool tab and do the following:
• Click the Loading Tool row you want to edit, and select the
appropriate check box to apply locks, bars, and restrictions. A
graphical representation of what you have selected is shown in
the panel below your selections.
ii. Click the Processor tab and do the following:
• Click the Processor row you want to edit, and select the
appropriate check box to apply locks, bars, and restrictions. A
graphical representation of what you have selected is shown in
the panel below your selections.
iii. Click the Groups tab and define valid assignment groups for the
truck.
6. When editing a shovel or a truck loadout unit, click the Restrictions tab,
and do the following:
• Click the Truck tab and do the following:
• If you want to lock all trucks last serviced here, click Lock to Last.
• If you want to bar all unlocked trucks, click Make All Barred.
• If you want to remove all truck bars, click Remove All Bars.
• If you want to make all restrictions provisional, click Make All
Provisional.
• If you want to remove all provisions on restrictions, click Remove All
Provisional.
You can also lock, bar, and restrict specific trucks by clicking on the
truck row that you want and selecting the appropriate check box.
i. Click the Processor tab and do the following:
• If you want to use the processor specified in the mining block as
a preferred assignment destination, select the Use mining
block destination check box.
• If you want to lock or bar a processor, click the row of the
processor, then select either the Lock or Bar check box.

Machine Tracking
ii. Click the Groups tab and define valid assignment groups for the
shovel or truck loadout unit.
7. When editing a processor, click the Restrictions tab, and do the
following:
i. Click the Truck tab and do the following:
• If you want to lock all trucks last serviced here, click Lock to
Last.
Provisional.
• If you want to remove all provisions on restrictions, click Remove
All Provisional.
You can also lock, bar, and restrict specific trucks by clicking on
the truck row that you want and selecting the appropriate check
box.
ii. Click the Groups tab and define valid assignment groups for the
8. When editing a loader, click the Restrictions tab, and do the following:
i. Click the Truck tab and do the following:
• If you want to lock all trucks last serviced here, click the Lock to
Last.
Provisional.
• If you want to remove all provisions on restrictions, click Remove
All Provisional.
You can also lock, bar, and restrict specific trucks by clicking on
the truck row that you want and selecting the appropriate check
box.
ii. Click the Processor tab and do the following:
• If you want to use the processor specified in the mining block as
a preferred assignment destination, select the Use mining
block destination check box.
• If you want to lock or bar a processor, click the row of the
processor, then select either the Lock or Bar check box.
iii. Click the Groups tab and define valid assignment groups for the
9. If you want to save your changes and continue editing data, click Apply.

Machine Tracking
Remember to consider the minimum requirements of the class, for
example, destinations, materials, etc.
Deleting machine classes

This topic explains how to delete machine classes. The procedure is the
same for all classes.
You must be in Expert Mode to delete machine classes.
The procedure for deleting a machine is the same for all machines. It is
recommended, however, that you do not delete machines. You should
archive them instead.
 To delete a machine class

2. Navigate to the machine class folder you want to delete. Ensure that no
machines still exist in the class that you want to delete.
If machines still exist, either delete them or assign them to another
class.
3. Click the machine class that you want to delete, and click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the machine, click Yes in the
Archiving machine categories and classes

 To archive a machine category or class
2. Navigate to the machine category or class folder you want to delete.
Ensure that no machines still exist in the class that you want to delete.
and no classes exist in the category you want to delete.
If machines or classes still exist, either delete them or assign them to
another class or category.
3. Click the category or class to archive and click Archive. You are asked
if this is the category or class you wish to archive.
4. Click Yes.
Restoring machine categories and classes

 To restore a machine category or class
1. Open Delay Type Finder.
If you cannot see your archived machine category or class, i.e. grayed
out folders, click the Toggle button on the tool bar.
2. Click the machine category or class you wish to restore, then click
Restore. You are asked to confirm you wish to restore the category or
class.

Machine Tracking
3. Click Yes. The category or class is returned to the list.
Deleting machines
You must be in Expert Mode to delete machines.
Note It is recommended that you do not delete machines. You should

archive them instead
 To delete a machine
2. Navigate to the machine you want to delete.
3. Click the machine that you want to delete, and click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the machine, click Yes in the
Archiving machines
 To archive a machine
2. Select the machine you want to archive.
3. Click the Archive button.
4. If you are sure that you want to archive this machine, click Yes in the
Note Machines are unavailable when archived.
Viewing machine classes

This topic explains how to view machine class attributes.The procedure for is
the same for all classes.
 To view a machine class

2. Navigate to the machine class folder you want to view, for example,
Processor.
3. Click Open.
Viewing machines
This topic explains how to view the attributes of a machine.

Machine Tracking
 To view a machine
The procedure for viewing a machine class is the same for all classes.
2. Navigate to the machine you want to view.
3. Click Open.
Restoring machines
 To restore a machine
2. Click the Toggle button on the toolbar.
3. Select the machine you want to restore and click the Restore button.
4. If you are sure that you want to restore this machine, click Yes in the
Note Machines are restored back to their correct fleet.
Comparing Loading Tools

The Loader Comparison Tool helps the the office software Operators,
support staff, and any other authorized personnel to understand why trucks
are being assigned more to one loader over another.
Reasons that a truck may be receiving assignments to one loading tool over
another include:
• The loader is not available for assignment.
• The loader is on delay.
• The loader may be in Load Haul Dump mode.
• Loading efficiency.
• Restrictions - locks and bars on a truck.
• Production requirements.
• Travel times to load and dump.
• Queue length.
• Reachability.
• Compatibilities with other loaders, trucks, processors or materials.
You can open the Loader Comparison tool in the following ways:

Machine Tracking
• In Machine Finder, click, then right-click a Loader or Shovel and click

Comparison.
• Click Contents > Assignment > Loader Comparison (used in the
procedure below).
• On any loader context menu, for example, in Fleet Update Assistant, on
the Loading Tool tab, click then right-click the Loader or Shovel and
click Comparison.
 To compare Loading Tools

1. Open Loader Comparison.
2. From the list beside First Loading Tool, select the first loading tool to
compare, then from the list beside Second Loading Tool, select the
loading tool with which you want to compare details.
3. The results of the comparison are shown in the top panel, and
recommendations for changes to improve the inconsistencies are
shown in the lower panel.
If there are inconsistencies in your comparison, for example, if one of
the loading tools you selected are currently unavailable for assignment,
there will be a in the loading tool column in the Available for
Assignment row.
If there are no comparison inconsistencies, rows will have a .

4. Hovering your mouse over a recommendation displays a tool tip,
providing you with more information on the best way to resolve the
issue.
5. You can make changes to a loading tool in other areas of the office
software, e.g. put a loader on delay and redo the comparison. Click
Refresh to see the changes you made reflected in the Loader
Comparison Tool.
6. If you want the the office software support team to view your comparison
issues, click Save for support.
This creates a log file with a filename starting with loader_comparison_
and a timestamp, which you can send to the support team in your daily
snapshot file. This allows the support team to be able to better
understand the outcome you were trying to achieve.
Tracking Ton Miles/Kilometers Per Hour in

This topic explains how to configure Ton Miles Per Hour (TMPH) or Ton
Kilometers Per Hour (TKPH) for tracking in Fleet Update Assistant. TMPH
would normally be monitored by the the office software Operator. The
example uses TKPH for simplicity.

Machine Tracking
 To configure TKPH for tracking in Fleet Update Assistant

1. Ensure that TKPH in Assignment is enabled in Supervisor, as per the
Note on page 10.8.
2. In the office software, ensure that you have information in the following
fields in the Truck Class Editor for all of the truck classes on your mine.
On the Dimensions tab:
• Gross vehicle weight
• Chassis weight
• Body weight.
On the Payload tab:
• Distribution Empty, Front and Rear.
• Distribution Loaded, Front and Rear.
Note If an aftermarket bed is used, you will have to get the values for the
front/rear distribution from your maintenance department.
3. Click Save after entering any information.

4. Ensure that you have information in the following fields in the Truck
Editor for all of the individual trucks on your mine.
On the General tab:
• TKPH Lowest rated tire.
Note The TKPH value for the lowest rated truck must be inherited from the
Truck Class or individually defined at the Truck level, for all trucks.
5. Restart CycleKPISummaries.
TKPH should now be showing in the Fleet Update Assistant. If you do not
see the tire TKPH column, follow the next procedure.
 To configure the TKPH Monitor column

1. On Fleet Update Assistant, click Actions > Properties.
2. Click the Properties tab.
3. Click the Truck tab.
4. From the Exclude column, select the TKPH Monitor property, then click
the right arrow to move the property to the Include column.
5. You can move the properties up and down using the arrows to the right
of the Include column, so that you can see your most frequently viewed
columns easily.
6. Click Ok.

Machine Tracking
Generic values for the fields on the Dimensions and Engine tabs can be
found in the Caterpillar Handbook for Caterpillar Trucks. For modified, or
Non-CAT equipment, please consult your Maintenance Department.
You should now see the TKPH Monitor column in Fleet Update Assistant,
and can monitor the column.
 To monitor the TKPH Monitor column

1. Ensure you can see the TKPH Monitor column - if not, configure your
properties as per the To configure the TKPH Monitor column procedure.
The TKPH value displayed in the TKPH Monitor column is equal to the
rolling average TKPH value achieved by each truck. The displayed
rolling average value is represented as a percentage of the truck’s
achieved rolling average TKPH value compared to its lowest TKPH
rated value (as defined through the Truck Editor).
2. When a truck is below the TKPH maximum percentage defined in Truck
Class Editor the TKPH Monitor field for that truck will be green.
For example, if you have defined 90% as the site rolling average TKPH
threshold, and the individual truck has a lowest rated TKPH value of
700, then the truck will reach 90% upon reaching a TKPH value of 630 -
despite the fact that it has been configured at 700.
3. When a truck reaches the TKPH maximum percentage, the TKPH
Monitor field for that truck will turn red, and an alarm will be raised
indicating that the truck has exceeded its TKPH threshold.
 What to do if the tires start getting close to TKPH limits
Note The following information is an example only. You should

determine the Standard Operating Procedure for your trucks
nearing the TKPH limit.
Should the TKPH in the Fleet Update Assistant begin to get close to the tire
manufacturer’s TKPH limit, you need to take action by doing one of the
following, or following your Standard Operating Procedure.
• Place the truck on a very short haul, where the truck spends time in
queuing/loading/dumping, to reduce the TKPH (let the tire cool).
• Slow the truck down. That is, have the trucks gear down to fourth gear on
long flat hauls instead of running in sixth gear.
• If possible, add additional trucks to increase the wait times at loaders and
dumps.
Do not stop the truck to let the tires cool, as this allows the tire temperature
to further increase, potentially creating an unsafe situation.

Machine Tracking
Ability to report production losses due to Restrictions

Fleet has the ability to calculate, display and report production lost due to
restricting the movement of trucks in a mine. Placing restrictions on where a
truck can be loaded from may simplify the ability to keep track of where
trucks are assigned but it will also have an impact on the overall production
of the mine.
 To report production losses

1. In Supervisor click Options > System Options.
2. From the Product drop-down list select Machine Tracking, then in
Options Sets choose (FUA) Fleet Update Assistant.
3. Change the Update List and Display List text to read exactly as written
below.
• Update List = tonsMined
• Display List =
tonsMined.primeForShift,tonsMined.rehandleForShift,freePercent.a
verageFreeDestPercentForShift,freePercent.averageFreeGrpDestP
ercentForShift
If you had Fleet running, you need to restart it for the changes made in
Supervisor to take effect. Once Fleet has restarted, go to Fleet Update
Assistant and do the following.
1. Click the Actions tab, then click Properties. The Configure Properties
dialog displays.
2. In the Exclude panel on the left, click Assignment Event.
3. Click the single arrow. This moves Assignment Event to the Include
panel on the right of the screen.
4. Click OK to save the changes and close the Configure Properties
dialog.
5. On the FUA, click File > Save Configurations to save the Assignment
Event tab.
Fleet Update Assistant should now display two additional columns, % Free
and % Group Free.
% Free is the number of loaders available for truck assignment at the end of
a cycle as a percentage of the number of loaders that are compatible with the
truck. This number represents the percentage site wide.
% Group Free is the number of loaders available for truck assignment at the
end of a cycle as a percentage of the number of loaders in the truck
assignment group that are compatible with the truck. This number represents
the percentage for an assignment group.
For example, if there are 10 loaders that are compatible with a truck and six
are available, then the % Free column would display 60%. If this same truck
is locked to a particular loader then the %Free column would display 10%.
If the truck is locked and the loader is not available for assignment then the
column would display 0%. You can see in the above scenario that the

Machine Tracking
maximum % Free value will ever be for the locked truck is 10%. You can also
see that forcing trucks to load from a particular loader will likely result in
longer queue times which will impact production.
The average percent is also shown at the bottom of the Fleet Update
Assistant page.
Note The% Free and % Group free columns also display on the
Assignment Event Monitor by default and do not need configuration in
Supervisor.
Machines displaying asterisks on Fleet Update

Assistant
You may occasionally notice asterisks on either side of the machine number
in Fleet Update Assistant. These can display on any machine tab, but are
most likely on the truck tab.
These asterisks indicate that the truck is not assigned. The sections below
describe possible reasons as to why the truck may not be assigned, and
solutions. If none of these reasons apply, it may be because the
assignmentState is Unknown, and the truck is assignable, not on delay and
not loading. This will require further investigation, and you many need to
contact Fleet Customer Support.
Possible reasons
There are no Loading Tools available for this truck to be
assigned to
• In Truck Assistant on the Restrictions tab, check which Loading Tools the
Truck is Locked to or Barred from.
• In Loading Tool Assistant on the Restrictions tab, check the Available for
Assignment check box is selected for the Loading Tool, then ensure that
there are no unwanted Locks or Bars.

Machine Tracking
The allowed Loading Tool for this truck is on delay

• Check to see if the Loading Tool is on delay. If the Loading Tool is on
delay, manually assign the Truck to the Loading Tool you want it to go to.
There is no available dump (processor) for this truck to be
assigned to
• In Fleet Update Assistant ensure that the dumps that are Available for
Assignment, then check the Material types selected are allowed at that
dump.
The truck does not have any material entered so the office
software doesn't know where to send it
• Open the Truck Assistant and on the General tab manually select the
material from the Current Loaded Material drop-down list.
Note You may not be able to do this for trucks without VIMS as they will not
register a payload for the office software. In this case you need to
manually assign the truck to where it needs to go - it can travel empty
instead of traveling loaded.
The truck has not been assigned to a dump

• Occasionally the asterisks will only appear temporarily as the truck is just
leaving a Loading Tool. It should correct itself. If it doesn’t follow the
procedure below.
1. Open Truck Assistant and on the General tab select the Current Loaded
Material from the drop-down list.
2. From the Loading Tool drop-down list, select the appropriate Loading
tool.
3. Click the button beside the Current Loaded Mining Block field, and in the
Mining Blocks tree, locate and select the appropriate Current Loaded
Mining Block.
4. From the Default/Active Mining Blocks drop-down list, select the
appropriate Mining Block.
5. Click Apply.
Viewing fuel levels in Fleet Update Assistant

Fuel level properties are configured using Supervisor, by going to Options >
System Options > Machine Tracking > FUA. Refer to the Supervisor Page
Reference chapter in your Fleet Administration & Configuration manual for
details.
Once you have configured the properties in Supervisor you can view them in
the Fleet Update Assistant.

Machine Tracking
 To view fuel levels

2. On the toolbar, click the Configure Properties button.
3. On the Pages tab, click Fuel, then click the single right-arrow button.
4. Click OK. The Fuel tab displays.
Managing fleets
This topic explains how to manage fleets.
Creating fleets
 To create a fleet
2. Ensure that the second level of the hierarchy is displayed.
3. Double-click Fleets.
4. Click New. Fleet Editor opens.
5. Enter a name for the fleet in the Name field.
6. Select the machines to be included in the fleet, by clicking the machine
in the Exclude column and then clicking the arrow button to move the
machine to the Include column.
Clicking >> moves all machines to the Include column.
You can select individual, contiguous or non–contiguous machines.

7. If you want to show the machine icons in your fleet, click the Show
Machine Icons check box.
Editing fleets
 To edit a fleet
3. Click Fleets.
4. Select the Fleet you want to edit, and click Open. Fleet Editor opens.
5. Make the required changes.

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
Deleting fleets
 To delete a fleet
3. Click Fleets. You may need to scroll.
4. Select the Fleet you want to delete, and click Delete.
5. If you are sure that you want to delete the fleet, click Yes in the
Viewing fleets
 To view a fleet
2. Navigate to the fleet you want to view.
3. Click Open.
Analyzing positions
This topic describes the procedures for monitoring positions including:
• Event messages.
• Viewpoints.
• Machine positions.
• Viewing object details.
Monitoring event messages

This topic explains how to monitor event messages using a graphical view.
Plotting production messages using Site Editor

 To plot production messages
1. Open Site Editor.
2. Click Actions, then click Events. The Define Position Plotting
Parameters dialog opens.
3. On the General tab, select the time period, start and end dates for the
events you want to plot.
4. On the Machines tab, do the following:
• Select the machines you wish to include on your plot.

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
5. On the Message Type tab, do the following:

• Click Message Types.
• Select the Message Types you wish to include, move them to the
Include panel, and click OK. To reduce to the number of message
types displayed for selection you can use the filter box.
Note The selection list for Message Types includes a variety of production
messages including VIMS production messages, but does not include
VIMS event types. VimsPcsCycle and VimsTpms messages are the
TMAC HPI defined message format containing production information
derived from Payload Control System (PCS) and Truck Payload
Management System (TPMS) onboard loaders and trucks, e.g. the
messages will contain data about how far the truck travelled and
tonnage carried.
• Select the Include check box for those message types you wish to
include. If you want to include all of the message types, click Select
All. If you want to clear the selected message types, click Clear
Selected.
• Click the Marker column to select the type of marker you want the
message type to display as.
• Click the Color column to select the color you want the message
type to display as.
6. On the Event Type tab, click Event Types.
By default all Activated events are displayed. If you also want to display
Deactivated events, select the Deactivated check box.
To reduce the number of event types displayed for selection you can use the
filter box.
7. Select the Event types you wish to include, move them to the Include
panel and click OK.
8. Select the Include check box for those event types you wish to include.
If you want to include all of the event types, click Select All. If you want
to clear the selected event types, click Clear Selected.
9. Click the Marker column to select the type of marker you want the event
type to display as.
10. Click the Color column to select the color you want the event type to
display as.
11. Click OK.
12. On the Hazard Events tab, do the following:
i. Select Include if you want Hazard events to be plotted.
ii. Select the Marker type to use for indicating Hazard Events.
iii. Select the Colour you want Hazard Events to display as.
iv. Click OK.

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
13. On the menu bar, click Actions, then click Event Display. The Define
Position Plotting Display Parameters dialog opens.
14. If you want to see all of the positions you have defined, select All.
15. If you want to see the last known position before the selected time, do
the following:
i. Select Last Known.
ii. Move the slider to adjust the time to minute and second
accuracy.
16. If you want to see the expected position for the current time by
interpolating the positions, do the following:
i. Select Interpolated.
ii. Move the slider to adjust the time to minute and second
accuracy.
17. Click Close.
Plotting VIMS events using Site Editor

 To plot VIMS events
2. Click Actions, then click Events. The Define Position Plotting
Parameters dialog opens.
3. On the General tab, select the time period, start and end dates for the
events you want to plot.
4. On the Machines tab, do the following:
• Select the machines you wish to include on your plot.
5. On the Event Type tab, do the following:
• Click Event Types.
By default all Activated events are displayed. If you also want to display
Deactivated events, select the Deactivated check box.
To reduce the number of event types displayed for selection you can use the
filter box.
If you know the exact VIMS Event ID you can use that ID in the filter box to
reduce the selection list to your specific VIMS event choice.
If you are interested in a specific Level number you can filter for all Level 3
events by entering Level 3 or l 3 in the Filter field. The field is not case-
sensitive.
6. Select the Event types you wish to include, move them to the Include
panel and click OK.
7. Select the Include check box for those event types you wish to include.
If you want to include all of the event types, click Select All. If you want
to clear the selected event types, click Clear Selected.

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
8. Click the Marker column to select the type of marker you want the event
type to display as.
9. Click the Color column to select the color you want the event type to
display as.
10. Click OK.
Note If the process times out, or reaches the maximum records limit, you
will be asked whether you wish to continue processing or terminate
the process.
When you save the page configuration in Site Editor your selected message
types and event types are saved with the page configuration. This allows you
to have immediate access to your commonly plotted message and event
types.
Managing viewpoints
This topic explains how to manage user-defined views of your mine, known
as Viewpoints. The functionality is available on both Site Editor and Site
Monitor.
Creating viewpoints
 To create a viewpoint
2. If necessary, use the Zoom Mode tool on the toolbar to zoom in to the
required area.
3. Select Actions > Viewpoints. The Viewpoints window opens.
4. Click New. The Add viewpoint dialog opens.
5. Type in the new Viewpoint name, and click OK.
6. Click Close.
Renaming viewpoints
 To rename a viewpoint
3. Select a viewpoint from the list in the left panel, and click Rename.
4. Type your changes to the Viewpoint name.
5. Click Close.

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
Deleting viewpoints
 To delete a viewpoint
3. Select a viewpoint from the list in the left panel, and click Delete.
4. Click Close.
Going to a viewpoint
 To go to a viewpoint
3. Select a viewpoint from the list in the left panel, and click Goto.
4. Click Close.
Monitoring machine positions

This topic explains how to monitor machine positions. Choose the
appropriate procedure based on the information you want displayed.
Using Fleet Update Assistant

 To monitor machine positions
2. From the list beside Page Configuration, select Status by Category.
3. Select the tab of the machine class you wish to monitor, for example,
Truck.
4. You can then view various columns depending on the page
configuration you have selected.

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
Using Site Monitor

 To monitor machine positions
1. Open Site Monitor.
2. To display the layers on your view, click Actions, then click Layer.
3. In the left panel, select the Display check boxes for the layers you wish
to view.
The check boxes you select are reflected as the same options in the
relevant tabs on the right-hand side. You are able to select an individual
category of machine, e.g. Select Trucks and clear all other machines, if
you only want to see the trucks.
4. On each of the tabs do the following:
i. If you have not done so already, select the Display check box.
ii. Select the Selectable check box for the layers for which you
wish message positions and waypoints to be selectable.
iii. Depending on the tab you are on, select whether or not to show
the label, the size and alignment of the label. You are also able to
change the scale of the icon. Navigate through the hierarchy to
show or hide specific items.
iv. Click Close.
5. Click File, then click Save to save your page configuration. The changes
you have made will remain with the page configuration for that layer.
Finding a specific machine position

 To find specific machine positions (using Site Monitor)
1. Click Actions, then click Search. A Search dialog opens.
2. From the list beside Layer, select the layer you wish to filter on, e.g.
Trucks, or in the Search For field, type the name of the entity you wish
to search for. As you start typing, the list of available entities displays.
3. From the Filtered List, select the entity you wish to show.
4. Click Show.
Icons on the screen change to reflect the state change of the entity (for
example, trucks).
Monitoring positions
 To monitor positions (using Travel Progress Monitor)
1. Open Travel Progress Monitor.
The default view is the view set up for your mine. You are able to
customize and save your own page configurations.

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
2. From the list beside Fleets, select the fleet you wish to view.
3. From the list beside Page Configuration, select the page configuration
you wish to view.
Managing GPS
This topic explains how to manage the Global Positioning System (GPS) for
use in the office software, and is only available for trucks.
Machines that have Ignore for assignment enabled are indicated in the
Fleet Update Assistant in red, enclosed in asterisks.
 To ignore GPS for truck assignments

This procedure tells you how to ignore GPS for truck assignments from the
office.
1. Open Truck Editor.
2. On the General tab, clear the Use GPS for Assignment check box.
3. If you want to save your changes and continue adding data, click Apply.
 To view GPS messages

2. Click the Truck tab and look for the GPS column.
3. If you cannot see the GPS column, click the Configure Properties
button on the toolbar .
4. In the Configure Properties dialog, click the Properties tab, then click
the Truck column.
5. In the Exclude column, find GPS and move it to the Include column.
Use the up and down arrows to move it to where you would like the
column to display in Fleet Update Assistant.
6. Click OK.
The GPS column displays where you wanted it.
7. Messages that display in the GPS field will be one of:
• Not used by Assignment and fault detected On Board.
This means that this truck’s GPS signal is bad in both the field and
the office.
• Fault detected On Board.
This means that the GPS signal is bad in the field.

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
• Not used by Assignment.

This means that the GPS signal is bad in the office.
Note When a machine sends through a badGPS signal, the machine is no

longer displayed in Site Monitor as there is no way of knowing where
to place the machine.
Showing the shortest path

This topic explains how to find the shortest path between two nominated
locations, using the Find Path Information tool on the Site Monitor page.
The start and end locations can be waypoints, destinations, loading tools, or
processors. For each truck class and each travel state, for example, loaded
and forward, the shortest path taken is shown together with the travel times,
distance and rise/fall.
This is useful for understanding why a truck was assigned to one location in
preference to another, or why a truck followed a particular path.
You can find the shortest path by doing either of the following:
• Select Actions > Find Path.
• Click the Find Path button on the toolbar.
 To find the best path between two nominated locations

2. Click Actions, then click Find Path. The Find Path window opens.
3. Starting from the far left drop-down list do the following:
i. From the first drop-down list, select the start location, either a
loading tool, processor, destination, or waypoint.
ii. From the next drop-down list, select the exact machine,
destination or waypoint you wish to start from. The items
displayed in this drop-down list will depend on what you have
selected in the first drop-down list.
iii. From the next drop-down list, select the end location, either a
loading tool, processor, destination or waypoint.
iv. From the next drop-down list, select the exact machine,
destination or waypoint you wish to end at. The items displayed
in this drop-down list will depend on what you have selected in
the previous drop-down list.
v. From the Load State drop-down list, select the state, either
Loaded or Empty.
vi. Click the Refresh button on the right if necessary.
The best path for each truck class and each travel state for the options you
have chosen are shown in the table below the drop-down lists, and drawn on

Machine Tracking
Analyzing positions
the site monitor page. You can click the drawn path to see the path for each
state, e.g. reverse empty route, forward full route.
4. If you want to see the shortest path for different truck class, select the
relevant tab.
5. If you want to see the shortest path for a particular travel state, click the
relevant tab.
6. If you want to refresh the table, click the refresh button on the find path
table.
7. If you want to clear the table, click the clear button on the find path table.
 To view the shortest path in context with other layers

2. Click Actions > Layer.
3. In the left-hand panel, select the Display check boxes for the Find Path
layer.
Selecting this check box is reflected as the same option in the Find Path
tab on the right-hand side. You are able to navigate through the
hierarchy to show or hide specific items.

Machine Tracking
Managing the travel network
Managing the travel network

Fleet provides numerous ways to manage the travel network and view your
mine model, with two of the most comprehensive being Site Editor and Site
Monitor. These pages and their respective functionality are described in the
following sections.
Managing objects using Assistants

The following topics explain how to use the various Assistants to mange
objects, such as waypoints, roads, and destinations.
Managing waypoints using Waypoint Assistant

This topic explains how to manage waypoints using Waypoint Assistant,
which can be found under Contents > Machine Tracking.
You can also create and maintain waypoints using Site Editor. See Managing
waypoints using Site Editor.
Creating waypoints
 To create a waypoint
1. Open Waypoint Assistant.
2. Click New. Waypoint Editor opens.
3. Enter a name in the Name field.
4. Enter a description in the Description field.
5. On the General tab, do the following;
i. From the Type list, enter the type of waypoint.
ii. From the Color list, enter a color for the waypoint.
Depending on the Type of waypoint you have chosen, you are able to
select various check boxes relating to assignment. If the function is not
available for your selection, the check box is dimmed. Select the
appropriate check boxes from the following:
• ReAssign when Loaded.
• ReAssign when Empty.
• Bounds Parent Location
• Send on Entry.
• Send on Exit.
6. Click the Geometry tab. On this tab you can either create the
coordinates for the waypoint by either using the table or dragging the
points on the graphical representation.

Machine Tracking
7. If you want to create the coordinates using the table, do the following:
i. From the Unit list, select the unit of measurement you want to
use for the waypoint.
ii. Double-click the X, Y, and Z fields to enter the coordinates of a
vertex.
iii. If you want to reverse the direction of the waypoints, click
Reverse Direction.
iv. If you want to add more coordinates, click the Add button
directly underneath the graphic.
v. If you want to delete one of the vertices, select the appropriate
row in the table and click Delete.
vi. If you are sure that you want to delete the selected vertices, click
Yes in the confirmation dialog.
8. If you want to create the coordinates using the graphical
representation, do the following:
i. From the Unit list, select the unit of measurement you want to
use for the waypoint.
ii. Click a point on the graphic and drag the point to the location you
want.
iii. If you want to reverse the direction of the waypoints, click
Reverse Direction.
iv. If you want to add more coordinates, click the Add button
directly underneath the graphic.
Copying waypoints
 To copy an existing waypoint
2. Select an existing waypoint row on the table displayed.
3. Click Copy. Waypoint Editor opens.
4. Enter a name in the Name field.
5. Change any details that need to be changed.
The Waypoint Editor switches to edit mode (gray) while editing waypoint
attributes.

Machine Tracking
Editing waypoints
 To edit a waypoint
1. Open Waypoint Assistant
2. Scroll through the list of waypoints until you find the one that you want to
edit.
3. Click Open.
4. Change any fields necessary on the General tab.
5. Click the Geometry tab.
6. Depending on the waypoint attribute that you want to edit, either
• Click the value that you want in the list box, select or clear the check
box, or double-click the cell and type a new value.
Or
• Click and drag the waypoint you want to edit to its new coordinate.
Archiving waypoints
 To archive a waypoint
Waypoints that have been archived do not have a “tick” in the Active
column.
2. Select the waypoint you want to archive and click Archive.
3. If you are sure that you want to archive this waypoint, click Yes in the
Restoring waypoints
 To restore a waypoint
column.
2. Click the Toggle button on the toolbar if archived waypoints are not
visible.
3. Select the waypoint you want to restore and click the Restore button.
4. If you are sure that you want to restore this waypoint, click Yes in the

Machine Tracking
Deleting (Archiving) waypoints

When you delete a waypoint, the waypoint is archived to the model
database. The waypoint can be completely deleted using Expert Mode.
 To delete (archive) a waypoint

delete, and click that row.
3. Click Archive. The Archive dialog opens.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the waypoint, click Yes in the
Updating waypoint information

 To update waypoint information
2. Right-click on a waypoint, and click Send Update.
The Waypoint Update dialog displays.
3. Click the machines you want to send the updates to, or click Select All
to send the updates to all the machines in the list.
4. Click the Extended Options Tab.
5. Select the check boxes for the options you wish to include.
6. Click Run to send the updates, or click Close to return to Site Editor
without sending any updates.
Viewing waypoints
 To view a waypoint
view, and click that row.
3. Click Open.
Viewing archived waypoints

 To view archived waypoints
2. Click the Toggle button on the toolbar if your view does not show any
archived waypoints.
column.

Machine Tracking
Resetting the waypoint missed count

The Waypoint Assistant has a Reset button which allows the missed count of
the selected waypoint to be set to 0. This may be necessary, for example, if
the waypoint is no longer in use, (because the road that passes through it
may have moved), and the mine model is not updated in a timely manner.
Clicking the Reset button resets the missed count for the selected waypoint
to 0.
When the geometry of a waypoint changes, the missed count is also reset.
Note You are not able to reset the missed count for multiple waypoints at
once. You must select and reset individual waypoints.
There is also a Missed Count field on the Waypoint Editor. This field is not
editable by the user.
Managing road segments using Road Segment Assistant

This topic explains how to manage road segments using Road Segment
Assistant, which can be found under Contents > Machine Tracking.
You can also create and maintain roads using Site Editor. See Managing
roads using Site Editor.
Creating road segments

Before you begin, ensure you have created the required waypoints. See To
create a waypoint on page 10.66. You also need to extract travel time
information into a file using the Toolkit menu option in Supervisor.
 To create a road segment

1. Open Road Segment Assistant.
2. Click New. Road Segment Editor opens.
i. In the Speed Limit field, enter the speed limit for the road
segment.
ii. From the Tax Class list, select the tax class for the road
segment.
iii. In the Description field, enter a description of the road segment.
iv. In the Condition field, enter the condition of the road segment.
v. In the Rolling Resistance field, enter the rolling resistance
percentage
vi. If you want to use dynamic travel times, select the Use Dynamic
Travel Times check box.

Machine Tracking
vii. If passing is allowed on the road, select the Passing Allowed

check box.
4. Click the Travel Times tab.
5. In the Configuration for Significant Difference section, do the
following:
i. In the % Difference field, enter the percentage difference that
will be accepted between the Dynamic and Recent travel times.
This value can also be entered using Supervisor, and changed
here.
ii. In the Sample Size field, enter the minimum number of samples
to use as a minimum sample size to apply recent travel data to.
6. In order to be able to manually configure road segment travel times, you
need to ensure the Supervisor settings are set accordingly. Check this
by doing the following in Supervisor:
i. Select Options > System Options, then from the Product list
select Machine Tracking.
ii. From the Option Sets list select Roads, and click the Road
Management Settings tab.
iii. In the Design Travel Times panel, ensure the Automatically
Update Haulage Roads check box is selected.
Back in the office software, if you want to set the dynamic travel times
individually for each truck class, do the following for each cell beside the
truck class:
1. Double-click the Dynamic cell.
2. Enter a value.
Note You may have to increase the size of the Road Segment Editor to see
all columns in the table.
If you want to set all values for any load/state combination, in the Travel
Times section, do the following:
1. In the Direction list, select the required combination.
2. Enter the required travel time in the Time field.
3. Update the design time by selecting the Update Design Time check
box.
4. If you want the time to be calculated automatically, select the
Calculated Time check box.
5. Click Set.
6. Show Recent Travel Data by selecting the Show Recent Travel Data
check box. This is reflected in the table in the lower part of the window.

Machine Tracking
7. Show EFH data by selecting the Show EFH Data check box. The details
table below the check boxes changes to show relevant data, which you
can change.
8. Click the Geometry tab.
9. In the Waypoints section, do the following:
i. From the Start list, select a start waypoint name.
ii. From the End list, select an end waypoint name.
Editing road segments

You are not able to edit Final road segment attributes (e.g. travel time,
distance). They will however give the appearance that they are being edited,
but road segments are dynamic, i.e. travel times and distances lengthen and
shorten as the loading tools move around.
 To edit a road segment

2. Scroll through the list until you find the road segment that you want to
edit.
3. Click the required road segment and click Open to open the road
segment in the Road Segment Editor.
4. If you want to select another road segment to edit, you can either:
• Click Prev or Next to scroll through the list, or
• From the Name list, select another road segment.
5. If you want to show the next road segment after you click Apply, select
the Show next road segment on apply check box.
6. Edit the required information on each tab.
Note You may have to increase the size of the Road Segment Editor to see
all columns in the table.
i. On the Travel Times tab, click Update to compare the travel

times in the field data file with the current travel times. Any
current travel times outside of the acceptable range are
displayed in red in the Calculated cell for the relevant truck
class, travel direction and state. The data shown in the
Calculated column indicates the time it takes a truck to traverse
a road, and are calculated as follows:
<median> (<min>/<max>/<count>) <ratio>%
where

Machine Tracking
• median = median travel time

• min = min travel time
• max = max travel time
• count = number of samples
• ratio% = 100*(median-current)/median where current is the
current travel time
Clicking the arrow button beside the Calc field applies the
calculation
Archiving road segments

 To archive a road segment
Road segments that have been archived do not have a “tick” in the
Active column.
2. Select the road segment you want to archive and click the Archive
button.
3. If you are sure that you want to archive this road segment, click Yes in
the confirmation dialog.
Restoring road segments

 To restore a road segment
Active column.
2. Select the road segment you want to restore and click the Restore
button.
3. If you are sure that you want to restore this road segment, click Yes in
Deleting road segments

You should not delete road segments unless absolutely necessary. It is
better to archive them instead. You must be in Expert Mode to delete road
segments.
 To delete a road segment

2. Scroll through the list until you find the road segment that you want to
delete.

Machine Tracking
3. Click the required road segment and click Delete.

4. If you are sure that you want to delete the road segment, click Yes in the
Viewing road segments

 To view a road segment
2. Scroll through the list of road segments until you find the one that you
want to view, and click that row.
3. Click Open.
Viewing archived road segments

 To view archived road segments
2. Click the Toggle button on the toolbar if the view does not show
archived road segments.
Active column.
Delaying road segments

Road segments can be put on delay directly from the Road Segment
Assistant or from the Delay Assistant.
You can also right-click a road segment in the Road Segment Finder, or in
Site Monitor, and click Delay to open the Delay Editor.
This procedure uses the right-click method in Road Segment Assistant.
 To put a road segment on delay

2. Scroll through the list of road segments until you find the one that you
want to put on delay, and right-click that row.
3. Click Delay. Delay Editor opens.
4. Click the Type tab and navigate to the required delay type.
5. Click the required delay type.
6. Click the Road tab. The road segment you selected to have the delay
has a “tick” in the Select column.
7. Select the Duration tab, and do the following:
i. From the Start list, select the start date and time for the delay.
ii. If you do not know the duration of the delay, select Unknown.
iii. If you want to select a duration for the delay, select the time
using the arrow keys beside Duration.

Machine Tracking
iv. From the Created By list, select the person creating the delay.
v. If you want confirmation of the delay, select Confirmation
Required.
vi. If you want acknowledgement of the delay, select
Acknowledgement Required.
vii. If the delay makes the delay target unavailable for assignment,
select Assignment Delay.
viii.If the delay requires the machine’s engine to be switched off,
select Engine Switched Off.
8. Select the Description tab, and enter a description of the delay.
9. Complete the details on all other tabs as required.
10. Click Save.
Managing destinations
This topic explains how to manage destinations.
Creating destinations
Before you begin, ensure you have created the required waypoints. See To
create a waypoint on page 10.66.
 To create a destination
1. Open Destination Assistant.
2. Click New.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the destination.
4. In the Description field, enter a description of the destination.
i. If you want to specify the destination as a source, select Source.
ii. If you want to specify the destination as a sink, select Sink.
iii. If you want to specify the destination as a station, select Station.
iv. From the Tax Class list, select the tax class for the destination.
v. If the destination you are creating is in a known bad
communications area, select Bad Communications. The office
software only sends a backup assignment automatically to
destinations that are Sinks (e.g. dumps).
If you have a source or station selected, and you select Bad
Communications the office software will not take any automatic
action. You can, however, leave the bad communications check

Machine Tracking
box selected as mine sites are forever changing, and the source
or station destination may one day become a sink.
Note When selecting Bad Communications you must also ensure that in
Supervisor > Contents > Setup > Assignment Options you have
selected the Send backup assignments check box. This ensures
that when a truck enters a dump destination in an area with unreliable
communications, the office software sends a backup assignment to
the truck.
Backup assignments will show in the Assignment Event Monitor.
See Backup assignments in the Concepts and Reference chapter for

more information.
6. Click the Geometry tab, and do the following:

i. If the destination is a parent destination, select the Parent check
box.
ii. On the Bounding Waypoints tab, select the bounding
waypoints to be included or excluded.
iii. On the Child Destinations tab, select the child destinations to
be included or excluded. The child destinations tab only displays
if the Parent check box is selected.
iv. If you want the office software to suggest child destinations
based on existing waypoints, click Auto.
i. If the materials are to be re-handled, select Re-Handle.
ii. If you want to allow all materials for this destination, select Allow
all Materials.
iii. If you want to specify allowable materials individually for this
destination, select the include column of the appropriate
material.
iv. If you want to select all materials click Select All, and if you want
to clear all materials, click Clear.
Editing destinations
 To edit a destination
2. Scroll through the list until you find the destination that you want to edit,
and click that row.

Machine Tracking
3. Click Open.
4. Edit the required details on each tab as required.
Archiving destinations
 To archive a destination
Destinations that have been archived do not have a “tick” in the Active
column.
2. Select the destination you want to archive and click the Archive button.
3. If you are sure that you want to archive this destination, click Yes in the
Restoring destinations
 To restore a destination
Click the Toggle button on the tool bar if archived destinations are not
visible.
column.
2. Select the destination you want to archive and click the Restore button.
3. If you are sure that you want to restore this road segment, click Yes in
Deleting destinations
This topic explains how to delete destinations.
It is not normally necessary to delete destinations. Should it be necessary,
however, you can switch to Expert Mode and delete destinations as
necessary.
Ensure that you are aware of the ramifications to your mine model if you
delete destinations.
 To delete a destination
1. Open Destination Editor.
2. Scroll through the list until you find the destination that you want to edit,
and click that row.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the destination, click Yes in the

Machine Tracking
Viewing destinations
 To view a destination
1. Open Destination Editor.
2. Scroll through the list until you find the destination that you want to view,
and click that row.
3. Click Open.
Viewing archived destinations

 To view archived destinations
2. Click the Toggle button on the tool bar if archived destinations are not
visible.
column.
Site Editor overview

Site Editor provides a visual model of the network and its components. It
allows you to directly create and maintain components such as viewpoints,
waypoints and road segments through the graphical user interface, providing
a graphical representation of the mine travel network.
To access Site Editor select Contents > Machine Tracking > Site Editor.
Site Monitor overview

Site Monitor displays a scaled graphical representation of the mine, the
location of machines and operators. It dynamically updates machines states
and positions and mining block color changes as they occur.
To open Site Monitor, select Contents > Machine Tracking > Site Monitor.

Machine Tracking
Toolbar icons
The following table describes the toolbar icons for both Site Editor and Site
Monitor. It is indicated where an icon displays on only one of the pages.
Icon Function
Selection
Allows you to select toolbar or menu options, or
a bounding box around objects to select them.
Pan
Allows the screen to be ’grabbed’ and moved to
change the view.
Zoom Mode
Allows you to draw a window around an area you
wish to zoom in on.
Measure - Site Editor only

Allows you to measure distances. The distance is
shown at the bottom of the screen.
Fit to Page
Changes the display to fit all data in the window in
plan view.
Zoom In
Allows you to zoom in on the center of the
display.
Zoom Out
Allows you to zoom out from the center of the
display.
Rotate
Allows you to rotate the view 360 degrees
clockwise about the center of the display.
Layers Editor
Allows you to control the:
• display of the office software items, and
change the location and size of the label.
• selectability of the office software items and
.DXF data.
Search for Entities

Allows you to search for road segments and
waypoints.

Machine Tracking
Icon Function
Viewpoints Editor
Allows you to
• save the current view as a new viewpoint.
• delete and rename existing viewpoints.
• go to a nominated viewpoint.
Keyboard Interface
Displays the keyboard shortcuts.
Find Path - Site Monitor only

Allows you to calculate the shortest path between
two nominated locations. The locations can be
waypoints, destinations, loading tools or
processors.
Load DXF file as a background

Allows you to perform multiple .dxf mporting
tasks.
The layers view and selectability of the .DXF data
is used in the creation of new entities.
Show Field Message Positional Data - Site

Editor only
Allows you to plot messages of various types
from machines in the field.
Configure Display of Field Message Positional

Data - Site Editor only
Allows you to configure the way machine field
data is displayed.
Create Hazard Waypoint at Location - Site

Editor only
Allows you to create a hazard waypoint manually.
The waypoint will be sent to the machine, and the
machine is expected to display the waypoint.

Machine Tracking
Icon Function
Create Waypoint - Site Editor only
Allows you to create the following types of
waypoint:
• Square
• Rectangle
• Hexagon
• Freeform
The elevation, or "Z" coordinate of the centroid of
the waypoint is determined by interpolations from
the imported DXF data. If no DXF data exists, a
value of zero is used. The size of the square,
rectangle, and hexagon is based on the default
road width set in Supervisor. See Roads in the
Supervisor Page Reference chapter of the Fleet
Administration and Configuration manual for the
default road width.
Create Road - Site Editor only

Allows you to draw a new road. The elevation, or
"Z" coordinate of the road is automatically
interpolated from the DXF data that has been
used as a background. If no DXF data has been
imported, an elevation of zero is assigned to all
points on the road.
Edit Polygon Points - Site Editor only

Allows you to:
• edit the points on the polygon (waypoint)
• move individual points on the polygon
• resize the polygon
• rotate the polygon
• move the polygon
Note This is not a toolbar icon, but is used to

directly insert road and waypoint objects.
When you select the waypoint or the road tool,

the crosshairs appears instead of the pointer or
cursor. A + is displayed in the centre circle. Place
the + in the area you want to add a road or
waypont and click the button.

Machine Tracking
Shortcut keys
 To use the keyboard shortcut keys
Shortcut keys are available in both Site Editor and Site Monitor; although Site
Monitor has reduced functionality.
• Click on the Site Editor or Site Monitor toolbar. This displays a dialog
box, showing in the left column the key to press, and in the right column,
the result of pressing the key.
The shortcut keys are shown in the following table.
Keyboard Function
command
+ Zoom in by a small amount
- Zoom out by a small amount
[,] Step back and forward through previous views
c Center on cursor
C Center on selected object and lock to it
f Fit all data to window and revert to plan view
g Toggle the display of the grid lines
p Pan mode
q Rotate clockwise
r Repaint
s When in point entry mode "snaps" to DXF data nearest to

the center of the cross-hair. When not in point entry mode,
’s’ puts you into Select Mode. Site Editor only
w Rotate anticlockwise
z Switch to zoom window mode
Layer keys Toggles the following layers

• 0 - background
• 1 - message positions
• 2 - waypoints
• 3 - roads
• 4 - mining blocks
• 5 - destinations
Arrow keys Pan in each of the four directions

Machine Tracking
Keyboard Function
command
Alt + drag Zoom in (move mouse right) or out (move mouse left
horizontally
Ctrl + drag Pan
i, m Rotate around the X axis
j, l Rotate around the Y axis
x Front elevation view (from the X axis)
y Side elevation view (from the Y axis)
Insert Insert or delete intermediate points or entities.

Delete
u, Ctrl +Z, Undo or redo the last operation. Uppercase letters are for
Ctrl + z, U, Redo - Site Editor only
Esc Completes an object in point entry mode or clears the

selection if not in point entry mode and something is
selected - Site Editor only
Double Completes object creation

Click
Removing grid lines

You can remove the grid lines from both your Site Editor and Site Monitor
view.
 To remove the grid lines from your view

1. With either Site Editor or Site Monitor open, press the g key on the
keyboard. This removes the grid lines. Pressing g again turns them
back on.
2. Click File, then click Save Page Configuration, and enter your page
configuration name.
3. If you are looking at a particular viewpoint, you will have to remove the
grid lines from each of your viewpoints, and resave them individually.
Display axis
The Display Axis is visible on both Site Editor and Site Monitor, and is
displayed in the top left corner of the screen. It is a set of color-coded axes
indicating the direction of X, Y and Z based on the rotation of the current
mine model view.

Machine Tracking
• The green line represents the X axis.

• The blue line represents the Y axis.
• The red line represents the Z axis.
Measuring distances
This functionality applies to Site Editor only.
The Measure button on the toolbar allows you to measure the distance
between to objects.
 To view object details

2. Click the Measure button.
3. Click and hold the mouse button at the start of where you wish to
measure, and drag the mouse to the endpoint of your measurement.
The distance between the start and end points is displayed in the information
bar at the bottom of the screen.
Viewing the mine model

This functionality applies to both Site Editor and Site Monitor.
You are able to view the model from any point.
The Toolbar icons and Shortcut keys provide you with numerous ways in
which to view your mine model.
Viewing the details of objects

 To view object details
2. Zoom in to the area you wish to view if necessary.
3. Click on the object whose details you wish to view. A ToolTip displays,
showing various details depending on the object you have clicked on.
The ToolTip will show beside your mouse pointer. You may have to
move your mouse slightly for the ToolTip to display.
You can click on any object. Some examples of details displayed are:
• Processor: Name, Current Material, Destination.
• Road: From, To, Length
• Destination: Name, Current Material, Destination.
• Stockpile: Name, Material, Inventory Mass, Maximum Mass.

Machine Tracking
Managing .dxf files
The details displayed can be configured in Supervisor.
Note You can right-click any object to display its shortcut menu.
Managing .dxf files

You can overlay a .dxf file containing topographical information about your
mine site onto the Site Editor display. This allows you to add elements to the
model using the overlay as a guide, and maps (snaps) the x, y, z coordinates
of any new object to the corresponding x, y, z coordinates of the.dxf overlay.
A fundamental use of the DXF data is to provide accurate XYZ data with
which you are able to create and edit the office software graphical objects.
As you are generally interacting with the mine model in plan view, erroneous
data in the XY plane is immediately obvious, however erroneous data on the
Z is not so obvious. The most common Z value error is Z=0.00. Because raw
data whose Z=0.00 precisely is incredibly rare these values are by default
ignored.
Note Site Monitor provides a cut-down version of the Background files

dialog, comprising Replace all files, Append a new file, and the DXF
read options.
 To manage .dxf file

2. Click Actions > Background Files ... or click on the toolbar. The
Background Files dialog displays which the following options.
• Replace all files
i. Select this option and click OK to display a dialog which allows
you to search for a .dxf file.
ii. Locate the file you want, and click Open. The .dxf file you have
selected is loaded into Site Editor, and replaces any previously
loaded background.
• Append a new file
to search for the .dxf file to append.
ii. Locate the file and click Open. The .dxf file you have selected
loads the file into the background while keeping any existing
files.
• Write DXF file

Machine Tracking
Editing layers

you to save the current contents of the Site Editor into a .dxf file.
ii. Select where you wish to save the file, enter a name for the file,
and click Save.
• Upload all DXF files to the surface
i. Select this option and click OK to have the office software
construct a three-dimensional surface which allows the Site
Editor to calculate an accurate Z value from the X and Y values.
This is used, for example, when creating roads and waypoints to
ensure accurate Z values for the points.
• DXF read options
Note These options are set in Supervisor, and those settings are carried
through to the client by default. You are able to change the settings in
Site Editor, however they are not retained once you exit the page.
Once you have settings you are happy with you should go into
Supervisor > Options > System Options > Machine Tracking >
Graphical Display, to have them as the default settings.
i. Select Import DXF points with Zero Z Values if you have a

need to display files without Z values, e.g. roads.
ii. Enter a value in the DXF detail minimum field to specify the
distance between the points loaded from the DXF files. If the
points are closer than this setting, they are ignored. This reduces
the number of lines to draw, which will help with performance.
Set this field to 0 to show all of the detail in the DXF file.
If you already have .dxf files loaded into the background, the following option
is also displayed on the Background Files dialog.
• Clear selected files
i. Select this option to remove the files from the Site Editor display.
When you select this option, you are able to select the file or files
you wish to clear.
ii. Select the files to clear, then click OK.
Editing layers
The editing layers functionality is available on both Site Editor and Site
Monitor, however Site Monitor provides more layers.
 To edit layers
2. To display the layers on your view, click Actions, then click Layer.

Machine Tracking
Entity creation menus
3. In the left panel, select the Display check boxes for the layers you wish
to view.
The check boxes you select are reflected as the same options in the
relevant tabs on the right side.
The layers are displayed in the order they are drawn on the screen. You
can change the order of the layers by clicking the arrow buttons
between the left and right panels.
4. On each of the tabs do the following:
i. Select the Selectable check box for the layers for which you
want message positions and waypoints to be selectable.
ii. Depending on the tab you are on, select the message positions,
waypoints, and editable roads you wish to view. Select whether
or not you want to show a label, the size and location of the
label. You are able to navigate through the hierarchy to show or
hide specific items.
iii. Click Close.
5. Click File, then click Save Page Configuration. The changes you have
made will remain with the page configuration for that layer.
 To toggle layers on and off

2. Numbers 0-5 toggle different layers on and off as follows:
• 0 - background (DXF data)
• 1 - message positions
• 2 - waypoints
• 3 - roads
• 4 - mining blocks
• 5 - destinations
Entity creation menus

Note Refer to Toolbar icons on page 10.79 and Shortcut keys on
page 10.82 for more information on toolbar and shortcut key
functionality.
Site Editor only
Use the buttons on the toolbar to create waypoints and roads,

and to edit polygon points.

Machine Tracking
Point entry mode
 To tear-off entity creation menus

• You can "tear-off" the create waypoints and edit polygons menus only.
1. Click the arrow beside the icon.
2. Hold your mouse on the "dotted" area (indicated by the arrow), and drag
the menu anywhere onto your Site Editor screen.
3. The last icon you select becomes the default icon.
Point entry mode

Use point entry mode when creating roads or waypoints.
 To use point entry mode

• Select either create a waypoint or create a road on the entity creation
menu.
When you create a road or waypoint, the cursor changes to a crosshair,
(shown on the left), so that you are able to see that you are in point entry
mode. The reticule, that is, the small circle in the middle of the crosshair,
represents the currently configured "snap" zone. Both the crosshair size and
the snap zone are configured in pixels so they remain the same size
regardless of the zoom currently applied. In the center of the reticule there is
a "+", which you place in the position you want the road to start, or where you
want the waypoint.
The size of the reticule (the snap zone), and the size of the crosshair are
configurable using Supervisor. See Site Editor in the Supervisor Page
Reference chapter of the Fleet Administration & Configuration manual for the
settings.
• The crosshair displays with the reticule.
• Clicking anywhere on your Site Editor screen creates a point.

• Pressing the s key on your keyboard creates the point by snapping the
closest piece of DXF to the center of the crosshair within the reticule. If
there are no points within the reticule, nothing will happen.
• Entity creation is complete when you either press Esc, or double-click at
the final point.
If you were creating a road, then the last point entered is the end of the
road. If that last point was inside an existing waypoint then that waypoint
is used as the road end, otherwise a new waypoint is created.
If you were creating a freeform waypoint, the polygon is automatically

Machine Tracking
Creating objects using DXF data
closed by connecting the last point entered to the first point.
If you were creating a pre-defined waypoint, e.g. a rectangle, square, or

hexagon, a new waypoint is created when you click or snap.
The waypoint is named using the convention defined in Supervisor. See

Server Waypoint Defaults on page 9.54 of the Supervisor Page
Reference chapter of your Fleet Administration & Configuration manual.
• Zoom using the Ctrl key, and pan using the Alt key while in point entry
mode. You are returned to normal selection mode once you release the
key.
• Undo the last point created without exiting point entry mode by using one
of the undo shortcut keys, either u or Ctrl + z.
• You can redo that point by selecting U or Ctrl + Z.

You can create roads and waypoints from DXF data, and perform other
functions as described below.
Note You can hold down the Shift key to select more than one object.
Note Any changes made to DXF data cannot be either saved or undone.
The DXF edits last as long as your Site Editor page remains open.
Creating roads using DXF data

There are three ways to create a road using DXF data. Each of these are
described below.
When you create a road, the cursor changes to a crosshair, (shown on the
left), so that you are able to see that you are in point entry mode. The
reticule, that is, the small circle in the middle of the crosshair, represents the
currently configured "snap" zone. Both the crosshair size and the snap zone
are configured in pixels so they remain the same size regardless of the zoom
currently applied. In the center of the reticule there is a "+", which you place
in the position you want the road to start.
settings.
 To create a road by snapping to DXF data

1. Select the Create Road icon.

Machine Tracking
2. Move the reticule over the DXF data point that represents the start of
your road, and press the s key.
The office software creates a point that is at precisely the same
coordinates of the DXF data point that is closest to the center of the
crosshair inside the reticule.
3. Move the cursor over the next DXF data point that is at the desired
location of the next point on the road and press s. Continue doing this
until you are at your last data point.
4. On selecting your last data point, press Esc, or double-click to finish the
road.
If the first or last point of the road is not positioned within an existing
waypoint, waypoints are automatically created at the end of the road.
If the road crosses another road, an intersection waypoint is created
where the roads cross, and the crossed road is split at that point.
 To create a road from a DXF line

1. Select one or more lines.
2. Right click the line, then click Create Road.
A road is created that follows the line(s) you selected.
If a DXF line is too long or short, see the Note below.
 To create a road between two DXF lines

1. Select the two lines you wish to create a road in between.
2. Right-click on one of the roads, then click Create Road Between Lines.
A road is created along the center of the ones you selected.
Note If a DXF line is too long it can be trimmed using the To split DXF lines
procedure below.
If a DXF line is too short, it can be connected to another DXF line
using either the To automatically join DXF lines or To manually join
DXF lines procedure below.
Joining and splitting DXF lines

 To automatically join DXF lines
1. Select the lines you want to join by drawing a bounding box around them
or holding down Shift and selecting the lines you want.
2. Right-click, then click Join DXF Lines.
The lines are automatically joined end to end.

Machine Tracking
Managing waypoints using Site Editor
 To manually join DXF lines

1. Select a single DXF line.
2. Right-click, then click Manual Join.
3. Click the end of the DXF line you want to start from, then click the end of
the DXF line you want to join it to.
The selected DXF lines are joined.
 To split DXF lines

1. Select the line you want to split, right-click it and click Split DXF Line.
2. The line is split into two lines at the point you selected.
Creating waypoints using DXF data

 To create a waypoint using DXF data
1. Select at least one line.
2. Right-click and click Create Waypoint. A waypoint is created that is the
best fit, enclosing the lines you selected.
If a DXF line is too long or short, see the earlier Note.

This topic explains how to manage waypoints using Site Editor, which can
be found under Contents > Machine Tracking.
You are able to create, edit, and archive waypoints directly on Site Editor as
described in the following procedures.
You can also create and maintain waypoints using Waypoint Assistant. See
Managing waypoints using Waypoint Assistant.
Creating waypoints using Site Editor

You are able to create four types of waypoint:
• Rectangle
• Square
• Hexagon
• Freeform
When you create a waypoint, the cursor changes to a crosshair, (shown on
the left), so that you are able to see that you are in point entry mode. The
in the position you want to add the waypoint.

Machine Tracking
settings.
 To create a waypoint using Site Editor

1. On the Create Waypoint button on the toolbar, click the arrow
and select the type of waypoint you want to create.
The elevation, or "Z" coordinate of the centroid of the waypoint is
determined by interpolations from the imported DXF data. If no DXF
data exists, a value of zero is used.
2. Place the crosshair over the position you want the waypoint and click to
place the waypoint, or if creating a Freeform waypoint, place the
crosshair where you want the waypoint to start, using the + in the middle
of the reticule to get the right starting position. If you want to use the
background DXF data to more accurately position the reticule, place the
reticule over the area where you want the point and press the s key. This
snaps the point to the DXF data point that is closest to the +.
3. If you are creating a Freeform waypoint, click the left mouse button as
you move the crosshair to insert points, then when you have finished,
double-click or press Esc to complete the waypoint.
4. If you are creating a pre-defined waypoint, for example a rectangular
waypoint, the waypoint is created when you click or snap. Press Esc on
your keyboard to complete the waypoint.
5. Click Apply.
Creating a waypoint from lines

 To create a waypoint from lines
In some cases (like at dumps, hoppers, park-ups) the imported survey data
(DXF) contains the essential boundaries of the waypoint desired.
1. Select the lines that represent the boundary of your waypoint, then right-
click Create Waypoint.
The office software creates a best fit waypoint around them.
Editing waypoints using Site Editor

 To edit the shape of a waypoint
1. Ensure you are in vertex editing mode by right-clicking the
waypoint and clicking Edit Points.
2. Move a vertex by selecting the one you want to move and dragging it.

Machine Tracking
Pressing Esc or clicking away from the waypoint will exit you from
vertex move mode.
3. Delete a vertex by placing the pointer inside, or on, the vertex marker
of the selected object and pressing Delete on your keyboard.
If the pointer is not inside the vertex marker the whole object is deleted if
it was created in this session and has not been saved. If the object has
been saved, it will be archived.
4. You can undo any of these operations by pressing u or Ctrl + z on your
keyboard.
 To snap a waypoint to the Z Surface

1. Select a waypoint.
2. Right-click on the waypoint, and click Snap Z to Surface.
The center of the waypoint is moved to the currently interpolated Z
values from the .dxf file.
Resizing waypoints using Site Editor

 To resize a waypoint
1. Select the waypoint.
2. Right-click on the waypoint and click Resize. This places a "best fit"
rectangle around the waypoint. The rectangle has vertices on each
corner as well as midway along each side.
Moving a corner vertex changes the size of the waypoint along each
axis.
Moving a side vertex stretches or shrinks the waypoint in that direction.
Rotating waypoints using Site Editor

 To rotate a waypoint
1. Select the waypoint.
2. Right-click on the waypoint and click Rotate. The vertices turn green.
3. Click on a vertex, and while holding down the left mouse button, move
the mouse. The waypoint rotates about its center.
4. Release the mouse button when the waypoint is oriented correctly. The
vertices remain green so that you are still able to rotate that waypoint.
5. To exit from rotation mode, select another object, or press Esc, or click
on a blank area of the screen.

Machine Tracking
Changing waypoint properties using Site Editor

 To change the properties of a waypoint
1. Double-click the waypoint you wish to edit.
Waypoint Editor displays with the details of your selected waypoint
preloaded.
2. Edit the necessary fields as per To edit a waypoint from the step Change
any fields necessary on the General tab. on page 10.68.
Archiving waypoints
Note If you have not saved any of your changes, when you archive an
object it is only retrievable using the Undo functionality within Site
Editor.
If you have committed your changes (e.g. clicked Apply or Save) you
are able to Archive objects, which you are then able to Restore using
Waypoint Assistant.
The color of the object changes when it has been applied or saved to
the server and is no longer a local copy.
Roads are always attached to waypoints, therefore archiving a waypoint that

has a road attached can have a significant impact on the integrity of your
mine model.
• If you archive a waypoint that is at the intersection of two roads, the roads
will be joined.
• If you archive a waypoint that is at the intersection of more than two
roads, or if the waypoint is at the end of a road, a warning dialog will
display once you click Apply, stating that "Removal of this waypoint will
result in the removal of roads ’<r1,r2, r3....>’".
Archiving waypoints using Site Editor

If you have not saved any of your changes, when you archive an object it is
not retrievable (with the exception of the Site Editor Undo and Redo
functionality, as the changes have not been committed to the server).
1. Click on the waypoint you wish to Archive.
2. Press Delete on your keyboard.
You can also right-click on the waypoint, then click Archive.
Once you have clicked Apply, your waypoints will be Archived.

Machine Tracking
Managing roads using Site Editor
Archiving waypoints using Site Monitor
Note You can multi-select roads and waypoints before Archiving.
1. Right-click the waypoint you wish to archive.
2. Click Archive.
The Archive Assistant displays.
3. Verify the waypoint you want to archive is selected. You are shown the
consequences of archiving the waypoint you have selected in the
bottom panel.
4. Click Archive.
5. Click Apply.
You can restore your waypoints using Waypoint Assistant. See Restoring
waypoints.

This topic explains how to manage roads using Site Editor, which can be
found under Contents > Machine Tracking.
You are able to create, edit, and archive roads directly on Site Editor, and
archive roads using Site Monitor, as described in the following procedures.
You can also create and maintain roads using Road Segment Assistant. See
Managing road segments using Road Segment Assistant.
Creating roads using Site Editor

When you create a road, the cursor changes to a crosshair, (shown on the
left), so that you are able to see that you are in point entry mode. The
in the position you want to add the road.
settings.
 To create a road
1. Click Create Road on the tool bar.

Machine Tracking
Place the crosshair over the position you want the road to start, using
the + in the middle of the reticule to get the right starting position. If you
want to use the background DXF data to more accurately position the
reticule, place the reticule over the area where you want the point and
press the s key. This will snap the point to the DXF data point that is
closest to the +.
2. Click the left mouse button as you move the crosshair to insert points.
The elevation, or "Z" coordinate of the road is automatically interpolated
from the DXF data that has been used as a background. If no DXF data
has been imported, an elevation of zero is assigned to all points on the
road.
To undo previously created point, press u or Ctrl + z.
3. Double-click, or press Esc to generate the new road.
If your new road starts or ends in an existing waypoint, those points will be
used as the start or end points of the road, otherwise new waypoints are
created.
If your new road crosses an existing road or waypoint then it and the existing
road will be split into two at that point.
Once you have created the road the office software checks all of the
segments against the maximum allowable gradient. If any section of a road
exceeds the allowable gradient you have set, you will be given a warning.
 To create a road from lines

As mine survey data loaded as DXF can include the edges of roads, you can
create a road in the office software using this information.
See the following procedures described earlier for more information.
• To create a road from a DXF line on page 10.90.
• To create a road between two DXF lines on page 10.90.
Editing roads using Site Editor

 To edit the shape of a road
1. Click on the road you want to edit. This shows the vertices (the points
that make up the object) as shown below.
2. Move a vertex by selecting the one you want to move and dragging it.
3. Insert a new vertex into the road by pressing Insert on your keyboard.
This inserts a vertex between the two vertices that are closest to the

Machine Tracking
pointer. Once you have inserted a vertex, you are able to place the
vertex in its final position, by moving it, before updating the road.
4. Delete a vertex by placing the pointer inside, or on, the vertex marker
of the selected object and pressing Delete on your keyboard.
If the pointer is not inside the vertex marker the whole road is deleted.
5. You can undo any of these operations by pressing u or Ctrl + z on your
keyboard.
 To edit the length of a road

1. Click on the waypoint at the end of the road.
2. Move the waypoints to the location you require.
 To edit the properties of a road

1. Double-click the road you wish to edit.
Road Segment Editor displays with the details of your selected road
preloaded.
2. Edit the necessary fields as per To edit a road segment from On the
General tab, do the following: on page 10.70.
 To snap a road to the Z Surface

1. Select a road.
2. Right-click on the road, and click Snap Z to Surface.
All vertices of the road are moved to the currently interpolated Z values
from the .dxf file.
Archiving roads
Note If you have not saved any of your changes, when you archive an
object it is not retrievable, as the changes have not been committed
to the server.
If you have committed your changes (e.g. clicked Apply or Save) you
are able to Archive objects, which you are then able to Restore using
Road Segment Assistant.
The color of the object changes when it has been applied or saved to
the server and is no longer a local copy.

Machine Tracking
Archiving roads using Site Editor

 To archive a road
The delete key on your keyboard archives objects that have been created in
the current site editor session but have NOT been saved (i.e. they really only
exist in the client). If you have saved the object, you need to archive the
object to remove it from your Site Editor display.
1. Click on the road you wish to delete.
2. Press Delete on your keyboard.
You can also right-click on the waypoint, then click Archive.
Once you have clicked Apply, your waypoints will be Archived.
Archiving roads using Site Monitor
Note You can multi-select roads and waypoints before Archiving.
 To archive a road
If you have already saved the road you want to delete, you will have to
Archive the road, as you cannot delete a road once it has been saved.
1. Right-click the road you wish to archive.
2. Click Archive.
The Archive Assistant displays.
3. Verify the road you want to archive is selected. You are shown the
consequences of archiving the road you have selected in the bottom
panel.
4. Click Archive.
5. Click Apply.
You can restore your waypoints using Road Segment Assistant. See
Restoring road segments.

Machine Tracking
Creating destinations using Site Editor
 To create a destination using Site Editor
• Select one or more waypoints (Shift + click to select more than one), right-
click, and select Create Destination.
• A destination is created with your selected waypoints as bounding
points. A blue line encompasses the waypoints.
• You can right-click the destination and click Open, which then
displays the Destination Editor.
 To add a waypoint to the destination using Site Editor

1. Select the destination line.
2. Hover your cursor over a waypoint that is not part of the destination, and
click Insert on your keyboard.
The waypoint is included in the destination.
 To remove a waypoint from a destination using Site Editor

1. Select the destination line.
2. Hover your cursor over a waypoint that is part of the destination, and
press Delete on your keyboard.
The waypoint is removed from the destination.
Note If you are not hovering over a waypoint correctly, you will delete the
destination.
Managing bulk site edits using Site Editor or

Site Monitor
This topic describes bulk editing and archiving, which allows you to
simultaneously edit and archive the common attributes of selected road
segments or waypoints all at once, or edit and archive individual instances as
required, using either Site Editor or Site Monitor.

Machine Tracking
Managing bulk site edits using Site Editor or Site Monitor
Selecting objects
 To select objects freehand
2. Zoom in to a level where waypoints and road segments are comfortably
visible.
3. Hold down the shift key and use the mouse pointer to point directly at an
object you want to edit.
4. Click to select the object.
5. Continue holding down the shift key, and click on each object you want
to edit.
6. Right-click one of the selected objects.
7. A drop-down menu displays. Click the option you want to edit.
 Selecting objects using fence select

2. Zoom in to a level where objects are comfortably visible.
3. Select the objects in either of the following ways.
i. Hold down the mouse button and drag from right to left to create
a selection box. This selects all objects that are within or partially
within the box.
ii. Hold down the mouse button and drag from left to right to create
a selection box. This selects only those objects that fall wholly
within the box.
Note You can hold down the Shift key while using fence select to add or
remove objects to and from the surrounded area.
4. Right-click one of the selected objects.

5. A drop-down menu displays. Click the option you want to edit.
Note The drop-down menu gives you the option of editing each object
individually, or bulk editing similar objects e.g. Waypoints. See earlier
sections, starting from Creating waypoints using Site Editor on
page 10.91 for more information.
Selecting either the Archive, Edit Waypoints, and Edit Roads

options from the menu allows the bulk editing functionality, described
in following sections.

Machine Tracking
Updating an attribute in Bulk Edit mode updates that attribute for all of those
similar objects you selected.
Bulk editing waypoints

 To bulk edit selected waypoints
1. Select the waypoints you wish to edit using either of the methods
described above.
2. Right-click on one of the waypoints and click Edit Waypoints.
3. To move waypoints in or out of the current selection, click Select.
4. Select waypoints to Include or Exclude and use the arrows to move
them between the Include and Exclude lists.
5. Click OK.
6. To change the type of waypoint, select the Change Type check box.
Select the type of waypoint from the list.
7. To change the geometry of a waypoint, select the Change Geometry
check box, then from the drop-down list choose the master waypoint
whose geometry, shape and attributes you wish to apply to all selected
waypoints. You can also select the master in the graphic panel.
8. To change the display color of on-screen objects, select the Change
Color check box. Select a color from the list.
Step numbers 8-11 require you to select two check boxes, one to perform the
Change operation, and an associated check box to update the value.
Note Selecting the Change check box and not the associated value check
box where applicable, will clear all entries for that column.
9. To allow the assignment of all fully loaded machines to enter the

waypoints, select the Change check box, then select the Reassign Full
check box to update the value.
10. To allow the assignment of all empty machines to enter the waypoints,
select the Change check box, then select the checkbox to the right of
Reassign Empty to update the value.
11. To send all machine states and position information upon entering the
waypoints, select the Change check box, then select the On Entry
check box to update the value.
12. To send all machine states and position information upon exiting the
waypoints, select the Change check box, then select the On Exit check
box to update the value.
13. If you want to save your changes and continue editing, click Apply.

Machine Tracking
If you made changes using Site Editor, the changes are only applied
when you click Apply in Site Editor.
If you make changes using Site Monitor, the changes are applied
straight to the Database.
Bulk editing roads

 To bulk edit selected roads
1. Select the roads you wish to edit manually, or using fence select.
2. Right-click on one of the roads and click Edit Roads.
3. To move roads in or out of the current selection, click Select.
4. Select roads to Include or Exclude and use the arrows to move them
between the Include and Exclude lists.
5. Click OK.
6. To change the speed limit of the road segments, select the Change
Speed Limit check box and enter the required speed in the numeric
field. The default speed limit is displayed.
7. To change the tax class, select the Change Tax Class check box and
select a tax class from the list. The default tax class is displayed.
8. To change the description of the surface condition of the road segments,
select the Change Condition check box. Enter the description in the
text field.
9. To change the rolling resistance value for the road segments, select the
Change Rolling Resistance check box. Enter the percentage of
resistance in the numeric field. The default rolling resistance is
displayed.
Step numbers 11 and 12 require you to select two check boxes, one to
perform the Change operation, and an associated check box to update the
value.
10. To use dynamic travel times select the Change check box, then select
the Use Dynamic Travel Times check box to update the value.
11. To set passing options on the road segments, select the Change check
box, then select the Passing Allowed check box to update the value.
12. To change the direction vehicles are permitted to travel in, select the
Change Allowed Travel check box. Set the direction by selecting either
Forward or Reverse.
13. To recalculate the Effective Flat Haul (EFH) value for haulage and final
roads, select Recalculate EFH. Recalculating the EFH also selects
Recalculate design times and Clear dynamic times.
14. To keep the design travel times for haulage roads, clear the Recalculate
design times check box.
15. To keep the dynamic travel times clear the Clear Dynamic Times check
box.

Machine Tracking
Managing travel conditions
16. To save your changes and continue editing data, click Apply.
17. To save your changes and exit, click Save.
If you made changes using Site Editor, the changes are only applied
when you click Apply in Site Editor.
If you make changes using Site Monitor, the changes are applied
straight to the Database.
Bulk archiving
Using Site Editor
 To bulk archive an object

1. Select the group of objects you wish to archive either manually, or using
fence select.
2. Right-click and select Archive. The objects you have selected
immediately disappear from your screen, and are marked for archiving.
3. Click Apply or Save. A warning dialog is displayed, confirming that you
wish to archive the objects you have selected, and the consequences of
doing so.
4. Click either Yes to commit your changes, or No to return to Site Editor.
Using Site Monitor
 To bulk archive an object

1. Select the group of objects you wish to archive either manually, or using
fence select.
2. Right-click and select Archive.
3. The Archive Assistant displays, showing the list of objects that will be
archived, and a panel informing you of the consequences of archiving
the selected objects.
Check the objects in the list, as well as the consequences of archiving them
carefully. If there are any objects you do not want to archive, clear the
relevant check box, or click Clear to deselect all of them.
4. If you want to archive all of the objects in the list and some have not
been selected, click Select All.
5. Click Archive.

This topic explains how to manage travel conditions.

Machine Tracking
Creating travel conditions

 To create a travel condition
1. Open Travel Condition Assistant.
2. Click New.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the travel condition.
4. In the Adjustment Factor field, enter the percentage used to adjust
road travel times. These adjusted times are used when the specified
travel condition is applied.
5. If you want to check that the details you have entered are correct, do the
following:
i. Click Validate.
• If the details you entered are correct, a Success dialog is
displayed.
• If the details you entered are incorrect, a Data Validation Error
dialog is displayed.
8. Click Cancel to exit Travel Conditions.
Editing travel conditions

 To edit a travel condition
2. In the Road Travel Conditions panel, select the road condition you
wish to edit.
3. Make the changes in the relevant fields in the right-hand panel.
4. To save your changes, click Apply.
Deleting travel conditions

 To delete a travel condition
2. In the Road Travel Conditions panel, select the road condition you
wish to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the road condition, click Yes in the

Machine Tracking
Viewing travel conditions

 To view a travel condition
• Open Travel Condition Assistant.
You can see all travel conditions that have been created in the Road
Travel Conditions panel on this page.

Material Tracking
Material Tracking
Introduction to Material Tracking
Introduction to Material Tracking

functionality. Material Tracking is the sub-system used to define materials on
a site and their grades. It provides a real-time view of material movements
from the office, the pit or a remote location.
• Managing grades.
• Managing mining block groups.
• Managing mining blocks and stockpiles.
• Managing material groups.
• Managing materials.
• Managing material mixes.
• Managing loader recipes.
• Managing blending.
Managing grades
This topic describes how to manage grades in the office software. This
includes creating, editing, deleting and viewing the following:
• Grades
• Mining Block Groups
• Mining Blocks
• Stockpile Blocks.
Creating grades
 To create a grade
1. Open Grade Finder.
2. Select the Grade folder, and click New. Grade Editor opens.
3. Enter a Name for the Grade.
4. Select the Grade Type from the Type list.
5. Select a Weight Average Method from the list.
6. Depending on the Grade Type you selected, you will see a Continuous
grade or a Discrete panel, with fields to enter information into. Enter the
required details on the panel.

Material Tracking
Managing grades
7. In the Continuous panel, do the following:

i. Select the appropriate Unit Type and Name from the drop-down
lists.
For example, if you are creating a Gold grade, from the Unit Type
list select ratio, and from the Unit Name list select [g/t].
ii. Enter Maximum, Desired, and Minimum grade values.
8. On the Discrete panel, do the following:
i. From the list of discrete values, select the value you want, and click
Select. If the value you want is not there, click New and add a
value.
9. If you want to add the grade and continue creating grades, click Add.
Editing grades
 To edit a grade
2. Navigate to the grade you wish to edit, and click Open. Grade Editor
opens.
Note: You can continue adding, selecting, or deleting grades using the New,
Delete and Select buttons without needing to leave the Grade Editor.
Deleting grades
 To delete a grade
2. Navigate to the grade you wish to delete, and click Delete.
3. If you are sure that you want to delete the grade, click Yes in the
Viewing grades
 To view grades
2. Navigate to the grade you wish to view, and click Open.

Material Tracking
Managing mining block groups
Managing mining block groups

This topic describes how to manage mining block groups. This includes
creating, editing, deleting and viewing mining block groups.
You need to create a mining block group before you can create mining
blocks.
Creating mining block groups

This topic explains how to create mining block groups. It does not matter
where in the hierarchy you are creating a mining block group, the procedure
is the same. A mining block group can either be a block or a stockpile.
 To create a mining block group

2. Navigate to the level in which you want to create the new mining block
group.
3. Click Group. Mining Block Group Editor opens.
4. Enter a Name and Description for the mining block group in the
relevant fields, for example block or stockpile.
5. If your site uses K Values to look up an external block model, enter the
value in the K Value field.
Editing mining block groups

 To edit a mining block group
2. Navigate to the mining block group you wish to edit.
3. Click Open. Mining Block Group Editor opens.
Deleting mining block groups

Before deleting a mining block group you must ensure that the group does
not contain any active blocks.
 To delete a mining block group


Material Tracking
Managing mining blocks and stockpiles
2. Navigate to the mining block group you wish to delete.

3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the mining block group, click Yes
in the confirmation dialog.
Viewing mining block groups

 To view a mining block group
1. Open Mining Block Finder. The hierarchy of mining block groups is
displayed.
2. Navigate to the mining block level you wish to view.
3. If you wish to view the current attributes of a mining block group,
navigate to that mining block group and click Open.
4. You can toggle the display of archived mining block groups by clicking
the Toggle archived items button on the toolbar.

This section describes the procedures for managing mining blocks and
stockpiles.
Creating mining blocks and stockpiles

You create stockpile blocks and stockpiles in the same way that you create
mining blocks and groups.
 To create a mining block or stockpile

2. Navigate to, and click, the mining block group in which you wish to
create the mining block or stockpile.
3. Click New. Mining Block Editor opens.
4. Enter a suitable name for the mining block in the Name field. Mining
blocks are usually named according to their position in the mine and the
associated material.
5. Select the required engine from the Grade Engine list
7. In the Materials section do the following:
i. From the Material list, select the material to which this grade
applies.

Material Tracking
ii. In the Mass and Volume rows, double-click the Mined and
Original fields and enter the appropriate values.
8. Select the Active, Read–only and Stockpile options as required.
If the mining block is not being mined, and you don’t want it to display in
the list of mining blocks in onboard software or in editor pages, then do
not select the Active check box.
9. If you selected Stockpile, select the Stockpile from the list.
10. From the Locked Destination list select the appropriate destination.
This means that any trucks loaded with this material from this mining
block can only unload at the specified destination.
11. Click the Grade tab.
12. In the Continuous section, double-click the Value field and enter the
appropriate value.
13. In the Discrete section, select a value for the grade from the Value list.
14. Click the Coordinates tab.
15. For each set of coordinates, do the following:
i. From the Unit list, select the required unit of measurement for the
coordinates.
ii. Click Add to create an empty row in the table.
iii. Double-click the X, Y, and Z fields to enter the coordinates of a
vertex of the mining block. The minimum number of coordinates
you can enter is four.
If you make an error you can click Delete and start again.
16. Click the Alternates tab.
Alternates, or child mining blocks, contain different material from the
parent mining block.
i. Click Add to create an empty row in the table.
ii. Click the ID field and select a number from the list.
iii. Click the Material field and select a material from the list
iv. Click the Destination field and select a destination from the list.
If you make an error you can click Delete and start again.
Editing mining blocks and stockpiles

You edit stockpile blocks and stockpile groups in the same way that you edit
mining blocks and groups.
 To edit a grade or stockpile

2. Select the mining block or stockpile that you want to edit.

Material Tracking

4. Edit the mining block attributes as required.
Deleting mining blocks and stockpiles

This topic explains how to delete inactive mining blocks and stockpile block
details. You should not delete an active mining block from the office software.
Doing so may prevent data associated with the mining block from being
accessed from the historical database. You can only delete mining blocks
that are archived, and you must be in Expert Mode to do so.
You delete stockpile blocks and stockpile groups in the same way that you
delete mining blocks and groups.
 To delete a mining block or stockpile

2. Navigate to the required mining block or stockpile in the hierarchy.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the mining block or stockpile, click
Yes in the confirmation dialog.
Viewing mining blocks and stockpiles

 To view a mining block or stockpile
1. Open Mining Block Finder. The hierarchy of mining block groups is
displayed.
2. Navigate to the mining block or stockpile group level you wish to view.
3. Double-click the mining block or stockpile group to view the mining block
hierarchy.
4. If you wish to view the current attributes of a mining block or stockpile,
navigate to that mining block and click Open.
 To view archived mining blocks or stockpile

2. Click the Toggle display of archived items button on the toolbar. All
archived mining blocks and stockpiles are then displayed in the same
hierarchical structure as current mining blocks.
3. Navigate to the archived mining block or stockpile group level you wish
to view.
4. Double-click the archived mining block or stockpile group to view the
archived mining block hierarchy.

Material Tracking
5. If you wish to view the attributes of an archived mining block or

stockpile, navigate to that mining block and click Open.
This topic explains how to activate and deactivate mining blocks and
stockpiles.
Activating mining blocks or stockpiles

 To activate a mining block or stockpile
2. Navigate to the mining block or stockpile that you want to activate. You
can select any number of mining blocks or stockpiles from anywhere in
the hierarchy.
3. Right-click the mining block or stockpile to display the shortcut menu.
4. Click Activate. The icon associated with the mining block or stockpile
changes to indicate the new status.
Destinations typically have a long list of mining blocks associated with them.
To make this list easier to work with, when you create a mining block or
stockpile you can specify that individual mining blocks be active or inactive.
See To create a mining block or stockpile.
Only active mining blocks or stockpiles appear when selecting the default
mining block for a loading tool and on onboard displays.
Note: You must make inactive blocks Active before you can access them.
Deactivating mining blocks and stockpiles

 To deactivate a mining block
2. Navigate to the mining block or stockpile that you want to deactivate.
You can select any number of mining blocks or stockpile from anywhere
in the hierarchy.
4. Click Deactivate. The icon associated with the mining block or stockpile
changes color to indicate the new status.
Archiving mining blocks and stockpiles

This topic explains how to archive and extract mining blocks or stockpiles.
Once a mining block or stockpile has been mined out, you can archive the
block to remove it from the list of current mining blocks. Mining blocks and
stockpiles can be returned from the archive to a status of current should the
need arise.

Material Tracking
Managing material groups
 To archive a mining block or stockpile

You can only archive deactivated mining blocks or stockpiles.
2. Select the mining block or stockpile that you want to archive. You can
select any number of mining blocks or stockpiles from anywhere in the
hierarchy.
4. Click Archive. The mining blocks or stockpiles you selected are
removed from the current hierarchy.
Importing mining blocks and stockpiles

Mining block data is imported by running a standard job, using Job Runner.
Refer to Creating jobs on page 3.5 of the Platform chapter for more
information and procedures for running jobs.
Managing material groups

This topic explains how to create, edit, delete, and view material groups.
Creating material groups

 To create a material group
1. Open Material Finder.
2. Navigate to where you want to create a material group.
3. Click Group. The Material Group Editor dialog opens.
4. Enter a Description for the group.
The group you have created is displayed in the hierarchy. You may need
to refresh your screen to see the group.
Editing material groups

 To edit a material group
2. Select the group you wish to edit.
3. Click Open.
4. Make the required changes to the name and/or description.
5. Click Apply.

Material Tracking
Managing materials
Deleting material groups
Note: You can only delete a material group if it does not contain any
materials.
 To delete a material group

2. Select the group you wish to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the material group, click Yes in
Viewing material groups

 To view material groups
1. Open Material Finder. The hierarchy of material groups is displayed.
2. Navigate to the material group level you wish to view.
3. Double-click the material group to view its hierarchy.
4. If you wish to view the current attributes of a material group, navigate to
that group and click Open.
empty folders button on the toolbar.
Managing materials
This section describes the procedures to create, edit, delete and view
materials, and how to update your mine model.
Creating materials
 To create a material
2. Navigate to the group in which you want to create a material.
3. Click New. Material Editor opens.
4. Enter a Name and Description for the material.

Material Tracking
Managing materials
5. On the General tab do the following:

i. Enter values in the following optional fields if required:
• Enter the CAES Code used to identify the material.
• Enter the Loose density value of the material after excavation.
• Enter the Bank density value of the material before excavation.
ii. Select a material measurement from the Unit list.
iii. If you want to associate a color with a material, do the following:
• Click the button beside Color to display the Select Color dialog.
• On the Swatches tab select a predefined color, or create your
own using the HSB or RGB tabs.
• Click OK to apply the color.
This color is also used for the mining block and appears on the Site
Monitor to assist with material identification. If you change the color
associated with a material, the change also takes place on the Site
Monitor.
6. On the Grades tab, assign any required grades to the material.
If you are using grade determination, it is recommended that all
materials have the same grades associated with them.
7. Click the Discrete tab and ensure that the assigned grade values are
correct. If you have assigned more than one discrete grade name, click
the name in the Grade Name list to review the assigned values.
8. Click the Continuous tab and ensure that the assigned grade values
are correct.
9. Double-click the Maximum, Desired, or Minimum values fields if you
need to change the values.
Editing materials
 To edit a material
2. Navigate to the material you want to edit.
3. Click Open. Material Editor opens.
4. Edit the material definition as required.
You cannot change the type of an existing grade. For example, grade
definitions cannot be changed from discrete to continuous.

Material Tracking
Managing materials
 To change the color associated with a material

2. Navigate to the material you want to edit.
3. Click Open. Material Editor opens.
4. On the General tab, the button beside Color to open the Select Color
dialog.
5. On the Swatches tab select a predefined color from the swatch, or
create your own using the HSB or RGB tabs.
This color is also used for the mining block and appears on the Site
Monitor to assist with material identification. When you change the color
associated with a material, the change also takes place on the Site
Monitor.
6. Click OK to apply the color.
7. If you want to save your changes and continue adding data, click Apply
Archiving materials
 To archive a material
2. Navigate to the material you want to archive.
3. Click Archive.
4. If you are sure that you want to archive the material click Yes in the
Materials are unavailable when archived.
Restoring materials
 To restore a material
2. Click the Toggle button on the toolbar.
3. Select the material you want to restore and click the Restore button.
If you are sure that you want to restore this material, click Yes in the

Material Tracking
Managing material mixes
Deleting materials
You must be in Expert Mode to delete a material
Note: You can only delete a material that is not associated with a mining
block. A message dialog displays indicating that you are unable to
delete material where a mining block association exists.
 To delete a material
2. Navigate to the material you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the mining block, click Yes in the
Note: There is no undo functionality in the office software. Deleted

items are permanently removed from the database.
Even if you recreate a material and give it the same name as a

previously available material, with the same attributes and grades, the
office software recognizes the material as a completely new material. Be
very sure that you need to delete a grade before doing so.
Viewing materials
 To view materials
2. Double-click a material group to view the materials within it.

This topic explains how to create, edit, delete, and view material mixes.
Creating material mixes

 To create a material mix
1. Open Material Mix Editor.
2. Click New to enter edit mode.
3. Enter a Name and Description for the material mix.

Material Tracking
4. If you want to select individual materials, select a material from the

Exclude list, and click “>” to add the required materials to the Include
list.
5. If you want to select all materials in the Exclude list, click “>>” to add all
of the listed materials to the Include list.
Once you have defined material mixes, you can start adding them to various
processors. You can add one or more material mix to any processor to
achieve the final required mix.
 To add a material mix to a processor

Using material mixes overrides all previous materials allowed for a
processor.
2. Select the Processor tab.
3. Select the row of the Processor to which you wish to add materials.
4. Double-click the Allowed Materials cell for the required processor. The
Select Materials dialog is displayed.
5. Click Browse to choose the material mix you require.
6. In the Include column, select the check box for the material mix that you
want to use for this processor.
7. Click OK.
Editing material mixes

 To edit a material mix
2. In the Material Mixes panel on the left, click the material mix you wish to
edit.
3. Make the changes required in the right-hand panel.
4. If you want to rename the material mix, make the change in the Name
field.

Material Tracking
Managing loader recipes
Deleting material mixes

 To delete a material mix
2. In the Name column, click the material mix you wish to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the material mix, click Yes in the
Viewing material mixes

 To view a material mix
2. All material mixes are displayed in the Name column.

This topic explains how to create, edit, delete, and view loader recipes, and
how to send the recipes to machines.
Creating loader recipes

Before you can use loader recipes in your mine, you need to specify a
category of machines to function as Loaders. You also need to create the
actual loader recipes and send them to the required machines. The creation
of loader recipes and how to send them to Loaders is covered in the section
below.
Creating loader recipes is essentially a two step process:
1. Creating the recipe in the office.
2. Sending that recipe to the Loaders.
Any number of recipes can exist in the office software, but only one can exist
on any single Loader at one time. As soon as you send another recipe to an
Loader, it replaces any pre-existing .
 To create a loader recipe

1. Open Loader Recipe Finder.
2. Click New to add a new Loader Recipe.
3. In the Recipe Name field enter a suitable name for the recipe.
The first Version of a recipe is always zero. Each time you change and
save the recipe, the version number increments by one.

Material Tracking
i. In the Select column, select the check box for each of the required
Machine Activities for this loader recipe.
4. If you want to save your changes and continue adding recipes, click
Add.
Sending loader recipes to machines

 To send a loader recipe to a machine
1. Open Loader Recipe Sender.
2. Select the required recipe from the Name list in the left-hand panel, and
click Open. The Loader Recipe Sender Editor dialog opens.
3. Select the Loaders you wish to send the recipe to. If you want to send
the recipe to all Loaders, select the Loaders check box.
4. Click Send Recipe. The Loader Recipe Update Progress dialog is
displayed, showing you the sending progress, including any errors
encountered during the process.
5. Click Close when the recipe has been sent.
Editing loader recipes

 To edit a Loader Recipe
2. Select the recipe you wish to edit from the Loader Recipes list and click
Open.
Deleting loader recipes

 To delete a Loader Recipe
2. Select the recipe you wish to delete from the Loader Recipes list.
3. If you are sure that you want to delete the loader recipe, click Yes in the

Material Tracking
Managing blending
Viewing loader recipes

 To view a loader recipe
1. Open Loader Recipe Editor.
2. Select the recipe you wish to delete from the Loader Recipes list.
3. Details for that recipe are shown in the Details tab.
Managing blending
This topic describes the blending workflow, defining blends, and how to
create, copy, archive and restore blends.
Blending workflow
A blend is a component of Production Requirements, enabling you to satisfy
specific production goals. Before using Blending, you need to define your
blends and production goals. Do this by following the workflow described in
the following procedure.
 To set up blending
1. Define your Blends, using the Blend Editor.
2. Define your Production Requirements, including your Blending goals,
using the Production Requirements Editor.
3. Monitor production through KPIs shown on the tabs in the Fleet Update
Assistant.
Defining blends
Define your blends using the Blend Editor.
 To define a blend
1. Open Blend Editor.
2. Enter a Name for the blend.
It is recommended that you define and use an appropriate naming
convention for a blend name that is relevant to you, for example, the
sink and a blend combination.
3. Select a Unit from the list beside the Control Quantity field, either mass
[t] or time [s], and then enter the Control Quantity.
If your Unit Set in Supervisor is set to miningSI, the control quantity is
defined over a mass as tonnes, (e.g. 5,000 tonnes), if set to
miningImperial the control quantity is defined over a mass in tons. Time
is defined in seconds, (e.g. 1800s), and the control quantity should be

Material Tracking
Managing blending
set to as large a value as possible in order to minimize production

constraints.
Note: Control Quantity can be based on either mass or time.
Minimum mass should be at least five times greater than the size
of your largest truck. This allows Assignment to effectively and
efficiently satisfy blending and production requirements.
Minimum time should be 30 minutes (1800s).
4. Select which Materials are allowed within the blend. The default is all
materials are disallowed.
5. You can Add these settings and continue with the procedure below, or
click Save to save the blend and exit Blend Editor.
 To create a new blend

Once you have defined your blend, you can continue with entering the details
of continuous and discrete grades and their required values, to create your
blend.
Note: You are able to define blends containing both continuous and discrete
grades.
Continuous Grades
1. In the Continuous Grades panel, click Add.
2. Click in the Grade column. This will display a list of available continuous
grades relating to the Allowed Materials you selected earlier.
3. Select the required grade.
Note: The system will fill in the Unit Type field with the Unit Type associated
with the grade you have selected.
4. In the Min field, enter the minimum acceptable value of that grade for
the blend.
5. In the Max field, enter the maximum accepted value of that grade for the
blend.
Note: The Maximum Value for a Continuous Grade cannot be less than the
Minimum Value

Material Tracking
Managing blending
You cannot specify the same continuous grade in more than one criteria
within the same blend.
Discrete Grades
1. In the Discrete Grades panel, click Add.
2. Click in the Grade column. This will display a list of available discrete
grades relating to the Allowed Materials you selected earlier.
3. Select the required grade.
4. Click in the Grade Value column, this will display a list of available
continuous grades relating to the Discrete Grade you selected.
5. In the Min (%) and Max (%) fields, enter the minimum and maximum
required percentages of the selected discrete grade.
For example if you require a 50:50 split across two grade values with a
+-5% tolerance (absolute), select the appropriate grade and values and
enter a Min% and Max% of 45% and 55% respectively.
Note: The Maximum Value for a Discrete Grade must be at least 10%
greater than the Minimum Value.
You cannot specify the same combination of discrete grade and value in
more than one criteria.
Materials
1. In the Materials panel, click Add.
2. Click in the Material column. This will display a list of available
materials.
3. Select the required material.
4. In the Min (%) and Max (%) fields, enter the minimum and maximum
required percentages of the selected material.
Note: The Maximum Value for a Material must be at least 10% greater than
the Minimum Value.
5. Click Add to continue creating or editing the blend.

6. Click Save to finish creating the blend, and start creating a new blend.
You should repeat the process until all blend requirements have been
entered into the system.
Entering more than five blending constraints may adversely affect the
efficiency of operations and it may not be possible to actually produce a
blend with those values.
You cannot specify the same material in more than one criteria

Material Tracking
Managing blending
 To edit a blend
Note: Once a blend has been used in a Production Request you are no
longer able to edit that blend. When you open a blend that has been
used, all of the fields will be uneditable. You will have to define a new
blend or copy the original and give it a new name.
1. Open Blend Assistant.

2. Select the blend you wish to edit, and click Open. You can also right-
click on the blend and click Open.
3. Make the necessary changes and click Apply to save your changes and
continue editing the blend, or Save to save your changes and exit the
editor.
 To copy a blend
2. Select the blend you wish to copy, and click Copy. This creates a copy
of the blend you have selected, and opens it in the Blend Editor.
3. Change the blend name from Copy of x-axes. You do not have to
change the blend name if you wish to identify that it is a copied blend.
4. Make the necessary changes and click Apply to save your changes and
continue editing the blend, or Save to save your changes and exit the
editor.
Notes on archiving, restoring, and deleting blends

• You must be in Expert Mode to be able to delete blends. If you do not
have this level of access, you will be able to archive and restore blends,
but not delete them.
• If you attempt to delete a blend that is referenced by any production
request or any template, then a message dialog is displayed and you will
be unable to delete the blend.
• If you attempt to archive a blend that is referenced in the active
production request or in ANY production request template, a message
dialog is displayed (listing the active production request and any
templates) and you will not be able to archive the blend.
• If you attempt to archive a blend that is referenced in one or more
historical production request and is NOT referenced in any templates,
then a warning dialog is displayed (listing the referencing production
requests) and you will be able to continue with the archiving, or cancel.
 To archive a blend

Material Tracking
Managing blending
2. Select the blend you wish to archive, and click Archive. You are asked if
you want to archive the blend.
3. Click Yes. The blend is removed from the Blend Assistant.
 To restore a blend
2. On the toolbar, click the Toggle the display of archived icons button.
Blend Assistant now includes blends that have been archived.
3. Find and click the blend you wish to restore. The Archive button and the
bottom of the screen changes to Restore.
4. Click Restore. You are asked if you want to restore the blend.
5. Click Yes. The blend is restored in Blend Assistant.
6. Click the Toggle the display of archived icons button again to hide
archived blends.
Viewing your blending goals in Fleet Update Assistant

You can view your blending goals via the Fleet Update Assistant. Blending
goals are displayed as a graphical embedded dashboard with one dial for
each goal. The statistics are shown in real time.
 To view blending goals in Fleet Update Assistant

2. On the toolbar, click the Configure Properties button.
3. On the Pages tab, in the Exclude panel, select Blending Goals and
move it into the Include column.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the Blending Goals tab to see each of your goals displayed as a
graphical dial.

Material Tracking
Managing blending

Operator Management
Operator Management
Introduction to Operator Management

functionality. Operator Management is the sub-system used to manage
personnel, their safety, their licenses, scheduled breaks and shift changes.
• Managing absences.
• Managing machine licenses.
• Managing workgroups and personnel.
• Managing safety records.
• Managing scheduled breaks.
• Managing shift changes.
• Managing transport vehicles.
Managing absences
This topic explains how to manage absence types.
Creating an absence type

 To create an absence type
1. Open Absence Type Editor.
2. Click New.
3. In the Name field, enter the name of the absence type.
Validate.
Deleting an absence type

 To delete an absence type
1. Open Absence Type Editor.
2. Select the absence type you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
Managing machine licenses

This topic explains how to manage machine licenses.
Creating a machine license

Before you start creating machine licenses, ensure you have created fleets.

Operator Management
1. Open Machine License Editor.

2. Click New.
3. In the license name field, enter the name of the machine license.
4. In the Fleet panel, select the fleet to which the license applies.
5. In the Active Holders panel, include the personnel with an active
license of the type you are creating, and Exclude those who do not have
an active license.
Editing a machine license

2. From the Name panel on the left, select the machine license name you
want to edit.
3. In the Fleet panel, select the fleet to which the license applies.
4. the Active Holders panel, include or exclude license holders where
necessary.
Deleting a machine license

2. From the Name panel on the left, select the machine license name you
want to delete.
3. If you are sure that you want to delete the machine license, click Yes in
Managing work groups and personnel

This topic explains how to manage workgroups and personnel.
Creating work groups

 To create a work group
1. Open Personnel Finder.
2. Click Group. The Create Work Group dialog is displayed.
3. Enter a name for the work group and click OK.
Work groups are displayed in alphabetical order.

Operator Management
Editing work groups

 To edit a work group
2. Navigate to the work group you want to edit and click Open. The Edit
Work Group dialog is displayed.
3. Edit the work group name and click OK.
Deleting work groups

 To delete a work group
2. Navigate to the work group that you want to delete, and click Delete.
3. If you are sure that you want to delete the work group, click Yes in the
Viewing work groups

 To view a work group
2. Navigate to the work group that you want to view, and click Open.
Creating personnel
The office software does not require that personnel be entered into the
system, but better monitoring and reporting is possible if all machine
operators are part of your mine model. Some reports cannot be used if
personnel are not entered.
Site personnel are sorted alphabetically within their respective work groups.
You can drag personnel between work groups if you need to change the
group to which they belong.
 To create a person
You can use the Personnel Summary page to create a person if you do not
want to create work groups.
2. Navigate to the work group to which you want to add personnel, and
click New. Personnel Editor opens.
3. In the Name field, enter the preferred name of the person.

Operator Management
4. In the Personnel ID field, enter the personnel ID of the person.

5. On the Licenses tab, do the following:
i. Click New.
ii. From the License list on the right, select the license the person
has.
The licenses in the left panel become unavailable so that you
cannot select another license while you are creating a new one.
iii. From the Date Acquired calendar, select the date the person
acquired their license.
iv. From the Last Use Date calendar, select the last date the license
was used, i.e. when did they last use log in to a machine using this
license. Note that you are only able to change this field if you are a
Mine Builder.
When an operator is set for a machine, the Last Use Date of every
license containing that machine is updated. This happens
regardless, whether the license is current or not.
You can use Reporting with parameters for Last Use Date and
Date Acquired to summarize operators with upcoming license
issues.
v. From the Temp. Expiration Date calendar, select the temporary
expiry date of the license if required.
If there is no expiry date for the license, click None.
The Expire Date field is always disabled, showing a dimmed date.
This date is the Date Acquired plus the Maximum License

Duration, which is configured in Supervisor.
The Unused Expire Date is always disabled, showing a dimmed

date. The date is the Last Use Date plus the Unused License
Duration, which is configured in Supervisor.
vi. Once you have entered all the licensing details, you must select the
Ticketed check box to enable the license. If it is not selected, the
license details are saved in the system, but not enabled. This
means that when the Operator attempts to log in to TOPE on a
machine an error is displayed informing them that they do not have
an appropriate license.
vii. Click Apply to add the license to the Machine licenses table and
continue adding details.
The office software does not prevent an operator from operating a
piece of machinery if they do not have a suitable license, but their
name appears in red in the relevant monitor pages.
An operator may be set to a machine by a person actually logging

on to the machine, or by an office software Operator setting the
operator in the Machine Editor or Machine Assistant pages.

Operator Management
6. Click the Contact Details tab.

7. In the Details section do the following:
i. In the Address 1 and Address 2 fields, enter the person’s
address.
ii. In the City field, enter the City the person lives in.
iii. In the State field, enter the State the city is in.
iv. In the Zip Code, enter the Zip Code of the City.
v. In the Phone (h) field, enter the person’s home telephone number.
vi. In the Phone (m) field, enter the person’s mobile telephone
number.
8. In the Emergency Contact Details section do the following:
i. In the Name field, enter the name of the person to contact in an
emergency.
ii. In the Phone field, enter the telephone number of the person to
contact in an emergency.
9. Click the Employee Details tab, and do the following:
i. In the Tech Level field, enter the technical level of the person.
ii. In the Department field, enter the department the person is a
member of.
iii. In the Position Description field, enter a description of the
person’s position.
iv. In the Primary Supervisor field, enter the name of the person’s
primary supervisor.
v. From the Hire Date list, select the date that the person was hired.
vi. From the Crew list, select the crew the person is associated with.
vii. From the Work Group list, select the work group the person
belongs to.
10. Click the Security tab, and do the following:
i. In the Machine Password field, enter the person’s machine logon
password.
ii. Select the Maintenance User check box if the person is a
maintenance user only and does not need to be licensed to have
access to the machine, for example, a field technician.
11. Click the Shift Change tab, and do the following:
i. If the person is to be excluded from automatic equipment
allocations, select the Exclude From Equipment Allocation
check box.
ii. From the Allocation Date list, select the hire or seniority date to
use to define the allocation order for a group of personnel.
iii. Using the up and down arrows beside Allocation Priority, select
the allocation priority of equipment.

Operator Management
iv. Select the preferred equipment to include or exclude.

12. Click the Leave/Absences tab, and do the following:
i. Click New.
ii. From the Start Date calendar, select the first day the person will be
absent.
iii. From the End Date calendar, select the last day the person will be
absent.
iv. From the Reason For Absence list, select an explanation or
justification for the person being absent.
See Creating an absence type if there are no absence types for you
to select.
13. Click the Overtime tab, and do the following:
i. Click New.
ii. From the Start Date calendar, select the first day the person will be
working overtime.
iii. From the End Date calendar, select the last day the person will be
working overtime.
iv. From the Shift Type list, select the shift type to be worked.
Validate.
Editing personnel
 To edit details of a person
2. Navigate to the person whose details you wish to edit, then click Open.
Personnel Editor opens.
Archiving personnel
 To archive details of a person
2. Navigate to the person whose details you wish to archive.
3. Click on the person, and click Archive.
4. If you are sure that you want to archive this person’s details, click Yes in

Operator Management
Managing safety
Restoring personnel
 To restore details of a person
2. Navigate to the person whose details you wish to restore. You may need
to click the Toggle button on the toolbar to toggle the display of archived
personnel.
3. Click on that person, and click the Restore button on the toolbar.
4. If you are sure that you want to restore this person’s details, click Yes in
Deleting personnel
There is no undo functionality in the office software. Once an individual has
been deleted the details cannot be retrieved. Deleting personnel affects all
records in the office software that store personnel information.
You must be in Expert Mode to delete personnel.
 To delete a person from a work group

2. Navigate to the work group that contains the person you want to delete.
3. Click on the appropriate person and click Delete to delete the individual
from the database.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the person, click Yes in the
Viewing personnel
 To view a person’s details
2. Navigate to the person that you want to view, and click Open.
Managing safety
This topic explains how to manage safety items, actions, and records.
Note: After you have defined, or changed, your safety check items, you must
generate, upload, and activate the safety check data files on each machine.
You do this using the Onboard File Assistant.

Operator Management
Managing safety
Adding a safety item

 To add a safety item
1. Open Safety Checklist Editor.
2. On the Safety Checklist panel, click New.
3. On the Details tab, do the following:
i. In the Name field, enter the name of the machine component to be
inspected.
ii. In the Display Order field, enter the order in which to display the
check list items to the machine operator.
iii. Select a Load Status, either Common, Empty or Full. Select
Common for non-trucks, and those items which must be checked
regardless of the load status.
iv. Select a Category, either to Repair or Report Before Operating.
v. Select an Action to take if the safety check fails.
4. On the Machine Categories tab, do the following:
i. Select the machine categories to which you wish to send the safety
check list.
ii. If you want all the machine categories to have the safety checklist,
select the Machine Categories check box.
5. If you want to save your changes and continue creating safety items,
click Apply.
7. If you want to exit without saving your changes, click Cancel.
8. If you want to save your changes and add another item, click Save.
After you have defined, or changed, your safety check items, you must
generate, upload, and activate the safety check data files on each machine.
You do this using the Onboard File Assistant.
Editing a safety item

 To edit a safety item
2. On the Safety Checklist panel, select the safety item you wish to edit.
3. On the Details tab, make the changes required.
4. On the Machine Categories tab, make the changes required.
5. If you want to save your changes and continue editing safety items, click
Apply.

Operator Management
Managing safety
Deleting a safety item

 To delete a safety item
2. On the Safety Checklist panel, select the safety item you wish to
delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the safety item, click Yes in the
Viewing a safety item

 To view a safety item
• Open Safety Checklist Editor.
The safety items are all listed in the Safety Checklist panel.
Adding a safety check action

 To add a safety check action
1. Open Safety Check Action Editor.
2. Click New.
3. In the Name field on the right, enter the name of the action.
4. If you want to save your changes and continue adding safety actions,
click Apply.
7. If you want to save your changes and add another action, click Save.
Editing a safety check action

 To edit a safety check action
2. From the Name panel on the left, select the action you wish to edit.
3. In the Name field on the right, make the changes required.

Operator Management
Managing safety
4. If you want to save your changes and continue editing safety actions,
click Apply.
6. If you want to save your changes and edit another action, click Save.
Viewing a safety check action

 To view a safety check action
2. The actions entered are listed in the Name panel on the left.
Deleting a safety check action

 To delete a safety check action
2. From the Name panel on the left, select the action you wish to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the safety check action, click Yes
Editing a safety record
Note: You cannot create safety records. Safety records are created by the
system for each failed safety check item that occurs during operator
login. When the page is opened, by default only records that are not
actioned are displayed. Use the page configuration selector to toggle
the display of records.
 To edit a safety record

1. Open Safety Record Editor.
2. If the record has not been actioned and you wish to action it, select the
Item Actioned check box.
3. From the Date Actioned drop-down list, select the date on which the
item was actioned.
4. If you want to save your changes and continue editing safety records,
click Apply.

Operator Management
Managing scheduled breaks
7. If you want to save your changes and edit another record, click Save.
Deleting a safety check record

 To delete a safety check record
2. Select the record you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the safety check record, click Yes
Viewing a safety check record

 To view a safety check record
2. The actions entered are listed in the top panel.

This section explains how to manage scheduled operator breaks and
scheduled break allocation rules.
Creating a scheduled break

 To create a scheduled break
1. Open Scheduled Break Finder.
2. Click New. Create Scheduled Break opens.
3. From the Day calendar, select the date on which the shift starts.
4. From the Shift list, select the shift.
5. In the Break Name field, enter the name of this scheduled break.
6. In the field beside the Break Start Time date field, enter the start time
for the break either directly or by clicking the arrows to increase or
decrease the time value.
7. In the Number of Sessions field, enter the number of sessions by
clicking the arrows to increase or decrease the number.
8. In the Time Between Sessions field, enter the time between sessions
in hours and minutes by clicking the arrows to increase or decrease the
time values.

Operator Management
9. If you do not want to automatically allocate field equipment to the

scheduled break sessions, do the following:
i. Ensure the Automatically Allocate check box is not selected.
ii. Click OK.
10. If you do want to automatically allocate field equipment to the scheduled
break sessions, do the following:
i. Select the Automatically Allocate check box.
ii. Click OK. Automatic Allocation dialog displays.
iii. If you do want to replace existing allocations, select the Replace
Existing check box.
iv. If you want to edit the rules for the allocation, see To edit scheduled
break allocation rules
v. Click OK.
11. On the Equipment tab do the following:
i. If you want to exclude all equipment and operators from the
scheduled break, click Exclude All. Non operator machines are
automatically excluded.
ii. If you want to exclude specific operators from the scheduled break,
click the Exclude check box beside each one.
iii. If you want to lock specific operators to the scheduled break, click
the Lock check box beside each one. You may want to do this to
ensure that specific operators are not affected by changes to
allocation rules.
iv. If you want to change the break session for the operator, click in the
Session Number column and select a session number.
v. If you want to automatically allocate again, click Allocate
Sessions. The Automatic Allocations dialog displays.
vi. If you want to clear any of the allocations, click Clear Allocations
and select the required check box(es) in the Clear allocations
dialog.
vii. If you want to clear any of the session allocations, do the following:
• Click Clear Allocations. Clear Allocations dialog displays.
• To clear locked allocations, click Clear Locked.
• To clear automatic allocations, click Clear Automatic.
• To clear both automatic and locked allocations, click Clear All.
• Click OK.
12. On the Sessions tab do the following:
i. Check that previously entered session details are correct (start date
and time, number of sessions, duration).
ii. From the Truck Load State list, select the state of the truck.
iii. From the Delay Type list, select a delay type.

Operator Management
iv. From the Session Allocation Message list, select a message that
will be sent to inform the operator of the scheduled break.
v. In the Allocation Message Lead Time fields, enter the amount of
time before the break that the message will be sent to the operator.
vi. From the Session Imminent Message list, select a message that
will be sent to remind the operator that the scheduled break is
about to happen very soon.
vii. In the Imminent message lead time fields, enter the amount of
time before the break that the reminder message will be sent to the
operator.
viii.From the Cancellation Message list, select a message that will be
used to advise the operator that the scheduled break has been
cancelled.
ix. From the Update Message list, select a message that will be used
to advise the operator of any updates to the scheduled break.
13. On the Destinations tab do the following:
i. If you want to have refueling allowed on the equipment, select the
Refuelling Allowed check box.
ii. Move the destinations that you want to include into the Include list.
14. Select the Confirmed check box to activate the scheduled break details
as soon as they are saved. This cannot be reversed, however, the
scheduled break can be deleted if required.
15. Click Save.
Editing scheduled break allocation rules

 To edit scheduled break allocation rules
You will only need to do this procedure as part of the create or edit scheduled
break procedures.
1. In the Automatic Allocation dialog, click Rules... Session Allocation
Rules dialog displays.
2. In the Allocate Truck to Same Sessions group box, do the following:
i. If you want to allocate trucks to be in the same session as the first
loading tool to which they are locked for this session, select the
First locked Loading Tool check box.
ii. If you want to allocate trucks to be in the same session as all
loading tools to which they are locked for this session, select the
All Locked Loading Tools check box.
iii. If you want to allocate trucks to be in the same session as the
loading tool that last loaded them, select the Loading Tool That
Last Loaded Truck check box.
3. In the Session Allocation Order group box, do the following:
i. If you want to allow the allocations to be made in any order, select
<None> from the Select list.

Operator Management
ii. If you want the allocations to be made in ascending order of the

sessions, select Session Number - ascending from the Select list.
iii. If you want the allocations to be made in descending order of the
sessions, select Session Number - descending from the Select list.
4. In the Equipment Allocation Order group box, do the following:
i. If you do not want to specify an allocation order for equipment
classes, select <None> from the Equipment Class list.
ii. If you do want to specify an allocation order for equipment classes,
select <As specified> from the Equipment Class list and arrange
the classes in the order required.
iii. If you do not want to specify an allocation order for equipment,
select <None> from the Equipment list.
iv. If you do want to specify an allocation order for equipment, select
<As specified> from the Equipment Class list and arrange the
classes in the order required.
v. If you do want equipment allocations to be made in ascending order
within the class, select <Equipment Name - Ascending> from the
Equipment list.
vi. If you do want equipment allocations to be made in descending
order within the class, select <Equipment Name - Descending>
from the Equipment list.
5. Click OK.
Editing a scheduled break

 To edit a scheduled break
2. Select the scheduled break you want to edit.
3. Click Open.
4. To edit equipment details, click the Equipment tab and edit the details
as required.
5. To edit session details, click the Sessions tab and edit the details as
required.
6. To edit destination details, click the Destinations tab and edit the details
as required.
7. Edit other details as required. For instructions, see To create a
scheduled break
8. Click Save.
Deleting a scheduled break

 To delete a scheduled break

Operator Management
Managing shift changes
2. Select the scheduled break that you want to delete.

3. Click Delete. If the scheduled break was previously confirmed,
cancellation messages are sent to all field equipment. All scheduled
allocation and imminent messages are deleted.
Viewing a scheduled break

 To view a scheduled break
2. Select the scheduled break that you want to view, and click Open.
3. View as required, using the tabs.
Managing shift changes

This topic describes all tasks relating to Shift Change.
Shift change preparation

When preparing to set up a shift change, you should undertake the following
activities.
1. Record any leave for personnel who are rostered for the next shift, but
who require scheduled leave to be recorded using the Personnel
Summary.
2. Record any overtime for personnel rostered for the next shift but who
require scheduled overtime to be recorded using the Personnel
Summary.
3. Record any delays for equipment that will not be available at the start of
the next shift, but which does not yet have a scheduled delay recorded
using the Delay Editor.
Setting up a shift change

The following sections guide you through various procedures for setting up a
shift change. If you are setting up new shifts, it is recommended that you
follow the procedures in the order they are given.
Note: The data retention period for Shift Change is set by default to
Medium - 62 days in Supervisor. See the Workgroup Extensions in
the Supervisor Page Reference chapter of the Fleet Administration &
Configuration manual, for more information on Data Archiving
settings.

Operator Management
Allocating operators
You can allocate available operators either manually or automatically to
available equipment.
For available equipment, allocated operators can be seen in that machine’s
tab, (e.g. Loading Tool, Truck), in the Shift Change Editor.
You can see the allocated equipment for each available operator in the
Personnel tab.
Prior to allocating operators to equipment, the following configuration is
required.
Shift change allocation indicator
• Personnel, Trucks, Loading Tools, Processors and Auxiliary
Equipment need to specify whether shift change allocation is
required.
• For personnel, shift change allocation indicates that a person
available for a shift is eligible to be allocated as an operator to
equipment for the shift. You can specify this using the Shift Change
tab of the Personnel Editor.
• For equipment, shift change allocation indicates that a person is
required to be allocated to operate the equipment. You can specify
this using the General tabs of the Truck Editor, Loading Tool Editors,
Processor Editor and Auxiliary Equipment Editor.
 To allocate operators
1. Open Shift Change Editor.
If an entry is shown for the next shift, it means that a shift change has
been previously saved for the next shift. Do the following:
i. Select the entry for the next shift and click Open. This opens the
Shift Change Editor for the selected shift.
ii. If the selected shift is the current or a previous shift, a warning is
displayed, letting you know the shift has finished, or already started.
If there are no shift entries, this means that no shift changes have
previously been saved for the next shift. Do the following:
i. Click New. The Create Shift Change dialog displays.
ii. If the default shift shown is not the required shift, select the Date
and Name for the next shift. If the selected shift is the current or a
previous shift, a warning is displayed.
2. Click the Personnel tab, and do the following:
i. Ensure that the list of available operators requiring operator
allocation matches the expected list of operators requiring operator
allocation for the next shift.
Available operators
Available operators for equipment allocation are those available
personnel for the next shift that are not specified to be excluded

Operator Management
from equipment allocation. Available operators for equipment

allocation are listed in the Unallocated Operators list before
operators are allocated and can be determined from the Personnel
tab.
Available personnel for the next shift = (Personnel currently defined
as being in the crew rostered for the next shift) – (Personnel
recorded as being on leave for the next shift) + (Personnel
recorded as being on overtime for the next shift).
Operators shown in grey are not available for operator
allocation.
ii. Click the Exclude column to make an operator unavailable for the
next shift. Select a specific reason for them being unavailable.
Note: You must create Absence Types before you can exclude any
personnel. See To create an absence type on page 12.1.
You are also able to make operators unavailable for the next and future
shifts using the Personnel Editor.
iii. Click the Equipment column to manually allocate an operator to
specific equipment. Do this if the allocation cannot be made
automatically according to operator allocation priorities,
preferences and the allocation order defined when creating
allocation rules.
iv. To make unavailable equipment available, select the appropriate
equipment tab, e.g Loading Tools, Truck, and clear the Exclude
check box.
Available equipment
Available equipment for the next shift is the equipment that is not
scheduled to be on delay at the start of the shift.
Available equipment for operator allocation is the available
equipment that is specified for inclusion in operator allocation.
Available equipment for transport allocation is the available
equipment that is specified for inclusion in transport allocation.
Available equipment is listed in the Unallocated Equipment list
before operators are allocated and can be determined from the
various Equipment tabs.

Operator Management
3. Click Allocate and select the required options to automatically allocate

remaining available operators to remaining available equipment.
i. Review the operator allocations. If necessary, make changes to
operator allocation priorities, preferences, licenses, or the
allocation order defined in your allocation guideline, so that
operator allocations for future shifts will require less manual
intervention.
You can rerun automatic allocation of operators by selecting Replace
existing in the Allocation Rules dialog box, or run again to attempt to
automatically allocate more operators by not selecting Replace
Existing in the Allocation Rules dialog box.
ii. Manually make new allocations or change existing allocations.
Note: Changes to licenses and preferences are not automatically shown in

the Personnel tab of the Shift Change Editor unless the page is
refreshed.
Manual allocations are set to “Retain”. Allocations set to retain are not
removed during the automatic allocation of operators, even if “Replace
Existing” allocations is selected. If “Replace Existing” is selected,
existing allocations not set to retain will be replaced.
Advanced Allocation Rules
A good quality solution uses the allocation rules and the operator and
equipment allocation orders specified to determine operator allocations.
The objective of better and best solutions is to minimize the number of
operators and equipment that are not allocated. These solutions may
require the evaluation of many alternative solutions.
Evaluation of all solutions can take a lot of time. A good solution can
however be obtained reasonably quickly.
The limits for the quality of the automatic allocations solution and the run
time in attempting to find the quality limit can be specified. Specify
Advanced Allocation rules by doing the following:
i. Click Advanced.
ii. Move the slider to the appropriate Quality limit.
iii. Select a maximum Run Time.
If one of the limits specified is exceeded, the best solution at that time
will be returned. The default limits are good quality and a maximum run
time of 3 minutes.
An example of using advanced allocation rules is when your the goal is
to obtain a good solution in no more than 3 minutes.

Operator Management
Allocating shift change tie-downs

 To allocate shift change tie-downs
You will only need to do this procedure as part of the create or edit shift
change procedures, in which case the appropriate page will already be
displayed.
1. Click the Tie-down tab.
2. If you want to update the tie-down default values for all the machines as
per the changes in this session, at any time click Update Machine
Default Tie-Down Destinations.
3. To set the tie-downs for loading tools, do either of the following:
i. On the Tie-down tab, in the Loading Tools column for a specific
destination, double-click the cell on that row and select all loading
tools for that destination. Loading tools may be defined as their
own destination, therefore the list of destinations may include
loading tool names. These are usually colored blue.
ii. On the Loading Tool tab, click the item whose tie-down destination
details you want to change and edit as required.
4. To set the tie-downs for trucks, do the following:
i. On the Tie-down tab, in the Trucks column, for a specific
destination, double-click the cell on that row and select the required
trucks for that destination.
5. To assign the truck tie-downs, on the Tie-down tab click Suggest Truck
Tie-down Destinations and do the following:
i. To tie down all trucks to the tie-downs of the loading tools to which
they are locked, select the Use Truck Locks check box. Note that
if a truck is not locked to a loading tool it will not be allocated a tie-
down.
ii. To tie down trucks to the tie-downs of the last loading tool that they
used, select the Use Last Loading Tool check box.
iii. To use the default tie-down destination for all trucks, select the Use
Truck Default Shift Change Destination check box. Note that if a
truck does not have a default tie-down value it will not be allocated
a tie-down destination.
iv. If you want to replace the existing tie-down, select the Replace
Existing check box in conjunction with at least one of the other
options. If this is not done the new tie-downs will be appended.
v. Ensure that each loading tool has a tie down.
vi. Click OK.
6. To set the tie-downs for auxiliary equipment, do either of the following:
i. On the Tie-down tab, in the Auxiliary column, for a specific
destination, double-click the cell on that row and select the required
auxiliary equipment for that destination, or

Operator Management
ii. On the Auxiliary tab, click the item whose tie-down destination
details you want to change and edit as required.
7. To check that all loading tools have a tie-down allocation, do the
following:
i. Click the Loading Tools tab.
ii. Ensure that all values are as required.
8. To check that all trucks have a tie-down allocation, do the following:
i. Click the Trucks tab.
9. To check that all auxiliary equipment has a tie-down allocation, do the
following:
i. Click the Auxiliary tab.
10. If you want to create assignments to make trucks go to the tie-down
destination, do the following:
i. Select the Auto create TieDown Assignments check box.
ii. Using the Arrive After slider, select a time after which the truck
must arrive.
iii. Using the Arrive At slider, select a preferred time for the truck to
arrive.
iv. Using the Arrive Before slider, select a time before which the truck
must arrive.
v. Select the load state of the truck on arrival at the tie-down
destination from the Load State list.
vi. From the On Assignment Delay Type list, select the type of delay
to be applied when the truck is on the assignment of travelling to
the tie-down destination.
vii. From the On Arrival Delay Type list, select the type of delay to be
applied when the truck arrives at the tie-down destination.
viii.If you want to automatically log out all the operators on machines
that do not have onboard hardware for doing so, select Auto
Logout and do the following:
• Using the slider beside Auto Logout, select the exact time at
which they will all be logged out.
• From the Logout Delay Type list, select a delay to be applied
when logout occurs.
11. If you want to allocate personnel, continue on to the next section,
otherwise click OK.

Operator Management
Limiting shift change tie-downs

 To limit tie-downs
1. Click the Tie-down tab.
2. Click the Limit Tie Downs button.
The Limit Tie Downs Progress dialog displays.
This causes all of the scheduled assignments for the shift change to
have only one valid destination. It also ensures that, after the process
has finished, the expected tie-down destination for each truck is known.
3. If there are no details showing, click the Details >> button, otherwise
click Close.
After the process has completed you can still change the scheduled
assignments.
Note: If a manual assignment was made when the shift change scheduled
assignment is active, this would cause an issue with the known
destination for the truck. In order to highlight this, a popup displays
whenever a manual assignment is made replacing an active
scheduled assignment. The popup window has two buttons, OK and
Cancel. In this scenario, it is the office software Operator's
responsibility to inform the field and bus of any changes.
Allocating personnel at shift change

 To allocate personnel at shift change
You will only need to do this procedure as part of the create or edit shift
change procedures.
1. Click the Personnel tab.
2. To exclude operators who are not able to work on this shift, in the
Exclude column, click the cell to display a list of reasons and select
one.
Note: You must create Absence Types before you can exclude any
personnel. See To create an absence type on page 12.1.
3. To allocate a person to a specific piece of equipment, in the Equipment

column, click the cell to display a list and select one. This locks the
operator to that piece of equipment.
4. To enter a comment that you want the operator to read on the display
monitor at the beginning of the shift, do the following:

Operator Management
i. On the same row as the operator’s name, in the Comment column,

double-click the cell to activate it.
ii. Enter the comment. Note that the comment remains with the
operator and is not affected by other changes to the shift details.
5. If you want to allocate a loading tool, continue on to the next section,
otherwise click Save.
Specifying a supervisor for the shift

 To specify a supervisor for the shift
1. Open Shift Change Finder.
2. Select the required shift change from the list.
3. Click Open. Shift Change Editor opens.
5. Beside the Supervisor list, click Browse.
6. If you want to filter by crew, select a crew from the Crew Filter list.
7. Select the check box in the Include column beside the required name
for the supervisor. Note that only one selection is possible. This name
will be displayed in a fixed position at the top of the display monitor for
the shift.
8. Click OK.
9. Enter a comment in the Comment box if necessary.
Allocating transport vehicles

You can allocate transport vehicles in various ways. The most common
transport vehicle allocations are:
1. Predefined transport runs.
2. Manually allocating Loading Tools.
When predefining transport runs, you do the following:
• Automatically allocate equipment to transport vehicles by matching shift
changes destinations to transport runs.
When manually allocating Loading Tools to transport runs, you do the
following:
• Automatically generate transport runs based on the tie-downs of allocated
Loading Tools
• Automatically allocate equipment to transport vehicles by matching shift
changes destinations to transport runs
The Transport Vehicle Required list shows the available equipment that
has not yet been allocated to transport vehicles. You can see this by clicking
the Transport Vehicle tab, which shows the results of the allocations.

Operator Management
The driver for a transport vehicle that does not have a dedicated driver is
assumed to be the operator of the first Loading Tool allocated to the transport
vehicle in ascending Loading Tool name order.
Note that by matching equipment rather than actual operators, the transport
vehicle allocation ensures that there is a seat for all possible outgoing and
incoming operators. This means the transport allocations can be used for
transporting operators ending the shift and transporting operators starting the
next shift no matter whether a cold, warm or hot shift change is used.
 To predefine transport runs

1. Using the Shift Change Finder, open the Shift Change Editor for the next
shift.
2. Click the Transport Vehicles tab. Ensure that the list of available
transport vehicles for the shift change is as you expect.
i. Transport vehicles shown in grey are not available for transport
allocation.
ii. Select the Exclude check box to make a transport vehicle
unavailable.
Transport vehicles can be made unavailable for this and future
shifts by specifying in the Transport Vehicle Editor that the transport
vehicle is not available for transport allocation.
iii. If necessary update the runs specified for the transport vehicles.
3. Manually allocate any equipment whose operators must be transported
by a certain transport vehicle.
4. Automatically allocate remaining available operators to remaining
5. Review the transport allocations. As appropriate, make changes to the
resulting allocations.
i. If necessary, make changes to shift change destinations for
auxiliary equipment, or the allocation order defined in the allocation
guideline, so that transport allocations for future shifts will require
less manual intervention. Automatic allocation of transport vehicles
can be rerun (by selecting Replace Existing in the Allocation
Rules) or run again to try and automatically allocate more
operators (by not selecting Replace Existing in the Allocation
Rules).
 To manually allocate Loading Tools

1. Using the Shift Change Finder, open the Shift Change Editor for the next
shift.
2. Click the Transport Vehicles tab. Ensure that the list of available
transport vehicles for the shift change is as you expect.

Operator Management
i. Transport vehicles shown in grey are not available for transport

allocation.
ii. Select the Exclude check box to make a transport vehicle
unavailable.
Transport vehicles can be made unavailable for this and future shifts by
specifying in the Transport Vehicle Editor that the transport vehicle is not
available for transport allocation.
3. Manually allocate Loading Tools to transport vehicles.
4. Manually allocate any equipment whose operators must be transported
39by a certain transport vehicle. This will include any highly mobile
auxiliary equipment for which shift change destinations are not
specified.
5. If you need to clear all transport vehicle runs do the following:
i. Click Clear.
ii. Select Clear Transport Runs.
6. If you need to add common stations such as ready lines to the
appropriate transport vehicle runs, do the following:
i. Open Transport Vehicle Editor.
ii. Click the Run tab.
iii. Select the common stations in the Exclude panel and move them
to the Include panel.
iv. Click Save.
This causes auxiliary equipment with common shift change destinations
to be automatically allocated.
7. In Shift Change Editor, click Allocate, and do the following:
i. In the Transport panel, click Rules.
ii. Ensure that Add stations to runs for locked allocations rule is
selected.
Instead of adding common stations to appropriate transport vehicle
runs, a single auxiliary equipment for each common shift change
destination could be manually allocated. When autoallocating, the Add
stations for existing allocations rule would then add the common
stations to the transport vehicle runs.
8. Automatically allocate remaining available operators to remaining
9. Review the transport allocations. As appropriate, make changes to the
resulting allocations.
i. If necessary, make changes to shift change destinations for
auxiliary equipment, or the allocation order defined in the allocation
guideline, so that transport allocations for future shifts will require
less manual intervention. Automatic allocation of transport vehicles

Operator Management
can be rerun (by selecting Replace Existing in the Allocation

Rules) or run again to try and automatically allocate more
operators (by not selecting Replace Existing in the Allocation
Rules).
 To allocate transport vehicles manually

2. Select the appropriate equipment tab, e.g. Loading Tools, Trucks,
Auxiliary.
3. Allocate the transport vehicle in one of the following ways:
i. Click the Transport Vehicle column of the row of the equipment to
which you want to allocate the transport vehicle.
ii. Select the appropriate vehicle from the list.
Or
i. Click the Transport Vehicles tab.
ii. Select the row of the equipment to which you want to allocate the
transport vehicle.
iii. Double-click the Equipment column.
iv. Select the equipment for transport allocation in the Exclude panel
and move to the Include panel.
v. Click OK.
vi. Click Save.
Manual allocations are by default set to Retain. Allocations set to retain
are not removed during the automatic allocation of transport vehicles,
even if Replace Existing allocations is selected. If Replace Existing is
selected, existing allocations not set to retain will be replaced.
 To allocate transport vehicles automatically

2. Click Allocate.
3. Select the relevant options.
4. Click OK.
Existing allocations not marked as Retain will be removed if Replace
Existing is selected.
Equipment is allocated to transport vehicles according to the allocation
rules specified. The default allocation rules are the rules used for the
last automatic allocation by any user for any crew or shift for the system.
Equipment not allocated will still be listed in the Transport Required
list.

Operator Management
Shift change comments

Shift comments
You can enter comments for the shift on the General tab of the Shift Change
Editor. Comments can be up to 4000 characters.
Individual comments
You can enter comments for an individual allocation for available personnel
on the Equipment and Personnel tabs of the Shift Change Editor.
You can copy comments by selecting a comments cell and clicking Ctrl+C.
You can then paste the comments to another comments cell using Ctrl+V.
Alternatively, you can copy comments from or to another application such as
Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel.

Operator Management

Pit Link
Pit Link
Introduction to Pit Link
Introduction to Pit Link

functionality. Pit Link is the sub-system used to provide communication
between the office and the field ensuring optimum productivity and efficiency
of mine operations.
• Monitoring field communications.
• Monitoring the field network.
• Managing field events.
• Managing onboard files.
• Managing data transfer.
• Managing operator message groups.
• Managing operator messages.
Monitoring field communications

This topic explains how to monitor field communications. Field
Communications Monitor provides a real-time view of the raw data and
messages across the field. The information displayed depends on the
machine and message type selected.
Field Communications Monitor is a useful tool for debugging messages at
the edge of the radio network.
 To monitor field communications

1. Open Field Communications Monitor.
Details on Field Communications are shown in different panels on the
screen.
2. If you want to use a pre-defined page configuration, select one from the
list beside Page Configuration.
3. If you want to create a page configuration you can save and use again,
do the following:
i. Click [...] beside Machine to select the machines to include or
exclude.
ii. Click [...] beside Message to select the message types to include
or exclude.
iii. Select File.
iv. Click Save Page Configuration.
v. Enter a name for your page configuration.
4. If you want to view the IP addresses of the machine, rather than the
machine name, click Actions > Toggle Machine Address. This is
useful for debugging purposes.

Pit Link
Support tool for Field Communications Monitor
5. If you want to open a specific gateway file, click Actions > Open, then
navigate to your gateway files.
Note: You will probably already be connected to your gateway, therefore the
Actions > Open option will be dimmed. You need to click Actions >
Disconnect, then proceed to step 6.
6. If you want to connect to a specific gateway, click Actions > Connect,

then enter the Gateway Server and Port you wish to connect to.
Support tool for Field Communications

Monitor
This tool is to be primarily used by support staff off site.
The field communications monitor support tool allows support staff and other
authorized personnel to better interpret and analyze field communications
messages.
This tool can be accessed in the following ways.
1. Open Field Communications Monitor and click Actions > Export
messages to a TSV file.
2. In the Field Communications Monitor by clicking the Save messages to
a CSV file button on the toolbar.
3. Via the command line as an mstarrun target. See the mstarrun targets
chapter in your Fleet Administration & Configuration manual for more
information about mstarrun targets.
 Using the Field Communications Monitor tool through the

office software
2. To filter particular Machines and Messages you wish to Include or
Exclude in the export, click the Ellipsis button beside the field to select
the machines you wish to include or exclude, then click OK.
The machine filter and messages (gateway files) are passed from the Field
Communications Monitor to the export tool.
3. Select the Messages Properties and fields you wish to export using
the tree structure shown. If you do not select any, then by default no
fields are exported.
4. Click Save to save the query as a template for future use. The file,
default.gwc, is saved into your
mstarFiles\systems\main\config directory.
5. Click Load to load a template file already saved. The template contains
the machine filter, but you can override this by either editing the machine

Pit Link
filter using the Field Communications Monitor page, or by passing a

delimited list using the command line mode. If a template called
default.gwc already exists in the {MSTAR_SYSTEM}\config
directory, it will be loaded by default. This will save you some setup time.
The default.gwc file can be created using the Save template button
described in step 4.
6. Click Export to export the query as a gateway export file. The file is
saved into your mstarFiles\systems\main\data directory.
 Using the Field Communications Monitor tool via the

command line
1. Open a command line window.
2. Enter the command mstarrun GwmExport using any of the following
options:
mstarrun GwmExport [-c] [-b] [-o]
where:
-c allows you to specify a configuration file.
-b allows you to specify a bus url.
-o allows you to specify an output.
If you do not specify the bus url, raw values for parameters are output
instead of names, e.g. the truck ID is printed instead of the truck name.
The mstarrun GwmExport command can have the folder location of the
GWM files parsed after the command line. The command will process
all GWM files save in the specified folder. If no folder is specified, the
default is {MSTAR_BASE_CENTRAL]/messages
3. If you do not specify any options, the following is assumed:
• Configuration file name = {MSTAR_CONFIG}/default.gwc
• Output file = \gwm.tsv
• Bus Url = none
Third party interface (TPI)

Fleet supports the standardized VIIMS 3G protocol, enabling the office
software to communicate with third party machines that have been fitted with
the CAT® VIMS 3G TPI module. This allows mixed fleets to report all their
health information to the office software for total system integration and
machine management.
Fleet continues to support all previous VIMS communication protocols,
ensuring that older machines continue to operate as expected.

Pit Link
TMAC messages in Fleet

Receiving messages from VIMS
To ensure Fleet has been configured successfully, it is necessary to check
that messages are being received from machines in the field. To check
whether messages are being received, follow the procedure below.
 To confirm messages are being received from VIMS

2. Navigate to the Message ID column. If there are any of the following
TMAC messages in this column indicate that TMAC messages are
being received from VIMS.
• VimsTpmsDipper2
• VimsTpmsCysle
• VimsTpmsLoad
• VimsTpmsEventActivate
• VimsTpmsEventDeactivate
• VimsTpmsMode2
Note The truck must be performing cycles in order for these TMAC
messages to be sent to Fleet from VIMS.
 To verify TMAC messages

2. In the machine column, locate the Machine you want to verify is
receiving messages.
Note The machine may be identified by either the machine name or the IP
address. Verify in the MessageID column that any of the listed TMAC
messages listed above are being received.
Messages to CMPD
A StateChange TMAC message in the Message ID column indicates that the
CMPD is receiving TMAC messages from VIMS. This condition is valid if
VIMS has triggered the state change (i.e. body up, VIMSCycle).

Pit Link
Monitoring the field network
Monitoring the field network

This section describes the procedures for managing the field network. Field
Network Monitor provides a manageable view of the processed data and
information across the field.
Information displays depending on the fleet selected. The Field Network
page opens in Grid View by default.
 To monitor the field network

1. Open Field Network Monitor.
2. From the Fleet list, select the specific fleet you wish to view details for.
3. From the Page Configuration list, select the page configuration you
wish to use.
Machines being tracked are shown on the screen, and are color-coded
as per the legend at the bottom of the screen.
4. If you want to view field network information in table view, select
Actions > Table View.
5. If you want to view the event table, click Actions, then click Event
Table. This shows the messages coming in from the machines. Each
line of information on the event table corresponds with the information
coming into the Field Communications Monitor.
Managing field events

This section describes the procedures for managing field events.
Each page configuration displays a different view. The types of page
configuration are as follows:
• Load Events.
• Position Events.
• State Change Events.
• Assignment Required Events.
• Time Synchronization Error Events.
Monitoring field events

This topic explains how to monitor field events
 To monitor field events

1. Open Field Event Monitor.
2. In the Page Configuration list, select the configuration you wish to
view.
3. If you wish to monitor events from a specific truck, select a truck from
the Machine list

Pit Link
Managing onboard files

This topic explains how to generate files and upload them to machines.
There are three ways of activating files:
Automatically — where uploading the files will activate them automatically,
for example, Fleet files.
Manually — by uploading the files then rebooting the onboard computer, for
example, executable files.
Reboot only — after uploading the machine configuration files, you must
reboot the onboard computer to activate these files.
You can hover their mouse over any cell in the table to see the office version
number, the onboard version number, and the date the file was activated (if
known).
Selecting and generating files

 To select and generate files
This procedure will only update and regenerate files if the contents of the files
have changed. The office stores a copy of the latest files for each machine
type.
1. Open Onboard File Assistant.
2. If you want to select individual files to generate, select the appropriate
check box from the top row, for example, Material, Operator.
3. If you want to select all files, click Select All Files.
4. If you want to select only those machines from which you have received
a field event in the last five minutes, click Select Connected Machines.
5. Click Generate. A dialog displays progress.
Version numbers of files are only incriminated if the content of the file
has changed, so you are able to generate files as often as you want.
Files are only regenerated if their content has changed.
Uploading Files
You need to upload machine files to field equipment to keep the information
synchronized between the field and the office.
You can update both configuration files and data files.
 To upload out-of-date files to machines

2. Select the files you wish to upload, and the machines to which you wish
to upload the files.
3. Click Upload Out Of Date. A dialog displays progress.
You can also monitor the upload progress by opening Job Execution
Monitor.

Pit Link
 To upload selected files to machines

Use this procedure to upload files even if the files are not out-of-date.
2. From the list beside Page Configuration, select the configuration you
wish to use.
3. Do the following:
i. Select the files you wish to upload, and the machines to which you
wish to upload the files.
• If a file type table cell is gray, the file type does not apply to that
machine type.
• If a file type table cell is yellow, the onboard version number for
that file type is not yet known for this machine.
• If a file type table cell is white, you are not able to track the
version number for that file type because it is not versioned. You
can only see the date the file was created in the office.
4. If you are uploading Fleet files, click the Uploaded Selected button. A
dialog displays progress. Files are automatically activated after they are
uploaded to the machine.
5. If you are uploading Configuration files, do the following;
i. Click Build Card. You only need to do this once for this procedure
for trucks.
ii. Click Uploaded Selected.
iii. If you are uploading the Main Executable file, click Activate. This
file is a compressed file, which will automatically be unpacked
when activated. You can also click Activate when uploading
Configuration files.
You can monitor the upload progress by opening Job Execution Monitor.
Selecting all machines and files, then clicking Upload is the quickest
way to ensure that all machine have been updated.
 To upload files to a FLASH card

Note that this procedure is only relevant for trucks.
2. Select the trucks to which you wish to upload the files.
3. Click the Build Card button.
4. A dialog box displays progress.
You can also monitor the upload progress by opening Job Execution
Monitor.
5. When the files are transferred, click Close.
You can locate the files you have generated in your Onboard directory
for that machine. The files will be in the FLASH directory.

Pit Link
Pushing KPI data
You can now cut and paste these files onto the onboard equipment in
the truck.
 To manage onboard safety checklist configurations

You need to configure each onboard display to be required to present the
safety checklist as part of the login process. For onboard hardware displays,
this is achieved by using the following configuration keys in that machine’s
TOPE configuration file:
$ Checklist Required
$ Advanced Safety Check = 1
For more information, refer to your TOPE User Manual.
For Navigator and QNX file systems, refer to their respective User Manuals.
Updating files for TOPE

 To update files for TOPE
1. Ensure you have Supervisor set up correctly. Refer to the Fleet
Administration & Configuration manual, Onboard Hardware on
page 9.63
2. In the Machine Column, select the required machine.
3. Select the Backdrop check box.
4. Click Generate to create the TOPE backdrop file using your Supervisor
settings.
This creates the file (MSTAR_ONBOARD}/MineStar/backdrop.dxf
Pushing KPI data

Critical Production and Health information is available to machine operators
via CAES and TOPE on-board systems.You can send KPIs such as loader
tons per hour, truck tons per hour, and total tons per shift to machines to
enable the machine operators to monitor and improve performance.
Note: Before performing the following procedure, ensure you have set up
the CAES or TOPE interface to display the KPI windows required.

Pit Link
Managing data transfer
 To push KPI data

Configure the KPIs
1. Navigate to
c:\mstar\mstarHome\ext\Production\Production_Managem
ent\xml
2. Copy the entire onboardKPI folder.
3. Navigate to c:\mstarFiles\systems\main\config\xml and
paste the onboardKPI folder into the directory.
4. Open the onboardKPI folder, and then open the sample.xml file.
5. Edit the file as required so that it contains the KPIs you wish to push out
to the machines.
Note: Ensure that the source values align with the values used in
datasources.xml
6. Save the file with a different filename so that it is easier to identify.

7. Restart your system. Changes you have made are not picked up
until the CyclesKpiSummaries service is restarted.
Once your system has restarted, continue with the rest of the steps.
Pushing the KPIs
9. In the Machine Column, select the required machine or machines.
10. Select the KPI check box.
11. Click Generate to generate a KPI.mwf file for the machine(s).
12. Click Upload Selected to upload the file to the machine(s).
Managing data transfer

This topic explains how to monitor data transfer.
Monitoring data transfer

 To monitor the transfer of data
1. Open Job Execution Monitor.
All data files currently being transferred are shown in the top panel.
2. Select the task whose status you want to check.
3. If you want to view details of the task progress, click the Details tab.
4. If you want to view messages generated by the transfer, click the
Messages tab.

Pit Link
Managing operator message groups
5. If you want to view details of waiting tasks, click the Release Status tab.
6. If you want to see why transfers have failed, click the Failure Details
tab.
7. If you want to stop a job that is running, click Stop.
8. If you want to clear all the jobs that have finished but are still visible,
click Clear Finished.
If you generate files and do not upload them, they are not displayed in Job
Execution Monitor.
Managing operator message groups

This section explains how to manage operator message groups.
Creating operator message groups

 To create a message group
1. Open Standard Message Finder.
2. Navigate to the folder into which you want to add the new message
group, and click Group. Message Group Editor opens.
3. Enter the name of the new message group.
4. Select the check box if your message group contains safety messages.
When an operator logs in, and completes a safety checklist, a random
message is chosen from any message group folder called “safety
messages”. This message is then sent out as the Safety Message of the
Day to that operator.
As messages are chosen randomly from those available, the message
displayed may not be the same for all machines on any given day.
Note: If safety checklists are not used, the Safety Message of the Day is not
used.
5. On the Associations tab, select the check boxes for the classes of
machine in this group which are allowed to send messages. Message
groups with messages designed to be sent from the office should not
have any associations selected.
6. If you want to save your changes and continue creating message
groups, click Add.

Pit Link
Managing operator messages
Editing operator message groups

 To edit a message group
2. Navigate to the message group you want to edit, and click Open.
Message Group Editor opens.
3. Edit the message group as required.

4. If you want to save your changes and continue editing message groups,
click Apply.
Deleting operator message groups

If a group contains messages, the Delete button is dimmed.
 To delete a message group

2. Navigate to the message group you want to delete, and click Delete.
3. If you are sure that you want to delete the group, click Yes in the
Viewing operator messages groups

 To view a message group
2. Double-click the equipment type folder for the machine category you
want to view.
3. Select the message group you want to view.
4. Click Open to view current message group attributes.

This section describes the procedures for managing both standard and ad
hoc operator messages.
Creating operator messages

This topic explains how to create operator messages.

Pit Link
 To create an operator message

2. Navigate to the folder into which you want to add the new message, and
click New. Standard Message Editor opens.
3. In the Message text field, enter the text of the message.
4. In the Message window title field, enter the title of the message. This
appears as the title in the machine operator’s message window.
5. In the Message type list, select an appropriate message type.
6. If you do want a response to your message, from the On Board
Response list select a response type.
7. If you do not want a response to your message, click None.
8. If you are creating an operator message the office software will
automatically reply to, select the message the office software will use to
send the reply in the Office Response Std Msg drop-down.
9. If you want to save your changes and continue creating messages, click
Add.
Sending operator messages

This topic explains how to send operator messages to field equipment.
 To send a message
1. Open the Send Message Assistant.
2. Click the Equipment tab. A hierarchy of machines displays.
3. Navigate to the machine(s) to which the message is to be sent. Only
machines that have the Assignment interface configured in their
definition appear in the list of machines.
4. You can click Select All to send a message to all machines in your fleet.
This is especially useful in an emergency situation. Select Clear All to
clear all of the machines selected so that you can choose which
machines to send messages to.
5. Click the Message tab.
6. If you want to send a standard message, do the following:
i. Select the message in the Standard Messages list.
ii. Edit the message and message attributes as required.
iii. Click Send to send the message.
7. If you want to send an ad hoc message, do the following:
i. In the Message text field, enter the text of the message.
ii. In the Message window title field, enter the title of the message.

Pit Link
iii. In the Message type list, select the type of message.

iv. In the Response list, select either a response type if the message
requires a response from the operator or None if a response is not
required.
v. Click Send.
You can click the Clear button to reset all fields back to their default values.
Editing operator messages

This topic explains how to edit operator messages.
 To edit an operator message

2. Select the message to be edited.
3. Click Open. Standard Message Editor opens.
4. Edit the message as required.
5. If you want to save your changes and continue editing messages, click
Apply.
Deleting operator messages

This topic explains how to delete operator messages. Any standard
messages that you delete remain available on field equipment until you
update the onboard files.
 To delete a message
2. Select the message that you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the group, click Yes in the
Viewing operator messages

This topic explains how to view operator messages.
 To view a message
2. Navigate to the equipment type folder for the machine category you
want to view.

Pit Link
3. Select the messages you want to view.

4. Click Open to view current message attributes.

Pit Link

Production
Production
Introduction to Production
Introduction to Production
functionality. Production is the sub-system used to determine, record, report
and display production-related information.
• Managing cycles.
• Managing delay types and delays.
• Managing job code groups and job codes.
• Managing machine states.
• Managing fluids.
• Managing service records.
Managing cycles
This topic describes the procedures to manage cycles.As viewing and
filtering cycles are the most common tasks, these procedures are given first.
Viewing cycles
This topic explains how to view cycles.
 To view cycles
1. Open the Cycle Assistant.
2. From the Page Configuration drop-down list, select the type of machine
whose cycles you wish to view.
3. Display the required range of cycles and machines. See To filter cycles
on page 14.2.
Complete cycles are displayed by default.
4. If you want to show only complete cycles click Actions, then select the
Show Complete Cycles check box, otherwise only incomplete cycles
will be shown. Clear the other check boxes.
5. If you want to show only missing cycles, click Actions, then select the
Only Show Missing Cycles check box. Clear the other check boxes.
6. If you want to show interim cycles, click Actions, then select the Show
Interim Cycles check box. Clear the other check boxes. Interim cycles
are not displayed by default.
Interim cycles are displayed in green, even when they are read only.
7. If you want to show cycles surrounding the timeframe you will specify
below, click Actions, then click Fetch Surrounding Cycles.
8. If you want to remove selected cycles from the data table display, click
Hide, then click Yes in the dialog that opens. This does not delete the
cycle.
9. Click Refresh to display the retrieved cycles in the data table.

Production
Managing cycles
Filtering cycles
This topic explains how to specify which cycles you want to display. It is
performed as a step in other procedures.
 To filter cycles
In the Cycle Filter box, do the following:
1. From the Period list, select the type of time period.
2. If you have selected a period other than <Manual>, from the list beside
the time period, select the date from the calendar. The From and To
fields are filled in, but you are able to modify them.
3. If you have selected <Manual>, from the Period list, fill in the From and
To fields, by doing the following:
i. In the fields beside From, select the start date from the calendar,
and the start time using the arrows, or directly editing the hours/
minutes/seconds of the time.
ii. In the fields beside To, select the end date from the calendar, and
the end time using the arrows, or directly editing the hours/minutes/
seconds of the time.
4. Click [...] beside Machines label and select the machines whose cycles
you wish to display.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Refresh. The filtered list of cycles displays.
Splitting cycles
This topic explains how to split cycles.
 To split a cycle
1. Open Cycle Assistant.
2. From the Page Configuration list, select the type of entity whose cycle
you want to split.
3. Display the required range of cycles. See To filter cycles.
4. Select the required cycle.
5. Click Split. Split Cycle Wizard opens.
6. If you want to split the cycle at a specific point in time, do the following:
i. Select Split at a point in time.
ii. Click Next and follow the wizard.
7. If you want to split the cycle into cycles of equal lengths, do the
following:
i. Select Split equally.

Production
Managing cycles
8. If you want to split the cycle by length of time, do the following:

i. Select Split by duration.
9. Click Save.
Splitting drill cycles

When splitting a drill cycle, some attributes of drill cycles which are derived
from field events may need to be set for the new cycles. However, as the field
events from which the values are derived are timestamped, it is not sensible
to copy the data from the old cycle to a new one.
For drill hole positions, the event which contains the position data has a start
time and an end time. When splitting a cycle, choosing the option to allocate
the drill hole position to the cycle into which it naturally fits can result in the
position being allocated to no cycle at all, if none of the new cycles contains
the complete duration specified in the event.
Choosing the option to regenerate positions from recorded field events will
only allocate positions to new cycles when the duration of the event is
contained within the duration of the cycle. Consequently, splitting drill cycles
at random positions can result in hole position information becoming
disconnected from the cycle.
Similarly, drill hole consumable events and drill hole slices have a duration,
and will only be allocated to new cycles whose duration completely contains
that of the event.
Creating cycles
This topic explains how to create cycles.
The office software creates cycles automatically, but sometimes you may
need to create a cycle manually. You are not allowed to create a cycle with a
start and finish time causing overlap with an existing cycle for that machine.
 To create a cycle manually

The display varies depending on the type of cycle you have chosen to create.
1. Open the Cycle Assistant.
2. From the Page configuration list, select a page configuration
corresponding to the entity whose cycle you want to create.
3. Click New. The Cycle Editor opens for the page configuration you have
selected, for example, if you selected Truck in step 2, the Truck cycle
editor opens.
Note: The following steps describe common procedures first. You need to
follow those procedures, then follow the procedures for the type of
cycle you chose to create.
4. From the Start calendar, select the start date of the cycle.

Production
Managing cycles
5. Select the start time for the cycle.

6. From the Finish calendar, select the finish date of the cycle.
7. Select the finish time for the cycle.
• The Duration is calculated from the Start and Finish fields. You can
also change the Duration directly - the Finish time will change
accordingly.
8. In the Count field, enter the number of cycles to create.
9. If you want to split the time period into the number of cycles specified in
the count field, select Split.
10. If you want to duplicate the cycle into the number specified in the count
field, select Duplicate.
11. Click the Job Code tab and do the following.
i. Expand the list.
ii. Select a job code.
iii. Click Add.
12. Click the Activities/Delays tab and do the following.
i. Right-click in the Activities/Delays section. A menu opens.
• If you want to resynchronize the delay activity components with
system wide delays, click Resynchronize Delays.
• If you want to add a cycle activity component to this cycle, click
Add Activity.
• If you want to edit the selected activity, click Edit.
• If you want to remove the selected activity, click Remove.
If you are creating an Auxiliary, Drill, or Self Loader cycle, click the
General tab and do the following.
• From the list beside Operator, select the operator of the
machine.
If you are creating a Loader or Truck cycle, click the Production tab and
do the following.
1. In the Material section, do the following:
i. From the list beside Material, select the material to be loaded.
ii. In the Payload field, either enter the weight of the payload to be
loaded during the cycle, or click Set Payload to nominal.
2. In the Haulage section, do the following:
i. From the list beside Truck, select the truck for the cycle.
ii. From the list beside Truck Operator, select the truck operator’s
name.
3. In the Source section, do the following:
i. From the Source Destination list, select the destination where the
truck was loaded.

Production
Managing cycles
ii. From the Loading Tool list, select the shovel that loaded the truck.
iii. From the Loading Tool Operator list, select the name of the
shovel operator that loaded the truck.
iv. Check the Rehandle box if the material is being rehandled.
v. In the Mining Blocks section, expand the list and select the mining
block to be dug from.
vi. From the Selected Mining Block list, select a mining block.
Note: Information on the Position and Consumable tabs is obtained from

events in the field. You are not able to do anything with the values on
these pages.
If you are creating a Truck cycle you also need to do the following:
1. In the Haulage section do the following:
i. In the Fuel Used field, enter the amount of fuel used in this cycle.
ii. In the Shifts field, enter the number of transmission shifts
performed by the truck.
2. In the Sink section do the following:
i. From the Sink Destination list, select the destination where the
truck was dumped.
ii. From the Processor list, select the processor that unloaded the
truck.
iii. In the Mining Blocks section, expand the list and select the mining
block to be dug from.
iv. From the Selected Mining Block list, select a mining block.
If you are creating an Auxiliary or Truck cycle, do the following:
1. Click the Road Segments tab and do the following:
• Right-click in the Road Segments section. Road Segment
Component Editor opens.
2. If you want to add road segment data, click New and do the following:
i. Enter the start and end velocity of the machine as it enters and
leaves the road segment.
ii. If you want to edit road segment data, click Edit.
iii. If you want to remove road segment data, click Remove.
The colors on the Road Segments tab indicate the following:
• Light Green - Coasting
The machine is coasting down a slope of sufficient gradient.

Production
Managing cycles
• Light Pink - Mismatched Start/End Beacons

Adjacent road segments do not have matching waypoints, i.e. the End
waypoint of the first segment is not the same as the Start waypoint of the
second segment.
• Light Yellow - Out of Sync
Adjacent road segments do not have matching times, i.e. the End Time of
the first segment is not the same as the Start Time of the second
segment.
• Light Blue - Predicted
The road segments and intermediate waypoints have been filled in by the
predictive inflow feature.
If you are creating a Drill cycle, do the following:
1. Click the Hole tab and do the following:
i. From the Drill Start calendar, select the start date of the drilling
cycle.
ii. Select the Drill Start time for the drilling cycle.
iii. From the Drill Finish calendar, select the finish date of the drilling
cycle.
iv. Select the Drill Finish time for the drilling cycle.
v. In the Breaking Ground Dur field, enter the duration of the drilling.
vi. Click the value beside the Breaking Ground Dur field (for
example, [s]), and select the units for the duration of the drilling.
vii. In the Depth Actual field, enter the actual depth of the drill hole.
viii.Click the value beside the Depth Actual field, and select the units
for the depth of the hole.
ix. In the Name Actual field, enter the actual name of the drill hole.
x. In the Pattern Actual field, enter the pattern the hole was actually
part of.
xi. In the Depth Design field, enter the depth of the drill hole
according to the design.
xii. Click the value beside the Depth Design field, and select the units
for the depth of the drill hole.
xiii.In the Name Design field, enter the name of the drill hole according
to the design.
xiv.In the Blast Design field, enter the blast the hole was designed to
be drilled for.
xv. In the Pattern Design field, enter the pattern the hole was
designed to be a part of.
xvi.From the list beside Hole Type, select the type of the drill hole.

Production
Managing cycles
2. If you are creating a Self Loader, click the Materials Movement tab and
do the following:
i. In the Material section, do the following:
• From the list beside Material, select the material to be loaded.
• In the Payload field, enter the weight (in tonnes) of the payload
to be loaded during the cycle.
ii. In the Source section, do the following:
• From the Source Destination list, select the destination where
the truck was loaded.
• In the Mining Blocks section, expand the list and select the
mining block to be loaded from.
• From the Selected Mining Block list, select a mining block.
• In the Sink section, do the following:
• From the Sink Destination list, select the destination where the
truck was dumped.
• In the Mining Blocks section, expand the list and select the
mining block to be dug from.
• From the Selected Mining Block list, select a mining block.
3. Click Save.
Editing cycles
This topic explains how to edit cycles. You can edit single cycles using Cycle
Assistant, or multiple cycles using either Cycle Assistant or Cycle Bulk
Update Assistant.
 To edit a cycle using Cycle Assistant

2. From the Page Configuration list, select the type of entity whose cycle
you want to edit.
3. Display the required cycles. See To filter cycles on page 14.2.
4. Select the cycle to be edited.
5. Click Open. The appropriate cycle editor opens.
6. Edit the attributes on each tab as required.
7. On the Road Segment tab, you may see the following:
i. Yellow-colored lines. This indicates that there is some time
missing, that is, the end time of the first yellow line is not equal to
the start time of the second yellow line. This normally occurs if the
truck goes between waypoints that do not have a road segment
between them indicating that the mine model needs to be updated.
ii. Red-colored lines. This indicates that the two road segments don’t
join up, so you have a hole in the route.

Production
Managing cycles
 To edit multiple cycles using Cycle Assistant

You can edit multiple cycles for the same machine, and for trucks, you can
edit multiple cycles from more than one truck. If you select more than one
non-truck machine, the Open button will be dimmed.
2. From the Page Configuration list, select the type of entity whose cycles
you wish to edit.
3. Display the required cycles. See To filter cycles on page 14.2.
4. Select the cycles you wish to edit.
5. Click Open. The appropriate multi-cycle Editor opens.
6. If you have selected cycles from only one machine, do the following:
• Edit the fields you wish to change by entering new values in the
fields.
If you have selected cycles from more than one truck, do the following:
• Select the fields to edit by selecting the checkboxes on the left, and
entering new values in the fields on the right of the field names. The
Summary panel tells you what changes will be made.
7. When you want to save your changes and exit, click Save.
 To edit multiple cycles using Cycle Bulk Update Assistant

You must be in Expert Mode to edit multiple cycles using Cycle Bulk Update
Assistant.
You can only edit multiple truck cycles. The Open button will be dimmed for
all other vehicles.
1. Open Cycle Bulk Update Assistant.
2. In the Cycle Filtering section, select the mode you wish to use for
filtering, either Filter By Fields, or Filter From File.
3. If you selected Filter By Fields, do the following:
i. In the Period Selector section, select the period for the cycle
updates, the starting and finishing date and times.
ii. In the Matching Criteria section, select the Primary Machine
Name, Source Blocks and Destinations, Sink Blocks and
Destinations you wish to match the cycle criteria on.
4. If you selected Filter From File, do the following:
i. In the Filter File field, enter the filename where you have
previously saved a list of cycle IDs.
5. In the Update Mode section, select the mode you wish to use for
updating, either Update Cycles or Recalc Reporting Data.

Production
Managing cycles
6. If you selected Update Cycles, do the following:

i. Select the Source and Sink Block Names and Destinations you
wish to update the cycle with.
ii. Select the New Rehandle Flag, either True or False.
iii. If you wish to Re-apply grade values, select the check box.
iv. If you wish to Re-apply road and activity summary information,
select the check box.
v. If you wish to Commit the changes, select the check box.
vi. If you wish to update a.csv file with the changed cycle data, enter
the file location in the Changed File field.
7. If you selected Recalc Reporting Data, load factors are reapplied when
the cycle is updated.
8. If the Advanced Parameters section is not visible, click the button.
i. Set the size of the query chunk in hours.
ii. Set the time to wait between each cycle update (in seconds).
9. Click Run. A progress dialog opens.

10. Once the update has finished, click Close.
Merging cycles
This topic explains how to merge cycles.
 To merge two or more cycles

3. Select the sequential cycles that you want to merge.
4. Click Merge. Merge Cycle Wizard opens.
5. Select the cycle that you want to use as the Master cycle.
6. Click Next and follow the wizard.
7. Click Save.
Deleting cycles
This topic describes how to delete cycles. You must be in Expert Mode to do
this procedure. For details on how to change to expert mode, see the
Platform chapter.
 To delete cycles
2. Enable expert mode.

Production
Managing cycles
3. From the Page Configuration list, select the type of entity whose cycles
you wish to delete.
4. Display the required range of cycles. See To filter cycles on page 14.2.
5. Select the cycles you wish to delete.
6. Click Delete. The Delete dialog opens.
7. If you are sure you want to delete the cycles, click Yes.
8. Disable expert mode.
Hiding cycles
This topic explains how to hide cycles.
 To hide cycles
3. Select the cycles that you want to hide.
4. Click Hide. A warning dialog opens.
5. If you’re sure you want to hide the cycles from the current view, click
Yes. The cycles will not be deleted.
Monitoring cycles
This topic explains how to monitor cycles for the various machines.
 To monitor cycles using Cycle Monitor

1. Open Cycle Monitor.
2. From the Page Configuration list, select the machine cycles you would
like to monitor.
Reconstructing truck cycles from VIMS payload files

If radio communication is lost for an extended period of time, basic
production information for VIMS equipped trucks can be recovered from
VIMS payload (*.PA_) files using Cycle Assistant.
Once radio contact is reestablished, PA_ files should be downloaded from
the trucks using the VIMS File Download scheduled job. This will place the
payload files in the {MSTAR-VIMS)/unprocessed directory.

Production
Managing cycles
 To reconstruct truck cycles from VIMS payload files

This procedure must be performed in a separate "Recovery" / Test
system, NOT in the live Production system. For information on setting
up a separate environment please contact your Fleet Customer Support
representative.
Note: You must contact your site’s Implementation or Fleet Customer

Support representative for information on how to access the following
functionality.

2. Select the Period and Machines for which you wish to reconstruct the
cycles.
3. Click the Reconstruct button. The Cycle Reconstruction window opens.
4. Click the Ellipses, and navigate to the folder containing message logs
for the machine for which you wish to reconstruct delays.
The file dialog will display only those files matching the time period and
machines specified using the Cycle Assistant.
5. Select the file you want and click Open.
The contents of the file are displayed in the table on the Cycle
Reconstruction page. Any cycles obtained from the files that overlap
existing cycles in the office software are grayed out. Any cycles
obtained from the files that are outside the time period are also grayed
out. Hovering the cursor over grayed out entries displays a tool tip with
the reason for exclusion of the cycle.
6. Select the rows you wish to use to construct delays and click Save. If no
rows are selected, all rows are used to attempt cycle generation.
Grayed out rows will be automatically excluded from the cycle
generation process.
Once the new data has been created, you will be returned to the Cycle
Assistant. You can then add extra data not available in the VIMS files.
Monitoring production events

 To monitor production events using Production Event
Monitor
1. Open Production Event Monitor.
2. Use the Filter button to change the event attributes to display or select
the events you want to display.

Production
Managing delay types and delays

This topic explains how to manage delay type groups, delay types, and
delays.
Managing delay type groups

This topic describes how to manage groups of delay types.
Creating a delay type group

 To create a delay type group
You should only create one level of delay type group.
2. Click Group. Delay Group Editor opens.
3. Enter a Name for the delay type group in the dialog box.
4. Click Add if you wish to continue creating delay type groups, otherwise
click Save.
Renaming a delay type group

 To rename a delay type group
2. Select the delay type group you wish to rename.
3. Click Open. Delay Group Editor opens.
4. Enter the new name for the delay type group as required.
5. Click Add if you wish to continue adding delay types, otherwise click
Save.
Deleting a delay type group

 To delete a delay type group
If two or more groups have the same name, check the contents before
deleting.
2. Select the delay type group you wish to delete.
3. Click Delete. If the delay type group contains delay types, you will have
to delete them all before you can delete the group.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the selected delay type
group.

Production
Viewing a delay type group

 To view a delay type group
2. Navigate to the delay type group you wish to view.
3. You can toggle the display of archived delay type groups by clicking the
Toggle archived items button on the toolbar.
Managing delay types

This topic describes how to manage delay types.
Creating a delay type

 To create a delay type
2. Select a Delay Type Group and click New. Delay Type Editor opens.
3. Enter a name for the delay type in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the delay type in the Description field.
6. In the E-mail field, enter one or more e-mail addresses (separated by
comas or semi-colons) for all recipients of notifications about this delay
type.
7. Enter the estimated duration beside the Estimated Duration field as
follows:
i. If the duration cannot be estimated, click Unknown.
ii. If the duration can be estimated, click the option button beside the
time fields and enter the number of days, hours and minutes using
the arrows.
8. From the Category drop-down list, select in which category the Delay
belongs.
9. If office acknowledgement is required when the delay starts, select the
Acknowledgement Required check box.
10. If this delay makes the delay target unavailable for assignment, select
the Assignment Delay check box. This ensures that the office software
does not continue to consider this target for assignment.
11. If this delay requires that the engine be turned off, select the Engine
Switched Off check box. This helps to ensure the accuracy of fuel
management calculations.

Production
12. In the External Reference field, enter the reference used by the
external software systems.
13. In the External Reference Description field, enter the description for
the external software systems reference.
14. Click the Association tab.
15. If you want to associate the delay type with roads, select the Roads
check box.
16. If you want to associate the delay type with destinations, select the
Destinations check box.
17. If you want to associate the delay with a specific machine category,
select the appropriate Allowed check box.
18. If you want to save changes and add more data, click Add.
19. If you want to save changes and exit, click Save.
Editing a delay type

 To edit a delay type
2. Select the Delay Type you wish to edit, and click Open. Delay Type
Editor opens.
3. If you want to edit the delay type name, change the details in the Name
field.
4. If you want to edit the delay type description, change the details in the
Description field.
5. Edit the attributes on the General, Association, and Auto Assign tabs
as required.
6. If you want to save changes and edit more attributes, click Apply.
7. If you want to save changes and exit, click Save.
Archiving a delay type

 To archive a delay type
2. Select the delay type you wish to archive, then click Archive. You are
asked to confirm you wish to archive the delay type.
3. Click Yes. The delay type disappears from the list.
Restoring a delay type

 To restore a delay type

Production
If you cannot see your archived delay types, i.e. grayed out delay types,
click the Toggle button on the tool bar.
2. Click the delay type you wish to restore, then click Restore. You are
asked to confirm you wish to restore the delay type.
3. Click Yes. The delay type is returned to the list.
Viewing a delay type

 To view a delay type
2. Double-click the delay type group containing the delay type you wish to
view.
Moving a delay type

 To move a delay type
2. Click and drag the delay type and drop it on the group you wish to move
it to.
Managing delays
This topic describes the procedures for managing delays.
Creating delays
This topic explains how to create delays using the office software. It does not
explain how to create delays from field machines.
 To create a delay
1. Open Delay Monitor.
2. Click New. Delay Editor opens.
3. Click the Type tab. The list of delay types may take a few seconds to
load and display.
4. Select the required delay type. Delay Editor refreshes to enable the
relevant tabs and fields for the selected delay type.
5. If enabled, click the Machine tab and do the following:
i. Expand the folders until the required machine is displayed.
ii. Select the required machine.
6. If enabled, click the Destination tab and do the following:
i. Select the check box beside the required station name.
7. If enabled, click the Road tab and do the following:

Production
i. Select the check box beside the road to which the delay will be
applied.
8. Click the Duration tab and do the following:
i. Enter the start date and time in the Start field.
ii. If the duration cannot be estimated, click Unknown.
iii. If the duration can be estimated, click the option button beside the
time fields and enter the number of days, hours and minutes using
the arrows.
iv. Enter the finish date and time in the Finish field.
There may be multiple non-overlapping delays for a machine. If a
machine has a delay and a new delay is added for the machine
which overlaps the existing delay, the office software adjusts the
end time to prevent the overlap.
When viewing a delay in Delay Monitor, the Finish column will flash
if the delay did not finish at the time it was supposed to.
v. From the list beside Created By, select the first person to report
this delay.
vi. If office confirmation is required before the delay starts, select the
Confirmation Required check box.
vii. If office acknowledgement is required when the delay starts, select
the Acknowledgement Required check box.
viii.If this delay makes the delay target unavailable for assignment,
select the Assignment Delay check box. This ensures that
Assignment does not continue to consider this target for
assignment.
ix. If this delay requires that the engine be turned off, select the
Engine Switched Off check box. This helps to ensure the
accuracy of fuel management calculations.
9. If enabled, click the Description tab and enter a description for the
delay in the Description box.
Editing delays
This topic explains how to edit delays. If a delay is active you can only edit
certain attributes.
 To edit an active or inactive delay

2. Click the row of the delay you want to edit.
3. Click Open. Delay Editor refreshes to enable the relevant tabs and fields
for the status of the selected delay.

Production
4. Edit the fields on the enabled tabs where required.

5. If you want to stop the delay, see To stop a delay.
6. If you want to extend the delay, see To extend delays.
7. Click Save.
 To edit an historical delay

1. Open Delay Assistant.
2. From the list beside Period, select the type of time period.
3. From the list beside the Period list, select the date from the calendar.
4. Click the arrow beside the From field to display the calendar.
5. Select the date you wish to filter from.
6. Enter the ‘from’ time into fields beside the From time using the arrows.
7. Click the arrow beside the To field to display the calendar.
8. Enter the ‘to’ time into fields beside the To time using the arrows.
9. Click [...] beside Machines, Roads or Destinations fields, and select
the ones you want to filter on.
10. Click Refresh. The list redisplays.
11. Select the delay you want to edit.
12. Click Open. Delay Editor refreshes to enable the relevant tabs and
fields for the status of the selected delay.
13. Edit the fields on the enabled tabs where required.
14. If you want to split the delay, see To split an historical delay.
15. Click Save.
Deleting delays
This topic explains how to delete delays.
You can only delete inactive or historical delays. Active delays cannot be
deleted.
 To delete an inactive delay

2. Select the delay.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the selected delay.
 To delete an historical delay

You must be in Expert Mode to delete historical delays.
2. Click [...] beside Machines, Roads or Destinations label.

Production
3. Select the type of time period from the Period list.

4. Select the date from the calendar beside the Period list.
9. Select the date you wish to filter to.
12. Select the delay to be deleted.
13. Click Delete.
14. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the selected delay.
Viewing delays
This topic explains how to view delays.
 To view an active or inactive (non-historical) delay

2. If the Finish column is flashing, this means that the delay did not finish
at the time it was supposed to.
3. If you want to view all the attributes of the delay, click the delay, then
click Open.
 To view an historical delay

2. From the list beside Period, select the type of time period.
3. From the list beside the Period list, select the date from the calendar.
9. Click [...] beside Machines, Roads or Destinations fields, and select
the ones you want to filter on.

Production
Splitting delays
This topic explains how to split delays.
You can only split historical delays. You cannot split active or scheduled
(inactive) delays.
If you want to split an historical delay into more than two delays, you must
perform multiple single splits.
All original delay attributes are retained and copied into the new delay. Any
incompatible attributes are ignored, that is, they are not retained or copied.
 To split an historical delay

2. Display the required historical delays. See To view an historical delay.
3. In the data table, select the delay that you want to split.
4. Click Split. Delay Splitter opens.
5. In the Split Time field, specify the time at which the delay should be
split.
6. Adjust the delay types of the resulting delays as required in the delay
Type panels.
7. Click Save.
Merging delays
This topic explains how to merge delays.
You can only merge historical delays if they are for the same delay target and
there is no gap in time between the two delays.
You cannot merge active or scheduled delays.
All original delay attributes are retained and copied into the new delay. For
example, any incompatible attributes due to a change in delay type are
ignored, that is, they are not retained or copied.
 To merge consecutive historical delays

1. Open the Delay Assistant.
2. Display the required historical delays.
3. In the data table, select the delays that you want to merge.
4. Click Merge. Delay Merger opens.
5. Select the delay type for the merged delay.
6. Click Save.
Extending delays
This topic explains how to extend delays. You can only extend active and
inactive delays.

Production
 To extend delays
2. Select the required delay(s).
3. Click Extend. Extend Delays dialog opens.
4. Use the arrow keys to enter the time to extend the delay by.
5. Click OK.
Stopping delays
This topic explains how to stop delays. You can stop a delay using the office
software but it is still active until the operator stops it on board the machine.
 To stop a delay
1. Select the delay you want to stop.
1. Click the Stop button on Delay Monitor.
2. If you are sure you want to stop the delay, click Yes.
You can stop a delay using the office software but it is still active until the
operator stops it onboard the machine.
Stopping a delay using the office software may cause delay information
to be unsynchronized with delay information on the machine.

Production
Automatic delay creation for stationary equipment

Automatic delay creation gives you the ability to positively influence
production reporting for field equipment that is stationary by allowing
automatic detection of stationary field equipment and subsequent automatic
creation of delays for the period that the equipment was stationary.
The advantages of this include improved production information for
equipment.
The disadvantages (or risks to be mitigated) include stationary determination
may not reflect reality.
How it works
The office software compares successive position reports from all machines.
When two successive position reports arrive too close together, the second
one is ignored for this process and a later position report is considered.
When the office software has two valid successive position reports, the
distance travelled and speed of travel are computed. If the distance is less
than the allowed movement and the speed is less than the allowed speed,
the machine is considered stopped. When the machine has stopped for the
defined allowed period, the office software activates a delay for the machine
if the machine's class is configured with an appropriate delay type for that
machine.
Subsequent position reports are analyzed, and if the machine is no longer
considered to be stopped and the office software placed the machine on
delay automatically as part of the stopped machine detection process, then
the office software automatically ends the delay.
 To set up automatic delay creation in Supervisor

1. Open Supervisor and click Contents > Setup > System Options.
2. From the Product list select Machine Tracking, from the Option Sets
list select Machine Nodes, and then select the Stopped Machine
Node tab.
3. Select the Activate Stopped Machine Determination check box to
enable automatic delay creation by default.
4. Select the Only consider travelling trucks check box if you want to
consider trucks should be considered stationary only when traveling, or
when traveling and arrived/queuing.
5. In the Minimum delay duration field, specify how long, in minutes, a
machine should be stopped before the delay is put on.
Default = 10 minutes
6. In the Minimum time between positiion reports field, specify the
minimum duration, in seconds, equipment must be stationary before a
delay is created. This removes possible duplicates.
Default = 10 seconds

Production
7. In the Maximum speed that is still stopped field, specify the maximum
speed, in milliseconds, allowed to consider the equipment stationary
(there may be GPS jitter causing small movements).
Default = 0.5 milliseconds
8. In the Maximum distance moved that is still stopped field, specify
the maximum allowed distance equipment is allowed to travel, in meters,
and still be considered stationary.
Default = 15 meters
 To set up automatic delay creation in the office software

1. Click Contents > Pit Link > Machine Finder.
2. Click, then right-click the Machine class for which you want to set the
automatic delay, and click Open Class. The Machine Class Editor
displays.
3. Click the Stopped tab.
4. Click the Elipses button beside the Stopped Delay Type field, and
navigate to the delay type you require.
5. Click Apply, to save your changes and remain in that window, or click
Save to save your changes and exit the window.

Production
Reconstructing truck delays from TMAC message log files
Reconstructing truck delays from TMAC

message log files
If radio communication is lost for an extended period of time, basic delay
information for machines may be able to be recovered from TMAC (Trimble MineStar
Aquila Caterpillar) message log files using the Delay Assistant.
If the TMAC Message Log Download Service is enabled in the
CommsController, TMAC message log files will be automatically downloaded
by the StandardJobExecutor, if and when they become available. These files
are stored in a subdirectory with the name of the machine in the
{MSTAR_DATA} area.
By default this service is not enabled. You need to enable it in Supervisor.
 To enable the TMAC message log download service in

Supervisor
1. Open Supervisor and click Contents > Setup > System Options.
2. From the Product list select Pit Link, then from the Option Sets list
select Comms Services.
3. Select the Enable Automatic Download of TMAC Message Logs
check box.
4. Click Apply.
5. Restart the CommsController for the service to take effect.
 To reconstruct truck delays from TMAC message log files
Note: You must contact your site’s Implementation or Support

representative for information on how to access the following
functionality.

2. Select the Period and Machines for which you wish to reconstruct the
cycles.
3. Click the Reconstruct button. The Delay Reconstruction window
opens.
4. Click the Elipses, and navigate to the folder containing message logs
for the machine for which you wish to reconstruct delays.
The file dialog will display only those files matching the time period and
machines specified using the Delay Assistant.
5. Select the file you want and click Open.
The contents of the file are displayed in the table on the Delay
Reconstruction page. Any delays obtained from the files that are outside
the selected time period are grayed out. Any state changes

Production
Managing job codes groups and job codes
corresponding to the end of a delay started by an earlier state change in

the file are also grayed out. Hovering the cursor over grayed out entries
displays a tool tip with the reason for exclusion of the cycle.
The Action column describes what actions will be taken if the
corresponding row is selected and saved.
6. Select the rows you wish to use to construct delays and click Save. If no
rows are selected, all rows are used to attempt delay generation.
Grayed out rows will be automatically excluded from the delay
generation process.
Once the new data has been created, you will be returned to the Delay
Assistant. You can then add extra data not available in the TMAC
Message Log files.

This section describes the procedures for managing jobs and job codes.
Managing job code groups

This topic describes the procedures for managing job code groups.
Creating job code groups

This topic explains how to create job code groups.
 To create a job code group

1. Open Job Code Finder.
2. Select a page configuration from the Page Configuration list.
3. Expand the list and select the job code group in which you want to
create the new job group.
4. Click Group. Create Job Code Group dialog opens.
5. Enter the name in the Name field.
6. Enter a description in the Description field.
7. If you want to save the group and continue adding groups, click Add.
8. If you want to save the group and exit, click Save.
Editing job code groups

This topic explains how to edit job code groups.
 To edit a job code group

3. Expand the list and select the job code group you want to edit.

Production
4. Click Open. Job Code Editor opens.

5. Edit the attributes as required.
6. If you want to apply the changes and continue editing, click Apply.
7. If you want to save the group and exit, click Save.
Deleting job code groups

This topic explains how to delete job code groups.
 To delete a job code group

3. Expand the list and select the job code group you want to delete. You
can only delete a group that contains no job codes.
4. Click Delete. Delete dialog opens.
5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the job code group.
Viewing job code groups

This topic explains how to view job code groups.
 To view a job code group

3. Expand the job code list to view the job code groups.
Managing job codes

This topic describes the procedures for managing job codes.
Creating job codes

This topic explains how to create job codes.
 To create a job code

3. Expand the list and select the job code group in which to you want to
create the new job code.
4. Click New. Job Code Editor opens.

Production
5. In the Name field, enter the name for the job code.
6. In the Description field, enter the description for the job code.
8. In the External Ref field, enter the code that the job code will have in the
external system.
9. Click the Associations tab.
10. Select the Allowed check box beside each category of machine that
you want to associate the job code with.
11. If you want to save your changes and continue creating job codes, click
Apply.
Editing job codes

This topic explains how to edit job codes.
 To edit a job code

3. Expand the list and select the job code that you wish to edit.
4. Click Open. Job Code Editor opens.
6. Click Save.
Deleting job codes

This topic explains how to delete job codes.
 To delete a job code

3. Expand the list and select the job code that you wish to delete.
4. Click Delete. Delete dialog opens.
5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the job code.
Viewing job codes

This topic explains how to view job codes.
 To view a job code


Production
Managing machine states
3. Expand the list and select the job code that you wish to view.
4. If you want to view the job code attributes, click Open. Job Code Editor
opens.
5. Click the tabs to view the attributes.
6. Click Cancel.

This section describes the procedures to manage machine states and
machine state groups. You can create groups under the root directory
(Machine States) or under any other group that has been created.
Managing machine state groups

This topic explains how to manage machine state groups.
Creating a machine state group

 To create a machine state group
1. Open Machine State Finder.
3. Select the location of where you want to create the new machine group.
4. Click Group. Create Machine State Group dialog opens.
5. Enter a Name for the machine state group.
6. Click OK. Describe Group dialog opens.
7. Enter a Description of the group.
8. Click OK.
Editing a machine state group

 To edit a machine state group
2. Double-click the machine state group that you want to edit. Edit Machine
State Group dialog opens.
4. Click Save.

Production
Deleting a machine state group

 To delete a machine state group
There is no undo functionality in the office software. If you delete a machine
state group it is immediately removed from the database and cannot be
retrieved.
2. Expand the list and select the machine state group that you want to
delete. You can only delete a group that contains no machine states or
other groups.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the group.
Viewing a machine state group

 To view a machine state group
2. Double-click the machine state group that you want to view. Edit
Machine State Group dialog opens.
3. Click the tabs and view details as required.

This topic explains how to manage machine states.
Creating a machine state

 To create a machine state
3. Select the group under which you want to create the new machine state.
4. Click New. Machine State Editor opens.
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the new machine state.
6. Enter an abbreviation for the new machine state in the Abbreviation
field.
7. If you want this machine’s time allocated to working time, select the Is
Working check box.

Production
8. If you want this machine’s time allocated to idle time, clear the Is
Working check box.
9. Click the Destination tab.
10. From the list beside Destination, select a destination for the machine.
11. Click the Associations tab.
12. Select the Allowed check box beside each category of machine that
you want to associate the machine state with. You must choose at least
one association.
13. Click Save.
Editing a machine state

 To edit a machine state
3. Expand the list and select the machine state you wish to edit.
4. Click Open. Machine State Editor opens.
6. Click Save.
Deleting a machine state

 To delete a machine state
3. Expand the list and select the machine state you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the machine state.
Viewing a machine state

 To view a machine state
3. Expand the list and select the machine state you want to edit.
4. Click Open. Machine State Editor opens.
6. Click Save.

Production
Managing Fluids
Managing Fluids
This section describes the procedures for managing fluids.
Creating fluid types

 To create a fluid type
1. Open Fuel and Lube Type Finder.
2. Click New. Fuel and Lube Type Editor opens.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the fluid type.
4. In the Description field, enter a description for the fluid type.
5. In the Category field, enter a new or existing category name.
6. From the Unit Type list, select a unit type.
7. From the Field Input Unit list, select the unit you will interpret field-enter
quantities of this fuel.
The fluid type you have created displays in Fuel and Lube Type Finder. You
may have to refresh the screen to see the fluid type you have just created.
Editing fluid types

If a user needs to rename a fuel category, they must rename the category
attribute of each fluid type that uses that category.
 To edit a fluid type

1. Open the Fuel and Lube Type Finder.
2. Select the fluid type that you want to edit.
3. Click Open. Fuel and Lube Type Editor opens.
4. Edit the attributes of the fluid type as required.
5. Ensure that the Unit Type is correct.
Note: You cannot edit a fuel type that has been deleted. If you are trying to
do this you will see the following error message
The fuel type has been deleted and cannot be updated. Please
recreate fuel type.
You may have to refresh the screen to see the fluid type you have just edited.

Production
Managing service records
Deleting fluid types

 To delete a fluid type
2. Select the fluid type that you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the fluid type, click Yes in the
Viewing fluid types

 To view a fluid type
2. Select the fluid type that you want to view.
3. Click Open. Fuel and Lube Type Editor displays the details of the
selected fluid type.

This section describes the procedures for managing service records.
Creating service records

The Fuel Lube and SMU Assistant is used to manage fuel, lubricants and
SMU records and provides access to the Fuel Lube and SMU Editor. The
Fuel, Lube and SMU Editor is used to create and edit fuel, lube and SMU
records.
 To create a service record

1. Open Fuel Lube and SMU Assistant.
2. Select a Shift from the list beside Period, then select a date and time
the service record applies to.
3. Click [...] beside the Machines field to select the machines you want to
create records for.
4. If you want to show only records containing SMUs, do the following:
i. Select the Only show records containing check box.
ii. Select SMU from the list beside Refresh.
iii. Click Refresh.
5. If you want to show only records containing Fuel, do the following:
i. Select the Only show records containing check box.

Production
ii. Select Fuel from the list beside Refresh.

iii. Click Refresh.
6. Click New. Fuel Lube & SMU Editor opens and you can create the
service record.
7. From the fields beside Timestamp select the following:
• The date from the calendar.
• The time in hours, minutes and seconds using the arrow keys.
8. From the list beside Machine, select the machine to which the service
record will apply.
9. From the list beside Odometer, select the odometer reading of the
machine when this event was initiated.
10. From the list beside SMU, select the SMU value for the machine.
11. From the list beside Operator, select the operator of the machine.
12. From the list beside Fuel Attendant, select the attendant who refueled
the machine.
13. If you want to save your changes and continue creating records, click
Add.
Editing service records

 To edit a service record
2. Edit the filtering details as required.
3. From the data table, select the service record that you want to edit.
4. Click Open. Fuel & SMU Editor displays the list of fuel and lube types.
5. Edit the service record details as required.
6. If you want to save your changes and continue editing records, click
Apply.
Deleting service records

 To delete a service record
2. Select the service record that you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. If you are sure that you want to delete the service record, click Yes in the

Production
Viewing service records

 To view fuel, lube or SMU records
2. From the list beside Period, select the shift you want to view.
3. Select the Date, Machines, and Record types you want to view.
4. Click Refresh to show the current records in the data table.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Introduction to troubleshooting
Introduction to troubleshooting
This chapter explains the procedure you must follow before calling support,
and also how to solve some common problems when using the office
software.
Getting support
The method you use to contact support is determined by the severity of your
issue and your site’s support procedures. The following information should
be used in conjunction with the support procedures for your site.
Before contacting support you should perform some basic troubleshooting of
the issue. This will allow you to gather information on the issue to give to the
support team.
Running a snapshotSystem
If there is an issue with the office software you must run a snapshotSystem.
Different types of snapshots are created depending on the machine the
snapshotSystem is started from. The type of issue you are having will
determine where to run the snapshotSystem from. If the office software
appears to be running correctly except for your machine, for example,
messages are going to and from the field and no other users are
experiencing difficulties, then the snapshotSystem can be run from the
office software client machine, e.g., the office software Operator’s machine.
If the office software appears to have stopped working, for example, no
messages are going to the field or all machines are experiencing difficulties,
then, if possible, the snapshotSystem should be run from the the office
software server. If this is not possible, then run the snapshotSystem from
your machine.
The snapshotSystem takes a snapshot of the office software diagnostics
including:
• Log files.
• Custom configurations.
• Field Communications Server files.
• Assignment details.
• Memory, CPU and disk usage on the application server and other
monitored machines.
These files are then zipped together ready to be sent to your Fleet Customer
Support representative. The support team will use the information saved in
the zip file when diagnosing the cause of the issue.
1. On the Tools menu, click snapshotSystem.
2. In the Snapshot Logger window, enter as much information as possible
and click OK.

Troubleshooting
Getting support
The snapshotSystem may take several minutes to complete.

A command window will show when the snapshotSystem is complete. This
window can be closed or will close automatically after five minutes. When the
snapshotSystem has been completed you can restart the office
softwarecomponents if required.
Taking a screen capture

Use screen captures to send examples of error messages, dialog boxes or
examples of other issues displayed on the screen.
1. Arrange the screen so the area you are trying to show is clearly visible.
2. Press Print Screen to capture the entire screen or press ALT+Print
Screen to capture only the active window.
3. Open Paint or Microsoft Word.
4. Click Edit and then click Paste.
5. Click File and then click Save As.
6. Enter a file name in the File Name field.
7. Click OK.
Sending a reporting issue

When sending a report to Customer Support for diagnosis, it is important to
remember that it is unlikely your data will be available to test the report. This
process allows you to easily include the correct data subset with the report.
1. Open the report in Business Objects full client.
2. Run the report so that it demonstrates the problem. This includes
entering values for prompts, for example, start and end dates, machines
names, etc.
3. Modify the report so it will not refresh when opened.
i. Click Tools and then click Options to open the Options dialog.
ii. Click the Save tab and clear the Refresh Document When
Opening check box.
iii. Click File and Save As to open the Save As dialog.
iv. Navigate to where you want to save the report.
4. Enter a file name and select the Save for all users check box.
5. Click Save to save the report.
6. Email or place the file on the ftp server. Include an explanation of the
problem and details of where in the report the particular problem can be
shown.
7. After the file has been received by Customer Support, remove the file
from your system to avoid inadvertently running it again.

Troubleshooting
Getting support
Using the CAT FTP server

There are two ways to use the CAT ftp server to transfer files to the support
team.
• Let the system do it.
• Use a manual process.
The procedures for each of these ways are shown below.
The support team may also put files, e.g., patches and documentation, on
the ftp server for you to download.
 To let the system transfer files to the support team

• Copy or move your files to the Central Base Directory\outgoing folder.
The sendAllToSupport task will automatically pick up your files and ftp
them to the CAT ftp server.
 Manually transferring files using the FTP server

The username and password for your site is in your Customization,
Configuration and Administration Information document.
1. Click Start and then click Run to open the Run dialog.
2. In the Open field, type cmd.
3. Click OK to open a DOS window.
4. Type cd \ and press Enter.
5. Type cd temp and press Enter. You should now be in the temp
directory, e.g. c:\temp.
6. Type ftp ftp.cat.com and press Enter.
7. Enter your site’s three digit username and press Enter.
8. Enter your site’s password and press Enter.
9. Type hash and press Enter. This will display # symbols in the cmd
window to show the progress of the download.
10. Type bin and press Enter.
11. Type put <filename> and press Enter. The upload process will begin.
To download a file from the ftp server type get <filename> and press
Enter.
12. When the transfer is complete, type bye to exit the ftp server.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Common problems
Common Alarm problems
The following table explains how to solve some common problems related to
alarms when using the office software.
Symptom Cause Solution

No alarms are The the office Ensure that communications
being raised in the software client may exist between the the office
Alarm Monitor. have lost software and the Server. Try
communications with running the Alarm Monitor in
the office software a different instance of the
server. the office software, or
restarting the current office
software instance.
Alarms of certain The software that Ensure that the appropriate

types are not raises the alarm may software is running.
being raised. For not be running.
example, some
trucks may go off The alarm types may Ensure that the alarm types
course but no not be correctly are correctly configured.
Truck is off configured.
course alarm is The alarm types may Alarming cannot raise
raised. be archived. alarms of a specified type if
that type is archived. Ensure
that the alarm types for
which alarms are not being
raised are not archived.
Handling import process errors for mining blocks

The following table explains how to handle errors experienced when
importing mining block.
Message / Possible cause(s) Suggested action

symptom
File error for access. You do not have the necessary • Change the permissions on the file,
permissions to import the file. or
• login as another user with the
necessary permissions.
Unable to open The file cannot be accessed or is • Ensure the file is accessible, or
supplied files. corrupt. • Create a new import file from your
mine planning package.

Troubleshooting
Common problems

symptom
Invalid file format. • The file extension may be • Check that the file extension is
incorrect, or .dbt, or
• The file is not a valid .dbt file. • Create a new import file from your
mine planning package.
Duplicate found on A mining block with the same name is If Override is selected the mining
mining block group already located on the mining block block will be updated with the imported
group. mining block, otherwise the previous
mining block will be kept.
No grade values No grade values can be determined • Check the XML file to ensure all
selected for mining for any mining blocks. grade values in the import file are
block name defined.
• Create a new import file from your
mine planning package ensuring
mining blocks have valid values.
Unable to find attribute An attribute in the input file is not • Check the XML file to ensure all
in input file defined in the XML file. attributes in the import file are
defined.
• Create a new import file from your
attributes are in the input file.
Unable to convert to Import unit type cannot be converted • Check the XML file to ensure units
grade unit type to the grade unit type, for example, are defined.
tonnes to meters.
• Ensure the unit type is specified in
the office software.
• Create a new export file from your
mine planning package using units
which have been defined and can
be converted.
Problem with grade During the import process a problem • Check the office software is
setting value occurred within the office software. operating correctly
• Check that there are no
communication problems between
the import machine and the server.
Grade value in import • The grade value specified for the • Check the allowable grade
is not allowed value for mining block is not allowed for a definitions for discrete grades in
discrete grade discrete grade, or the office software.
• The grade value specified for the • Create a new export file from your
mining block is not defined for a mine planning package using
discrete grade. grade values defined in the office
software.

Troubleshooting
Common problems

symptom
Unable to find entity • Entity type is not allowed or Create a new export file from your
type mine planning package, ensuring the
• Entity type does not exist.
entity type is valid.
Unable to find entity Entity does not exist in the office • Check that the entity name is in the
software. XML file.
• Create a new export file from your
valid entity names are used.
Unable to obtain A quantity is not defined in the office Create a new export file from your
quantity software. mine planning package, ensuring valid
units are used.
Messages
A messages passes through many components before being received. If a
problem occurs, you should check each relevant component. This is usually
done using the pinging method.
 To check a field network component

Always refresh the TNR Web page when it has been left open to ensure the
information on the page is up-to-date.
1. Open the TRIMCOMM Network Router (TNR) web page. To do this:
i. Open a web browser
ii. Enter the IP address of the router as the URL
2. Before rebooting the TNR, always follow your site support procedures. If
the TNR Web page does not display this could be an internal network
problem or a wireless link could be down.
3. Click Currently Associated TRIMCOMMs to show a list of the field

network components currently connected to the radio network.
4. Check all of the components have recently been in communications by
checking the Last contact and CMR columns. SGPS should always
show zero percent for CMR.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Pinging field network components

Field network components can be pinged in the following ways:
• Using the Current TRIMCOMM Associations web page or
• Using the Diagnostics web page
 To ping using the Current TRIMCOMM Associations Web

page
2. Click Currently Associated TRIMCOMMs. A list displays of the field
network components currently connected to the radio network.
3. Click Attached Hosts of the component you want to ping.
4. Click Ping of the required host. The Ping Output page will open with the
results of the ping.
 To ping from the Diagnostics page

2. Click Configuration & Diagnostics.
3. Click Diagnostics.
4. Click Ping.
5. Enter the IP address of the component you want to ping.
6. Click ENTER. The ping output page opens with the results of the ping.
7. Check the number of packets received and the percentage lost.
• If successful, the number of packets received is between one and
five.
• If unsuccessful, the number of packets is zero.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Dipper count in production event monitor is showing

as zero
The dipper counts are showing as zero because the events in question are
VIMS load reports and the dipper information in these is referred to as
LoaderPassCount.
You are able to tell they are VIMS load reports because when you click Quick
View the Payload field is shown, and it will contain a value that is not zero.
CAES load reports on the other hand, have dipper counts but not payload,
and in reporting this is referred to as dipperCount for loading tools. The
information from both events is combined when you create a production
cycle.
Navigating pages
Pages are split into the following categories:
• Diagnostics pages.
• Management pages.
• Setup pages.
Individual pages within these master categories are organized alphabetically
by subsystem, and alphabetically within each subsystem. The group and the
order the page is in matches its location in the Contents menu.
Opening pages
 To open a page
1. To use a pre-defined desktop to automatically open the page(s), specify
the desktop when you log in.
2. To use the Contents menu, do the following:
i. Click the Contents menu.
ii. Navigate to the section which contains the page you want to open.
iii. Click the page name.
3. To use the Page Configuration drop-down list:
i. Click the arrow beside the drop-down list.
ii. Click the page configuration you want to open.
See the GUI Page Reference chapter for more information.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Opening the wrong page

If a page opens that you weren’t expecting, it is probably because you have
an older version of code yet to be deleted or a new version yet to be
completed. You need to fix the tags in the relevant catalog, e.g.
Pages.properties.
Items marked as development will be hidden; items marked as user will
appear in Client; and items marked as admin will appear in Supervisor.
Using the older page navigation format

If you are using an earlier software version, you will be using the Contents
menu to navigate pages.
If you have software version 1.3.0.3 or later you will be using the navigation
system split into diagnostic, management, and setup pages. You are able to
switch to the previous navigation format by making a change in Supervisor.
 To switch to the previous navigation format

1. Click Options, then click System Options.
2. Select Platform - Clients from the Product list.
3. Select Explorer - Client from the Option Sets list.
4. Click the Appearance tab.
5. Clear the Tree Menus check box.
6. Click Apply.
Troubleshooting erroneous time-based numbers in

KpiSummaries reports
Introduction
To troubleshoot erroneous time-based numbers in KpiSummaries reports
you need to run cycle validation reports to identify potential issues with
cycles and activities. The Kpi-based cycle validation reports facilitate quick
and easy identification of important time issues.
Identification of issues with non-continuous cycles

Cycles that have gaps between them or that overlap will cause erroneous
time-based numbers to be reported. The greater the overlap or gap then the
greater the potential for errors in reports. The validation reports highlight
gaps or overlaps between cycles with a continuous indicator. Below are
examples from a cycle validation report and a description of the associated
cycle issue.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Duplicate cycles
The example below demonstrates detection of duplicate cycles. Note that for
the one machine there are two cycles that start at the same time and finish at
the same time.
Figure 15.1: Section from Validation-Truck Cycles.rep showing duplicate cycles
Starttime Endtime Primarymachinename
Overlapping cycles
The example below demonstrates detection of overlapping cycles.
Figure 15.2: Section from Validation-Truck Cycles.rep showing overlapping cycles
Cycle
Primary machine Dura- Activity Delays
Starttime Endtime name tion Minutes Minutes Continuous

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Gaps between cycles

The example below demonstrates detection of a gap between cycles. Note
that the start time of the cycle indicated with an error is about 20 minutes
following the end of the previous cycle.
Figure 15.3: Section from Validation-Truck Cycles.rep showing gaps between cycles
Cycle Contin-
Primarymachine Dura- Activity Delays
Starttime uous
Endtime name tion Minutes Minutes
Identification of issues with activities within cycles

Cycles that have activities that are missing, overlapping or have gaps will
cause erroneous time-based numbers to be reported. The greater the
overlap or gap then the greater the potential for errors in reports. The
validation reports highlight errors in activity times with indicators similar to the
continuity of cycle indicator. Below is an example from a cycle validation
report and a description of the associated activity issue:
Missing Activities
The example below demonstrates detection of missing activities within the
cycle. Note that there is 23.92 minutes of time within the cycle that has no
associated activity.
Figure 15.4: Section from Validation-Truck Cycles.rep showing missing activities
Cycle
Primarymachine Dura- Activity Delays Diff Activities
Starttime Endtime name tion Mins Mins Mins Comments Continuous

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Overlapping Activities
The example below demonstrates detection of overlapping activities within
the cycle. Note that there is 120 minutes of additional activity time within the
cycle.
Figure 15.5: Section from Validation-Truck Cycles.rep showing overlapping activities
Cycle
Primarymachine Dura- Activity Delays Diff Activities
Contin-
Starttime name tion Mins Mins Mins Comments
Endtime uous
Resolution of identified cycle data issues using cycle

assistant
Refer to the Pages and Production chapters for information about the use of
the cycle assistant, and editing cycles. All of the above cycle related issues
should be addressed to ensure accurate figures reported.
Note that it may be necessary to perform a recalculation of the KpiSummary
for the period. A recalculation of the KpiSummary data can be performed
using the recalcCyclesKpiSummaries command. Refer to the Fleet
Administration and Configuration Manual, Working with KpiSummaries for
detailed information about performing a recalculation.
Standard process for obtaining support for report related

issues
If the above process has been followed to correct cycles, and no further cycle
issues can be identified using either the cycle assistant or the validation
reports, and a recalculation of KpiSummary data for the period has been
performed and reports still return erroneous results, please follow the
process below to obtain support.
1. Run the report using BO full client.
2. Select the Options button then clear the Refresh document on open
check box.
3. Save the report as a.REP (default) file.
4. Zip the report up and change the extension to.Paz instead of.zip.
5. Follow your site support procedures for sending the.Paz file and
requesting assistance.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Shift Change issues

Operator automatic allocation takes too long to complete
If you have a large fleet, the evaluation for the best possible solution may
take more than 60 minutes for a large fleet. A good solution, however, can be
determined in a much shorter time.
On the Allocation Rules dialog box, click the Advanced button to set a
maximum run time for the automatic solution, or alternatively, select a Good
or Better solution rather than the Best solution.
One or more Processors are displayed in the unallocated

equipment lists
Processors are usually not allocated operators or transport. When a
processor is created, the default is for the processor to be excluded from
operator and transport allocation.
If a processor is shown in the unallocated equipment list, even if the Show
Processors Tab option is not set in Supervisor, you can exclude the
processor from operator and transport allocation using the General tab in the
Processor Editor.
Onboard Safety Check issues

As with all onboard functionality, initial troubleshooting involves inspecting
the messages to and from the field using the Field Communications Monitor.
The contents of the onboard safety checklist file may be viewed with the
Onboard File Viewer.
The machine fails to display the safety checklist when the

operator logs in
Possible cause
The onboard configuration file does not have this feature enabled, or has not
been downloaded and activated on the machine.
Solution
Correct the onboard configuration file. Check that the onboard setup for the
machine is correct so that the relevant onboard configuration file is actually
used.Download and activate the configuration file using the Onboard File
Assistant.
The machine is not put on delay when a “Repair before

Operating” safety check item fails
Possible cause
The Safety Check Inspection Failed delay category has not been defined or
has been mistyped.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
Solution
Use Supervisor to check that the Safety Check Inspection Failed delay
category is entered. Use the office software to check that the specified delay
category exists, and is compatible with all relevant machine categories.
Failed safety check items do not raise an alarm

Possible cause
The safety check field messages are not being received or are not being
processed properly.
Solution
• Use the Field Communications Monitor to check for problems with the raw
field messages.
• Use the Field Network Monitor to see if any safety check events are
showing. If not, there may be a problem processing the events.
• Examine the log files for errors.
Disabling dynamic fuel and travel alarms

There are alarm settings on the Dynamic Mine Model page for advising the
Builder that various model parameters given to the system to control travel
times and fuel burn predictions are not matching what is being observed on
the system.
These alarms can be turned off if no action is being taken on the alarms. This
can be done without a system restart, and will not change the functional
operation of the system, but will prevent an alarm being created or updated
which in turn translates to less impact on the application and database
servers. You can turn the alarms back on at a later time when the Mine
Builder has reviewed the parameters and fine-tuned them accordingly.
 To disable dynamic travel time alarms

1. Enable Expert Mode.
2. Open Dynamic Mine Model Assistant.
3. On the Dynamic Travel Times tab, clear the Alarms Enabled check box,
as shown in the following screen shot.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
4. Click Apply to save the changes.

5. Exit from Expert Mode.
You can enable the alarms settings by following the same steps and
selecting the Alarms Enabled check box.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
 To disable dynamic fuel monitoring alarms

1. Enable Expert Mode.
2. Open Dynamic Mine Model Assistant.
3. On the Dynamic Fuel Monitoring tab, clear the Alarms Enabled check
box, as shown in the following screen shot.
4. Click Apply to save the changes.

5. Exit from Expert Mode.
You can enable the alarms settings by following the same steps and
selecting the Alarms Enabled check box.

Troubleshooting
Common problems
ROM Loaders
Payload is always the default of 20 ton
Possible cause
There is no entry in the ROM Loader Supervisor page for that loader.
Solution
Check for a match on the loader name, and create an entry in Supervisor.
Possible cause
There is an invalid entry in the ROM Loader Supervisor page for that loader.
Solution
In Supervisor, check that the format is
loader name:capacity:nominal payload.
If you use unit names, check that they are valid. You can also look at the
CycleGenerator log file for when the SelfLoaderCycle engine starts - it warns
about invalid entries it finds.


CAT FleetUserManual

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

CAT FleetUserManual

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Cat® Fleet

Page i © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Page ii

Terms & typographical conventions

Page iii © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Audience ........................................................................................ i.ii

FLEET SYSTEM OVERVIEW

FLEET CLIENT INTERFACE

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

GUI PAGE REFERENCE

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Grade Editor ............................................................................ 4.61

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Safety Check Action Editor.................................................... 4.101

CONCEPTS AND REFERENCE

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Assignment reasons and triggers ................................................... 5.5

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Interim cycles .......................................................................... 5.24

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Fuel ........................................................................................ 5.41

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Loading tool attributes ............................................................. 5.74

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Payload events ........................................................................ 5.96

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Status of breaks ......................................................................... 5.110

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Users, personnel, work groups and crews ................................ 5.125

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Adding a processor to an assignment group.................................. 6.7

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Editing a machine category .......................................................... 10.3

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Possible reasons ........................................................................ 10.54

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Viewing archived road segments ............................................... 10.74

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Archiving roads ...................................................................... 10.97

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Editing material groups............................................................ 11.8

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Viewing work groups .................................................................... 12.3

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Third party interface (TPI) ....................................................... 13.3

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

Managing delay types and delays ............................................. 14.12

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Managing machine states ..................................................... 14.28

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012

issues ......................................................................................... 15.12

© Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

What is the Fleet Client?

Fleet subsystem descriptions

Note: You can buy Health as a standalone product.

The following table provides a description of each subsystem and its

Page 1.1 © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

This page is configured by security for use by the Fleet Builder

Historical Inspector assists implementation and support personnel by

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Page 1.2

Page 1.3 © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Release Date: March 2012

Release Date: March 2012 © Caterpillar 2001-2012 Page 1.4